English

Operating Manual

catman®
Hottinger Brüel & Kjaer GmbH
Im Tiefen See 45
64293 Darmstadt
Tel. +49 6151 803-0
Fax +49 6151 803-9100
[email protected]
www.hbm.com

DVS: A05566 02 E00 01

04.2022

© Hottinger Brüel & Kjaer GmbH

Subject to modifications.
All product descriptions are for general information only.
They are not to be understood as a guarantee of quality or
durability.
CONTENTS

1 Introduction 13
1.1 System requirements 13
1.2 Installation/Upgrade 14
1.2.1 Notes on the Ethernet interface 16
1.2.2 Notes on the FireWire interface (IEEE 1394) 17
1.3 Uninstalling 19
1.4 Licensing and registration 20
1.5 Conventions used – Help window 21
2 Quick start 23
2.1 The user interface 24
2.2 How do you work with catman? 28
2.3 Available additional modules for catmanEasy 31
2.4 What's new in catman? (History) 32
2.4.1 What was new in catman 5.4? 34
2.4.2 What was new in catman 5.3? 35
2.4.3 What was new in catman 5.2? 38
2.4.4 What was new in catman 5.1? 41
2.4.5 What was new in catman 5.0? 42
2.4.6 What was new in catman 4.2? 44
2.4.7 What was new in catman 4.1? 46
2.4.8 What was new in catman 4.0? 47
2.4.9 What was new in catman 3.5? 50
2.4.10 What was new in catman 3.4? 53
2.4.11 What was new in catman 3.3? 54
2.4.12 What was new in catman 3.2? 56
2.4.13 What was new in catman 3.1? 57
2.4.14 What was new in catman 3.0? 59
2.4.15 What was new in catman 2.2? 60
2.4.16 What was new in catman 2.1? 61
2.4.17 What was new in catman 2.0? 62
3 Start a DAQ project (DAQ mode) 65
3.1 Prepare a new DAQ project: Device scan 66
3.1.1 Settings for QuantumX/SomatXR, PMX and MGCplus with CP52 67
3.1.2 Using the HBM Device Manager 68
3.1.2.1 Update MX firmware 69

catman 3
 3.1.2.2 Identifying an MX module (LED) 70
3.1.2.3 Renaming MX module or MGCplus with CP52 70
3.1.2.4 Updating firmware for MGCplus with CP52 70
3.1.2.5 Renaming a PMX 71
3.1.2.6 Update PMX firmware 71
3.1.2.7 Add additional devices 72
3.1.3 Settings for MGCplus with CP42 and DMP41 74
3.1.4 Settings for optical measuring devices 74
3.1.5 MGCplus on-board recording 75
3.1.6 Scan range for TCP/IP device scan (TCP/IP scan range) 76
3.1.6.1 Which Ethernet address is to be entered on the device? 77
3.1.6.2 How is the address set on the QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus with
CP52? 78
3.1.6.3 How is the address set on the PMX? 78
3.1.6.4 How is the address set on the MGCplus? 79
3.1.6.5 How is the address set on the FS22 BraggMETER? 79
3.1.6.6 How is the address set on the DMP41? 80
3.1.6.7 Changing the PC's IP address 80
3.1.7 Options when establishing a device connection (device search) 81
3.1.7.1 Execute sensor scan after device connection 82
3.1.7.2 Device reset/factory setting after device connection 83
3.1.7.3 Do not change filter and sample rate after connecting device 84
3.1.7.4 Lock interactive channel configuration 84
3.1.7.5 CAN bus options (Default setting of number of CAN channels) 85
3.1.7.6 Hardware time channels 87
3.1.7.7 Advanced options 89
3.1.7.8 Additional devices (add devices manually) 91
3.2 Start a new DAQ project 93
3.2.1 Using older QuantumX modules 95
3.2.2 Integrating optical measuring devices 96
3.2.3 Connecting to CANHEAD modules 99
3.2.3.1 Assign CANHEAD modules (activate sub-channel blocks) 100
3.2.3.2 Remove CANHEAD modules 101
3.2.4 Connecting with Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn systems 101
3.2.5 Connecting to MGCplus with on-board recording 103
3.2.6 Synchronizing several devices 103

4 catman
 3.2.6.1 Synchronization in case 1: Several devices of the same HBM family, dir-
ect synchronization 105
3.2.6.2 Synchronization in case 2: different devices (hybrid system) 107
3.2.6.3 Synchronization in case 3: Multiple devices of the same family; syn-
chronization via Sync cable not possible 109
3.2.6.4 Configure and check time synchronization services 110
3.2.7 Check/update firmware 116
3.2.8 No device found? 117
3.3 Prepare DAQ project without device 120
3.3.1 Prepare complete DAQ project 120
3.3.2 Create DAQ project from Excel parametrization file 122
3.3.2.1 Devices worksheet 123
3.3.2.2 SampleRateGroups worksheet 128
3.3.2.3 Channels worksheet 128
3.4 Open DAQ project 137
4 Setting up channels (measuring chain) (DAQ channels tab) 141
4.1 Using transducers with TEDS 145
4.2 Assigning sensors (transducers) to channels 148
4.2.1 How to add your sensors to the Sensor database 151
4.2.2 Search database for transducers 152
4.3 Sensor modification: gage factor, calibration 153
4.3.1 Calibrating sensors 154
4.3.2 Change strain gage settings (gage factor) 157
4.3.3 Temperature compensation when using strain gages 158
4.4 Using CAN signals/bus reset 160
4.4.1 Assigning CAN signals from Sensor database 164
4.4.2 CCP/XCP (ECU, only MX471) 165
4.4.3 Loading a CAN database 166
4.4.4 Assigning CAN signals from a Vector database 166
4.4.5 Change number of sub-channels 167
4.4.6 Send CAN bus messages 167
4.5 Using optical sensors 168
4.5.1 Activating and configuring QuantumX MXFS channels 168
4.5.2 Configuring FS22 BraggMETER channels 171
4.5.3 Using ARAMIS channels (GOM testing controller) 173
4.6 Use GNSS channels (GPS) 174

catman 5
4.7 Assign channel names and colors 176
4.8 Import channel name and sensor assignment from Excel 177
4.9 Test signal (only QuantumX/SomatXR) 178
4.10 Digital input channels 178
4.11 Digital output channels 179
4.12 QuantumX/SomatXR On-board functions 180
4.13 Time channels in catman 183
4.14 Computation channels 184
4.14.1 Define/change computation channels in DAQ project 185
4.14.2 Algebra and formulas (computations) 186
4.14.2.1 Formula editor 187
4.14.2.2 Predefined formulas 189
4.14.2.3 Linearization 189
4.14.2.4 Statistics 190
4.14.2.5 Mathematical functions 190
4.14.2.6 Mathematical operators 196
4.14.3 Strain gage computations 199
4.14.4 Filter 204
4.14.5 Peak-Valley (cycle counter, min/max) 206
4.14.6 Class counting 206
4.14.7 Optical sensors 207
4.14.8 Math libraries 208
4.14.9 Electrical power 209
4.14.10 Signal generator/playback file 210
4.14.11 Create new auxiliary channel 210
4.15 Limit values and events 211
4.15.1 Defining/changing limit values/events 213
4.15.2 Available types and conditions of limit values/events 214
4.15.3 Available limit value/event actions 217
4.15.4 How to delete/deactivate limit values/events 221
4.16 Using Power BI 221
4.17 Channel info (Component window) 224
4.18 Channel check 225
4.18.1 Prepare shunt test (determine nominal unbalance) 226
4.18.2 Perform shunt test 228

6 catman
5 Setting up video cameras 229
6 Configuring DAQ jobs 233
6.1 General measurement settings (Start/ Stop/ Sample rate) 235
6.1.1 Start of recording 236
6.1.2 Stop of data recording and measurement 238
6.1.3 Sample rate 240
6.1.3.1 Which sample rate is the right one? 242
6.1.3.2 Switching sample-rate domains for QuantumX/SomatXR 244
6.2 Data storage and backup (settings: Storage) 245
6.2.1 Storage mode 246
6.2.1.1 Peak values per time interval 247
6.2.1.2 Cycle-dependent intervals (long-term DAQ) 248
6.2.1.3 Time-dependent intervals (long term DAQ) 251
6.2.2 Data saving 253
6.2.3 File format and resolution 255
6.2.4 Saving depth 260
6.2.5 Remote data saving (FTP/SFTP) 261
6.3 Channel parameters for data acquisition 264
6.4 Specify job parameters 266
6.4.1 Compute statistics after DAQ job 267
6.4.2 Statistic journal 267
6.4.3 Test parameters 268
6.5 Prepare On-Board recording (MGCplus) 270
6.6 Configure video recording 271
6.7 Advanced (job) settings 272
6.7.1 Synchronization 273
6.7.2 Data transfer and error handling 274
6.7.3 Remote (UDP output) 278
6.8 Define default settings for DAQ jobs 279
7 Visualization: Panels and Print pages 281
7.1 Configuring Panels and Print pages 283
7.2 Available display objects for Panels/Print pages 285
7.2.1 Objects for real-time indicators 286
7.2.2 Objects for the display of all recorded samples 293
7.2.3 Objects for synchronized display (only Analysis mode) 300
7.2.4 Layout objects 303

catman 7
 7.2.5 Controller, Developer tools (objects for predefined actions, clone actions,
AutoSequences and EasyScript) 304
7.3 Configure display objects 307
7.3.1 Configuring graphs 313
7.3.2 Configuring a y(x) graph 317
7.3.3 Configure real-time indicators 319
7.3.4 Export or print a graph 321
7.3.5 Configure Multi-bar graph 321
7.3.6 Set up a Flexible table 321
7.3.7 Configuring a CAN raw table 331
7.3.8 Configure button 332
7.4 Analysis functions (evaluation in graphs) 334
7.4.1 Section functions (Analysis mode) 335
7.4.2 Cursor functions 336
7.4.3 Annotations 338
7.4.4 Scroll functions 340
7.5 Special Panels: Scope- and Floating-Panel 340
7.5.1 Scope panel 340
7.5.1.1 Configuring a Scope panel 342
7.5.1.2 Analysis in the Scope panel (Cursor) 342
7.5.1.3 Scope panel trigger (tab) 343
7.5.2 Floating panel 343
7.5.2.1 Configuring a Floating panel 345
7.5.2.2 Analysis in the Floating panel (cursor) 346
7.5.2.3 Save/copy/print Floating panel 346
7.5.2.4 Floating panel trigger (tab) 346
7.6 DataViewer (DAQ mode) 347
8 Measuring (start DAQ job) 349
8.1 The Job status window 350
8.2 The Recorder Console 351
8.3 Start On-Board recording (MGCplus) 352
8.4 Possible problems during measurement 353
8.5 Preventing a RT lag (performance) 354
8.6 What happens after a measurement? 355
9 AutoSequences 357
9.1 How do you use AutoSequences? 357

8 catman
 9.2 How do you create an AutoSequence? 358
9.3 Useful information on creating AutoSequences 359
9.4 Notes on the AutoSequence actions 361
9.4.1 General 361
9.4.2 Measurement 362
9.4.3 I/O 363
9.4.4 Analyze 364
9.4.5 Panel 364
9.4.6 Control flow 365
9.4.7 MS Excel 366
9.4.8 MS Access 366
9.4.9 Special 367
9.5 How do you test an AutoSequence? 367
9.6 Configure automatic execution at certain times 368
9.7 Start AutoSequences via Buttons 372
9.8 Restrictions of AutoSequences 373
10 Analysis mode: display/analyze data 375
10.1 Test Explorer 376
10.1.1 Find files (search functions) 377
10.1.2 Toggle views (Show channel properties/configuration) 378
10.1.3 Loading tests or channels 379
10.1.4 Load additional tests 379
10.1.5 Remove or delete tests? 380
10.1.6 Converting/merging files 380
10.1.7 File download 382
10.2 Searching in analysis projects 383
10.3 DataViewer (Analysis mode) 383
10.4 Display data in Analysis mode 385
10.5 Computations in Analysis mode (EasyMath) 388
10.5.1 Create/change computations in Analysis mode 389
10.5.2 Algebra (formulas) 390
10.5.3 Frequency analysis 391
10.5.4 Filter 393
10.5.5 Strain gage stress analysis (strain gage rosettes) 394
10.5.6 Plot operations (Curve section, Shift plot) 395
10.5.7 Data series 396

catman 9
 10.5.8 Data cleansing 396
10.5.9 Interpolation 397
10.5.10 Peak values 398
10.5.11 Class counting 399
10.5.12 Script 400
10.5.13 Matrix 401
10.5.14 CAN decoders 401
10.6 Export data (convert formats) 402
10.7 Create report 406
11 EasyScript 409
12 catman web server 411
12.1 Create dynamic page content with EasyScript 412
12.2 Create advanced page layouts 413
13 Program options 415
13.1 catman start parameters 416
13.2 Watchdog function 418
13.3 Program function options 419
13.3.1 Diagnostics and logging 420
13.3.2 Additional modules 421
13.4 Options for safety 422
13.5 Data storage options 425
13.6 Folder options 428
13.7 Program start options 430
13.8 Shortcut options 431
13.9 Options for CX22 432
13.10 DAQ channel options 433
13.11 Channel list options 435
13.12 Sensor options 437
13.12.1 Sensor database (location, password protection) 437
13.12.2 After loading a DAQ project 438
13.12.3 Use sensor description as channel name 439
13.12.4 TEDS 440
13.12.5 Software T-ID 441
13.12.6 Clear zero-balance value and adjustment values on sensor assignment 441
13.13 Zero balancing options 442

10 catman
 13.14 Panel (and print page) options 443
13.15 Style options 446
13.16 Customize user interface options 446
13.17 EasyScript options 448
13.18 Options for AutoSequences 449
14 Technical support 451
15 Glossary 453
15.1 Alias, Alias effect 453
15.2 Anti-alias filter 453
15.3 APIPA 453
15.4 Autocalibration 454
15.5 catman working directory 456
15.6 Characteristic value 456
15.7 Compatibility mode 456
15.8 DAQ job 456
15.9 DAQ project 457
15.10 DHCP 457
15.11 Electrical measuring range 458
15.12 Excitation voltage 458
15.13 Execution mode 458
15.14 File extensions used by catman 459
15.15 Hysteresis 460
15.16 Initialization log 461
15.17 IRIG-B 461
15.18 Isochronous data transfer 461
15.19 Job list 462
15.20 Limit load 462
15.21 Link resource conflict 462
15.22 Log file (system log) 463
15.23 MAC address 463
15.24 Message bar 463
15.25 Network segment 463
15.26 Nominal value 464
15.27 NTP time 464
15.28 Panel 464

catman 11
 15.29 Placeholders 465
15.30 Plot legend 467
15.31 Print page 468
15.32 PTP 468
15.33 Regular expression 469
15.34 Sample rate 472
15.35 Sample-rate domain 472
15.36 Characteristic value 473
15.37 Sensor database component window 473
15.38 Sensor ID 474
15.39 Sensor scan 474
15.40 Shortcut 475
15.41 Switch 475
15.42 T-ID 476
15.43 TEDS 476
15.44 UDP 477
15.45 UDP output rate 477
15.46 UUID 478
15.47 Vector CANdb (CAN database) 478
15.48 Zero balancing 479
15.49 Zero value 480
16 Index 481

12 catman
1 INTROD UCTION

In the following we assume that:

you are familiar with your Windows® operating system;
you know how to use an online help.

The content of this PDF file is the same as the online help.

In this section you will find

1. The system requirements for catman.
2. a description of installation.
3. instructions for uninstalling.
4. information on licensing and registration.
5. an explanation of the conventions and notations used in the help.

See also Quick start.

1.1 System requirements

To operate the current version of catman, your PC should meet the following require-
ments:
Intel Pentium or equivalent processor upwards from 1 GHz
Windows® 8.1, Windows® 10 or Windows® 11 (latest 32-bit or 64-bit versions)
The file system should be NTFS.
Current web browser
At least 8 Gbyte of RAM
Graphics card or screen with a resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels. We recom-
mend a resolution of 1600 x 900 pixels or higher. With small screens with higher res-
olution use the Windows Control Panel (Display settings) if necessary to enlarge the
display of text and other screen elements.
Approx. 1 GB of free storage capacity for the program installation; at least an addi-
tional 1 GB is needed for temporary storage of data; however you can also use a dif-
ferent drive for this (not a network drive)
Microsoft or 100% compatible mouse
Configured standard printer

catman
1 INTRODUCTION 13
 One of the following interfaces is required to connect measuring devices:1):
Ethernet (10/100 MBit) or FireWire (IEEE 1394b2))
The following fonts must be installed:
Arial (TT), Courier, MS Sans Serif, Small Fonts, Tahoma, Times New Roman
(TT), Verdana, Segoe UI and Wingdings. Usually these fonts are installed with
the Windows operating system.

Notes
To be able to save measurement data, you must have sufficient free memory on
your storage medium. To make a rough estimate of the space required:approx. 8
bytes are required for each measured value, i.e. for 100,000 values approx.
40 megabytes are necessary for the maximum possible 50 channels. The disk drive,
on which the temporary file for the temporary data storage is created, can be
changed using the menu File ► Options and Data storage (System group).
If there are numerous channels we recommend a Fixed storage size for the tem-
porary data storage. This will improve the speed of the (temporary) data recording.
See also Data storage (System group).
If no more free space is available on the specified storage medium, the measure-
ment is aborted. However you can see, for example next to in the status line,
how long you can continue measuring before this happens (d = days, h = hours).
The computation uses 100 megabytes as safety reserve. The background of the
status display will change to red as soon as there is less than 1 gigabyte of free
space.
The above requirements are sufficient if you use low sample rates, few channels
and carry out only a few graphical tasks. You must use a more powerful PC if you
want to use a lot of DAQ or computation channels, or carry out complex graphical
tasks using high sample rates.

1.2 Installation/Upgrade
See also Licensing and registration.

1) No interfaces are needed for catman PostProcess.

2) With FireWire only interfaces to IEEE 1394b are supported. The HBM drivers for the interface
(including adapters for IP over FireWire) must be installed (included in the catman installation
software).

catman
14 1 INTRODUCTION
 The installation requires Administrator rights. We recommend that you close all
open programs. After installation it may be necessary to restart Windows.

Insert the DVD into your drive. In the standard configuration Windows automatically
opens the DVD and the start window appears.
If you have deactivated the self-starting Windows function or downloaded the installation
files, look for the file “Start” or “Start.exe” (main folder of the DVD or download) and
double-click on its icon to obtain the start window. If the download is a ZIP file, unzip the
file first and then start with “Start.exe”.
At the top right of the start window select the installation language at Language.
Click on Install catman and follow the instructions of the setup program. Read the licens-
ing agreements and specify the folder in which the software is to be installed: Either con-
firm the suggested target folder or click on Browse and choose the one you want. The
setup program creates—where necessary—the folder you have specified and then copies
all files to it. In the next step you can select the components to be installed:
FireWire driver: The drivers are only needed if you want to operate Quan-
tumX/SomatXR modules via a FireWire interface in your PC. The driver is not
needed for connecting a CX27 or MX module with C functionality (e.g. MX471C) via
Ethernet to the PC and via FireWire to other QuantumX/SomatXR modules.
See also Notes on the FireWire interface (IEEE 1394).
NPT time server: The installation is only practicable with QuantumX/SomatXR,
MGCplus, PMX, DMP41 and FS22 BraggMETERs, because they can be supplied via
the time server with exact time specifications. The time server from Meinberg is
installed. Synchronization of the time server with a time server in the Internet is not
required and is also not set up by the automatic installation. The time server is only
used for synchronizing the devices taking part in the measurement.
You can also retrospectively install the NTP time server or install it on another PC;
see also http://www.meinberg.de and Synchronizing several devices.
Install legacy TEDS editor: The installation is normally not necessary, because you
can write new (empty) TEDS modules as well as easily modify existing ones via the
sensor database; see Using transducers with TEDS. The editor is only needed when
you want to view or edit TEDS content as specified in the TEDS standard.
PRNF converter: The converter is only useful if you want to open PRNF measure-
ment files, e.g. files captured with the Evidas program. To do this, the files must first
be converted to catman format.
Before actually copying the files into the folder, the installation program will display a
summary of the operations to be executed. Confirm these with Install.

catman
1 INTRODUCTION 15
Note
We recommend starting catman once directly after installation with administrator
rights. Enter the license number and, in the case of FireWire, connect the devices to
be operated so that the drivers are fully installed (requires administrator rights).
The retrospective installation of a driver can take many minutes, because Windows
first attempts to find the driver via the Internet. We therefore recommend that you
install using the program for the driver; see Notes on the FireWire interface (IEEE
1394).

1.2.1 Notes on the Ethernet interface

Windows Firewall
If you establish a connection to an HBM device via the Ethernet interface, it is usually
blocked by the Windows firewall or by the firewall of your anti-virus program. An excep-
tion is defined for the Windows firewall during the installation of catman. For other pro-
grams, enable access for catmanEasy or catmanEasy-AP (usually requires administrator
rights).

Other Firewalls
Depending on the devices connected, open the following ports:
QuantumX/SomatXR: TCP ports 80, 5001 and 7411, UDP for ports 1200, 1201, UDP-
Multicast for ports 1300, 1301, 31 416 and 31 417, for the CX27 the TCP ports as
from 50 000,
MGCplus with CP22/42: TCP port 7 (no UDP or multicast present),
MGCplus with CP52: TCP ports 7 and 80, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31
417,
DMP41: TCP port 1234, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31 417,
PMX: TCP port 55 000, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31 417,
FS22 BraggMETER: TCP ports 3500 and 3365,
Kistler System 2000: UDP for ports 8888 and 8889,
Kistler KiRoad: TCP ports 6155 and 6158, UDP for port 6156.

Connecting to MGCplus via WLAN

If you are not connecting the MGCplus through cable but instead through a WLAN, with
slow networks interruption in the connection (timeout) may occur. In these cases set the
waiting period for the interrogation of the output buffer to a higher value.

catman
16 1 INTRODUCTION
 Changes to the Registry using the regedit.exe program should only be made by
experienced users, and after backing up the existing Registry, because under some
circumstances serious Windows errors might result. If necessary, ask your admin-
istrator to make the change.

Under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/HBM/CATMAN/SETTINGS create the new

string MGCGetFifoTimeout and enter a value of above 500 (ms), e.g. 1500.

1.2.2 Notes on the FireWire interface (IEEE 1394)

The required FireWire drivers can also be installed during the installation of catman
(optional components). If it has not already been done, you can also install the drivers ret-
rospectively; see the following description.
The installation requires administrator rights under Windows. If you are using a
plug-in card for the FireWire interface, you should insert the card into the PC before
the installation. Then the HBM driver for the card is automatically activated.

For the FireWire interface (IEEE 1394b) of the QuantumX/SomatXR modules you have to
install the driver supplied by HBM. You can however switch back at any time to the ori-
ginal driver of your interface.
After the installation, start catman as usual and in the Prepare new DAQ project dialog
specify FireWire as the interface.

IP over FireWire (HBM IEEE1394 IP Adapter)

From Version 3.4 the communication with the QuantumX/SomatXR modules also takes
place by FireWire similar to Ethernet. In this respect a virtual interface for each physically
existing FireWire interface is set up: IP over FireWire. A maximum of two adapters are cre-
ated and are visible in the network connections. As IP addresses 24.0.0.1 and 25.0.0.1
are used; consequently, the IP over FireWire interface adapters are named IP over
FireWire 24 and IP over FireWire 25. (The latter is only present if more than one physical
interface is installed in the PC1)1)). Only the Internet protocol TCP/IP (IPv4) is required for
the IP-over-FireWire interface; the client for Microsoft Networks or the QoS Packet Sched-
uler is not required.

1) A FireWire card can have, for example, three connections, but despite this it is usually
registered in the system as only one interface. In this case only one IP-over-FireWire adapter
is set up (HBM IEEE 1394 IP Adapter).

catman
1 INTRODUCTION 17
Procedure for the (retrospective) installation of the drivers
1. Go to the “DriverSetups” folder in the installation folder of catman.
2. Double click on HBM IEEE1394 Driver Setup.exe.
3. Read through the license agreements and follow the instructions of the setup pro-
gram.
The setup program copies the required files into the appropriate Windows sub-
folder and sets up the drivers and the IP-over-FireWire adapter.

If you have connection problems, check whether the interface adapter IP-over-
FireWire 24 has been correctly set up (Windows Control Panel ► Network and Shar-
ing Center ► Change adapter settings). If not, connect a device and double click on
“HBM IEEE1394 IP Adapter Wizard.exe” in the “DriverSetups” folder.

Activating the HBM driver with several interfaces

The HBM driver is a modified Thesycon driver.

If your PC has more than one FireWire interface, you must define for which interface the
driver is to be used.
1. Start the program “t1394bus_installwizard.exe” (Thesycon T1394bus Setup Wizard)
in the folder “HBM IEEE1394 driver”. The folder is created within the “HBM” folder in
the “Programs” folder of Windows.
2. Select the required IEEE 1394 host controller by clicking in the list. The “Thesycon
T1394bus Setup Wizard” shows all 1394_OHCI_HostController located in the PC. If
you have several adapters, you can select one of them. Otherwise click the first
entry.
3. Click on Switch to T1394bus driver to install the HBM driver.
4. Close the program “Thesycon T1394bus Setup Wizard”. The driver is now installed
and ready for use.

If you want to again activate the original driver of your FireWire interface, restart the
“Thesycon T1394bus Setup Wizard”, select the relevant IEEE 1394 host controller and
click on Switch to in-box T1394 driver. This deactivates the HBM driver, but does not
uninstall it. You can switch between both drivers at any time.
Remove T1394bus driver from system removes the HBM driver completely from your PC.

catman
18 1 INTRODUCTION
Installing the device-specific driver
1. Connect the MX module.
After a short time a Windows dialog opens with the message that new hardware
has been detected and it asks whether to look for a driver on the Internet.
2. Activate No, not this time and click on Continue.
3. Activate Install software automatically.
Windows then updates the required files. Please wait until the message “New hard-
ware found” appears in the Windows taskbar. Only then start catman.

1.3 Uninstalling
To uninstall catman open the list of installed Windows applications. Then select the cat-
man installation.

Opening the list of apps under Windows 10

In the taskbar search box type Change or remove a program and open the suggested Con-
trol Panel program.
Alternatively, you can use Settings ► System ► Apps & Features on the Start menu or All
settings ► System ► Apps & Features in the Info Center.

Opening the list of apps under Windows 8/8.1

From the Charms menu on the Windows desktop (not in tile view) open Settings ► Con-
trol Panel. Double-click on Programs and Features (View: Small icons) or Uninstall pro-
gram (View: Category).

Notes
Only the files which were created during the installation are deleted. The files cre-
ated when using catman and the catman defaults are not removed.
Together with catman, installed utility programs, such as the NTP time server, are
not automatically uninstalled. If you no longer need the applications, use the Con-
trol Panel in Windows to uninstall them.
Programs or drivers that were installed for FireWire, for example, are also not auto-
matically uninstalled. Use the Windows Control Panel to uninstall these drivers.

catman
1 INTRODUCTION 19
1.4 Licensing and registration
See also https://www.hbm.com/terms/software for the software license terms
(EULA).

When running the program for the first time, you must enter your name and company, and
the license number sent to you. If you do not enter a license number, catman will start in
Analysis mode (the program can be run up to 25 times with use of all functions).
Click on Info in the catman start window if you want to:
Enter your license number at a later point in time.
Change the name or company.
Produce a file with information about your PC system (system info file) for HBM
Support.
See all activated modules, e.g. EasyMath (mathematical functions and
AutoSequences).
View the release notes for the current version.
See also What is new in catman? (History).
The current license data is shown in the window on the right. Click on Modify to change
settings.

Notes on the Map Panel object (only available with and catman PostProcess)
The object loads a map view from the Internet which is made available by Google Ireland
Ltd. When querying, no user information or PC parameters are passed to Google apart
from the querying IP address.
The maps can only be used in conjunction with catman. Owing to licensing law restric-
tions, the object is unavailable in some countries, including China and North Korea. You
can, however, switch to using Baidu maps if you have a Baidu account. For details refer to
the Knowledge Base under “Working with Baidu Maps in China” and http://lb-
syun.baidu.com/index.php?title=webapi.

Registration and activation of software maintenance

Please register at [email protected] with an email to activate your service con-
tract. HBM needs your registration to be able to ensure that you can be informed when a
new version appears and that you receive the license number necessary for this. After
completing registration you will also receive the appropriate telephone numbers from
HBM via email for direct access to the catman support in your region. The following
information is required:

catman
20 1 INTRODUCTION
1. The program name (catmanEasy or catmanAP or catman PostProcess).
2. Your current license number.
3. Your company's name.
4. Your name and, where applicable, department.
5. Your email address.

Reregistration for another name and/or another email address is possible at any
time.

Module activation
1. Click on Options in the catman start window.
2. Activate your module via Program functions (System group).
3. Enter your module license number in the following dialog.

The license number is only required the first time you activate the module. You can
disable the module via the menu File ► Options and Program functions (System
group) later if it is not required. To activate it again, just click in the appropriate box.

All activated modules and your main license number are displayed in the program if you
click on Info in the start window or on About catman in the Help menu.

1.5 Conventions used – Help window

See also The program interface, Help on EasyScript (in the script editor).

At the top of each page of the Help there is a blue-shaded header area. If the Help win-

dow becomes too small, only the text area is shown, and the hamburger menu is dis-
played in the top left corner of the header. Click on the icon to display the left side area
with the list of contents, index, etc.
With on the first line of the text area you can print the current topic, and with
remove the text marks displayed when searching for terms. and on the right side
to scroll to the previous or next topic. The second line in the text area (above the header)
indicates your current location within the Help. You can click on a topic at any time to go
to the relevant section.
For the sake of clarity, some sections are initially hidden. In such a case, is displayed
to the right of the title or text in question. Click on the title or text to reveal the relevant

catman
1 INTRODUCTION 21
section. The icon then changes to . Click again to hide the section again. With in
the first line of the text area you can show or hide all hidden sections at the same time.
At the bottom of each page, click on to scroll to the top of a page.

The following symbols denote special paragraphs:

Stands for Attention.

This symbol indicates an important detail or a special feature.

Paragraphs with this symbol provide a tip or explain an interesting feature.

This symbol is located in front of links to further information.

Terms that are explained in more detail in the glossary are identified by this marker (not
all terms can be clicked on in the PDF; please refer to the glossary).

Individual terms within the text are highlighted in italics. There are also identifiers for the
entries you need to make, all buttons, , checkboxes, the names for input fields, etc. The
menus, commands, dialog boxes and windows used in the program, as well as tabs and
groups in the ribbon, are also identified.

We hope these notations will help you identify the relevant sections and menus more
quickly, and guide you through the program in a user-friendly way.
All trademarks and brands used in the Help are trade names and/or trademarks
belonging to the respective product or the manufacturer/owner. Hottinger Baldwin
Messtechnik and Hottinger Brüel & Kjaer GmbH (HBK) do not lay claim to any other
than their own trade names/trademarks.

catman
22 1 INTRODUCTION
2 QUICK START

See also The program interface, Video tutorials on the HBM website:
https://www.hbm.com/de/6416/catman-daq-software-knowledge-base/, Know-
ledge Base (via Help ► Knowledge Base at the top right of the program interface),
Conventions used – Help window.

catman® is the measurement software for the HBM devices QuantumX, SomatXR,
MGCplus, PMX, DMP41, and the SI/DI FS22 BraggMETERs for measurement with optical
sensors. It enables you to perform different measuring tasks quickly and simply without
having to undertake any time-consuming programming. Apart from the HBM devices, you
can also connect a GNSS system (GPS), the Vaisala Weather Transmitter WXT520, a GOM
Testing Controller (ARAMIS) for optical strain gaging or Kistler RoaDyn sensors (System
2000 or KiRoad) to catman.
catman recognizes not only the configuration of the HBM measuring devices connected,
but thanks to the optimum interaction of hardware and software also enables you to auto-
matically configure the entire measuring chain, if you are using TEDS transducers for
example. For DAQ channels with conventional transducers, use the integrated catman
Sensor database and simply assign the transducers you are using to the individual chan-
nels. The Sensor database already contains all HBM transducers as templates, and typ-
ical sensors such as thermocouples, Pt100, voltage or current sources, but can also be
easily extended to include your own transducer types. CAN signals can also be included
in the Sensor database and assigned to CAN reception channels. You can also write the
sensor data from the Sensor database into the TEDS module or transfer the data from a
TEDS module to the Sensor database.
Use the default settings of catman or define your own measurement sequences, called
DAQ jobs: define sample rate, start and/or stop trigger including pre-trigger time and time
until stop (post trigger), select time points for start and stop or start and stop the mea-
surement manually. The settings can also be mixed, e.g. start with trigger and stop after
a certain time or number of measurements etc. Produce your own visualization with the
graphical objects of catman. Graphics showing the DAQ plots during measurement,
digital or bar indicators and numerous other objects are available. You can however also
use the default settings of catman and immediately start with the measurement. Even dur-
ing the measurement you may assign further channels to graphs or create new graphical
objects.
You can extend the catmanEasy basic version with additional (chargeable) modules. The
catmanAP version contains catmanEasy, all modules, and additional functions such as

catman
2 QUICK START 23
video recording, parallel recording (Recorder) and GNSS data visualization on cards.
The catman PostProcess version is restricted to Analysis mode (connection of devices
and acquisition of data are not possible).

Please register with HBM to activate your service contract. HBM needs your regis-
tration to be able to ensure that you can be informed when a new version appears
and that you receive the license number necessary for this, see Licensing and regis-
tration.

2.1 The user interface

The user interface of catman provides you with a clearly laid-out work space similar to
that used by Microsoft from Office 2010 which always offers only the currently required
functions: the ribbon. You will soon realize that with this interface it is very easy to pre-
pare, execute and evaluate a measurement.
You can also influence many settings yourself, for example which tab appears when you
start DAQ mode, which style is used for the ribbon and the windows, whether catman dis-
plays the start window on starting or directly seeks devices. You can also design your
own tabs (and hide those of catman), and much more! Test the possibilities: Menu File ►
Options and Keyboard shortcuts in the System group or Style and Adapt in the User inter-
face group.

The Ribbon
In the top section of the main window you will find the ribbon, which replaces the earlier
menus and toolbars. The tabs on the ribbon each display commands which are relevant
to the various ranges of tasks in the applications. Within the tabs various actions are
combined into so-called groups, e.g. the group Sample rates and filters contains the
three sample rates available in catman Slow, Default and Fast, provided the device is sup-
ported.

catman
24 2 QUICK START
 To hide and show the menu ribbon use and on the right above the menu rib-
bon. Then you have more space available for the main window. Click on the still vis-
ible area (the name) of a tab to temporarily display it so as to select an action.

QuickAccess bar
The quick access toolbar above the File menu can also be displayed in catman. This
means, for example, that you obtain a faster access to the Save menu. Using the context
menu of an action in the ribbon, many of the actions can be added as further buttons on
the quick access toolbar.
See also Program options: Adapt user interface.

Context-related tabs (context tabs)

Certain groups of commands are only relevant when objects of a certain type are to be
edited or certain options activated. For example, the Sensor database or the channel
check are only interesting when you are editing the channel list, i.e. setting up the chan-
nels. When you are designing your visual display, these functions are no longer needed.
Therefore, these tabs are only displayed once you have activated the DAQ channels tab.

Component windows
Apart from the main window, there are also so-called component windows in which, for
example, the Sensor database and the sensors that it contains are displayed or there is
another one for the channel information. Once catman has been started, the component
windows are first superimposed in the margin of the main window and they display a cer-
tain component, e.g. the Sensor database. The arrangement of the component windows
is however variable and they can also be “docked” at various locations. You can also tem-
porarily hide the windows (then just a tab is displayed) to obtain more space for the main
window.

catman
2 QUICK START 25
Hiding/minimizing/showing component windows
Click on in the window title bar to hide a component window (catman then displays a
tab at the side for the component). Move the mouse pointer over the tab to display the
component window (temporarily). Click on to again permanently display the window or
to be able to lock it onto another point.

Moving/docking component windows

Click in the title bar and move the required window with the left mouse key pressed. You
can arrange the component windows as separate windows outside of catman or “lock”
them onto various points in the main window, i.e. irrespective of how you change the size
or position of the main window, the component windows always cling to the respective
edge of it. Move the relevant window to the left, lower or right edge of the main window:
Near the edge or corner of the catman main window a frame appears indicating the dock-
ing position. Just release the mouse key to dock the component window at this position.

Combining several component windows into one window

Click the title bar of a component window and with the left mouse key pressed move it
onto the title bar of another component window. Then release the mouse key once the
frame with the new docking position appears on the desired component window. Tabs
which you can use to switch between the different windows are then displayed below the
component window (see example with two tabs).

Example component window

On the left is the component window Channel info (displayed temporarily), on the right
the component window Sensor database with the windows Sensor groups and the
sensors of type U9B.

catman
26 2 QUICK START
The quick access toolbar

The red circle marks the quick access toolbar.

catman
2 QUICK START 27
Component window tabs

Two tabs: Current sensor database and Channel info.

2.2 How do you work with catman?

See also The user interface.

From catman version 3.5 there is a new variant for connecting to QuantumX mod-
ules. Current modules with firmware 4.0 or higher and SomatXR modules are con-
nected normally. QuantumXmodules with older firmware (lower than 4.0) must be
updated beforehand. Please contact HBM Technical support to do so.

Some functions can be disabled with password protection—see Sensor options,

Password protection.

Procedure for QuantumX, SomatXR, MGCplus, DMP41 or PMX

1. Start catman.
Before connecting to a device for the first time, you must specify (once only) the
device type, the interface, and where appropriate additional options.
2. Select New (new DAQ project, open an existing DAQ project or start with Offline
(work without connected devices), if no measuring device is available.
See also DAQ projects (DAQ mode).
To view or analyze data already acquired, select Analyze and New or Open (Load
existing analysis project).
See also Analysis mode: Display/analyze data.

catman
28 2 QUICK START
3. If you are not using a transducer with TEDS, assign the connected sensors (trans-
ducers) to the channels: Find your sensors in the Sensor database component win-
dow and drag and drop each sensor onto the channel to which it is connected.
See also Add your own sensors, Changing strain gage settings, Calibrating sensors
and Using CAN signals.
4. Assign unique channel names.
From the Rename context menu you can create channel names with consecutive
numeration or accept the sensor description.
Each channel is identified by its name in catman, therefore as far as possible
use meaningful names.
See also Use sensor description as channel name.
5. Mark the channels which are to be zero balanced and carry out the zero adjustment
(Zero balance) with (Zero balance group) or use the menu item Zero balance all
hardware channels in the Zero balance group.

6. Deactivate channels that are not needed, e.g. channels without a sensor: in the
Channel group.
7. The Live display (DAQ channels tab, Channel group) is active by default, so you get
continuous measurements. Check that all channels are working properly.
8. Start the DAQ job (DAQ group).
catman will suggest different pre-configured visualizations. However, you may
also create your own visualizations, even during the measurement.
9. After the measurement enter Analysis mode to analyze your data or to be able to
compare them with other measurement data.

Procedure for QuantumX MXFS, FS22 BraggMETER or the GOM Testing Controller
(ARAMIS)
See Settings for optical measuring devices, Integrating optical measuring devices, Using
optical sensors.
These sections describe the procedure from preparing the devices to configuring the
channels.

catman
2 QUICK START 29
Optional settings

Mask out the deactivated channels: ► Active in the Channel group.

Create computation channels: Create in the DAQ channels tab (Computation chan-
nels group). Use Live display ► Measure computation channels (Channel group) to
activate live display also for computation channels.
See also Defining computations.
Set limits or events which you want to monitor.
You can disable zero balancing for individual channels, e.g. for a channel with a ref-
erence force transducer, using the Zero balancing group or the context menu. You
can then carry out zero balancing for all (unblocked) channels..
See also Configure channels.
Import channel names (and/or sensors) from an Excel file, see Import channel
name and sensor from Excel.
If you do not want to acquire some channels, such as temperature channels, at the
default sample rate with QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus or PMX, mark the channels
(DAQ channels tab) and in the Sample rates and filter group select the Slow or Fast
sample rate (the channels are marked with or , as appropriate, instead of ; at
the same time the corresponding time channels are generated in the background).
Create your own visualizations using the Visualization tab and the Visualization
objects group.
Run a Channel check.
Define additional DAQ jobs.
Without configuration, catman will use a predefined DAQ job which measures all
existing channels—such as on the QuantumX module MX840—at 300 Hz until you
stop the measurement manually (other devices/modules might use different
sample rates by default). The data acquired can then be saved or rejected.
However, you can specify other start options, such as trigger conditions or certain
start and stop times and dates.
Alternatively, you can also specify special recording conditions for certain chan-
nels by using recorders.

Notes
In the catman PostProcess version only Analysis mode is available.
catman automatically applies a filter for all channels as default. This is set to
approx. 15% of the sample rate as long as the channel has the required bandwidth.
See also Program option DAQ channels: Filter (automatic filter selection) in the

catman
30 2 QUICK START
 Channels and sensors group, Setting filters manually, Alias effect, Which sample
rate is the right one?
Filters with Bessel characteristic (default setting) do not cause any signal dis-
tortion, but they have a relatively flat frequency response. In case of high-fre-
quency interference at high amplitudes, you should therefore set the cutoff
frequency to 5% of the sample rate, or use filters with Butterworth char-
acteristics..
catman can also be operated via the keyboard: The default button in the dialogs has
a thick frame. Use to confirm, to cancel and close the dialog.

2.3 Available additional modules for catmanEasy

See also Program options: Program function options for activating the modules.
With the EasyMath module you can define mathematical computations in Analysis
mode, filter measurement data or calculate spectra. Using a formula editor you can
carry out computations which combine channels and apply numerous functions
such as integration, differentiation, sine or cosine.
See also EasyMath (Analyze measurement data).
Autosequences module (included in EasyMath): In DAQ mode, with the
AutoSequences you have the possibility of automating measurement sequences
without programming, for example writing cyclically data into an Excel table.
See also AutoSequences.
The EasyScript module provides a programming language with which you can mon-
itor and control catman. With EasyScript you can expand catman with your own
functional features or create complete programs for running measurements or ana-
lyzing data. EasyScript is based on the VBA standard (Visual Basic for Applic-
ations), which is also used in the Office programs from Microsoft. Due to the open
architecture of VBA, other programs, e.g. Excel, Word or the Windows Explorer can
also be addressed and controlled as objects.
See also EasyScript.

Only included in catmanAP

Using the Video Cameras module you can integrate the recordings of up to four
video cameras in a measurement.
See also Setting up video cameras.

catman
2 QUICK START 31
2.4 What's new in catman? (History)
See also video tutorials on the HBM website:
https://www.hbm.com/de/6416/catman-daq-software-knowledge-base/ and
Release Notes section in Knowledge Base (via Help ► Knowledge Base at the top
right of the program interface).

catman has been revised and its range of functions extended. The following list contains
the main changes and new possibilities.

New functions
You can now save measurement data in two different formats after the end of the
DAQ job; see Data saving.
The circuit diagrams for connecting the sensors to QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus
and PMX are now displayed in the DAQ channels tab when you open the Sensor
adaptation and wiring diagram context menu (the menu item has been renamed).
The sensor database has new entries. Sensors from Brüel & Kjaer have also been
included, for example. The HBM sensors group has therefore been renamed HBK
transducers (HBM & BKSV).
After a device search with the HBM Device Manager, you can add more additional
devices manually than before.
For QuantumX/SomatXR modules, you can now also display only the sample rates
possible for the module in question; see Sample rate.
You can also display and record EtherCAT signals received from the CX27C (Quan-
tumX/SomatXR) in catman; see EtherCAT with CX27C (QuantumX).
For CAN Raw data, the export formats Vector CANalyzer Log, PCAN Trace and
Vector BLF (Binary Logging Format) are available in addition to ASCII and HBM cat-
man format.
There is a new real-time computation in the filter Filter functions: Static and
dynamic computation for periodic signals. The computation allows you to record
both the amplitude of the peak values and the arithmetic mean of a periodic signal.

Modified functions
The overload detection has been improved: You can now choose between a display
when the sensor (electrical) measuring range is exceeded, when the input range of
the measuring amplifier is exceeded, or both; see Setting up channels (measuring
chain) (DAQ channels tab).

catman
32 2 QUICK START
 The additional modules for catmanEasy have been reduced to two, and the func-
tions of the others have been integrated into either catmanEasy or catmanAP. The
EasyPlan, EasyMonitoring, Ethernet-based GNSS and EasyOptics modules have
mostly been integrated into catmanEasy. The EasyRoadLoad and Video Camera
modules and the recorders (parallel data acquisition in the EasyMonitoring module)
have been integrated into catmanAP. Only the EasyMath module (including the
AutoSequences module) and EasyScript module are now available for catmanEasy.
The USB port on the MGCplus with CP22 or CP42 is no longer supported as from
catman 5.5. As the MGCplus is now only available with CP52, and connecting by
USB is less advisable than via Ethernet, support for this driver is being dis-
continued. Support for connecting CANHEAD modules via a USB adapter
(CANHEADdirect) is also being discontinued. The connection of CANHEAD modules
via the MGCplus is still supported.
The eDAQ/eDAQ-lite devices are no longer supported as from catman 5.5.
The synchronization of multiple PMX devices has been improved, and you can
record hardware time channels in ticks; see PMX (Time channels).

catman
2 QUICK START 33
2.4.1 What was new in catman 5.4?

New functions
catman supports the QuantumX module MXFS for the measurement with optical
sensors.
See Settings for QuantumX MXFS, Integrating the QuantumX MXFS, Activating and
configuring QuantumX MXFS channels.
A sensor comment is now applied as a channel comment when assigning the
sensor.
In Analysis mode you can now display the measured values of individual channels
without having to load the project: Double-click on a channel in the Channels tab
(Test Explorer tab).
See also Find files (search functions), Displaying channel data and measured val-
ues.
For the placeholders, you can also use only the file name of the backup saving file
without the path, for example in a text field or as a graph title: %TestFileName%.
You can now also use placeholders in Analysis mode.
In Analysis mode you can search for channels, sensor types etc. across all loaded
tests, and perform the search with regular expressions.
See Searching in analysis projects.

Modified functions
The (old) Interrogators SI/DI are no longer supported as of catman 5.4. The FS22
BraggMETER SI/DI are still supported.
If you start a DAQ job on the CX22 (QuantumX) and want the job to stop in the event
of an error, you now receive a warning if you have activated Extended safety checks
before DAQ start.
See also Check DAQ settings before DAQ start, Behavior on errors during the mea-
surement.
If more than 256 peaks are detected on an FS22 BraggMETER, only the first 256 are
included in the channel list; all others are ignored, as catman cannot use more chan-
nels per BraggMETER.
If you are using the QuantumX/SomatXR module, you cannot set all connectors to
CAN-RAW receiver only. At least one connector must additionally decode signals.
At the start of a DAQ project a check is made whether at least one other signal of

catman
34 2 QUICK START
 the module is active, and not only CAN-RAW.
Logging of FTP transfers has been improved.

Notes
This version is the last version that supports the following devices:
USB connection of MGCplus with CP22 or CP42. As the MGCplus is now only avail-
able with CP52 and connecting by USB is less advisable than via Ethernet, support
for this driver will be discontinued with the next version.
CANHEADdirect: Connection of CANHEAD modules via a USB adapter will be dis-
continued with the next version.
eDAQ/eDAQ-lite with TCE-Preview: As the devices will be phased out at the end of
2020, and the eDAQXR uses its own web interface, support by catman will be dis-
continued as of the next version.

2.4.2 What was new in catman 5.3?

Modified functions
As of catman 5.3.2, the CP32 for MGCplus and the SI/DI type Interrogators are no
longer supported (FS22 BraggMETERs are still supported). Also, it is no longer pos-
sible to install catman on a CX22 with WindowsXP.
Better synchronization of GPS data in hybrid systems. GPS systems that transmit
at data rates above a few Hertz were previously only recorded with one new value
per read block by the leader device, e.g. an MGCplus. You can now configure the
GPS device with a data rate to utilize the maximum speed of your system. To do
this, configure the GPS as a device with NTP synchronization; see Synchronization
in case 2: different devices (hybrid system) and the Knowledge Base (via Help ►
Knowledge Base at the top right of the program interface), section headed "Using
NTP synchronization for hybrid systems including a GPS".
The scan option not to change the device filters when connecting has been exten-
ded to the sample rates for QuantumX/SomatXR. When the option is active, neither
of these is changed, and the sample rates set in the device are applied in catman.
See Do not change filter and sample rate after connecting device.
The use of spaces and dashes in channel names is allowed again (had not been
allowed since catman 5.2.2).

catman
2 QUICK START 35
 Zero balancing is also disabled in the QuantumX/SomatXR modules (hardware
lock), and so is also effective in the MX Assistant for example. Any lock already set
in the module is likewise taken into account.
You can update the layout object text during measurement, to view the current time
for example.
The context and pop-up menus have been changed to make their layout clearer.
The explanatory text is no longer located below the menu entries, but is displayed
as a tooltip when you place the cursor on the entry in question.
The date and time in the data files, comments etc. is now formatted independently
of the local format configured on the PC. The following format is always used:
yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (e.g. 2018/10/21 09:15:30). Formats such as 09:15 PM are
no longer used.
You can activate and configure the Smart Peak Detection option of the FS22 Bragg-
METER SI via the Optical functions tab. The FS22 SI Smart Peak Detection option in
the Prepare new DAQ project dialog box must be enabled for this; see Advanced
options. It is no longer necessary to install the BraggMONITOR software, and the
button to run it has been omitted.

New functions
catman Supports the QuantumX module MX471C with CAN-FD and CAN FD Raw.
CAN FD enables higher data rates in the data part of the CAN message. It also
enables up to 64 bytes of user data to be transferred rather than 8. However, with
MX471C the bit length of an individual message within the 64 bytes may only be 8
bytes, though you can send multiple 8-byte messages in one transmission. CAN FD
is standardized in the ISO standard 11898-1.
See also Using CAN signals/bus reset.
The QuantumX/SomatXR modules MX590B-R and MX1609TB-R are fully sup-
ported.
Pt500 is supported as sensor for QuantumX/SomatXR MX840B.
The gateway functionality of the QuantumX modules with C functionality, such as
the MX471C, is supported. The modules can be used like the CX27 to transfer the
data received from connected modules via FireWire to the PC using Ethernet.
With MGCplus you can also select the Bessel 25 Hz filter for use with CANHEAD
modules.
The support for GPS data has been extended to include the following device fam-
ilies and functions:

catman
36 2 QUICK START
 peplink MAX Industrial Router (Ethernet-based GPS),
peplink Surf SOHO (Ethernet-based GPS),
Additional channels for yaw, pitch, roll, gyro rates, acceleration, position and
velocity with VECTORNAV VN-200 and VN-300,
Additional channels for acceleration, yaw, pitch, roll, RTK (gyro rates, baseline,
accuracy), heading/gradient and 2D and 3D velocities with EGPS 200 PLUS, i.e.
with IMU (Inertial Measurement Unit) and RTK (Real Time Kinematic) units.
See also Add additional devices.
Ethernet cameras, which already deliver a compressed data stream, can now also
be connected.
See Setting up video cameras.
You can create a sensor scaling assigned from the Sensor database directly as a
computation channel using the context menu of the channel on the DAQ channels
tab. The sensor channel will then only measure the electrical (raw) signal, and the
computation will provide you with the scaled measurement value. Internal scaling in
the device (e.g. thermocouple or Pt100), cannot be created however.
See also Sensor modification: gage factor, calibration.
Sensor groups can be renamed in the Sensor database by way of the context menu.
For event monitoring, the event type After start of measurement has been added;
see Available types and conditions of limit values/events.
To start or stop a DAQ job with a digital signal, you can specify a delay time
(debounce) in order to suppress interfering switch chatter and prevent unwanted
triggering.
See Start of recording, Stop of data recording and measurement.
In the DataViewer you can also search for values identical to zero and identical to
the overflow value.
See also DataViewer (DAQ mode), DataViewer (Analysis mode).
You can also change the plot styles for all the plots in a graph simultaneously:
Choose All for Style (post-process graph and real-time graph) or select the relevant
channels on the Plots tab.
See Configure display objects: Change plot parameters in a graph.
The formula editor in Analysis mode enables you to use statistical data such as the
minimum, maximum, standard deviation or average of a data set in a computation
(Additional functions).
With MX471, you can send bus commands for the transmission of information not
only when the DAQ job starts but also cyclically. You can send up to 10 CAN mes-
sages cyclically to serve CAN transmitters (e.g. ECU, OBD2).
See Send CAN bus messages.

catman
2 QUICK START 37
2.4.3 What was new in catman 5.2?

Modified functions
Blanks are no longer allowed in channel names, and are automatically converted to
underscores (‟_”). When you load a project of an earlier version from catman, how-
ever, the blanks are retained.
If you enter an already existing name when creating channel names, you now see a
dialog box with various options: either to suffix a number to the existing channel; to
reset to the default channel name or a random channel name; or to rename the cur-
rent channel.
Now, you can also use channels with different sample rates in one computation in
DAQ mode. The sample rate of the first channel is used in the formula as the
sample rate of the result channel.
For inputs in number fields you can also use an algebraic expression, e.g. 3/2 in
place of 1.5 or sqrt(2) in place of 1.414. As soon as you the reopen the dialog in
question, however, only the result will be displayed, not your original input.
In the event of high level crossing, low level crossing and channel overflow, you can
now specify a time period for which the channel must be overflowing before the
event is triggered.
See also Available types and conditions of limit values/events.
Strain gage temperature compensation via the polynomial on the package, which
was previously only possible through the Sensor adaptation dialog, is now addi-
tionally possible via the real-time computations, where there are more options for it.
In them, you can use 5th order polynomials (instead of just 3rd order), and you can
allow for the temperature dependency of the k factor. A computation to determine
the strain rate has also been added.
See also Strain gage computations.
You can convert the visualization object map for use with Baidu Maps, because
Google Maps is not available in China for example.
See also Objects for real-time indicators.
In the Post-process graph and Post-process Cursor graph visualization objects you
can also select the point index for the x axis in place of the time channel.
In the Real-time graph and Post-process graph visualization objects you can also
invert the x axis. (The option is not available for Cursor graphs).

catman
38 2 QUICK START
 If you disable compression in the Real-time graph and Post-process graph visu-
alization objects and then zoom, an overview across the entire measurement period
of time is displayed below the graph and the zoomed section is marked.
You can now also click on the plot legend in the Cursor graph to delete the plot,
move it to a different axis layer, or open the plot parameters dialog.
In the DataViewer you can search for specific measured values, such as values
greater than or less than, or two identical consecutive values, etc. Edit mode (if
enabled) is now always activated for the entire table, no longer just for one channel.
See also DataViewer (DAQ mode), DataViewer (Analysis mode).
In the long-term measurement modules you can now save the snapshots from time
to time, and not just at the end of the DAQ job.
catman now saves the PC's time zone in which the data were recorded (where avail-
able) as a test parameter in the test files.
As from firmware 2.0 of the FS22 BraggMETER SI/DI, the devices can use NTP time
synchronization, provided the NTP time server is installed on the PC on which cat-
man is running.
See also Configure and check time synchronization services.
Aborting a long-term measurement due to a synchronization problem (Re-Sync
message) can be prevented—see Synchronization.

New functions
catman supports the National Instruments format TDMS for both write and read
mode.
See also File format and resolution, Export data (convert formats).
catman now supports the ARAMIS camera system from GOM (Gesellschaft für
optische Messtechnik) for 3D movement and deformation measurements.
See Settings for optical measuring devices.
Band pass and band rejection have been added to the filter functions in real-time
computations.
Password protection has been upgraded with additional features, such as filter set-
tings or event control.
See Sensor options.
Frequently used formulas can be saved to and loaded from a formula collection.
You can create multiple formula collections. The supplied formula collection Optic-
alFormulas contains formulas to convert the wavelength of optical strain gages into
strain or temperature.
See also Formula editor.

catman
2 QUICK START 39
 The Derivation over time function has been added to the predefined formulas. All
you have to do is specify the measurement channel (DAQ channel). The general
function deriv(y,x) (dy/dx) is still available in the formula editor (Additional func-
tions).
Parameters for multiple computations of the same type can now be changed sim-
ultaneously.
See also Define/change computation channels in DAQ project, Create/change com-
putations in Analysis mode.
When creating a DAQ project by Excel parameter setting, you can also specify a
GPS module.
See also Create DAQ project from Excel parametrization file.
catman supports the UPS function of the CX22B with an event and a special action
to save all data and terminate catman in an orderly manner.
See also Available types and conditions of limit values/events.
The QuantumX gateway module CX27C is supported. The module has a much
higher transfer rate, but no digital I/Os.
Using the context menu of the Plot legend, you can move a curve directly to a new y
axis (scaling).
See also Configuring graphs.
The Test Explorer now provides new search methods in Analysis mode: You can
now search not only for file names (or parts thereof) or channels, but also for test
parameters and their contents, including sub-folders, and using wildcards.
See also Find files (search functions).

catman
40 2 QUICK START
2.4.4 What was new in catman 5.1?

Modified functions
The Windows® XP operating system is no longer supported.
The designation PC Card recording for MGCplus has been replaced by On-Board
recording, since a PC Card cannot be used with the CP52. In this case a storage
medium chosen by the user is connected via USB instead.
Operation with Spider8 is no longer supported.
Operation with espressoDAQ is no longer supported.
In the sensor adaptation dialog there is now the possibility to correct the cable res-
istance effects for the QuantumX/SomatXR modules MX1615 and MX1616 and
strain gage full bridges in 4-wire configuration.
See Calibrating sensors.

New functions
The CP52 for the MGCplus is supported, and can, like QuantumX/SomatXR, be
found and connected with the HBM Device Manager.
See Using the HBM Device Manager.
catman can search for GPS receivers and automatically apply them with the correct
interface and baud rate.
See Add additional devices or Additional devices (add devices manually).
The RoaDyn® wheel force sensors with the KiRoad system from Kistler are sup-
ported in the same way as System 2000 to date.
See hEasyRoadload with Kistler RoaDyn.
You can protect sensors from being created and TEDS settings from being over-
written with a password. You also have the option to lock the assignment of
sensors, changing of sensor settings and zero balancing by way of a password.
See Sensor options.
In the Sensor adaptation dialog you can now also change the type of scaling (2-
point or table).
catman supports forwarding of data to Power BI (Azure Cloud from Microsoft).
Therefore you can also use Power BI dashboards to display measurements or com-
putations.
See Using Power BI.
Additional filter options have been added in Analysis mode, the filters for crash ana-
lysis: CFC 60, CFC 180, CFC 600 and CFC 1000.

catman
2 QUICK START 41
2.4.5 What was new in catman 5.0?

Modified functions
The Test Explorer tab in Analysis mode has been revised and laid out more clearly.
In the test selection a search function is now integrated with which you can search
for certain file or channel name components. It is also possible to search for certain
files in subfolders.
See also Test Explorer.
The option Automatically consider channels already used in graphs and com-
putations when adding a new test has been moved to the ribbon and is now called
Use channels automatically.
See also Load additional tests.
The dialog for defining limit values and events has been revised. You create new
definitions with New and change the definitions by clicking them on the left and
entering the new settings on the right. It is no longer necessary to confirm.
See also Limit values and events.
The options on data transfer (number of values per transfer, time between trans-
fers) can now be set differently for each DAQ job. They can each be set depending
on the sample rate used. The general setting for the options has been removed.
When loading older projects the (current) default settings are used.
See also Data transfer and error handling.
The printer port (Spider8, MGCplus with CP32) is no longer supported. Use the USB
adapter from HBM. With Windows 7 or higher ensure that you use a USB adapter
from HBM with hardware (HW) 2.03 or higher and firmware (FW) 1.70 or higher
(imprint on the adapter). Older versions of the adapter do not operate properly
under Windows 7 or higher.
The Channel parameters (DAQ jobs) tab has been renamed Channels as further set-
tings can be made here too.
The multi-bar graph is no longer limited to 12 channels and can now display any
number of channels.

New functions
The Vaisala Weather Transmitter WXT520 is supported and can, for example, supply
information on relative humidity, rain or hail.
See also Additional devices (add devices manually).

catman
42 2 QUICK START
 The EasyMonitoring module makes (parallel operating) recorders available to you
with which you can specify special recording conditions for individual channels.
Start and finish of recording, which channels are to be recorded and the data rate
can be defined separately for each recorder of a DAQ job.
See also Configuring DAQ jobs.
The EasyMonitoring module also facilitates remote data saving. You can define that
after a measurement the data is automatically uploaded to an FTP server.
See also Remote data saving (FTP/SFTP).
The dialog to define limit values and events contains new functions, e.g. the time
point “With start trigger” and the push notification.
See also Limit values and events.
CAN Raw channels: With the QuantumX/SomatXR module MX471 you can create
up to four CAN Raw channels using the CAN bus options. You can directly display
the messages on the relevant CAN bus via these channels and save them (in addi-
tion to the “normal” CAN channels). Alternatively, you can also define that only the
CAN Raw channels are acquired on a connection. The QuantumX/SomatXR firm-
ware 4.8 or higher is required for the function.
See also CAN bus options, Panel object CAN Raw table.
With the MX471, use of CCP/XCP over CAN is supported.
See also CCP/XCP (ECU, only MX471).
catman automatically displays scroll bars, if visualization objects are not visible on
the screen area available.
On the Visualization tab you can also shrink ( ) or enlarge ( ) all objects on one
page.
You can use the value of a controller or a text entry field in a computation.
See also Formula editor.
In Analysis mode you can define the folders as favorites for quick access. This
means that you can also access folders in the network or deep nested folders with
one click.
In Analysis mode you can also load individual channels of a project.
See also Loading tests or channels.
The conversion of SIE files has been improved, for example video files are created,
no longer single frames.
See also Converting/merging files.

catman
2 QUICK START 43
2.4.6 What was new in catman 4.2?

Modified functions
The QuantumX/SomatXR Device Manager has been expanded (device scan for PMX
for adding manual devices) and is now called the HBM Device Manager.
The Compatibility mode for QuantumX modules with firmware less than 4.0 is omit-
ted. It is however still possible to update older modules using catman.
Real-time computations are no longer produced in a dedicated dialog, but rather the
dialog is displayed in the channel list as a window. This means that the channels
can be dragged directly into the dialog.
With the devices for optical measurements there are various changes:
You can assign the sensors from the Sensor database just as for other
devices. The new Sensor database (version 4.2) already includes many entries
with standard values which only need to be corrected with the data from the rel-
evant data sheet. The measurements are then shown in the same channel. You
do not need to create any computation function and also a second channel is
not occupied. Optionally, you can however still display the original values and
use a computation function.
The spectrum on the Optical functions tab shows only one channel (connector)
in each case.

The Optical spectrum visualization object ( ) is omitted in this version,

because with some devices the update takes several seconds.
The video Panel is omitted in this version. The Panel is no longer needed, because
the Video replay object has been added to the objects for synchronized display. You
can now synchronize any objects in this group with a video.
The angle function FOS (sector monitoring) has been revised. Instead, there is a
new graphical object, the Angle synchron. graph (Display of all recorded samples
section). In the default setting the graph is updated twice per second. The pos-
sibility of display (FOS tab) in other graphical objects is omitted. With the new graph
you can view the progression at the different revolutions after the measurement via
the General tab. In contrast to the normal post-process graphs here only one trace
over the specified angular range or the specified number of revolutions is displayed;
see also Angle synchron. graph.
The Statistic journal function has been revised and has new options.

catman
44 2 QUICK START
 The Log file (System log) of catman is now not an MS Access database, but rather a
normal text file (without symbols). Above a size of 1 Mbyte a new file is created
automatically.
With the Time-at-level and Span pairs functions the y-axis in the histogram is now
scaled in percent and the total number is no longer used; see Classing.
The computation function Outlier (Analysis mode) has been renamed Data cleans-
ing.

New functions
catman 4.2 also runs under Windows® 10.
The HBM Device Manager (formerly QuantumX/SomatXR Device Manager also sup-
ports PMX and you can manually add other devices, e.g. optical measuring devices
or GPS receivers.
NMEA devices (GPS): catman supports the wind speed and wind direction channels
from the MWV sentence; see GPS channels.
The Sensor database also includes fiber-optical sensors and also has the version
4.2.
You can drag computation channels to other positions in the channel list with the
mouse.
The Smart Peak Detection of the FS22 BraggMETER is supported.
For the optical measurement devices and provided you are not using the Smart
Peak Detection of the FS22, dynamic peak locking is always carried out. This means
that the defined bands (Range per peak) move with the peaks in order, for example,
not to lose the sensor during larger temperature temperatures, because the
wavelengths change too much. The original wavelengths of the peaks are saved
with Lock peaks and are also included in the project file.
Sound recording via video cameras is supported.
In conjunction with GPS data the new Map visualization object facilitates the dis-
play of positions and measurements (color-coded) via position data.
The Flexible table can also display the status of the limits.
The new Video replay visualization object with the objects for synchronized display
replaces the video Panel.
The new visualization object Angle synchron. graph facilitates the simple display of
data over the angular range.
The assignment of x channels when using multiple y channels in the real-time and
post-process graph has been simplified: Drag the x channel onto the legend of a y
channel. A context menu then appears by which you can plot the x channel against

catman
2 QUICK START 45
 this y channel or swap the y channel. You can also assign a color channel to the
post-process graphs.
With the Visualization objects Digital indicator, Analog meter, Bar indicator, LED and
Text you can set the background to Transparent.
The computation Matrix (Analysis mode) has been introduced to be able to display
one channel in dependence of two channels.
catman allows simple report generation with Microsoft Word based on a Word tem-
plate. In doing this you can now apply a Bookmark (Office tab) to many Visu-
alization objects in order to place them at the correct location in the Word
document.

2.4.7 What was new in catman 4.1?

Modified functions
The Sensor database can again be opened by several clients PCs). This means that
the Sensor database can, for example, be made available on a server to several PCs
with catman.
In the default setting the write cache has been increased to 64 kB (old setting
32 kB); see also Data storage.
In the Flexible table (new, it was formerly just Table) you can also directly enter for-
mulas in a cell; see Configure flexible table.
With Interrogators/BraggMETERs, the optical spectrum is no longer automatically
updated, and you have to update manually, or activate the Automatic update option.
Since updating may take a very long time, it can arise that the program does not
react in this time period.
With Interrogators/BraggMETERs the peaks of the optical spectrum are no longer
marked automatically; use the appropriate option if you require marking.

New functions
There is a new table in DAQ mode—the Flexible table. The table is similar to the one
already present in Analysis mode; you can individually configure each field and dis-
play measurements or pictures or compute formulas. See Objects for real-time
indicators, Flexible table and Configure flexible table.
The table in Analysis mode has been renamed Flexible table for better dif-
ferentiation, because, as with the flexible table in DAQ mode, you can configure
each field individually; see Configuring flexible table.

catman
46 2 QUICK START
 In Analysis mode there is a new group of objects for the synchronized display of
measurements from various channels (synchronization with cursor); see Objects
for synchronized display.
After the measurement a file is produced with the events that have arisen during the
measurement (*.event); see What happens after a measurement?
With filters there is the human vibration filter with various weighting functions to
EN ISO 8041 and ISO 2631, e.g. Wd weighting for horizontal whole-body vibrations
in the x or y direction.
See also Filter (real-time computations) and Filter (Analysis mode).
The new Interrogators from Fiber Sensing, the FS22 BraggMETER SI/DI, are now
also supported by catman. The user control in catman is practically identical to the
previously used interrogators. The devices are automatically detected if you specify
Optical interrogators in the Prepare new DAQ project dialog; see Configure device
scan.
When using an Interrogator/BraggMETER you can now use low-pass filters which
are directly computed in the catman channel. The ‟detour” via averaging for Inter-
rogators is no longer need.
In the ASAM MDF 4 format special functions such as Preview and ZIP compression
are now also supported.

2.4.8 What was new in catman 4.0?

Modified functions
The start screen has been completely redesigned to offer you easier and quicker
familiarization.
You can start again with the last configuration used without having to save a pro-
ject.
On terminating catman both in the DAQ and Analysis modes the start screen
appears again and you can change, for example, to the operating mode. catman is
not completely terminated as previously.
The 3D chart graphical object has been replaced in DAQ mode by the spectrogram
object.
The update rate for real-time indicators (Digital indicator, Analog meter, Bar indic-
ator or LED) has been limited. The objects are now updated every 150 ms at the
earliest, a faster update is not possible.

catman
2 QUICK START 47
 No equal signs ("=") may now occur in the Name of a test parameter. They are, how-
ever, still allowed in the Value.
The possibility of using the IRIG-B time option with the MGCplus has been removed.
The option continues to be available with QuantumX/SomatXR.
The IEEE 488.2 interface is no longer supported.
Various functions have been revised to achieve a higher speed when acquiring and
processing data.
If QuantumX/SomatXR modules are connected to the PC using FireWire and also
via Ethernet, the FireWire connection has priority (previously Ethernet).
The loading of DAQ projects with QuantumX/SomatXR modules, which receive their
addresses via DHCP and whose addresses have been changed in the meantime rel-
ative to those saved in the project, no longer leads to an error, because the UUIDs
(serial numbers) are evaluated and the IP addresses are converted if required.
The row with the device only shows the device name in the default setting. You can,
however, display the Complete device description again using the channel list
options. The Channel info component window always displays the complete inform-
ation.
See Channel info component window.
The (default) arrangement of the columns in the DAQ channels tab has been
changed. The columns however can be moved as before and arranged as desired.
The Sample column is displayed in bold lettering by default. You can change the set-
ting via the column context menu.
The symbols and arrangement of the sample rate groups have been changed: The
slow sample rate ( ) now comes first, then the default sample rate ( ), and finally,
as before, the fast sample rate ( ).
With an invalid channel configuration it is no longer deactivated automatically on
starting the measurement.
The Sensor database component window on the DAQ channels tab has been
revised. You can now call the groups “My sensors/General sensors/HBM sensor-
s/Sensors supported by the channel/CAN signals” with a click on the corresponding
icon.
In the Sensor database you can now create up to three levels of subgroups in the
‟My sensors” group.
The default values for the sample rates with QuantumX/SomatXR have been
changed to 10/300/4800 Hz. With the decimal sample-rate domain of Quan-
tumX/SomatXR 10/200/5000 Hz are used.
Some icons, e.g. with the sample rates, have been omitted to improve readability.

catman
48 2 QUICK START
 The synchronization with the System 2000 from Kistler (RoaDyn®) is now ensured
using hardware connections. The synchronization using NTP has been omitted.
Event monitoring: Digital outputs are now reset when the High level crossing/Low
level crossing monitoring method is no longer applicable. Here, the hysteresis is
considered. However, with all other types of monitoring the outputs remain
unchanged (as before).
On starting a DAQ job without visualization there are now more options for auto-
matic visualization.
When the graphical objects Digital indicator, Analog meter, Bar indicator or LED are
copied and pasted, they also remain assigned to the channels to be indicated.

New functions
In the scan options you can now specify that no filter settings and/or no Channel
settings are to be changed by catman. This is useful when the device(s) are oper-
ated, for example, on a test-rig and catman is to display measurement data only for
checking.
The start of the QuantumX/SomatXR scan server can be suppressed with the start
parameter /noscan, when you are not using a QuantumX/SomatXR module.
Multiple sensors from the Sensor database component window can now be
assigned to consecutive channels.
With the real-time computations several new functions are available:
The signal generator facilitates the output of various signals such as sine, rect-
angular or triangular signals.
The playback file enables you to read in measured data again and to display
them simultaneously with current measurements.
See Signal generator/playback file.
You can compute a signal with an A-weighted sound pressure level in dB
(dBA), (available in the DAQ and Analysis modes).
The linearization (Fixed formulas group) can, as in table scaling, correct non-
linear transducer characteristics in the Sensor database using a computation,
without however changing the original sensor transducer characteristic.
For the filters in DAQ mode you can now state the Cutoff frequency in Hz. The
input in percent of the sample rate is also still possible.
Bessel and Butterworth filters are also available as high-pass filters.
You can activate the increased sample rate for the MX410 (192 kHz) using catman;
the MX Assistant is no longer needed for this.
See Configuring channels (measuring chain) (DAQ channels tab).

catman
2 QUICK START 49
 The synchronization quality can now be checked also for PTP.
The channel filtering (Display filter) includes the most used display filters as but-
tons. Consequently these filters can be activated more quickly.
With GPS data, the Channel info component window can display and log the original
messages (NMEA sentences).
With the graphs there is the option of automatically displaying the axes in the same
color as the associated plots.
The spectrogram graphical object presents the chronological color-coded trace of
the frequency spectrum.
The section graph tool (only available in Analysis mode) can also compute an FFT
for the selected section.
The frequency spectrum graphical object in DAQ mode (Live FFT) can perform aver-
aging via a time window.
Further information has been included in the window for the job status during the
measurement. You can, for example, observe the processor loading on the CPU
core for the job being used and react before it becomes too high.
See Job status window.
In Analysis mode you can export the data from a channel as a sound file in WAVE
format.
The decimal sample rates of SomatXR and the QuantumX modules with B func-
tionality are supported. The switch is made via the DAQ channels tab and the dialog
for sample rate setting.
With the UDP output you can choose between the formats FLOAT32 (4 bytes) and
DOUBLE64 (8 bytes).
In EasyScript new commands have also been implemented; see Help on EasyScript
(in the script editor).

2.4.9 What was new in catman 3.5?

Modified functions
The communication with the QuantumX modules has been completely changed as
from catman 3.5, because the current firmware versions (as of 4.0) offer a whole
range of new possibilities: Improved transmission of the measurements; faster
scanning; and, in conjunction with current modules with B or C functionality, also
new time channel variants (PTP), new sample rates (decimal stepping) and more.
From catman 3.5 the SomatXR modules are also supported, which likewise use

catman
50 2 QUICK START
 firmware 4.0 or higher. For older modules you therefore have to make special set-
tings.
We recommend that you use the current firmware version for the QuantumX
modules. Carry out the update directly via catman; see also Checking/updating
firmware.
The start window was revised in Release 2 to show more clearly the various start
options in the DAQ and Analysis modes.
The treatment of sensors with TEDS has been simplified: Create the data as usual in
the Sensor database and then transfer the settings to the TEDS module. You can
however also transfer the data of a TEDS module into the Sensor database and edit
them there. For the cases in which you want to modify specific TEDS data, you still
have the (old) TEDS Editor available.
See Using transducers with TEDS.
The export of data in the DIAdem format has been revised, so that measurement set-
tings and test parameters can be accepted.
With problems with the measurement you have more possibilities of how and
whether the measurement is to be continued; see Data transfer and error behavior.
On opening a project a display filter set in the project is again taken into account,
i.e. only the channels originally visible in the project are displayed.
QuantumX/SomatXRmodules which are connected to a CX27 module are now
always found and used. It is no longer necessary to activate a CX27 scan.
Live display is immediately active after opening a project or starting a new one.
After connecting to a device, the currently used channel wiring configuration, e.g.
strain-gage full bridge, is shown in the channel list. In the traceability data (Channel
info window) you can also view the measuring range, excitation voltage, etc. The
display No sensor assigned no longer appears.
The arrangement of the columns in the DAQ channels tab has been changed.

New functions
If individual devices or modules are not present on loading a project, you can now
also automatically (temporarily) remove them from the project; see Program start
options.
On loading a project you can check for changed entries of the sensors used in the
Sensor database. If the sensor data have been changed (date of change is in the
Sensor database), you receive a message and can automatically update the rel-
evant sensors; see Sensor options: After loading a DAQ project.

catman
2 QUICK START 51
 On importing a DAQ project from an Excel parametrization file new options have
been added; see Create DAQ project from Excel parametrization file.
The PX460 module of the PMX and TIM-EC are supported.
Zero balancing in the DAQ channels tab can now also take place across all hard-
ware channels of a device without you first having to mark the channels.
The digital inputs and outputs of the MX879 can now also be used as trigger chan-
nels for starting/stopping the measurement and for monitoring the limits and
events.
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) time source of the newer QuantumX modules
with B functionality and the SomatXR modules is supported; see Configure time syn-
chronization services.
You can now parametrize and activate the test signal of the QuantumX/SomatXR
module via catman.
With real-time computations, Filter window, you can apply a phase correction to
compensate differences in the propagation time of signals due to different filter
cutoff frequencies; see Filter.
The real-time computations facilitate the computation of the electrical power (real,
apparent and reactive power as well as power factor) over a selectable time win-
dow. The RMS values for current and voltage are also computed; see Electrical
power.
The real-time computations include a signal generator so that you can produce and
display test signals. Alternatively, you can also specify a file which is ‟played back”;
see Signal generator.
The event monitoring has been expanded and enables you, for example, to monitor
frequency ranges of a live FFT for their amplitudes, to react to errors during the mea-
surement or to initiate a start or stop trigger; see Limits and events.
During the measurement a line with the messages about the DAQ job is displayed,
enabling you to go back in the list of messages to show older messages again with
date and time, which, for example, were only briefly visible in the status bar. The dis-
play can be turned off.
If QuantumX/SomatXR modules are operated in the multi-client mode (several PCs
or users access the data of a module), problems may arise if ‟logging out” does not
occur properly, because the number of clients is limited. In the expanded job para-
meters you now have the possibility of compulsorily terminating the measurement
processes of other clients so that catman can take control; see Synchronization.
For long-term DAQ, for which the connection to a device would be able to be inter-
rupted, you now have the option of dividing up the DAQ job into single intervals and

catman
52 2 QUICK START
 attempting connection again before each interval, if the connection has been inter-
rupted since the last interval; see Starting the acquisition.
For the display of live FFTs and JTF graphs the 3D diagram/chart (for DAQ and Ana-
lysis modes) has been added; see 3D chart (Analysis mode).
New formats have been added for data export: UFF58 and Vector MDF 4.1 (ASAM
standard); see Data export (convert format) for explanations about the formats.
When switching from DAQ mode to Analysis mode, you can automatically transfer
the graphs produced in DAQ mode as post-process graphs; see Options when chan-
ging from DAQ mode to Analysis mode.
In Analysis mode, the Section function is available, which not only enables you to
zoom, scale, cut or delete sections, but also to define the minimum and maximum
of a section; see Section functions.
The filter functions in Analysis mode (EasyMath) have been extended: Mean
value/RMS over time window, Chebyshev/elliptical filters. With Bessel and But-
terworth filters you can now select the order.
In Analysis mode the video panel can also compute and display an FFT using the
current signal.

2.4.10 What was new in catman 3.4?

Modified functions
Some display objects have been swapped for newer objects with additional options.
When you load a project, the objects are configured accordingly, but you should
then save the project again so that you do not have to swap every time you load it.
Windows Media® Player is no longer needed; video playback has been changed to a
dedicated object.
The universal data table (Analysis mode) is now called 'Table', because a new table
for data (numbers) only has been introduced which now uses the name 'Data table'.
The EasyLog module (PC card recording on MGCplus) has been integrated into the
EasyRoadload module. It is no longer available as a standalone module. On-board
recording is always available for eDAQ/eDAQ-lite, if such a device is present.

New functions
catmanEasy/AP supports up to 4 video cameras with the optional EasyVideocam
module. Camera recording can be activated either together with the DAQ job or via
the limit and event monitoring function.

catman
2 QUICK START 53
 The new HBM devices PMX and DMP41 are supported.
QuantumXQuantumX modules can be added or removed in the current DAQ project
if the project contains only QuantumX modules.
The Autocalibration options of some QuantumX modules are now selectable in cat-
man.
The Channel check supports the new QuantumX module MX1615.
The optical spectrum of an interrogator can also be displayed in the DAQ job on a
Panel.
The optical spectrum of an interrogator can be exported cyclically.
Placeholders can be used for e-mail texts and log entries in limit and event mon-
itoring.
In limit and event monitoring you can also use any text file as a log file.
A new Panel is available that can be freely placed on-screen, including on a second
or third monitor: Floating panel.
The graphs now have up to 12 scale levels.
Two new table types have been added for displaying test parameters or traceability
data in Analysis mode: Traceability table and Metadata table.
Computations can also be performed in Analysis mode using an EasyScript: Script.
In Analysis mode, updating (recalculation) is now also possible for a single com-
putation.
More start parameters have been added; see catman start parameters.

2.4.11 What was new in catman 3.3?

Modified functions
In the Sensor database the possibility of being able to define a ‟double scale” when
using the MGCplus is now no longer present (scaling with additional correction func-
tion).
The settings possible with the QuantumX for the use of TEDS now have effects on
catmanEasy/AP; see Using transducers with TEDS: Special features with Quan-
tumX.
The Sensor database has been completely revised and in the new design it uses the
same sensor symbols as the QuantumX Assistant.
The Accept channel name from TEDS option is no longer handled so strictly: It can
now also be renamed despite having been activated.

catman
54 2 QUICK START
 When using sensors with linearization via a table or polynomial function, the scaling
for QuantumX is now always carried out in the hardware (the QuantumX).
The Manual devices tab (Device scan dialog) has been renamed Additional devices.
The synchronization of multiple devices over FireWire (QuantumX only) or NTP has
been improved, and most settings are now made automatically.
The configuration dialogs for the graphs have been improved and are more clearly
laid out.

New functions
Various options improve security against data loss: Save project automatically
every x minutes, Save project on starting measurement and Create backup copy
before saving; see Options for safety.
Each channel can be assigned a color which is then used in all graphs (Default
color for plots). The color assignment is also restored on loading saved measure-
ment data.
On the DAQ channels tab, digital indicators (windows that can be zoomed infinitely
variably) can be displayed for individual channels (Large display). This means that
channels can be viewed better during live display.
On the DAQ channels tab not only the (computed) physical values but also the mea-
sured “raw values” can be displayed (Electrical value).
Sensors can be provided with attributes such as “Calibration required” or “may only
be assigned to a channel”.
The limit and event monitoring now also allows for sending emails.
There are several new visualization objects for interactive operation: (Real-time)
Cursor graph, (post-process) Cursor graph, histogram, 3D chart, Statistics table;
see Available display objects for Panels/Print pages.
A range of new objects are also available for AutoSequences and EasyScript; see
Objects for predefined actions, clone actions, AutoSequences and EasyScript.
Many visualization objects have been given further possible settings.
The file name is now available as system text in the visualization object text both
with and without the path.
The optional Road Load Data module allows the connection of a RoaDyn system
from Kistler for example. All channels configured on the RoaDyn system are used
by catmanEasy/AP and displayed in the channel list (DAQ channels tab, Configure
DAQ channels window). The configuration must be carried on the RoaDyn system
itself or via the associated software.

catman
2 QUICK START 55
 For user interface customization, the actions presented in catmanEasy/AP on the
ribbon are now available as clone actions.

2.4.12 What was new in catman 3.2?

Modified functions
The real-time computations (computations during acquisition) are no longer
defined via the Computation channels tab of the Channel tools context tab, but
rather via a dialog which you call with Create (Computation channels group in the
DAQ channels tab).
DAQ jobs which start via trigger and a pre-trigger time: The trigger condition is only
monitored when the pre-trigger buffer is filled. If the trigger condition has already
been fulfilled once, then while the buffer is still filled, no trigger occurs, also not ret-
rospectively once the buffer is full.
In the channel list of the DAQ channels tab the Sensor column has been renamed
as Sensor/Function.
Also measurement devices can be renamed, not just the channels.
Windows with the channel list only contain as many rows as there are channels
present. The scroll bars therefore only move the list in the region which actually con-
tains channels.
The Panels now have scroll bars on the sides. This means that even with smaller
screens all objects on the page can be brought into the visible region. In addition
the possible Panel area has been increased.
The Cursor and Annotations window is now initially displayed at the bottom (below
the Panel) and no longer below the configuration and the channel list windows. You
can change the position though, as before.

New functions
The program start can now occur with further options; see Program start options.
The settings of position and status (permanent, temporary) for the component win-
dow are now saved and restored by catmanEasy/AP during a restart.
In the DAQ channels tab a new column can be displayed in the channel list: Gage
factor. You can also enter the gage factor via this column, however only row by row.
When entering for several channels, use the Strain gage settings context menu in
the Sensor/Function column.

catman
56 2 QUICK START
 The window with the Sensor database displayed in the DAQ channels tab includes a
search field which starts the search even as you are typing the search term.
In the dialog for sensor adaptation the name of the channel is also shown and the
physical unit can be changed.
The analysis functions such as Zoom, Cursor and Annotations have been revised
and also included in the ribbon (Graphics tools group).
When zooming in real-time graphs, the values initially left out during compression
and therefore not displayed are now loaded from the temporary file and displayed.
Changing between the configuration dialogs for a graph and for the plots of the
graph has been simplified: In each dialog you can switch to the other dialog via a
button (Plots or Graph).
The possibilities of table design have been expanded: You can now join cells, there
are more cell types and with a Picture cell type you can link to a graph in cat-
manEasy/AP (e.g. on another Panel).
In Analysis mode, you can clone data sources from one section of the table to
another, and you can print or save the table separately from the other Panel objects
(Print/Load/Save in the context menu).
The button has new options such as shortcut, picture position and tab index.
All user settings and options can be reset to the factory settings; see Reset (pro-
gram behavior).
The synchronization of different devices via NTP has been revised and simplified.
All settings can now be made in a dedicated dialog; see Synchronizing several
devices.
The Matlab (5.0) and RPC III (MTS) storage and respectively export formats have
been added.
Since older firmware versions are no longer supported for QuantumX, the firmware
update can also be installed during the installation. The required firmware with
which the catmanEasy/AP (as shipped) interacts is always installed on the PC.

2.4.13 What was new in catman 3.1?

Modified functions
The installation of FireWire and CANHEAD® drivers is now optional.
The installation of the FireWire drivers has been simplified; see Notes on the
FireWire interface (IEEE 1394).

catman
2 QUICK START 57
 The PC Card Explorer from EasyPlan for the transfer of files in MGCplus or eDAQ
has been integrated into the Test Explorer of Analysis mode. This means that the
catmanEasy/AP start window contains fewer options and is more clearly laid out.
The video Panel has been converted to the Windows Media Player® (no longer any
dedicated control).

New functions
For the display of the channels in the channel list and in the DAQ channels tab vari-
ous display filters can be set, for example to display only the active channels.
In the DAQ channels tab channels can be more easily deactivated.
In the DAQ channels tab the sample rate and filter of the first DAQ job can be dis-
played and modified for all DAQ jobs.
The file and path names for the data storage can be given placeholders, so that not
only the job names, but also, for example, the date and time or test parameters can
be used in the file name.
eDAQ and eDAQ-lite (SoMat) are supported. It is also possible to set up an on-
board measurement.
The calibration of sensors is now also possible when using a tabular linearization.
In the case of QuantumX and sensors with a tabular linearization you can also carry
out the linearization in the QuantumX: Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram con-
text menu, Perform in hardware. Until now the linearization has been exclusively car-
ried out in catmanEasy/AP, and this continues to be the default setting.
If no filter is set as the filter with Spider8, the averaging (mean value formation) in
Spider8 is used.
The function ‟after a certain time” can be used as a limit condition. This condition is
not bound to a DAQ channel.
The function Calculate RMS value has been added to the Mathematical functions.
For saving data the Fast Stream option has been added, which at faster sample
rates facilitates faster saving of the data than the previously available options.
However, in this case no temporary data file is created and the data are written
directly to a file.
In addition to the (complete) measurement data, a file can be produced containing
the minima, maxima and means determined over a selectable time interval: stat-
istics journal; see Specify job parameters.
Using Comment (DAQ group in the Visualization tab), you can even enter comments
during the measurement, which are then saved with date and time as test para-
meters.

catman
58 2 QUICK START
 In Analysis mode, data files created consecutively (same DAQ job) can be combined
into one file.
There are further possibilities of adapting the user interface; see Custom UI options.

2.4.14 What was new in catman 3.0?

The user interface of catmanEasy version 3.0 has been completely redesigned to further
simplify using the program. An explanation of the functioning principle and possibilities
offered by this interface can be found in The new user interface.

Modified functions
Toggling between DAQ and Analysis modes is done either via the File menu or
using the button at the top right above the ribbon: Analyze measurement data or
Back to DAQ mode.
If you run Analysis mode directly from the Start window, when Analysis mode fin-
ishes catmanEasy also terminates.
Previously, with some setup dialogs a button in the relevant dialog had to be clicked
to create a setup or to accept changes (e.g. Sensor database, computation chan-
nels). This is now done via relevant buttons on the ribbon.
There are now three sample rates available instead of two.
There are now only three limits per channel available instead of four. However, you
can define further limits for the same measurements via a computation channel
(1*original channel).
In the device scan options a differentiation is made not only with regard to inter-
faces, but also devices, which are to be sought.
The cyclical saving mode has been renamed to periodical saving mode.This cla-
rifies that this type of saving is used periodically during a measurement in contrast
to the new cycle dependent or time dependent storage intervals where (in various
sequences) either all measurements or just peak values are stored.
The Post-process graph is no longer automatically refreshed during the measure-
ment (default Manually).

New functions
The Channel check checks various functions of the measuring amplifier and mea-
suring chain.
The visualization includes the new Frequency Spectrum graph, which automatically
performs the computation in real time.

catman
2 QUICK START 59
 Selection in the channel lists is now also possible with and/or (as in Win-
dows).
The DAQ jobs have new storage possibilities for the data, for example, for the last x
seconds. Additionally two new storage modes are available for long-term measure-
ments: cycle-dependent or time-dependent storage intervals.
The new QuantumX modules and eDAQ (SoMat) are supported.
The CANHEAD® modules can now also be directly connected if you have the PEAK
CAN bus interface: CANHEADdirect.
Many new options have been added: more keyboard shortcuts and visual styles,
and you can also customize the new interface yourself.
The digital outputs of the CP42 are supported for the limits.
Limits can also execute an EasyScript function, start/stop the data storage and sav-
ing or perform a backup, monitor a digital input, and carry out time-controlled
actions.
The procedure for configuring interactive objects has been simplified, and so is now
more consistent: For all objects and actions (predefined actions, AutoSequences or
EasyScript) toggling between Design mode and Execution mode is now done via a
menu on the right above the ribbon.
With the predefined actions further execution time-points have been added.

2.4.15 What was new in catman 2.2?

Modified functions
The channel information display has been reworked.
The configuration of optical measuring devices has been improved.

New functions
The QuantumX modules are now supported in this version.
New computations have been included in the EasyMath module: Eliminate outliers
and Interpolation.
A new storage mode has been added: Peak values per time interval. This is useful,
for example, if during material tests you wish to record only the maximum stress
through dynamic load change over several days. Despite high sample rates which
result in an excellent resolution on the time axis only few data will be stored.

catman
60 2 QUICK START
 The measuring devices to be used can now also be defined manually if you do not
wish to use the device scan or it is not possible to run it: Additional devices (add
devices manually).

2.4.16 What was new in catman 2.1?

Modified functions
Scope Window and Video Window are no longer objects on a page but have their
own panels, i.e. they always fill the page. They have therefore been renamed Scope
Panel and Video Panel. Both windows have their own numbering systems, and are
not included when other panels or the print pages are numbered.
Loading of tests in Analysis mode has been completely reworked; this function is
now much more simple and comfortable to use. The first test loaded can be used
as a template: its computations and the channels displayed in the graphs are then
automatically duplicated for every other test loaded, if channels exist with the same
names. When removing the data, the plots are also deleted in the graphs and the
computations that were generated automatically.
See also Loading test data.
CANHEAD® modules connected to the MGCplus can be configured completely in
catmanEasy. The dialog corresponds to that of the MGCplus Assistant. If no sub-
channel block is active or no assigned CANHEAD® module is found, the first sub-
channel block will be automatically activated.
See also Using CANHEAD modules.

New functions
The new EasyPlan module option allows you to prepare a DAQ project before con-
necting devices. You can define sensors and channel names as well as create com-
putations, DAQ jobs and visualizations via Prepare DAQ project in the start dialog.
See also Prepare DAQ project.
The new EasyOptics module option allows measuring with the HBM devices for
optical stress analysis and transducers with Fiber Bragg gratings (optical fibers).
CANHEAD® modules are better supported: Directly from catmanEasy, you can
enable sub-channel blocks, activate (assign) modules or remove assignments. The
MGCplus Assistant is no longer required.
Restoring measurement data: If catmanEasy terminates unexpectedly due to an
error, such as a power failure, when you restart catmanEasy you will be prompted to

catman
2 QUICK START 61
 save the data to a file.
See also Data saving.
Channel groups: For plug-in units or devices with several sub-channels, e.g. for
CAN bus, hide all sub-channels to allow a better overview. You will find the display
with or in front of the first channel in the channel lists.
In the channel list, you also have the option of assigning one transducer type to all
sub-channels. If the sub-channels of an ML801 are hidden, simply drag the trans-
ducer type onto the first channel.
New computations can be carried out from the Math libraries tab, and (only when
HBM optical strain gages are connected) the Optical sensors tab.
The Channel activation (DAQ jobs) tab has been renamed Channel parameters, as
additional settings can be made there.
You can specify different filters for each channel and job. Activate the setting Allow
manual filter settings in the options on the DAQ channels tab. You can then set the
required filter for the DAQ job with Channel parameters under DAQ jobs.
You can define whether the data should be saved (temporarily) for each channel
and job. Activate or deactivate the desired behavior on the Channel parameters tab
of the DAQ job.
The zero balance also works on computation channels, not only on channels to
which a transducer has been connected.
The Scope Panel now has a trigger mode that allows fast periodic signals to be dis-
played as a stationary picture.
When saving measured values you can reduce the resolution to save storage space.
4 Bytes are often sufficient for measured data, sometimes only 2 Bytes are suf-
ficient for strain gage measurements.
In Analysis mode you can also select several channels: or and mark the
channels.
When saving an Analysis project, you can include the measured data in the project
file. This makes it easier to transfer an Analysis project as only one file is neces-
sary.

2.4.17 What was new in catman 2.0?

Change of names
The terms Online/Offline have been replaced by DAQ mode and Analysis mode. Con-
sequently, various menu entries and descriptions change, e.g. Offline project to

catman
62 2 QUICK START
 Analysis project, etc.
The module Offline maths has been renamed EasyMath, the module PC Card record-
ing has been renamed to EasyLog.

New functions
Channel names and sensor assignments can also be imported from an Excel file.
The new module AutoSequences (included in the module EasyMath) gives you the
possibility of automating measurement sequences without programming, e.g. of
writing cyclically determined measurements in an Excel table.
New options for DAQ jobs: Number of measurements as job end, cyclic saving dur-
ing the measurement, (pre-)settings for all DAQ jobs present after the program start
can be saved.
Monitoring of the free hard disk space during the measurement. With fixed measure-
ment time periods you receive the warning already before the start of the measure-
ment that the space available is not sufficient for the intended measuring time.
More options to prevent a time delay between acquisition and display of the data
for slower PCs (Preventing RT lag): a dedicated dialog with options for deactivating
or reducing the frequency of graphical updates. Also for the single graphics objects
you can set the update frequency finer.
Activate a continuous display of the measurements on the DAQ channel tab with
Live readings, e.g. to check whether all channels are working properly.
Both in DAQ mode and in Analysis mode, Print pages (and Panels) are available to
you. Both can be printed out, but Print pages are optimized for the printout; they
show the size of the Print page and possess margin settings as well as header and
footer lines. Panels are only printed out as screen copies.
See also Panels and Print pages, visualizations.
Panels and Print pages can now also have a background image. The image can be
displayed centered, tiled or adapted to the page.
The new page-sized graph object Scope panel for DAQ mode for quickly configuring
and displaying the active channels in a graph. The Scope panel has its own toolbar
so that you can carry out the configuration immediately without calling further dia-
logs.
A new feature is the page-sized graphics object Video Panel for Analysis mode to
link video data to a graph and/or a table. At the same time as displaying your video,
a cursor is displayed at the current position of the video in the graph and the table
indicates the measured value at this point in time. You can move both the cursor
and fast forward or rewind the video to check other points.

catman
2 QUICK START 63
 The copying and insertion of text and graphics on Panels and Print pages is sim-
plified by an entry in the context menu. You can also insert a text or graph directly
on a page and the corresponding object is generated automatically.
For transducers with a TEDS module, you can call the TEDS Editor from the Channel
settings window (Edit sensor context menu).
MGCplus users can influence the autocalibration function in the channel list for
each channel separately in the Channel info window.
More computation functions have been added in the EasyMath module.
The Help on EasyScript (in the script editor) is also available as HTMLHelp (pre-
viously only as WebHelp).

catman
64 2 QUICK START
3 START A D AQ PROJECT (D AQ M OD E)

See also Analysis mode: Display/analyze data.

In the catman start window in the Measure menu (DAQ mode) you have a choice of four
options:
1. Continue
Continue at the point at which you stopped the last time in catman. On termination
a still unsaved project is saved under a temporary name and is recalled with this
menu item. If you have saved the last project before termination, this DAQ project
is loaded (provided it is present).
If you have terminated catman irregularly (process terminated using the task
manager, crash), in this case the last state is not loaded, but rather the last
saved DAQ project is loaded (if present) or the state in which catman was last
regularly terminated.
2. New
The interfaces defined with Prepare new DAQ project (device search) are searched
for the devices specified and those found are displayed together with the existing
channels in the Channel list.
If you have used the Device Manager once, you can activate Connect to devices
last in use to connect directly to those devices without having to call up the Device
Manager again. In addition to the specified devices, you can also add other devices
in the Device Manager that cannot be found by an automatic search, such as a
GNSS device (GPS) or an MGCplus with CP42.
See also Using older QuantumX modules.
If after connecting to a device you would like to start an additional project with
another device type, we recommend first completely terminating catman and
restarting.
3. Load
When a DAQ project is opened, the interfaces entered will be activated. If the pro-
ject settings do not match the interface configuration found, you have the option of
correcting the project settings.
You can load a project created offline or an Excel file with the configuration; see
Create DAQ project from Excel parameter file.
4. Offline
Define all settings—the channel assignment, the connected transducers, your com-
putations, visualizations and DAQ jobs before connecting a device. Then open this

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 65
 project as soon as the devices are connected and you wish to carry out the DAQ
project.
Alternatively, you can also load and modify an existing DAQ project.

A project saved in DAQ mode (DAQ project) contains:

the interface settings of the active devices used,
the device types used and the type of synchronization,
the computations and the channels of the Configure DAQ channels window defined
via the DAQ channels tab with all settings for sensors, zero values, scalings, limit
values, etc.,
all settings of the DAQ jobs,
all visualizations (Panels, print pages, etc.).

3.1 Prepare a new DAQ project: Device scan

See also Add devices manually (options) or Add additional devices (HBM Device
Manager) for special devices, Synchronizing several devices.

Access the settings for the device search in the Measure menu in the catman start
window via Select device type, interface and additional hardware options or via the
Options menu in the catman start window and Prepare new DAQ project.

On starting a new DAQ project, the interfaces activated in the device search are searched
for those devices activated under Search device types. The devices must be switched on
and ready for operation, otherwise they will not be found. Therefore, after switching on
the devices wait long enough before you start a new project or load an existing one.

Simultaneous connection of different HBM devices is supported by catman, but

with restrictions: with PMX and DMP41, only additional devices of the same type
can be used. QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus can also be used together with FS22
BraggMETERs or a GOM Testing Controller (ARAMIS). Only the possible com-
binations can actually be selected. Irrespective of this you can manually include, for
example, a GNSS receiver in the DAQ project via Options and the Additional devices
tab or the HBM Device Manager and Add additional devices.
See also Connecting with Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn systems, Settings for optical mea-
suring devices.

catman
66 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
FireWire interface
You can only use this interface if your PC has the interface available and you have set up
the interface appropriately (HBM driver), see Notes on the FireWire interface (IEEE 1394).

Special features of PMX

If you are using multiple PMXs, you can change the time channels to ticks. This results in
better synchronization of the devices in some configurations. Instead of timestamps, the
hardware time channels in catman then contain ticks. To do this, create the PMX_USE_
TIMETICK (DWORD) entry in the registry in the HKEY_Local_Machine\Soft-
ware\Wow6432Node\HBM\Catman\Settings section, and give it the value 1.

Changes to the Registry using the regedit.exe program should only be made by
experienced users, and after backing up the existing Registry, because under some
circumstances serious Windows errors might result. If necessary, ask your admin-
istrator to make the change.

3.1.1 Settings for QuantumX/SomatXR, PMX and MGCplus with CP52

Different QuantumX/SomatXR modules are identified by the module type number;
further identification by letters is only added if the modules have different prop-
erties. Thus there is no distinction between MX1615, MX1615B or MX1615B-R, for
example. All module types are handled under the designation MX1615.

You must first update MX modules with a firmware version lower than 4.0 before
you can use them with catman.

You have two ways of connecting to QuantumX/SomatXR, PMX, and MGCplus with CP52:
1. Use the HBM Device Manager (recommended method).
The device manager checks the available interfaces, and displays a list of the
devices found.
See Using the Device Manager.
2. Explicitly use an interface, specifying the IP address or a search range (the latter is
not possible with QuantumX/SomatXR).
See Scan range for TCP/IP device scan.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 67
3.1.2 Using the HBM Device Manager
See also No device found?

QuantumX/SomatXR-modules with firmware 4.0 or higher, PMX and MGCplus with CP52
broadcast their IP address cyclically in the network. These messages are collected and
evaluated. So the IP address set on the device is initially not important, as all devices are
found which are in the (Ethernet) network (or, with MX modules, can be reached via
FireWire).
If you have old MX modules, you must first update the firmware; see Updating MX firm-
ware.
Choose Add additional devices to add more devices, such as optical measuring
devices, MGCplus with CP42, or GNSS receivers.

Procedure
Click on New module scan if the device or module is not shown on the Modules
found tab.
All devices or modules are listed on the Modules found tab, even modules or
devices to which no connection is possible.
For an identification with change the IP address.
is shown before the module address if the device or module is set and mea-
surements can be supplied. As a rule, the PC and the device must be in the same
network segment for the purpose.
See also Change address on the QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus with CP52,
Change address on the PMX.
On the QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus with CP52, if the text “…update needed” is
displayed in the Firmware column, you must update the relevant module or device;
see Update MX firmware, Update Updating firmware for MGCplus with CP52.

If you have already selected and used devices or modules before in the Device Man-
ager, you can activate Connect to devices last in use in the start window (Measure
menu) to connect directly to these devices (without displaying the Device Manager
again).

Order of multiple devices

Multiple MX modules are sorted according to their names, and are imported into the chan-
nel list in ascending alphabetical order. To include PMX devices into the channel list in

catman
68 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
alphabetical order, sort the list in the HBM Device Manager: Click on the Name column
before connection.
QuantumX/SomatXR modules connected via a gateway, such as a CX27 module or mod-
ules with C functionality, such as an MX471C, are displayed in a tree structure below the
gateway.

Use an MX module as a gateway

Start a New DAQ project as necessary to access the HBM Device Manager. On the
Change module settings tab you can enable the gateway functionality. The function is dis-
abled by default.

3.1.2.1 Update MX firmware

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

Various methods are needed, depending on the firmware present in an MX module. The
module firmware is shown, for example, in the Firmware column on the Modules found
tab of the HBM Device Manager.

MX modules with firmware 4.0 or higher

1. Mark the device(s) to be updated in the Selection column on the Modules found tab.
2. Click on Firmware.
Current firmware is installed together with catman and displayed in the default set-
ting in the Firmware package field. If this is not (any longer) the case, open your
web browser with Search for new firmware, and check on the displayed HBM web
page whether the required firmware is available there. Download the firmware to a

folder of your choice and click to specify the file.

3. Click on Update firmware.
The update is started and the progress is displayed in the Firmware update tab.
After the update a new module scan is carried out and the list on the Found mod-
ules tab is updated.

MX modules with firmware older than 4.0

For updating older modules you need the appropriate firmware file. Depending on the
existing firmware, you may also have to download the program „QuantumXFirmware
Updater” and perform the update in several steps. Contact HBM Technical Support about

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 69
this.

3.1.2.2 Identifying an MX module (LED)

If you are not sure which MX module belongs to which address, you can make the LED of
the module flash. To do this, mark the line with the IP address and the module name on
the Found modules tab of the HBM Device Manager and then click on the Flash LED but-
ton.
An alternative is the UUID (last-but-one column in the list of modules found): This num-
ber uniquely identifies each module, and is also specified on the module (Serial-No.)

3.1.2.3 Renaming MX module or MGCplus with CP52

Mark the device or module in the list on the Modules found tab and click on Rename to be
able to assign a name to the module. Then edit the name in the relevant column.
The name is displayed in catman and also for example in the MX Assistant or MGCplus
Assistant.

3.1.2.4 Updating firmware for MGCplus with CP52

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

You update the firmware of the CP52 module in the MGCplus via the HBM Device Man-
ager. MGCplus devices with CP22/42 can only be updated with the MGCpLoad program.
To do this download the program and the current firmware from the HBM web site:
https://www.hbm.com/software-firmware-downloads-mgcplus. It is not possible to
update the amplifier plug-in modules of the MGCplus via catman, only via the MGCpLoad
program, which you can download from the HBM website specified above.
We recommend keeping all CP52s at the same firmware level, so always transfer
the latest firmware to all CPs.

Updating the firmware of the CP52 using the HBM Device Manager
1. Select the device(s) you want to update in the Selection column on the Modules
found tab.

catman
70 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
2. Click on Firmware.
Current firmware is installed together with catman and displayed in the default set-
ting in the Firmware package field. If this is not (any longer) the case, open your
web browser with Search for new firmware, and check on the displayed HBM web
page whether the required firmware is available there. Load the new firmware to a

directory of your choice and specify the file with .

3. Click on Update firmware.
The update is started and the progress is displayed in the Firmware update tab.

3.1.2.5 Renaming a PMX

You have two possibilities of changing the PMX name:
1. You can use a web browser
Connect to the device via a web browser. At the ADMINISTRATOR user level you
can then issue a new name via the menu SETTINGS ► SYSTEM ► DEVICE ►
DEVICE NAME.
2. You can use the HBM Device Manager
Carry out a module scan, mark the relevant PMX and go to the Module info tab.
The tab shows you the same view as a web browser. At the ADMINISTRATOR user
level you can then issue a new name via the menu SETTINGS ► SYSTEM ► DEVICE
► DEVICE NAME.
Then execute a New module scan.

3.1.2.6 Update PMX firmware

You have two possibilities for updating the PMX firmware:
1. You can use a web browser
Connect to the device via a web browser. At the ADMINISTRATOR user level you
can then load new firmware via the menu SETTINGS ► SYSTEM ► DEVICE ►
UPDATE FIRMWARE into the PMX and activate it.
2. You can use the HBM Device Manager
The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options,
Password protection.
Carry out a module scan, mark the relevant PMX and go to the Module info tab.
The tab shows you the same view as a web browser. At the ADMINISTRATOR user

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 71
 level you can then load new firmware via the menu SETTINGS ► SYSTEM ►
DEVICE ► UPDATE FIRMWARE into the PMX and activate it.
Then execute a New module scan.

3.1.2.7 Add additional devices

You can use this to add other devices, such as FS22 BraggMETERs or GNSS receivers
(e.g. GPS). As GNSS receivers, NMEA-0183 compatible systems are supported which you
can connect via USB or a USB-to-serial converter (NMEA = National Marine Electronics
Association).
GNSS receivers can also be added to an existing DAQ project (DAQ channels tab,
Special group).

After selecting the additional devices (the devices are displayed in the Device Manager
list), click Connect in the Device Manager..

Connecting FS22 BraggMETERs or ARAMIS channels (GOM Testing Controller)

Click on Add additional devices and select the Device type FS22, GOM from the list. Ether-
net is permanently set as the interface. Enter the IP address of the device, and the port if
necessary, and click on OK.

Add NMEA compatible device: GNSS receiver

Click on Add additional devices and select the device type NMEA compatible device from
the list. The easiest way is to click on Auto-Detect. catman then checks all COM inter-
faces with all baud rates (4.8 kBaud … 115.2 kBaud) to determine whether a device was
found. During the search the interface and baud rate are displayed next to the button.
The interface normally operates as RS-232 with 19,200 baud (bits per second), 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit and no parity. If necessary, refer to the instructions for your device regard-
ing the required specifications.
For Signals select which channels are to be created, if the relevant data (Sentences) are
sent from your device. Carry out the appropriate configuration as necessary directly on
your device.
See also Use GNSS channels (GPS).
We recommend that GNSS devices are only used together with other measurement
devices (MGCplus, QuantumX/SomatXR etc.).

Click on OK to close the dialog.

catman
72 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 Further information on NMEA devices can be found, for example, at
www.garmin.com.

peplink MAX Industrial Router and peplink Surf SOHO (Ethernet-based GNSS)
Select Ethernet TCP/IP as the interface and 127.0.0.1:6700 as the IP address (local PC
with port 6700). Enable ports 6700 and 22 in the firewall on your PC.

Configure the devices via the web interface as follows:

1. In the Advanced section, activate GPS forwarding.
2. As the IP address specify the address of your PC (on which catman is running) and
specify 22 as the port.

EGPS 200 plus and VECTORNAV

Use the VECTORNAV configuration software, and specify INS ECE2 for the Async output.

Adding Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn or MGCplus with CP42

The advantage of adding these devices manually is that you can first search for other
devices, such as QuantumX/SomatXR, using the HBM Device Manager.
Specify the interface for MGCplus; Ethernet is the fixed default for KiRoad/RoaDyn. When
using Ethernet, enter the IP address of the device in question and click OK.

Integrating Vaisala Weather Transmitter WXT520 and compatible models

Click on Add additional devices and select the device type Vaisala Weather Transmitter
from the list. The easiest way is to click on Auto-Detect. catman then checks all COM
interfaces with all baud rates (4.8 kBaud … 115.2 kBaud) to determine whether a device
was found. During the search the interface and baud rate are displayed next to the but-
ton.
The interface normally operates as RS-232 with 19,200 baud (bits per second), 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit and no parity. If necessary, refer to the instructions for your device regard-
ing the required specifications.
At Signals select which channels are to be created.

Configure your device so that only the “Composite Message” is sent automatically,
but “PTU” or “Min/Max Wind Direction”, for example, are not sent. In the Vaisala
Weather Transmitter configuration dialog this usually relates to the signals shown
on the left.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 73
 A Vaisala Weather Transmitter must be used together with other measuring devices
(MGCplus, QuantumX/SomatXR, etc.).

Click on OK to close the dialog.

3.1.3 Settings for MGCplus with CP42 and DMP41

See also No device found?, Possible cases with a connection via Ethernet, Which
Ethernet address is to be entered on the device?

Specify the Scan range for TCP/IP device scan. Specify a single address or a (small)
address range, as the search takes about 0.5 seconds per address.

Notes
Neither DHCP nor APIPA can be used for MGCplus with CP22/42 or for DMP41, but
you can set the Ethernet interface of the PC to Alternative configuration if there is
no server in the network.
For MGCplus with CP52, use the HBM Device Manager.
You do not have to specify a port number for MGCplus; the default value for
MGCplus (7) is used automatically. If you use another port number for your devices,
then in the dialog Prepare new DAQ project in the field Scan range for TCP/IP
device scan you must append the port to the address, separated by a colon, e.g.
192.168.169.122:5005. Alternatively, you can create the project with Offline (Meas-
ure menu in the start window), and enter the port when specifying the device.

3.1.4 Settings for optical measuring devices

Settings for QuantumX MXFS

If you want to use other QuantumX/SomatXR modules in addition to MXFS, they must
support the decimal sample rate domain. This means modules with A functionality, such
as an MX840A, cannot be combined; you can only use modules with B or C functionality,
such as an MX840B.
Hybrid systems—that is to say, systems in which both QuantumX/SomatXR and other
HBM devices, such as MGCplus, are to be used—are not possible.
Specify how many channels to create in the device scan options; see Integrating optical
measuring devices.
See also Activating and configuring QuantumX MXFS channels.

catman
74 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Settings for FS22 BraggMETERs
The following applies to the FS22 BraggMETERs SI and DI:
Up to four devices are supported.
Each device can use a maximum of 16 slots with up to 128 channels (measuring
points or optical strain gages) per slot.
The total number of channels is limited by catman: a maximum of 4,000 measure-
ment and computation channels.
The channels with the wavelength can only be zeroed if you assign sensors to the
channels. Otherwise, you have to zero-balance the computed channels.

See also Integrating optical measuring devices, Configuring FS22 BraggMETER

channels.

Settings for ARAMIS (GOM testing controller)

Use is only possible with catmanAP, not with catmanEasy. Use ARAMIS channels
only together with other measuring equipment (QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus).

catman communicates exclusively with the PC on which the testing software is run-
ning (GOM Testing Controller).

Basic procedure on the Testing Controller

1. Create a project on the Testing Controller or load an existing project.
2. Enable the SCPI Interface option (Tracking settings) in the deformation tracking dia-
log.
3. Select the desired sample rate for deformation tracking. The sample rate must
match one of the sample rates available in catman.
4. Start deformation tracking.

Do not stop deformation tracking while catman is running. Otherwise you will have
to exit catman and restart your project.

See also Integrating optical measuring devices, Using ARAMIS channels (GOM test-
ing controller).

3.1.5 MGCplus on-board recording

You can also transfer your DAQ jobs to an MGCplus and run them there: On-board record-
ing (recording to a storage medium on the MGCplus). The term used for this in the

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 75
MGCplus operating manual is PC card recording (CP42) or stand-alone measurement.
The EasyRoadload module required for this in older versions of catman is no longer
necessary.
You can combine the recording with a measurement on the storage medium connected
to MGCplus from catman (DAQ job) or execute it autonomously and independently of cat-
man in the device. Use Download (Tools group) in Analysis mode, Test Explorer tab to
transfer the measured data to the PC. Here, the files can also be converted or you can
carry out the conversion retrospectively (Convert).

Restrictions of On-Board recording compared to DAQ jobs of catman

You should only use transducers with linear scaling. Other linearizations (table, poly-
nomial) cannot be computed by the MGCplus; only the “raw values” in mV/V are
measured and recorded on the storage medium. The conversion to the physical
quantity must in this case be carried out later using a computation.
Computation channels are not recorded on the storage medium, only the device
channels.
You can define one start and one stop trigger for one channel in the device per DAQ
job; triggering on computed channels is not possible.
The post-trigger time (follow-up time) is not supported by the MGCplus.
The possible pre-trigger time depends on the available memory in the CP42/52 in
the MGCplus and is restricted to some 100,000 measurements for all channels, see
the Operating Manual for the MGCplus.
The start of the measurement at a certain point in time (date/time) is not supported
by the MGCplus.

3.1.6 Scan range for TCP/IP device scan (TCP/IP scan range)
If you cannot use the HBM Device Manager, specify a search range for the Ethernet
addresses for connecting to a device connected via Ethernet so that the search does not
take too long or scans through the wrong range of addresses. Either enter just a single
address (for example 192.168.100.55) or enter a (small) range including the address.
Separate numbers for a range with a minus sign (10-35), single addresses with commas
(3,5,9,46) and combinations with a semicolon (192.168.100.10-
35;192.168.100.3,5,9,46).

Spaces are not allowed. Range specifications are only allowed for the last group in
the IP address. Specifying 192.168.100-200.1-255, for example, is not possible.

catman
76 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 You may however search through several subnets using explicit addresses, e.g.
192.169.100.10-35;192.169.150.10-35.

The range must be accessible via the network. Ensure that, with different network
segments, the subnet masks are set accordingly on device and PC.
It is not possible to specify a range for QuantumX/SomatXR. Use the HBM Device
Manager for these devices, or specify individual addresses.

If you want to search through a complete subnet, you will find the subnets that can be
reached on your PC in the selection list. The number of displayed subnets depends on the
subnet mask and the number of Ethernet interfaces on your PC.
catman connects to all devices whose address are in the scan range.

catman stores the addresses entered for the search range in a list. Click on Clear history
to remove all entries.

3.1.6.1 Which Ethernet address is to be entered on the device?

Also apply case 1 if your PC has two Ethernet ports, of which one is connected to a
corporate network and the other is to be connected to the device.

Case 1: You are creating a local network between your PC and your measuring
device
Here you require an Ethernet cross cable if you wish to connect only the PC and device.
Otherwise you must connect PC and devices to an Ethernet Hub or Ethernet switch (and
use standard Ethernet cable).
With most PCs a cross cable is no longer needed as the interface is automatically
reconfigured appropriately.

Set the addresses on the devices. Assign the IP address 192.168.100.1 to your PC, for
example, and the subsequent addresses 192.168.100.2, 192.168.100.3 etc. for the
MGCplus and other devices. The 192.168.xxx.xxx address range is intended for such
internal networks, so they will not conflict with Internet addresses, even if your PC is
using another Internet access. Enter a Scan range for TCP/IP device scan in catman,
which contains the device address.
See also Setting the IP address of the PC.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 77
Case 2: Your PC is connected to an Ethernet network, and you want to connect
your measuring device to the same network
Contact your system administrator and ask him to give you an Ethernet address that you
can set on the device. Then enter a Scan range for TCP/IP device scan containing the
device address in catman.

3.1.6.2 How is the address set on the QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus with

CP52?
The factory setting of the devices and modules is DHCP. You can also assign a fixed
address. The device or module must be present in the list on the Found modules tab; oth-
erwise follow the instructions in Using the HBM Device Manager.

Change IP address
1. Activate the start of the device manager via Search ports and HBM Device Manager
in the Prepare new DAQ project dialog.
2. Open a new DAQ project in the start window of catman (menu Measure, New).
3. In the HBM Device Manager mark the relevant device or module and go to the
Change module settings tab.
4. Specify an IP address which uses an address only differing in the last group of fig-
ures (fourth group) from that of your PC (the IP address of your PC is shown under
Network adapters of your computer). If there are other devices in the network, this
address must not be used elsewhere.
5. Set the Subnet mask to the same numbers as for your PC.
6. Click on Apply settings.
7. Wait until the device or module has been restarted.
After that a new scan will be performed automatically.

3.1.6.3 How is the address set on the PMX?

You have two ways of changing the IP address of the PMX:
1. You can use a web browser
Connect to the device via a web browser. At the ADMINISTRATOR user level you
can then specify the address of the PMX using the menu SETTINGS ► SYSTEM ►
DEVICE ► NETWORK.

catman
78 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
2. You can use the HBM Device Manager
Carry out a module scan, mark the relevant PMX and go to the Module info tab.
The tab shows you the same view as a web browser. At the ADMINISTRATOR user
level you can then specify the address of the PMX using the menu SETTINGS ►
SYSTEM ► DEVICE ► NETWORK.

3.1.6.4 How is the address set on the MGCplus?

For an MGCplus with CP52, use the HBM Device Manager; see How is the address
set on the QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus with CP52?

You can set the address of an MGCplus with CP22 or CP42 via the AB22 menu: System ►
Interfaces ► Ethernet.
If your device does not have an AB22, you have to connect the MGCplus via a USB port,
start the MGCplus Assistant and set the IP address via System ► CP ► Settings and the
Communication tab.

3.1.6.5 How is the address set on the FS22 BraggMETER?

Use the factory default address initially to connect to catman. Then change the IP
address on the Optical functions tab.
See also Setting the IP address of the PC.

Procedure
1. Configure your PC as shown in the user manual so that you can connect to the FS22
BraggMETER (factory default IP address of FS22 BraggMETER: 10.0.0.150).
2. Connect to the device via catman.
3. Go to the Optical functions tab and type the following command in the command
window:
:ACQU:STOP
4. Click on Send.
5. Enter:
:SYST:IPAD:<new IP address>:<subnet mask>:<gateway IP> (enter all
numbers with 3 digits)
6. Click on Send.
The device now has the new IP address. Exit catman and reset your PC's IP address.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 79
Example of the command with a new IP address (192.168.100.121)
:SYST:IPAD:192.168.100.121:255.255.000.000:000.000.000.000
Press and hold the power button for more than 10 seconds to reset the FS22 Bragg-
METER to its factory default settings.

3.1.6.6 How is the address set on the DMP41?

You can only set the address of the DMP41 using the display on the device. Depending
on the device configuration, the entry of a password may be necessary. Otherwise tap on

(Settings) and then on Ethernet.

3.1.6.7 Changing the PC's IP address

Procedure for Windows 10

1. Open, for example using the symbol in the notification area of the taskbar, the
Network and Sharing Center.
2. Click in the Show active networks area on the connection you want (usually LAN con-
nection).
3. Click on Properties and specify an administrator account or confirm the security
prompt.
4. Select Internet protocol version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click on Properties.
5. Activate Use the following IP address and enter an address with which the first three
groups of numbers match the groups of numbers of the HBM device and only the
last group of numbers contains a different number between 1 and 254. The last
group of numbers must not match the one on the HBM device.
6. At Subnet mask enter the same groups of numbers as they are present on the HBM
device.
7. Then click OK or Close to close all open dialogs.

Example:
The IP address of the HBM device is 192.168.169.80, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Enter 192.168.169.123 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask on the
PC.

catman
80 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Procedure for Windows 8/8.1
1. From the Charms menu on the Windows desktop (not in tile view) open Settings ►
Control Panel ► Network and Sharing Center (View: Small icons) or Show network
status and tasks (View: Categories).
2. Click in the Show active networks area on the connection you want (usually LAN con-
nection).
3. Click on Properties and specify an administrator account or confirm the security
prompt.
4. Select Internet protocol version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click on Properties.
5. Activate Use the following IP address and enter an address with which the first three
groups of numbers match the groups of numbers of the HBM device and only the
last group of numbers contains a different number between 1 and 254. The last
group of numbers must not match the one on the HBM device.
6. At Subnet mask enter the same groups of numbers as they are present on the HBM
device.
7. Then click OK or Close to close all open dialogs.

Example:
The IP address of the HBM device is 192.168.169.80, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Enter 192.168.169.123 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask on the
PC.

3.1.7 Options when establishing a device connection (device search)

You can use the options of the Prepare new DAQ project dialog (click on Options) to
define:
Whether directly following establishment of the device connection a Sensor scan
should be carried out (General options).
During a sensor scan on starting a new DAQ project, the information contained in
sensors with TEDS or T-ID is evaluated.
See Execute sensor scan after device connection, Using transducers with TEDS.
You can define the behavior on opening an existing DAQ project via Sensors
(Channels and sensors group in the Program options).
Whether after establishing the device connection a dialog appears in which you can
reset the device settings to the factory settings (General options).
See Device reset/factory setting after device connection.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 81
 Whether the configuration of the channel filters can be changed by catman, or is to
be blocked.
See also Do not change filter and sample rate after connecting device.
Whether the configuration of channel settings (sensor assignment, sensor scaling,
TEDS scan, zero balance and filters) may be modified by catman or is to be locked,
e.g. on connecting to devices which are used in a test rig.
See Lock interactive channel configuration.
How many CAN bus channels are to be created, and whether CAN RAW channels
are to be created.
See CAN bus options (Default setting of number of CAN channels).
Whether the (hardware) time channels run in the device during the measurement
are used instead of the (software) time channels created in catman (Hardware time
channels).
See Hardware time channels, Time channels in catman.
Whether the math functions of specific MX modules are to be accessible, or the
maximum number of EtherCAT channels possible for the CX27C.
See Advanced options.
Which channel layout to use with QuantumX MXFS (optical sensors), and whether
you want to use the Smart Peak Detection of the FS22 SI.
See Advanced options.
Whether you want to add additional devices to those already selected. The option
allows you to include devices that cannot be found automatically by the Device
Manager. If you are not using the Device Manager, you can still add the devices in
the Device Manager. Otherwise, add devices here that are not in the list of device
types: GNSS receivers, ARAMIS channels (GOM Testing Controller), a Vaisala
Weather Transmitter, etc.
See Additional devices (add devices manually).

3.1.7.1 Execute sensor scan after device connection

This option is only relevant when using transducers with TEDS or T-ID.

If you carry out a sensor scan, then provided the measurement device supports TEDS, all
transducers with TEDS or T-ID module are detected.
For transducers with TEDS, the measuring chain is set up and adjusted immediately. With
T-ID, the information is transferred to catman in order to find the correct settings in the
Sensor database. If the entry exists, the amplifier is set up appropriately via catman.
Otherwise no settings are made and an error message “T-ID not found” is displayed.

catman
82 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 A (new) sensor scan is only performed with QuantumX/SomatXR if the device
detects a sensor being plugged in, or the sensor was already plugged in before the
device was switched on. With QuantumX/SomatXR modules, if you do not connect
the sensor directly to the device, but instead to an extension cable and only plug in
after switching on the module, the module does not detect that a (new) TEDS
sensor is present. So the existing configuration continues to be used. Therefore, if
you use extension cables and do not plug directly into the module, you should use
the Force device to reload TEDS content during a sensor scan option (Program
options: Sensors) so that the TEDS content is read out and activated again during a
sensor scan (Options in catman Start window, Sensors in Channels and sensors
group). Unfortunately, this means that the time required for the sensor scan
increases and approx. three seconds per sensor are needed.

The option After loading a DAQ project: Execute sensor scan determines the
response to loading a DAQ project (Options in the start window, Sensors in the
Channels and sensors group).

3.1.7.2 Device reset/factory setting after device connection

When the factory default setting is loaded, settings can be deleted which you have
made manually on the device, e.g. via the AB22 of the MGCplus. (The Ethernet
address is not reset when a default setting is loaded.)

With a device reset you have the possibility of deleting device settings such as channel
names or sensor assignments in the device. The function is not available for FS22 Brag-
gMETERs.
If required, you can also call the dialog via the DAQ channels tab and the Special group, or
the context menu for the device.

With MGCplus when the connection to the device is being established, there could be a
Link resource conflict for example if an On-Board recording is configured. In this case
reset the device and delete the flash settings for the On-Board recording.

A dialog is displayed after each device scan if Load factory settings after device con-
nection is activated. The dialog can also be called with Device reset in the Special group
on the DAQ channels tab:
1. Load the factory settings for all channels
With QuantumX/SomatXR all connectors are set to analog mode. However CAN
bus channels of the first connector of an MX840/MX840A/MX840B remain

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 83
 unchanged. With MGCplus all plug-in modules except ML77 are reset to their fact-
ory settings. You may also exempt ML71 plug-in modules from resetting (MGCplus
only).
With QuantumX MXFS all defined bands are deleted, the sensor assignments are
set to Wavelength and the channels are deactivated.
2. Reset all channel names
The names of all channels are reset to the default devicename_CH_slotnumber_
subchannelnumber. With MGCplus ML77 modules are always ignored; you may
specify that ML70 and ML71 are also ignored. Real-time computations and exist-
ing data sources in graphs, Digital indicators etc. are redirected or changed to the
new names.
3. Delete flash settings for on-Board recording (MGCplus only)
Recording parameter set 0 (flash) is deleted, any running On-Board recording is
stopped and the link resources for an AB22 process are freed.

After a reset all channels are reinitialized and the channel list is updated. The whole pro-
cess may take several seconds per device, with MGCplus up to 30 s.

3.1.7.3 Do not change filter and sample rate after connecting device
The option defines whether the filter settings (filter in the device) may be automatically
modified by catman after connection to a device or not.
With QuantumX/SomatXR, when the option is active the sample rates of the device
are not changed either, but instead applied as sample rates in catman.

In the default setting catman uses approx. 15% of the sample rate as the filter frequency
in order to reduce Alias effects; see DAQ channel options for other percentage figures.
After the scan and connection to a device, catman uses a default sample rate, and the
associated filter frequency is set automatically. This setting (and only this one) is pre-
vented by the option. You can modify the filter settings thereafter, both on the DAQ chan-
nels tab and on the DAQ jobs tab.
See Lock interactive channel configuration to prevent all further changes, and Measuring
(start DAQ job) to change the default settings of a DAQ job.

3.1.7.4 Lock interactive channel configuration

See also Sensor options, Password protection

catman
84 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
The option defines whether channel settings can be modified in catman or are to be
locked. With the option active you cannot:
Change channel names
Assign sensors
Perform a TEDS scan
Change the scaling
Change the filter settings
Perform a zero balance

After the device search and connection to a device, low-pass filters are auto-
matically set (once only) in order to reduce aliasing; see DAQ channel options. In
addition activate Do not change filter after device connection, to prevent this
change to the filter settings as well.

The option is useful, for example, with a connection to devices which are used in a test-
rig or which have been already configured elsewhere. It is however possible to change the
sample rate of catman.
Not every sample rate can be used with every filter. If a combination is invalid, cat-
man does not acquire any measurements. The Sample column on the DAQ chan-
nels tab then shows “Sample rate or filter setting is invalid”.

3.1.7.5 CAN bus options (Default setting of number of CAN channels)

See also Using CAN signals/bus reset.

Here you can specify how many (empty) CAN channels are to be available for the Quan-
tumX/SomatXR after establishing the device connection, provided the module has con-
nections which support the CAN bus. The setting must be made for each connector, but
is used for each module to which catman connects. No channels are created if the CAN
bus is not supported by the connected modules. The channels are acquired at the spe-
cified sample rate. If the data rate via the CAN bus is lower than the sample rate, the val-
ues are repeated until new values are available. An exception is the CAN-RAW format
(MX471), in which only the signals actually received are stored.
With MGCplus, only the channels already activated in the device are displayed after the
scan.

Maximum number of channels supported by your device:

128 (per connector) with QuantumX/SomatXR MX840 (1 connector) and MX471 (4
connectors),

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 85
 128 per plug-in for MGCplus.
Note that catman supports up to 4000 channels. The default setting is 512 channels; see
also Data storage options.

QuantumX/SomatXR MX840
The option is only taken into account when Connector 1 is already configured as a CAN
bus connector. If the connector is still configured as an analog input, the number quoted
here is used as the default setting only on switching to the CAN bus mode. You can how-
ever still change it; see Using CAN signals/bus reset.
The option is used for each module which is found during the scan and which uses Con-
nector 1 for the CAN bus.

QuantumX/SomatXR MX471
You can define the number of CAN channels individually for each of the four connectors.
As of catman 5.0, you can also specify that only or additionally CAN raw messages are
received at a connector (additionally: Activate CAN raw receiver option).
See also Configuring a CAN Raw table.
Alternatively, you can create only as many channels as are already configured in the
device: Use current device configuration. The configuration can take place with the last
measurement with the device or via the MX Assistant.
To be able to receive CAN-FD raw messages, you must additionally select CAN-
RAW format: FD (max. 64 byte payload).

CAN FD: Only the MX471C supports CAN FD. The MX471 and MX471B cannot be
connected to a CAN bus on which CAN FD messages are also sent.

The Refresh CAN signal list after project load option re-reads the channels after loading
a project with CAN channels. Use the option if the CAN channels are already defined, e.g.
via the MX Assistant, and you want to load a project in which a different channel con-
figuration is present. After loading the project, read in the signal list anew to obtain the
current configuration without changing other project settings.

MGCplus with ML71

You can also change the number of CAN channels after a scan via the General settings of
CAN bus modules dialog and the ML71 channel configuration tab (DAQ channels tab, Spe-
cial group, CAN configuration).

catman
86 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 After the change the MGCplus reboots. Settings that may have been made for other
channels will be lost. Therefore configure the CAN channels before making any
other settings.

3.1.7.6 Hardware time channels

See also Time channels in catman.

The Create hardware time channels option is only available for MGCplus, Quan-
tumX/SomatXR modules, PMX, and FS22 BraggMETERs.

Normally you do not need to activate this option: If, when starting a new DAQ project cat-
man finds that several synchronizable devices are possible (the devices are activated in
the Prepare new DAQ project dialog), you obtain a dialog with the query of whether you
want to synchronize them or not. If you respond here with Yes, the required options are
automatically activated. When only FS22 BraggMETERs are connected, the option is like-
wise automatically activated. After the scan display the dialog to check the syn-
chronization. In this dialog you can make the settings required for the time channels; see
Synchronizing several devices.

Hardware time channels are generated in the device and are transferred to catman
exactly like data from channels with other signals, e.g. from sensors. The main advantage
of hardware time channels is that you can use them also to retrospectively synchronize
data from different devices, i.e. data from devices which are not synchronized together, or
cannot be synchronized, for example because they are too far away from each other, or
multiple FS22 BraggMETERs. A prerequisite however is that the devices internally have
the precise time available, i.e. all devices must be supplied with the time information from
a time server. Apart from NTP time, with QuantumX/SomatXR the IRIG-B time option is
also available. In the case of QuantumX modules with B and C functionality, SomatXR
modules, and MGCplus with CP52, you can also use PTP. You can alternatively syn-
chronize a CX27 module via EtherCAT.
See also Configure and check time synchronization services.
The (software) time channels normally used are computed channels whose values are
computed from the sample rates.
NTP time channels do not show local time, but rather UTC time (derived from
Coordinated Universal Time, corresponding to Greenwich Mean Time or London
time). The time format is NTP-Unix (dating from 1.1.1970).

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 87
MGCplus
The CPU module CP22 cannot generate NTP times. For CP42 you can use NTP; for CP52
you can use NTP or (better) PTP.

QuantumX/SomatXR
All QuantumX/SomatXR modules from firmware version 4.0 upwards can use NTP.
With MX840A/MX840B and MX440A/MX440B IRIG-B is available as an alternative.
For QuantumX modules with B and C functionality, and SomatXR modules, PTP is also
available.
EtherCAT is only available when using a CX27 module.
See also Configure and check time synchronization services.

PMX
With PMX you can only use NTP or Ticks: If you are using multiple PMXs, you can change
the time channels to ticks. This results in better synchronization of the devices in some
configurations. Instead of timestamps, the hardware time channels in catman then con-
tain ticks. To do this, create the PMX_USE_TIMETICK (DWORD) entry in the registry in the
HKEY_Local_Machine\Software\Wow6432Node\HBM\Catman\Settings section, and give
it the value 1.

Changes to the Registry using the regedit.exe program should only be made by
experienced users, and after backing up the existing Registry, because under some
circumstances serious Windows errors might result. If necessary, ask your admin-
istrator to make the change.

FS22 BraggMETERs
As from firmware version 2.0 the FS22 BraggMETER SI/DI support NTP time syn-
chronization. Older FS22 BraggMETERs do not have NTP; here the PC time (in the NTP
format) is used as a time stamp on receipt of the data. Therefore with this type of device
ensure that the PC clock contains the precise (NTP) time or at least the same time source
as the other NTP clients.
See also Configure and check time synchronization services.

catman
88 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
3.1.7.7 Advanced options

QuantumX/SomatXR: On-Board math

Activate this option if you are using MX modules which possess math functions and on
which you want to configure and apply these functions using catman.
If you are carrying out the configuration via the MX Assistant and also do not need any
results of the math functions in catman, you do not need to activate this option. Analog
outputs and digital I/Os, e.g. with MX879, are always activated when an appropriate mod-
ule is detected.
See also QuantumX/SomatXR on-board functions.

EtherCAT with CX27C (QuantumX)

The CX27C allows you also to display EtherCAT signals in catman. You must define the
signals via the EtherCAT Master and the MX Assistant. You can view these channels in
catman by setting the Maximum number of QuantumX-CX27C channels in the Advanced
options to a value at least as high as the number of channels you want. Only the existing
channels will be included, however, even if more are indicated in this field.

If you open a project in which fewer channels are defined than in the current con-
figuration, only the project channels will be set up. So, where necessary, configure a
few more channels than you currently need.

If you open a project that no longer includes all the project channels, you must dis-
able the ones that are not present. Otherwise measurement will start.

The channels are initially disabled after a device scan. Once enabled, they are acquired at
the specified sample rate and processed like other channels. The data is only read how-
ever. Assigning sensors, scaling or changing the signal source is not possible. You can
only change the signal name in catman. The amplifier type (CX27C), the CX27 serial num-
ber and the physical unit of the signal are recorded as traceability data.
If the data rate via EtherCAT is lower than the sample rate, the values are repeated until
new values are available.

Defining QuantumX MXFS channel layout

The channel layout determines how many channels catman creates. You can only choose
between the configurations offered; custom configuration is not possible. The first num-
ber is the number of (occupied) connectors on the device; the second number is the num-
ber of measuring points per connector. If, for example, you do not need the maximum

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 89
possible number of channels, or not all connectors are occupied, you can use this to
reduce the number of channels catman creates. The setting 4 x 8 creates only 8 channels
for only 4 connectors, meaning only 32 channels in total instead of 128.

It is not possible to change the number of channels in a project later.

After connecting to the device(s), all channels are initially deactivated. A channel is only
activated when you specify the band relevant to it. To do this, use either Configure ranges
(MXFS optics group on DAQ channels tab) or Auto Range Detection.
See Activating and configuring QuantumX MXFS channels.

Use Smart Peak Detection for FS22

Smart Peak Detection changes the way the threshold and peak detection work in the
FS22 BraggMETER. Without this option, the specified Relative threshold is applied to the
entire Sweep range, i.e. all wavelengths:

Detected peaks are marked in green: 1 peak has not been detected and an interference
signal has also been detected as a peak in the center.

With the option active the threshold is only applied to the range specified (Peak lock band-
width) and a maximum of one peak per range is accepted:

catman
90 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Detected peaks are marked in green: All three measuring points have been detected and
the interference peak has not been analyzed (only the highest amplitude in the range is
valid).

3.1.7.8 Additional devices (add devices manually)

You can use this to add other devices, such as FS22 BraggMETERs or GNSS receivers
(e.g. GPS). As GNSS receivers, NMEA-0183 compatible systems are supported which you
can connect via USB or a USB-to-serial converter (NMEA = National Marine Electronics
Association).
See also HBM Device Manager for QuantumX/SomatXR, PMX and MGCplus with CP52:
Add additional devices.
GNSS receivers can also be added to an existing DAQ project (DAQ channels tab,
Special group).

Connecting FS22 BraggMETERs or ARAMIS channels (GOM Testing Controller)

Click on New device and select the Device type (FS22, GOM) from the list. Ethernet is per-
manently set as the interface. Enter the IP address of the device, and the port if neces-
sary, and click on OK.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 91
Add NMEA compatible device: GNSS receiver
Click on New device and select the device type NMEA compatible device from the list.
The easiest way is to click on Auto-Detect. catman then checks all COM interfaces with
all baud rates (4.8 kBaud … 115.2 kBaud) to determine whether a device was found. Dur-
ing the search the interface and baud rate are displayed next to the button.
The interface normally operates as RS-232 with 19,200 baud (bits per second), 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit and no parity. If necessary, refer to the instructions for your device regard-
ing the required specifications.
For Signals select which channels are to be created, if the relevant data (Sentences) are
sent from your device. Carry out the appropriate configuration as necessary directly on
your device.
See also Use GNSS channels (GPS).
GNSS devices must be used together with other measurement devices (MGCplus,
QuantumX/SomatXR, etc.).

Click on OK to close the dialog.

Further information on NMEA devices can be found, for example, at
www.garmin.com.

peplink MAX Industrial Router and peplink Surf SOHO (Ethernet-based GNSS)
Select Ethernet TCP/IP as the interface and 127.0.0.1:6700 as the IP address (local PC
with port 6700). Enable ports 6700 and 22 in the firewall on your PC.

Configure the devices via the web interface as follows:

1. In the Advanced section, activate GPS forwarding.
2. As the IP address specify the address of your PC (on which catman is running) and
specify 22 as the port.

EGPS 200 plus and VECTORNAV

Use the VECTORNAV configuration software, and specify INS ECE2 for the Async output.

Adding Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn or MGCplus with CP42

The advantage of adding these devices manually is that you can first search for other
devices, such as QuantumX/SomatXR, using the HBM Device Manager.
Enter the IP address of the device and click on OK.

catman
92 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Integrating Vaisala Weather Transmitter WXT520 and compatible models
Click on New device and select the device type Vaisala Weather Transmitter from the list.
The easiest way is to click on Auto-Detect. catman then checks all COM interfaces with
all baud rates (4.8 kBaud … 115.2 kBaud) to determine whether a device was found. Dur-
ing the search the interface and baud rate are displayed next to the button.
The interface normally operates as RS-232 with 19,200 baud (bits per second), 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit and no parity. If necessary, refer to the instructions for your device regard-
ing the required specifications.
At Signals select which channels are to be created.

Configure your device so that only the “Composite Message” is sent automatically,
but “PTU” or “Min/Max Wind Direction”, for example, are not sent. In the Vaisala
Weather Transmitter configuration dialog this usually relates to the signals shown
on the left.

A Vaisala Weather Transmitter must be used together with other measuring devices
(MGCplus, QuantumX/SomatXR, etc.).

Click on OK to close the dialog.

3.2 Start a new DAQ project

See also Prepare a new DAQ project: Device scan, Using Device Manager, Options
when establishing a device connection (device search), Execute sensor scan after
device connection, Assign CANHEAD modules (activate subchannel blocks), Syn-
chronizing several devices, Special features of PMX, No device found?

Start a new DAQ project by clicking on New in the Measure menu (catman start window).
If you are starting a project for the first time, you must first perform the correct settings
for the Device search. When starting, the interfaces activated in the Prepare new DAQ pro-
ject dialog are searched for the specified device types. The devices must be switched on
and ready for operation, otherwise they will not be found.
If you are using several devices, you should synchronize the devices; see Syn-
chronizing several devices. Otherwise there could be unrecognizable time dif-
ferences between the measured values of devices participating in the
measurement.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 93
 Simultaneous connection of different HBM devices is supported by catman, but
with restrictions: with PMX and DMP41, only additional devices of the same type
can be used. QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus can also be used together with FS22
BraggMETERs or a GOM Testing Controller (ARAMIS). Irrespective of this you can
include, for example, a GNSS receiver via Options and the Additional devices tab or
the HBM Device Manager in the DAQ project.
If after connecting to a device you would like to start an additional project with
another device type, we recommend first completely terminating catman and
restarting.

What happens during the start (connecting devices)

After starting a new DAQ project, the devices found and the channels they contain are cre-
ated in the channel list and the DAQ channels tab is opened with the Configure DAQ chan-
nels window. Exceptions are the CAN channels of QuantumX/SomatXR: Here only the
number specified in the Prepare new DAQ project dialog are created. With Quan-
tumX/SomatXR you can however still retrospectively change the number of channels
with CAN signals; see Using CAN signals.
The default settings for a DAQ job are applied, and the default filters are set. You can cre-
ate a maximum of 4,000 channels (including computation channels).
See also Do not change filter and sample rate after connecting device, Maximum number
of channels.
Several MX modules are sorted according to their names and are accepted into the chan-
nel list in increasing alphabetical order. In order to transfer PMX devices into the channel
list in alphabetical order it is sufficient if you sort the list in the HBM Device Manager:
Click on the Name column before connection.
See also Synchronizing several devices.

The channels are then checked and measured, i.e. the Live display is active (default set-
ting).
Channels with TEDS transducers are automatically configured if you have activated
Execute sensor scan after device connection on the General options tab in the dialog Pre-
pare new DAQ project (click on Options). Otherwise manually run a TEDS scan with
(Sensor group).

You can import individual settings such as DAQ jobs, computations, channel set-
tings, limits or visual displays from saved DAQ projects: File ► Import menu. You
can also transfer channel name, sensor type (name and/or ID), gage factor and

catman
94 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 channel comment from an Excel file; see Import channel name and sensor type
from Excel.

Is a different order of devices/channels required?

You can remove MX modules, PMX or MGCplus devices from the list and add them manu-
ally in a different sequence using the menu Special ► Remove/add module/device.
QuantumX/SomatXR-Modules connected via a gateway, such as a CX27 module or
modules with C functionality, such as an MX471C, are displayed in a tree structure
below the gateway. When adding, select the gateway to which the module is con-
nected. You may need to enable the gateway functionality; see Using the HBM
Device Manager.

The sequence of the (hardware) channels cannot be changed, as it corresponds to the

order of the channels in the device. You can only change the sequencing of CAN channels
and computation channels: Click in the column on the far left on the relevant row and
while holding down the mouse button move it to the desired position. CAN raw channels
(only ML471) are always created below the other CAN channels of the module.

Ports for Ethernet

You do not need to enter a port number for QuantumX/SomatXR and MGCplus, the
default values for MGCplus (7) and QuantumX/SomatXR (5001) are used automatically. If
you use another port number for your devices, then in the dialog Prepare new DAQ project
in the field Scan range for TCP/IP device scan you must append the port to the address,
separated by a colon, e.g. 192.168.169.122:5005. Alternatively, you can create the pro-
ject with Offline (Measure menu in the start window), and enter the port when specifying
the device.

3.2.1 Using older QuantumX modules

The communication with the QuantumX modules has been completely changed as from
catman 3.5, because the current firmware versions (as of 4.0) offer a whole range of new
possibilities: Improved transmission of the measurements; faster scanning; and, in con-
junction with current modules with B or C functionality, also new time channel variants
(PTP), new sample rates (decimal stepping) and more. From catman 3.5 the SomatXR
modules are also supported, which likewise use firmware 4.0 or higher.
For updating older modules you need the appropriate firmware file. Depending on the
existing firmware, you may also have to download the program „QuantumXFirmware

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 95
Updater” and perform the update in several steps. Contact HBM Technical Support about
this.

3.2.2 Integrating optical measuring devices

Integrating the QuantumX MXFS

If you want to use other QuantumX/SomatXR modules in addition to MXFS, they must
support the decimal sample rate domain. This means modules with A functionality, such
as an MX840A, cannot be combined; you can only use modules with B or C functionality,
such as an MX840B.
Hybrid systems—that is to say, systems in which both QuantumX/SomatXR and other
HBM devices, such as MGCplus, are to be used—are not possible.

Procedure
1. In the Scan dialog, specify QuantumX/SomatXR as the device type to find.
2. Activate the HBM Device Manager to browse the interfaces.
3. Then open the Options in the dialog and click on Advanced options. Specify there
whether:
Auto Range Detection is to be used,
and which channel layout catman to use.

The channel layout determines how many channels catman creates. You can only choose
between the configurations offered; custom configuration is not possible. The first num-
ber is the number of (occupied) connectors on the device; the second number is the num-
ber of measuring points per connector. If, for example, you do not need the maximum
possible number of channels, or not all connectors are occupied, you can use this to
reduce the number of channels catman creates. The setting 4 x 8 creates only 8 channels
for only 4 connectors, meaning only 32 channels in total instead of 128.

It is not possible to change the number of channels in a project later.

When you start a new DAQ project, the QuantumX/SomatXR modules are searched for
and displayed in a list. Select the module(s) you want to connect to from it. The Slot
column in the channel list shows which connector and which grid is displayed: 1-3 is the
third fiber Bragg grid on the first connector of the device.
See also Settings for QuantumX MXFS for general information on usage, Activating
and configuring QuantumX MXFS channels regarding channel configuration, i.e.

catman
96 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 band center and bandwidth, Defining QuantumX MXFS channel layout, Channel list
options regarding how to show columns.

Integrating FS22 BraggMETERs

You can configure and perform measurements with the FS22 BraggMETERs SI or DI as
usual in catman by a normal DAQ job. The maximum sample rate of the devices depends
on the model and lies between 1 Hz and 1 kHz. At a sample rate which is higher than the
maximum sample rate of the device you are using, in hybrid systems the relevant last
value is repeated until a new value is present.

Procedure
1. In the Scan dialog, specify FS22 as the device type to find.
2. Under Search ports activate Ethernet and enter the IP address used for the Scan
range for TCP/IP device scan or ensure that the IP address being used is in the spe-
cified scan range.
See also How is the address set on the FS22 BraggMETER?
3. If you are using an FS22 BraggMETER SI, open the Options in the dialog and click on
Advanced options, where you can activate Smart Peak Detection; see Use Smart
Peak Detection for FS22.

If you are using one or more FS22 BraggMETERs together with Quan-
tumX/SomatXR modules, you can also only activate QuantumX/SomatXR at
Search device types and the HBM Device Manager at Search ports. Then add the
BraggMETER(s) manually in the HBM Device Manager: Add additional devices,
see also Add additional devices.

When you start a new DAQ project, the specified IP address range is scanned. Devices
found are checked to see which connectors and how many fiber Bragg gratings they
have. The measuring grids found are displayed as channels in the channel list together
with the time channel and diagnostic channels of the devices. The Slot column in the
channel list shows which connector and which grid is displayed: 1-3 is the third fiber
Bragg grid on the first connector of the device.

As from firmware version 2.0 the FS22 BraggMETER SI/DI support NTP time syn-
chronization, see Configure and check time synchronization services. Activate syn-
chronization via NTP for all devices to get synchronous data acquisition; see also
Synchronization in case 2: different devices (hybrid system).

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 97
 See also Settings for FS22 BraggMETERs for general information on usage, Con-
figuring FS22 BraggMETER channels, Channel list options regarding how to show
columns.

Integrating the ARAMIS system (GOM testing controller)

Use is only possible with catmanAP, not with catmanEasy. Use ARAMIS channels
only together with other measuring equipment (QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus).

See also Settings for ARAMIS (GOM testing controller) regarding preparation of the
test controller and Using ARAMIS channels (GOM testing controller).

Procedure
1. Use the HBM Device Manager, for example, to find your HBM device, such as a Quan-
tumX/SomatXR module. In the dialog click on Add additional devices.
If you cannot use the HBM Device Manager for MGCplus with CP42, you have to
integrate the testing controller via Additional devices (add devices manually) (Show
options in Prepare new DAQ project dialog).
2. Specify the device type GOM ARAMIS.
3. Enter the Ethernet address of your Testing Controller (you do not have to specify the
port).
When you start a new DAQ project, the selected HBM devices and the testing controller
are displayed in the channel list. For the Testing Controller, all the channels defined there,
the NTP time channel and the Diag_Sec_Number channel are displayed. Diag_Sec_Num-
ber is a sequential numbering of the received data packets. Missing numbers indicate
lost data!

Important additional actions

1. Activate synchronization via NTP for the HBM devices; see Synchronization in case
2: different devices (hybrid system).
2. In catman set the same sample rate for the channels from the testing controller as
selected in the testing controller.

Notes
catman cannot check whether the configuration of the Testing Controller still
matches the one in the catman project.

catman
98 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 You must create a new catman project if the Testing Controller configuration
changes.
catman cannot carry out any configuration on the Testing Controller, and in par-
ticular cannot change the sample rate. So make sure that the sample rates set in
catman and in the Testing Controller for deformation tracking are identical.
Note that the Testing Controller's sample rate is not guaranteed in all cir-
cumstances. Interference on a camera image or a high CPU load might reduce the
sample rate for example. We therefore recommend dragging the REL_TIME channel
onto the x axis of the graph with the Testing Controller data in order to obtain a cor-
rect display. The channel contains the NTP time for each data packet sent by the
Testing Controller. The NTP time is in UTC and seconds since 1.1.1970 (Coordin-
ated Universal Time, i.e. world time, corresponding to Greenwich Mean Time [Lon-
don time]).
See also Configuring a y(x) graph.
Exit catman before stopping deformation tracking.

3.2.3 Connecting to CANHEAD modules

To measure with strain gages or transducers via CANHEAD you need one or more
CANHEAD modules and an ML74 in the MGCplus to which the modules are connected.
Pay attention to the maximum possible sample rates for the CANHEAD (the maximum
sample rate is displayed in the MGCplus Assistant only).
With CANHEAD modules on the MGCplus primarily only those CANHEAD modules actually
connected and assigned to the ML74 are accepted into the channel list. However, you
have the possibility of including further CANHEAD modules in the measurement via the
Special group and Assign CANHEAD modules. If catman finds an ML74 on connecting to
a device, the following possibilities then exist:
1. CANHEAD modules are already activated and assigned.
For each sub-channel block the corresponding channels are created in the Con-
figure DAQ channels window in catman.
2. Usually, (at least) one sub-channel block is activated, but no CANHEAD module is
assigned or none of the assigned CANHEAD modules have been found.
catman activates the first sub-channel block. Then via Assign CANHEAD modules
(Special group) call the configuration dialog Configure ML74 channel assignment
for the relevant ML74. Here, you can activate further sub-channel blocks and
assign the CANHEAD modules.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 99
3. Not all existing CANHEAD modules have been found.
Via Assign CANHEAD modules (Special group) call the configuration dialog Con-
figure ML74 channel assignment for the relevant ML74. Here, you can activate fur-
ther sub-channel blocks and assign the CANHEAD modules.

A new device connection is established after changing the configuration. Settings

that may have been made for other channels will be lost. Therefore configure the
CANHEAD modules first.

Filter settings of a CANHEAD module (sub-channel block) are used by all channels.
Once you select another setting for one channel, the other channels are also
changed.
See also Setting filters manually.

3.2.3.1 Assign CANHEAD modules (activate sub-channel blocks)

This function is only available with CANHEAD modules which are connected via an
ML74 in the MGCplus.

In the Configure ML74 channels dialog (Assign CANHEAD modules in the Special group),
enter the number of sub-channel blocks to be released either from the menu ML74 ►
Define number of sub-channel blocks or the context menu of any block. This number cor-
responds to the maximum number of CANHEAD modules that can be connected.
After a change in the number of the released sub-channel blocks, a new device con-
nection is made to be able to correctly establish the channel list. Settings that may
have been made for other channels will be lost.

Then assign the existing modules to the available places (activated sub-channel blocks)
in the ML74. You can choose between two methods:
1. Automatic assignment of the connected and found modules to the possible chan-
nels.
Select the menu ML74 ► Assign CANHEADs automatically.
2. Manual assignment of each individual CANHEAD module.
Drag the CANHEAD module ( ) from the right onto an activated sub-channel
block on the left-hand side.
Modules can only be assigned once. A module once assigned cannot be
assigned to another sub-channel block. To do this, you must first remove the

catman
100 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 first assignment.

Both methods have advantages and disadvantages: With automatic assignment you have
no influence on the sequence of channels. Manual assignment of many channels is time
consuming, but you can also retrospectively assign further modules or leave a block free
between other sub-channel blocks for later expansions.
Automatic assignment is only practicable when no assignment has been made yet
or a new start is desirable. Existing assignments are deleted.

Do not forget to activate the new configuration before closing the dialog: Apply con-
figuration. catman After closing the dialog, automatically establishes a new device
connection.

For each CANHEAD module you can start an LED test for finding the module: Use
the module context menu LED test or the Channel info window and Flash LED. The
Status 1 LED on the CANHEAD module connector then flashes for approximately 10
seconds.

3.2.3.2 Remove CANHEAD modules

This function is only available with CANHEAD modules which are connected via an
ML74 in the MGCplus.

Assigned modules can be removed again from the channel block with the Configure
ML74 channel assignment dialog (Assign CANHEAD modules in the Special group). You
will be asked if you want to save the settings in the CANHEAD module first. The module
can then be connected to another ML74 or to another MGCplus and all settings with
regard to the measuring points are retained if you select Activate channel settings from
CANHEAD after the new assignment.

3.2.4 Connecting with Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn systems

Requirements
For the synchronous measurement operation of the System 2000 or the KiRoad sys-
tem from Kistler and the HBM devices you must use the clock signal on the HBM
device (MGCplus: Configure ML60 as counter, QuantumX/SomatXR: with MX840,
MX440 or MX460 use a counter input). The number of measurements transferred

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 101
 by the system is sent via the counter. catman can then assign the correct values
using the comparison with the measurements supplied by the HBM device.
In addition you must acquire the trigger channel of the System 2000 or KiRoad sys-
tem. Any 10 V input (DC) is sufficient for the purpose.
The devices and the Kistler system must be connected together through an Ether-
net switch.
The IP addresses of the devices must lie in the same segment (only the last group
of figures differs).
The ports 8888 and 8889 for UDP must be released for the System 2000.
For the KiRoad system, ports 6155 and 6158 must be enabled for TCP and port
6156 for UDP.

Procedure
1. Configure the RoaDyn® system (number of channels or signals, etc.) using the asso-
ciated configuration software. The Sensor database cannot be used for con-
figuration of the RoaDyn® sensors.
2. Start catman.
3. In the Prepare new DAQ project dialog (Measure menu of the start window of catman
and Select device type, interface and additional hardware options or via the Options
menu in the start window and Prepare new DAQ project), activate Kistler RoaDyn
among the device types to be found.
4. Close the dialog.
5. Click on New to start a new DAQ project.
6. catman asks after the device search via dialog in which channel the counter signal
(clock signal) is present and in which channel the trigger signal is present. Specify
the channels you are using so that the measurement data can be acquired time-syn-
chronized.
The rest of the configuration and performing a measurement takes place in cat-
man as usual; only the channels transferred from the Kistler system cannot be fur-
ther configured.
See also Configure and check time synchronization services:

The synchronization used in the earlier versions of catman via NTP is no longer sup-
ported.

catman
102 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Information about Kistler RoaDyn®
The RoaDyn® systems are a product of Kistler Group Switzerland, and are available in
various versions for cars, SUVs, trucks, tractors and racing cars. The systems are prefer-
ably used for road tests. The forces acting on the wheels are transferred by telemetry
without contact into the vehicle. The systems consist of the wheel force sensors with inte-
grated 6-component sensors and the wheel electronics as well as the telemetry for power
and data transfer to the inner side of the wheel with the connecting cables to the central
gateway (System 2000/KiRoad). This system then transfers the readings over Ethernet to
catman.
Parameterization must take place using the relevant configuration software of the Kistler
system.

3.2.5 Connecting to MGCplus with on-board recording

If a running recording on the device is found when connecting to an MGCplus, no catman
settings are made. You must explicitly confirm the execution of Sensor scans, because
the measurement may be interrupted by this for up to one second.
The On-Board status button is superimposed on the far left in the status line so that you
can interrogate the status of a running recording to the storage medium connected to the
MGCplus (click on them). The window display is refreshed once every second as long as
an On-Board recording is running on one of the connected devices.
You can stop one or all recordings via this window.

Procedure for configuring a recording

1. Configure the channels as usual.
2. Define the parameters for the recording; see Prepare On-Board recording (MGCplus).
3. Start your measurement; see Start On-Board recording (MGCplus).
4. After the measurement transfer the data from the storage medium to your PC; see
File download.

3.2.6 Synchronizing several devices

If, when starting a new DAQ project catman finds that several synchronizable devices are
possible (the devices are activated in the Prepare new DAQ project dialog), you obtain a
dialog with the query of whether you want to synchronize them or not.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 103
Background information
On connecting several devices there is the problem of how the measurements from the
individual devices can be synchronized. With HBM devices the data of several channels
which are measured within one device are always synchronized. Since, however, with sev-
eral non-synchronized devices the measurements are started consecutively, even with
the same sample rate the actual measurements are not acquired at the same point in
time, nor does the acquisition start at the same point in time for all devices. Con-
sequently, a time offset can arise, which, even with two devices that are consecutive in
the channel list, can amount to over 200 ms. So measurements with unsynchronized
devices (click on No in the dialog) are only practicable for very slow measurements
(sample rate < 1 Hz).

There are different variants depending on your device configuration:

1. You have several devices of the same family, which can be synchronized to each
other directly (homogeneous system).
Use the synchronization mode according to Case 1. The devices then acquire all
measurements absolutely simultaneously.
2. You have devices from different families (hybrid system): QuantumX/SomatXR or
MGCplus and FS22 BraggMETER or a GOM Testing Controller (ARAMIS).
Use the synchronization mode according to Case 2. The devices then do not meas-
ure absolutely simultaneously, but the time correction can be carried out by cat-
man. The remaining difference is less than 1 ms to less than 1 µs, depending on
the synchronization mode used..
3. You have several devices of the same family, but the devices are situated too far
apart from one another to synchronize them via the synchronization cable.
Use the synchronization mode according to Case 3. In the case of Quan-
tumX/SomatXR and MGCplus with CP52 the devices are synchronized correctly as
in case 1. All other devices then do not actually measure absolutely sim-
ultaneously, but a correct time assignment can take place after the measurement
via the figures in the time channels and computations.
4. You are using the System 2000 or KiRoad from Kistler (RoaDyn®) with Quan-
tumX/SomatXR or MGCplus.
When combining HBM devices and Kistler RoaDyn® systems, you have to syn-
chronize the devices using clock signals and triggers; see Connecting with Kistler
KiRoad/RoaDyn systems.

catman
104 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Notes
Not all connectible devices can be synchronized with each other, so some device
combinations (hybrid systems) are not enabled by catman.
The QuantumX MXFS can only be combined with other QuantumX/SomatXR mod-
ules with B or C functionality (case 1).
If the specified type of synchronization does not match that carried out on the
devices, when starting the DAQ job you obtain an error message and the measure-
ment cannot be started.
See also Special features of PMX time channels.

3.2.6.1 Synchronization in case 1: Several devices of the same HBM family,

direct synchronization
In this synchronization mode, the devices are connected by cables. Limitations on cable
length apply: 100 meters for connections by Ethernet cable and the sync cable of
MGCplus with CP42, 5 meters for FireWire. For longer distances, use synchronization as
per case 3.
An advantage of this type of synchronization is that the carrier frequencies of the
carrier-frequency amplifiers in the participating devices are also synchronized.

QuantumX/SomatXR
Connect the modules via the FireWire connections at the back of the modules. The data
can either be acquired similarly via FireWire (interface required on the PC) or via Ethernet.
In the latter case you also need an Ethernet switch to which all modules are connected to
be able to transfer data to the PC or to make settings.
Alternatively, you can also use a gateway (CX22, CX27 or MX471C module) which gathers
all data from the connected (synchronized) modules via FireWire, and transfers them to
the PC via one Ethernet interface cable. With the CX27 module there is also the possibility
of carrying out the synchronization via EtherCAT instead of using an NTP or PTP time
server, if a suitable EtherCAT Leader is available.
To use the MX471C module as a gateway, you need to enable the functionality; see
Use an MX module as a gateway.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 105
MGCplus

MGCplus with CP52

Connect the devices via an Ethernet cable from SYNC OUT of the first device to the SYNC
IN socket of the second device (a Sync follower), etc. You can use commercially available
Ethernet cables (Cat-5 or better) for the purpose.
See Configure and check time synchronization services.

MGCplus with CP42

Connect the devices via the sync cable for MGCplus (round socket). The first device (the
Sync leader) normally does not have a plug in SYNC IN; the cable passes from SYNC OUT
on the first device to the SYNC IN socket on the second device (a Sync follower), and so
on. With cable lengths longer than 15 meters terminating plugs are needed in the first
device (SYNC IN) and in the last device (SYNC OUT). At cable lengths over 100 meters,
you must use the SY42 synchronization plug-ins in all MGCplus devices; see Syn-
chronized measurement. In cases of doubt contact HBM Technical Support.

In both cases:
You also need an Ethernet switch, to which all devices are connected, to be able to trans-
fer data to the PC or to make settings. All other settings (Sync leader/Follower) are made
automatically.
If you are using devices with a very different number of channels, check whether the
device being used as Leader (the first device in the chain) has fewer channels than one of
the Sync follower devices. In such cases, where applicable, use a waiting period before
the start of the measurement. See also Configure and check time synchronization ser-
vices to identify Leader and Follower devices.

Sample rates used by a Sync follower device must also be used by the Sync leader
device in at least one channel.

DMP41, PMX
Connect the devices via the Sync sockets on the devices. Do this by connecting the Sync
Out socket of one device to the Sync In socket of the next one. For this, you can use com-
mercially available Ethernet cables (Cat-5 or better). Here, the first device in the chain
becomes the Sync leader, and the next device operates as a Sync follower, and is in turn
the Sync leader for the next device.
With the DMP1 currently only the carrier frequencies of the participating devices are syn-
chronized, not the measurements themselves.

catman
106 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
FS22 BraggMETERs
FS22 BraggMETERs cannot be synchronized with each other directly. As from firmware
version 2.0 the FS22 BraggMETER SI/DI support NTP time synchronization. Older devices
do not have NTP. Here the PC time (in the NTP format) is used as time stamp on receipt
of the data. Therefore, with this device type ensure that the PC clock contains the exact
(NTP) time.
See Configure and check time synchronization services.

Checking the synchronization

After deciding on the synchronous mode you are asked whether you want to check the
synchronization. You then get a dialog in which the current status of the synchronization
is displayed; see also Configure and check time synchronization services.

3.2.6.2 Synchronization in case 2: different devices (hybrid system)

The QuantumX MXFS can only be combined with other QuantumX/SomatXR mod-
ules with B or C functionality (case 1).

This synchronization mode is applicable if you have one of the following hybrid systems:
(at least one) QuantumX/SomatXR module and (at least one) BraggMETER or a
GOM Testing Controller,
(at least one) MGCplus and (at least one) FS22 BraggMETER or a GOM Testing Con-
troller,
(at least one) QuantumX/SomatXR and (at least one) MGCplus,
(at least one) QuantumX/SomatXR with Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn,
one of these combinations, or one or more devices from one family together with a
GNSS system or a Vaisala Weather Transmitter.
If you are using multiple MGCplus or QuantumX/SomatXR modules, you must syn-
chronize them as in case 1, otherwise only one of the devices will be synchronized
with the others.

The devices can supply themselves with the (same) time via a common time server, and
add these timestamps to the measured values. The deviation of the device clocks from
the NTP time server may in the settled state be less than 1 ms, but this depends on the
Ethernet network you are using, and may also be several milliseconds. The deviation with
IRIG-B is much smaller, and is less than 1 µs. The PTP deviations with Quan-
tumX/SomatXR are less than 1 µs; with the MGCplus with CP52 they are less than 10 µs.
You can add a GNSS system in all combinations; see Use GNSS channels (GPS).

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 107
MGCplus with CP52 and QuantumX/SomatXR modules
For MGCplus with CP52 and the QuantumX modules with B or C functionality, as well as
SomatXR modules you should use synchronization by PTP; see Configure and check time
synchronization services: PTP. Synchronization via NTP is possible, but has much larger
tolerances, and is therefore not recommended.

MGCplus with CP22/42 and QuantumX/SomatXR modules

Synchronizing these two devices types is not easy, and is subject to certain limits. So as
from catman version 4.0 combining MGCplus and QuantumX/SomatXR modules is no
longer recommended. Please contact HBM Technical Support for details of potential com-
bination options.

QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus with GOM Testing Controller

Activate synchronization via NTP for the HBM devices; see Configure and check time syn-
chronization services: NTP. Set the NTP synchronization and NTP time server for the
Testing Controller on the controller. It is not possible via catman.
See also Integrating the ARAMIS system (GOM testing controller), Using ARAMIS chan-
nels (GOM testing controller).

QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus with FS22 BraggMETER

As from firmware 2.0, the FS22 BraggMETERs support synchronization via NTP. In the
case of FS22 BraggMETERs with older firmware, the PC time (in the NTP format) is used
as a time stamp on receipt of the data. So with those devices make sure the PC clock con-
tains the exact (NTP) time.
See also Configure and check time synchronization services: NTP, Configuring FS22
BraggMETER channels.

QuantumX/SomatXR with Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn

With this combination, the synchronization is by hardware. After the dialog-based device
search, by default catman queries the channels containing the Clock signal (counter sig-
nal) and Trigger signal. Otherwise, in the DAQ channels tab choose Additional functions ►
Configure external time synchronization to call up the setting dialog, go to the Syn-
chronization of hybrid systems tab and specify the channels at the bottom of the dialog.
See also Connecting with Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn systems.

catman
108 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
3.2.6.3 Synchronization in case 3: Multiple devices of the same family; syn-
chronization via Sync cable not possible
Use this synchronization mode for larger distances between the devices/modules that
cannot be bridged by cables. If possible, you should use synchronization with PTP or
IRIG-B. Otherwise use NTP.
The deviation of the device clocks from the NTP time server may in the settled state be
less than 1 ms, but this depends on the Ethernet network you are using, and may also be
several milliseconds. The deviation with IRIG-B is usually much smaller, and is about
1 µs. The PTP deviations using the MGCplus with CP52 are less than 10 µs; with Quan-
tumX/SomatXR they are less than 1 µs.

Newer QuantumX modules with B or C functionality, SomatXR modules, and

MGCplus with CP52
For these devices you have the option of synchronizing via PTP. Though you will need a
special (PTPv2-compatible) switch to do so. A PTP time server can be—but does not
have to be—additionally configured in the network. Even without a PTP time server the
devices interchange the times amongst themselves in this mode and synchronize them-
selves to the “best” device (Grandleader Clock).
See Configure and check time synchronization services: PTP.

MX840A/MX840B or MX440A/MX440B (QuantumX/SomatXR)

If you are using only these modules, you can also carry out synchronization using IRIG-B.
In this way catman can find the values from the data stream which have been acquired at
the (where possible) same time point, to store and display them “sorted” into the tem-
porary file. However, if the devices are not connected using a synchronization cable, you
need in this case one IRIG-B receiver per device.
See Configure and check time synchronization services: IRIG-B.

MGCplus with CP42, FS22 BraggMETERs (as from firmware 2.0), and older Quan-
tumX modules
The devices can supply themselves with the same NTP time via a common time server,
and add that time to the measured values. Activate Hardware time channels in the
options of the Prepare DAQ project dialog; see Hardware time channels. With QuantumX
and MGCplus, too, synchronization of the data acquisition occurs as in case 1, except
that the carrier frequency measuring amplifiers are not synchronized.
See Configure and check time synchronization services: NTP.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 109
 For FS22 BraggMETERs, you must configure the NTP time server on the PC on
which you are running catman. All other devices must then also use that time
server.

Older FS22 BraggMETERs

Systems featuring only older FS22 BraggMETERs cannot be synchronized. You can, how-
ever, synchronize them retrospectively at least following a measurement by way of com-
putations based on the time channels contained in the data.

PMX, DMP41
No other option is available for these devices.

3.2.6.4 Configure and check time synchronization services

See Synchronizing several devices regarding the preconditions for time syn-
chronization, Synchronization (DAQ jobs tab, Advanced).

The activation of the time-synchronization services only needs to take place once per
device as the devices retain the details and synchronize themselves appropriately and
automatically. Call the configuration dialog via the DAQ channels tab and the Special
group: Configure external time synchronization.
The Configure and check time synchronization services dialog shows you in the Settings
and status tab which devices are synchronized and how, and whether the status is OK:
The Internal synchronization column contains the Sync leader identifier for the device or
module to which the others synchronize. Sync follower indicates that this device is con-
trolled by the Sync leader. Sync single is shown when the device is not synchronized.
The type of time server used also appears in the External time source column, for
example NTP server: 192.168.100.19) or System clock. The Offset column displays the
value when the dialog is called, if available for the selected time service.
Click on Update status to display the current values or, if the selected synchronization
type is available, to display the deviations of the device clocks over a longer time period
use the Check sync quality tab in order to assess the quality of the synchronization.

Procedure with PTPv2 (only QuantumX modules with B or C functionality,

SomatXR modules and MGCplus with CP52)
You can only use the PTP time in conjunction with special Ethernet switches.

catman
110 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
1. Call the Configure and check time synchronization services dialog via Configure
external time synchronization (Special group on the DAQ channels tab).
2. Mark your devices in the list.
3. Activate PTP in the Reconfigure time sources of selected devices area and specify
the settings for the protocol if you are using a special PTP time server. Otherwise,
use the settings Auto and UDP IPv4. The setting for Domain is only relevant if you
are using multiple PTP time servers. You can then select the time server to be used
by stating the domain. Otherwise, leave the setting on 0 (first or no special time
server).
With hybrid systems, you can test the quality of the synchronization and block a mea-
surement from starting, and also from continuing: Always check sync quality before
DAQ start. The maximum time deviation is then 10 µs for QuantumX/SomatXR and
50 µs for MGCplus with CP52.
4. Click on Activate settings.
The setting is transferred to the device(s) and the synchronization process is star-
ted. The modules synchronize automatically, and in systems with no external PTP
time server the leader is also negotiated automatically. The deviations in module
times with this method are less than 1 µs (MGCplus with CP52: 10 µs), and no wait
time is necessary after switching on. The maximum distance between devices is
100 m for a connection via Ethernet cable.

Procedure with NTP

You must carry out the following settings so that the NTP time channels are activated
and recorded:
1. Install a time server which makes the NTP time available. You can do this either
when installing catman or later. Alternatively, you can also use a GNSS device that
transmits the times to the PC and then synchronize to the time in the PC.
See also Installation, http://www.meinberg.de, Synchronization in case 2: different
devices (hybrid system) and Knowledge Base (via Help ► Knowledge Base at the top
right of the program interface), section headed "Using NTP synchronization for
hybrid systems including a GPS".
2. In the Prepare new DAQ project dialog activate the relevant devices.
3. On the Hardware time channels tab activate Create hardware time channels.
4. Establish connection to your device(s) (menu Measure, New in the start window of
catman).

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 111
5. If the dialog with the synchronization settings is not automatically offered, call it up
with Configure external time synchronization (Special group in the DAQ channels
tab).
6. Mark your devices in the list, activate NTP and specify the IP address of the time
server (Server address) in the Reconfigure time sources of selected devices panel.
For the GOM Testing Controller, the time server's IP address can only be set on
the Testing Controller itself.
An NTP time server must be able to be reached at the specified address, otherwise
you will always be receiving the error message that the NTP client could not be
started.
With FS22 BraggMETERs you can activate Use ntp.conf file to improve the settling
response. (As from firmware version 2.0 the FS22 BraggMETER SI/DI support NTP
time synchronization.) With older FS22 BraggMETERs the PC time (in the NTP
format) is used as time stamp on receipt of the data. Therefore, with this device
type ensure that the PC clock contains the exact (NTP) time.
7. If you have connected devices of different types, you must specify on the Syn-
chronization of hybrid systems tab which channels are to be used as reference for
the search according to the same time stamps with the data from the other devices.
If you are using MGCplus devices and QuantumX/SomatXR or MGCplus and FS22
BraggMETERs, you have to use one (any) MGCplus for the Leader channels. With a
combination of QuantumX/SomatXR with FS22 BraggMETER specify the appro-
priate channels of one (any) MX module in the list.
With hybrid systems, you can test the quality of the synchronization and block a
measurement from starting, and also from continuing: Always check sync quality
before DAQ start. The maximum time deviation is then 5 ms for MGCplus, Quan-
tumX/SomatXRand PMX, and 10 ms for FS22 BraggMETERs.
If the other devices acquire their measured values with a delay relative to the
device with the NTP leader channels, you can set an output delay for the leader
device. The “current” measurements are then delayed by this time period so that
catman can correctly assign the measurements of the participating devices in the
input buffers. If the time difference is too large, the values of one device are no
longer in the input buffer, whereas the values of the other have not yet even been
read.
If you know the time delay between the time generator and the Leader device and it

catman
112 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 is constant, you can correct it using the entry for Manual synchronization cor-
rection.
8. Click on Activate settings.
The address of the NTP time server is transferred to the devices and the syn-
chronization process is started.
9. After the first configuration wait approx. one to two hours before a measurement
until the devices have reached the settled state.
Check the deviations either via Update status or via the Check sync quality tab
in the same dialog.
The deviation of the device clocks from the NTP time server in the steady state is nor-
mally less than 1 ms, but this depends on the Ethernet network used.
To use actual exact times of day the NTP time server must for its part be synchronized,
for example via an Internet connection, to an external (exact) time server. This is not
necessary for the synchronization function, however, because in it only all devices
involved in the measurement need to have the same time.

Note
After switching on the PC with the time server wait several minutes until the NTP
time server on the PC has itself settled before connecting to the devices via
catman. As long as the time server is not yet settled, the devices cannot syn-
chronize to it.
Also, wait about 5 minutes before starting a measurement so that the devices are
readjusted to the time server.
The maximum sample rate with synchronization using NTP is 2400 Hz. Faster
sample rates are not practicable due to the tolerances on the time stamp.
With multiple devices or QuantumX/SomatXR modules make sure that at least the
NTP time channels are active, the sample rate of which is used in the relevant mod-
ule or device.
In combination with MGCplus and the NTP Leader channels, for each sample rate
actually being used in the other devices, you must also use this sample rate on at
least one channel per MGCplus.
In systems with FS22 BraggMETERs, the NTP time server for all devices must be loc-
ated on the same PC on which catman is also running.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 113
 NTP time channels do not show local time, but rather UTC time (derived from
Coordinated Universal Time, corresponding to Greenwich Mean Time or London
time).
The time format is NTP-Unix (from 1.1.1970).

Synchronization for QuantumX/SomatXR and Kistler RoaDyn® (System

2000/KiRoad)
For the synchronous measurement operation of the wheel force sensors from Kistler and
the HBM devices you must use the clock signal on the HBM device and acquire the trig-
ger channel of the System 2000 or KiRoad.
Configure an ML60 as a counter for the clock signal on the MGCplus. With Quan-
tumX/SomatXR you need either an MX840, an MX440 or an MX460 module on which you
have to configure one input as a counter. Any 10 V input (DC) will suffice for the trigger
channel.
If not already done at the start of the DAQ project, you can also specify these channels in
the Configure and check time synchronization services dialog:
1. Call the dialog via Configure external time synchronization (Special group on the
DAQ channels tab).
2. Go to the Synchronization of hybrid systems tab.
3. Activate Synchronize devices via trigger and clock line.
4. Specify the appropriate channels at Trigger signal and Clock signal.

Procedure with IRIG-B (only QuantumX/SomatXR MX840A/MX840B and

MX440A/MX440B)
1. In the Prepare new DAQ project dialog on the Hardware time channels tab (Options)
activate the setting Create hardware time channels.
2. Establish connection to your device(s) (menu Measure, New in the start window of
catman).
3. Call the Configure and check time synchronization services dialog via Configure
external time synchronization (Special group on the DAQ channels tab).
4. Mark your devices in the list.
5. Activate IRIG-B in the Reconfigure time sources of selected devices area.
6. Specify the current year, if this information is not transferred with your IRIG-B
format.
7. Specify the difference of your time zone from the UTC time zone (derived from
Coordinated Universal Time, corresponding to Greenwich Mean Time or London

catman
114 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 time), if you want to use local time. Also take into account any difference due to sum-
mer time.
8. If you know the time delay between the IRIG-B time generator and your device and it
is constant, you can correct it using the entry for Time shift.
9. Click on Activate settings.
The setting is transferred to the device(s).
10. Assign the IRIG-B sensor to the channel to which the IRIG time source is connected.
The deviations in module times with this method are less than 1 µs and no wait
time is necessary after switching on.

Procedure with EtherCAT (only for QuantumX CX27)

The MX modules must be connected to the CX27 module(s) and these must be con-
nected to the EtherCAT network with time server (EtherCAT Distributed Clock).

1. Call the Configure and check time synchronization services dialog via Configure
external time synchronization (Special group on the DAQ channels tab).
2. Mark the CX27 module(s) in the list.
3. Activate EtherCAT in the Reconfigure time sources of selected devices area.
4. Click on Activate settings.
The setting is transferred to the devices and the synchronization process is star-
ted. After the first configuration settling may be prolonged so therefore allow the
devices sufficient time.

The time format is NTP-ECAT (EtherCAT, from 1.1.2000).

Background information about NTP synchronization

Devices for which NTP synchronization is activated interrogate the time server approx-
imately every 16 seconds and correct their own time as necessary. The times required for
the transmission of the message are appropriately taken into account by the time server
and corrected. Provided these times do not vary too much a deviation from the actual
time can be obtained which is significantly less than 1 ms. The NTP time synchronization
can therefore be used up to sample rates of 600 Hz, but deviations must be expected
above this.
After activation of the NTP synchronization each read block with measurements also con-
tains the corresponding NTP time stamp. In combination with MGCplus and Quan-
tumX/SomatXR the values are first saved by the device drivers in buffers and then
compared to find out which time stamp for the values of a device has the best possible
match with that of the NTP Leader channel.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 115
3.2.7 Check/update firmware
See also Program options: Options for safety.

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

Some functions are only executed correctly if the connected devices have the latest firm-
ware. When establishing the device connection, the firmware version of a Quan-
tumX/SomatXR, PMX, MGCplus or FS22 BraggMETER is checked and you receive, as
applicable, a warning notice or a message that catman cannot operate with this device. If
you would like to see which firmware version is used in your device and which is at least
recommended, use the menu Check firmware in the Special group (DAQ channels tab).

QuantumX
The communication with the QuantumX modules has been completely changed as
from catman 3.5, because the current firmware versions (as of 4.0) offer a whole
range of new possibilities: Improved transmission of the measurements; faster
scanning; and, in conjunction with current modules with B or C functionality, also
new time channel variants (PTP), new sample rates (decimal stepping) and more.
From catman 3.5 the SomatXR modules are also supported, which likewise use firm-
ware 4.0 or higher.

Modules with firmware 4.0 or higher

With these modules you can start the updating directly from the dialog with the display of
the firmware version. The current firmware is already selected at the bottom of the dialog.
Mark the module(s) to be updated and click on Update firmware.
See also Update MX firmware for the procedure.

Modules with firmware older than 4.0

For updating older modules you need the appropriate firmware file. Depending on the
existing firmware, you may also have to download the program „QuantumXFirmware
Updater” and perform the update in several steps. Contact HBM Technical Support about
this.

MGCplus
For MGCplus you can display the firmware version of the CP module, but not of the indi-
vidual plug-in modules. For MGCplus with CP52 you can update the firmware of the CP
module using the HBM Device Manager; see Updating firmware for MGCplus with CP52.

catman
116 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
For the modules and for CP22/42 you have to install the appropriate program for updat-
ing the firmware separately (MGCpLoad). You can download both the latest firmware and
the update program from the HBM website: https://www.hbm.com/software-firmware-
downloads-mgcplus.

PMX
Use the HBM Device Manager for the update; see Updating PMX firmware.

FS22 BraggMETER
For these devices you can only display the firmware version; an automatic update is not
currently possible.

DMP41, Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn, GOM Testing Controller

The option is not available for these devices.

3.2.8 No device found?

If no device is found when establishing the device connection, there are a number of pos-
sible causes. Check the following points and then repeat the search.

General reasons
Is the device really switched on (device LED)?
Is the interface cable connected?
Have you activated the correct interface or the correct interface adapter?

You are using the Ethernet interface

Are you using the correct Ethernet cable?
Use an Ethernet switch with standard cable or a direct connection with crossover
cable.
Is your Ethernet switch operating correctly?
If you have no other devices operating on the switch with which you could check
the function, try to establish a direct connection between the PC and the measure-
ment device.
Have you waited long enough for the PC to define its address?
If the PC cannot find a server in the network, with the DHCP settings on the PC
Obtain IP address automatically or the Alternative configuration (user-defined
address) a server is searched on the network (the symbol for the interface in the

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 117
 Windows tray indicates the search, but the symbol might only appear if the dis-
play is configured). It then takes about 20 to 30 seconds before an automatic
address (for DHCP and APIPA) or the stated alternative address is set. During this
time, a scan cannot find anything either.
Is it possible that your firewall is blocking the connection?
Try deactivating your firewall or open the following ports:
QuantumX/SomatXR: TCP ports 80, 5001 and 7411, UDP for ports 1200, 1201,
UDP-Multicast for ports 1300, 1301, 31 416 and 31 417, for the CX27 the TCP
ports as from 50 000,
MGCplus with CP22/42: TCP port 7 (no UDP or multicast present),
MGCplus with CP52: TCP ports 7 and 80, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and
31 417,
DMP41: TCP port 1234, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31 417,
PMX: TCP port 55 000, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31 417,
FS22 BraggMETER: TCP ports 3500 and 3365,
Kistler System 2000: UDP for ports 8888 and 8889,
Kistler KiRoad: TCP ports 6155 and 6158, UDP for port 6156.
Is it possible that your antivirus program is blocking the connection?
Try deactivating your antivirus protection to locate the cause. If the device is then
found, refer to the documentation of your virus protection program to find out
how to enable access to the network (local subnet) for individual programs. You
must open the same ports as those described under the firewall.
QuantumX/SomatXR:
Do you have older modules that still use a firmware version earlier than 4.0?
Contact HBM Technical Support to update.
Do all the modules connected via a QuantumX gateway module have the latest
firmware?
Have you enabled the gateway functionality when using the MX471C as a gate-
way?
See Using the HBM Device Manager.
If a WLAN is also active with your PC, test whether the device is found when you
temporarily switch off the WLAN (only for the time of the scan). With some WLAN
configurations, problems can occur during a scan across all interfaces.
If your PC has several Ethernet interfaces, try deactivating all other Ethernet inter-
faces.

catman
118 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 If you are using the device in a large network, contact your network administrator.
There are a series of options in managed networks to limit or completely prevent
data transmission between the individual nodes. Administrative access control set-
tings may therefore be needed here.

You are using the FireWire interface (QuantumX/SomatXR)

Have you installed the HBM FireWire driver?
See also Notes on the FireWire interface (includes installation instructions).
Is the IP-over-FireWire 24 interface adapter available?
Check this in the Windows Control Panel ► Network and Sharing Center ► Change
adapter settings.
See also Notes on the FireWire interface, procedure for the (retrospective) install-
ation of the drivers.
Is the driver also activated?
The software, Thesycon T1394bus Setup Wizard (t1394bus_installwizard.exe),
must indicate that the HBM driver is being used for the adapter to which the MX
modules are connected.
See also Notes on the FireWire interface.

Possible cases and their effects on the connection over Ethernet

With a connection between the PC and the instrument the following cases may arise:
1. No server in the network, the PC has no fixed address (DHCP is used), and the mea-
suring instrument (QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus with CP52, DMP41, PMX) is like-
wise set to DHCP (factory default).
When using Windows 7 and higher, temporary addresses are automatically
assigned by the PC (APIPA); the connection can be established.
2. No server in the network, PC has no setting or is using DHCP, measuring instruments
(QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus, DMP41, PMX) have a fixed address
No connection can be established with this combination.
3. No server in the network, PC has a fixed address or is using DHCP, measuring instru-
ments (QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus, DMP41, PMX) have a fixed address
A connection can normally only be established if the addresses of the PC and the
measuring instrument are in the same network segment.
4. DHCP server in the network, the PC and measuring instrument (QuantumX/SomatXR,
MGCplus with CP52, DMP41, PMX) use DHCP.
The connection can be established.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 119
 For MGCplus with CP22 or CP42 you must always set an address on the device.
These CP modules do not have DHCP functionality. Use the AB22 or the MGCplus
Assistant to set the address.

3.3 Prepare DAQ project without device

You can prepare a DAQ project with QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus, PMX, FS22 Bragg-
METER, Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn®, GNSS or Vaisala systems. The DMP41 is not supported
by this mode. With QuantumX/SomatXR and Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn® systems, you have
a choice of two variants:
1. Create a complete DAQ project in catman without connected devices.
The DAQ project can include all information about devices, channels and sensors,
the DAQ jobs and the visualization. For the measurement open this DAQ project,
check the initialization and start the measurement.
2. Create an Excel parameter file.
The file contains all the information about devices, channels and sensors as well
as sample rate(s). DAQ jobs and visualization are not however included. For the
measurement you open this file which is then compiled into a DAQ project by cat-
man.

Notes
Channels that are available in the measuring device but not defined in the signal
plan will not be displayed later when the project is opened with the devices con-
nected. You can therefore hide unnecessary channels from the outset, i.e. it’s not
necessary to deactivate them in the DAQ job.
The settings for QuantumX and SomatXR differ in the connection views you get
when you assign a sensor and open the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram con-
text menu.

3.3.1 Prepare complete DAQ project

The QuantumX/SomatXR MX878, MX879 and MXFS modules are not supported.

catman
120 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Procedure
1. Click on Measure and Offline in the start window of catman.
2. Use the Signal plan tab with New device (Channel group) to specify which Device
type is connected in the subsequent test
You can correct the address of the TCP/IP interface (Ethernet) when you open the
project, but you must first enter an address (any).
3. Also set the Module type, if necessary for your device.
4. Depending on the device, you can Create time channels and/or Create hardware time
channels.
5. Repeat the actions if you have connected multiple devices or modules.
6. For some devices, selection of the module type also determines the number of chan-
nels. Otherwise, you can Automatically create channels to this device, provided your
configuration is listed in the selection box. If not, choose New channel (Channel
group) to specify which plug-in modules are available.
If there is more than one device, first mark the device or a channel already spe-
cified before calling the dialog in order that the channel is inserted for the correct
device. The channels will be sorted automatically by means of their slot or channel
number.
With the CX27 module, a QuantumX/SomatXR module with C functionality (e.g.
MX471C) or a CX22B configured as a router, use the New MX module menu item to
create the modules connected to this module.
For multi-channel modules either the maximum number of sub-channels is cre-
ated or a dialog enables you to specify the number of sub-channels to create.
Use Delete (Channel group) to remove the channels not required.
7. If you are not using a transducer with TEDS, assign the connected sensors (trans-
ducers) to the channels: Using the Signal plan tab, find your sensors in the Sensor
database component window and drag and drop each sensor onto the channel to
which it will be connected.
For sensors with TEDS activate the option After loading a DAQ project: Execute
sensor scan; see Program options: Sensors.
8. Assign unique channel names.
From the Rename context menu you can create channel names with consecutive
numeration or accept the sensor description.
Each channel is identified by its name in catman, therefore as far as possible
use meaningful names.
See also Use sensor description as channel name.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 121
9. Save the DAQ project (menu File ► Save ► Project).

Optional settings
Specify Real-time computations (Computation channels).
Specify Limit values.
Configure your DAQ jobs.
Create Visualizations.

Note
When preparing a DAQ project, you can also open an existing project and modify it.
Double-click on a device in the list Signal plan tab to open the configuration dialog
and then, for example, modify the TCP/IP address.
You can also import channel names (and sensor types) from an Excel file in this
mode, as in a DAQ project with connected devices.
The information (columns) to be displayed can be changed via the menu File►
Options and Channel list (Channels and sensors group).
You do not need to enter a port number for QuantumX/SomatXR and MGCplus, the
default values for MGCplus (7) and QuantumX/SomatXR (5001) are used auto-
matically.

3.3.2 Create DAQ project from Excel parametrization file

This function is only available for QuantumX/SomatXR modules, GPS modules
(GNSS) and RoaDyn® wheel load sensors (System 2000 or KiRoad) from Kistler.
If you are using XLS files (Excel 97-2003 workbook), Excel is not required on the PC
for this. When using XLSX files, Excel must be installed on the PC.

With this function you can read in the configuration of the devices (interface, address)
and channels (name, sensor, sample rate, filter) from an Excel file. In contrast to creating
a DAQ project in offline mode, however, you cannot configure DAQ jobs or visualizations
here.
Generally, you should assign the sensors through the entry in the Sensor database,
but you can also directly define sensors and CAN signals (type of circuit, supply
voltage, scaling, etc.).

The Excel workbook consists of at least three worksheets which are described below.
Other worksheets (or columns on the required worksheets) are possible—see templates.

catman
122 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
The worksheets are defined by the names and the columns of the worksheets by the
column titles. The column titles must always be located in row 1, the column sequence
does not matter. Worksheets with different names are ignored by catman. Similarly, cap-
italization does not play any role. Usually the cell contents are written in plain text, but
with some parameters, e.g. the transducer circuit, codes are used (353 for full bridge
strain gage, for example). Such cells can however include any further text following the
number, for example the addition strain gage full bridge (353 strain gage full bridge).
In the installation folder of catman you will find in the subfolder “Excel para-
meterization” templates and examples for Excel parametrization files.

Make sure that all cells which only contain numbers are also formatted so that all
figures are displayed. In the Excel default setting leading zeros are suppressed and
the point in an IP address is interpreted as the decimal separator. Enter, for
example, an ' (apostrophe) before a number to format the cell as text.

Structure of the Excel workbooks

Devices worksheet
Channels worksheet
SampleRateGroups worksheet
In addition to the minimum required worksheets described here, others are optionally
available:
Files for paths and files
JobParameters for job and test parameters
Events for limit value and event monitoring

Restrictions
The Table and Polynomial sensor scalings can only be used through the assign-
ment of a sensor from the Sensor database and an entry in the Excel worksheet is
not possible.
The MX878 and MX879 modules are not supported.

3.3.2.1 Devices worksheet

You enter the device name(s), the device and module type and the addresses into the
devices worksheet. If there are modules connected via a CX27 module or if CAN con-
nectors are being used, further columns are possible.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 123
 Column name Description
Name of the device. As far as possible, catman transfers the
Name
name into the module and it is displayed in catman.

Currently only the texts QUANTUMX, GPS, KIROAD or

Type
ROADYN are permissible.

Contains the QuantumX/SomatXR module type or ROADYN,

KIROAD or GPS as text.
Permissible entries: MX238, MX410, MX411, MX430, MX440,
MX840, MX840, MX809, MX1601, MX1609, MX1615, MX1616,
MX471, CX27, GPS for GNSS modules and KIROAD for the
KiRoad or ROADYN for the RoaDyn® systems from Kistler—
Module
see also Connecting with Kistler KiRoad/RoaDyn systems.
For modules with A, B or C functionality, specify the cor-
responding type, i.e. MX840 or MX840A or MX840B.
However, no distinction is made between A and B type mod-
ules; what is important is the difference between modules
without identifiers, the A/B types and the C types.

Here, this may be an IP address or the UUID (serial number)

of the module. With a UUID (which clearly differs from an IP
address) a FireWire connection is assumed. catman auto-
Address
matically determines in this case the associated IP-over-
FireWire address from the UUID. Specify the COM port or IP
address and port of an Ethernet-capable GNSS module.

Address of a CX27 module if the module is connected to a

CX27 module using FireWire and the communication takes
CX27HostAddress
place through it. The CX27 module must also appear in this
list!

catman
124 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 Column name Description
Bit rate for CAN Connector 1 in bits/s. Only permitted for
MX471 and MX840.
Possible bit rates for MX471: 1.000.000, 800.000, 666.666,
CAN Baudrate1 500.000, 400.000, 250.000, 125.000, 100.000, 50.000, 20.000
and 10.000 bit/s.
Possible bit rates for MX840: 1.000.000, 800.000, 666.666,
500.000, 400.000, 250.000, 125.000 and 100.000 bit/s.

Bit rate for CAN Connector 2 in bits/s. Only admissible for

CAN Baudrate2
MX471.

Bit rate for CAN Connector 3 in bits/s. Only admissible for

CAN Baudrate3
MX471.

Bit rate for CAN Connector 4 in bits/s. Only admissible for

CAN Baudrate4
MX471.

CAN Sample@ CAN Classic sample point ratio in percent from 0 to 100 for
PointRatio1 MX471 and MX471C, CAN slot 1.

CAN Sample@ CAN Classic sample point ratio for MX471 and MX471C, CAN
PointRatio2 slot 2.

CAN Sample@ CAN Classic sample point ratio for MX471 and MX471C, CAN
PointRatio3 slot 3.

CAN Sample@ CAN Classic sample point ratio for MX471 and MX471C, CAN
PointRatio4 slot 4.

CAN Sync@ CAN Classic synchronization jump width for MX471 and
JumpWidth1 MX471C, CAN slot 1.

CAN Sync@ CAN Classic synchronization jump width for MX471 and
JumpWidth2 MX471C, CAN slot 2.

CAN Sync@ CAN Classic synchronization jump width for MX471 and
JumpWidth3 MX471C, CAN slot 3.

CAN Sync@ CAN Classic synchronization jump width for MX471 and
JumpWidth4 MX471C, CAN slot 4.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 125
 Column name Description
Listen-Only mode for MX471 and MX471C CAN slot 1. In
Listen-Only mode, MX471 and MX471C do not send Acknow-
CAN ListenOnly1 ledge packets; only data from the CAN bus is received.
0 or omitted = Listen-Only mode inactive
1 = Listen-Only mode active

CAN ListenOnly2 Listen-Only mode for MX471 and MX471C CAN slot 2.

CAN ListenOnly3 Listen-Only mode for MX471 and MX471C CAN slot 3.

CAN ListenOnly4 Listen-Only mode for MX471 and MX471C CAN slot 4.

Connect terminating resistor for MX471, MX471C or MX840A

CAN slot 1.
CAN Termination1
0 or omitted = do not connect terminating resistor
1 = Connect terminating resistor

Connect terminating resistor for MX471 and MX471C CAN

CAN Termination2
slot 2.

Connect terminating resistor for MX471 and MX471C CAN

CAN Termination3
slot 3.

Connect terminating resistor for MX471 and MX471C CAN

CAN Termination4
slot 4.

COM BaudRate Baud rate for the serial port for a GNSS module.

Number of data bits (7 or 8) for the serial port for a GNSS

COM DataBits
module.

Number of stop bits (1 or 2) for the serial port for a GNSS

COM StopBits
module.

Parity (0 = none, 1 = odd or 2 = even) for the serial port for a

COM Parity
GNSS module.

@ denotes the compound spelling of the term, which is separated in the table for space reas-
ons, e.g. SamplePointRatio.

catman
126 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Example 1

Name Type Module Address

MX840_1 QUANTUMX MX840 192.168.1.10

MX840_2 QUANTUMX MX840 192.168.1.11

Example 2

CX27Host
Name Type Module Address
Address
CX27_Test QUANTUMX CX27 192.168.0.1

MX840_Test QUANTUMX MX840A 0009E5000A01 192.168.0.1

MX410_Test QUANTUMX MX410 0009E5000A02 192.168.0.1

Example 3

MX471 192.168.1.12 10000 10000 50000 50000

MX840B 192.168.1.14 100000

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 127
3.3.2.2 SampleRateGroups worksheet
The SampleRateGroups worksheet contains the sample rates of the three sample rate
groups. In addition you have to specify the filter setting which is to be used for the chan-
nels with this sample rate group.

Column name Description

Sample rate group.
SamplerateGroup
Permissible entries: Default, Slow or Fast.

Samplerate Sample rate in Hz. The suffix Hz is optional.

Frequency in Hz for a low-pass filter applied to all channels of

the group.
Specify the filter characteristic by a prefixed BU or BE, e.g. BU
2000. If the prefix is omitted, Bessel is used. If AUTO is spe-
Filterfrequency
cified, or no specification is made, catman automatically deter-
mines the frequency matching the sample rate.
You can overwrite the setting in the Channels worksheet for
each channel separately.

Example

SamplerateGroup Samplerate Filterfrequency

Default 100 Auto

Slow 10 Auto

Fast 1200 Hz 100 Hz

3.3.2.3 Channels worksheet

The channels worksheet contains most of the details, because the assignment of the
channels and sensors occurs here. You can either specify Name/description or Sensor ID
from the Sensor database or enter the sensor data directly (not possible in the interactive
mode).

catman
128 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 Column name Description
Name Channel name (maximum 64 characters).

Comment Channel comment (no limit).

Name of the device (as given in the Devices worksheet) to

Device
which the channel belongs.

Sample rate group.

SamplerateGroup
Permissible entries: Default, Slow or Fast.

Module connector (channel), the first connector has the

value 1.
Permissible entries:
MX238: 1 … 2
Connector MX410, MX411, MX430, MX440, MX471: 1 … 4
MX809, MX840: 1 …8
MX1601, MX1609, MX1615, MX1616: 1 … 16
The signal numbers for a GNSS device are predefined and
fixed; see Table of GNSS signals.

Only for MX840 (port 1) and MX471: Number of the sub-

Subchannel channel.
Permissible entries: 1 … 128.

Trigger signal for synchronization between the Kistler

RoaDyn® system and QuantumX/SomatXR module.
TriggerSignal
0 or omit: no specification
1: Use current channel as trigger signal

Clock signal for synchronization between the Kistler

RoaDyn® system and QuantumX/SomatXR module.
ClockSignal
0 or omit: no specification
1: Use current channel as clock signal

Sensor ID from the Sensor database. If the value is spe-

cified, catman accepts the data from the Sensor database.
SensorID The columns Transducer through to Bridgefactor must not
in this case be occupied, otherwise the setting from the
Sensor database will be overwritten.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 129
 Column name Description
Sensor name (Name/Description) from the Sensor data-
base. If the value is specified, catman accepts the data
from the Sensor database. The columns Transducer
SensorName
through to Bridgefactor must not in this case be occupied,
otherwise the setting from the Sensor database will be
overwritten.

ID (code number) of the circuit type (see table of trans-

Transducer ducer circuits). Any further text can follow the number, for
example 353 Strain gage full bridge.

First characteristic point (electrical) in the basic unit of the

X1
amplifier, e.g. mV/V (depends on type of circuit).

Second characteristic point (electrical) in the basic unit of

X2
the amplifier, e.g. mV/V (depends on type of circuit).

First characteristic point (physical) in the unit measured by

Y1
the sensor (engineering unit).

Second characteristic point (physical) in the unit measured

Y2
by the sensor (engineering unit).

End of measurement range (nominal value) of the sensor in

the unit measured by the sensor. If this column is omitted
RangeMax
during an individual parameterization via X1 … Y2, then Y2
is used as the maximum value.

Start of measurement range (minimum value) of the sensor

in the unit measured by the sensor. If this column is omit-
RangeMin
ted during an individual parameterization via X1 … Y2, then
-Y2 is used as the minimum value (symmetrical range).

Physical unit (engineering unit) of the channel as text (max-

Unit
imum 12 characters).

Excitation voltage in volts. For transducers, which do not

Excitation use a bridge circuit, e.g. with the DC voltage 10 V type, the
figure is used as active excitation.

catman
130 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 Column name Description
Carrier frequency of the excitation voltage in Hz.
Permissible entries:
0 = DC
AUTO = The module automatically selects the best pos-
sible setting.
AUTO AC: The module automatically selects the best pos-
ExcitationFrequency
sible setting, but it must be the carrier frequency.
500 = 500 Hz carrier frequency
600 = 600 Hz carrier frequency
1200 = 1.2 kHz carrier frequency
2000 = 2 kHz carrier frequency
4800 = 4.8 kHz carrier frequency

Gage factor Gage factor (only needed for strain gages)

Bridge factor (only needed for strain gages in half or full

Bridge factor
bridge circuit)

Frequency in Hz for a low-pass filter. Specify the filter char-

acteristic by a prefixed BU or BE, e.g. BU 2000. If the prefix
is omitted, Bessel is used. On specifying AUTO, catman
Filters automatically determines the frequency suitable for the
sample rate; see Program options: DAQ channels.
The entry overwrites any existing setting for the sample
rate group in the Sample rate worksheet.

DisplayFormat Format for numerical displays, e.g. "0.000".

Display color in catman, e.g. in a graph. Use the back-

DisplayColor
ground color of the cell to determine the display color.

0 = Zeroing allowed
ZeroLock
1 = Zeroing locked

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 131
 Column name Description
Only for QuantumX/SomatXR modules: Activation or deac-
tivation of Autocalibration.
AutoCal 0 or omit: Do not use Autocalibration (turn off)
1: Automatic setting by the module (best method for
sensor type and measuring range)

First monitoring condition for a channel. A channel can

LV1
monitor up to three event conditions simultaneously.

LV2 Second monitoring condition for a channel.

LV3 Third monitoring condition for a channel.

Columns for CAN signals

For describing CAN messages and signals there are further columns, the setting of which
is described in the following table. The columns are only evaluated when the sensor
(Transducer column) is of type 100 (CAN).

Column name Description

CAN_Id CAN message ID

0 = Standard 11 bit ID
CAN_FrameFormat
1 = Extended 29 bit ID

0 = Motorola
CAN_ByteOrder
1 = Intel

CAN_ByteCount Number of data bytes (1 ... 8)

0 = Unsigned Integer 32 bit

1 = Signed Integer 32 bit
2 = Unsigned Integer 64 bit
CAN_RawValueFormat
3 = Signed Integer 64 bit
4 = Real 32 bit
5 = Real 64 bit

0 = Standard signal
CAN_SigType 1 = Mode signal
2 = Mode-dependent signal

catman
132 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 Column name Description
CAN_StartBit 0 … 63

CAN_BitCount 1 … 32

CAN_ScaleFac Scale factor

CAN_Offset Offset

CAN_MinVal Minimum value (not evaluated by HBM systems).

CAN_MaxVal Maximum value (not evaluated by HBM systems).

CAN_Unit Engineering unit

CAN_ModeSig Reserved

0 = Motorola Forward MSB

CAN_ModeByteOrder
1 = Intel

CAN_ModeMode Reserved

CAN Classic: 0 … 63
CAN_ModeStartBit
CAN FD: 64 …511

CAN Classic: 1 …64

CAN_ModeBitCount
CAN FD: 65 …512

CAN_BufferValue Reserved. Output format with QuantumX/SomatXR is

Format always 64 bit double precision.

Monitoring of the signal transmission interval in mil-

CAN_MaxRepTime
liseconds. Use 0 for no monitoring.

Table of transducer circuits (IDs for Transducer column)

ID TYP
100 CAN (only for CAN channels of MX471, MX840 and MX840A)

353 Strain gage transducer, full bridge

354 Strain gage transducer, half bridge

Strain gage circuit, full bridge 120 ohms (figures for gage factor and bridge
362
factor needed)

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 133
 ID TYP
Strain gage circuit, full bridge 350 ohms (figures for gage factor and bridge
363
factor needed)

Strain gage circuit, full bridge 700 ohms (figures for gage factor and bridge
364
factor needed)

Strain gage circuit, half bridge 120 ohms (figures for gage factor and bridge
365
factor needed)

Strain gage circuit, half bridge 350 ohms (figures for gage factor and bridge
366
factor needed)

Strain gage circuit, half bridge 700 ohms (figures for gage factor and bridge
367
factor needed)

Strain gage circuit, quarter bridge 4-wire 120 ohms (figure for gage factor
368
needed)

Strain gage circuit, quarter bridge 4-wire 350 ohms (figure for gage factor
369
needed)

Strain gage circuit, quarter bridge 4-wire 700 ohms (figure for gage factor
370
needed)

Strain gage circuit, quarter bridge 3-wire 120 ohms (figure for gage factor
371
needed)

Strain gage circuit, quarter bridge 3-wire 350 ohms (figure for gage factor
372
needed)

Strain gage circuit, quarter bridge 3-wire 700 ohms (figure for gage factor
373
needed)

Strain gage circuit, quarter bridge 4-wire 1000 ohms (figure for gage factor
376
needed)

380 LVDT

385 Potentiometer

420 DC voltage

catman
134 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 ID TYP
421 DC current

450 Thermocouple Type J

451 Thermocouple Type K

452 Thermocouple Type T

453 Thermocouple Type S

454 Thermocouple Type B

455 Thermocouple Type E

456 Thermocouple Type R

457 Thermocouple Type N

475 Resistance

500 Pt10

501 Pt100

502 Pt500

503 Pt1000

520 Frequency F1

521 Frequency F1 + F2 signal

523 Frequency 4 times

524 Time

525 Counter

581 IEPE

Table of GNSS signals (NMEA-compatible)

SLOT SIGNAL
1 Latitude

2 Longitude

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 135
SLOT SIGNAL
3 Altitude

4 Speed over ground

5 Time

6 Date

7 Satellite status

8 Number of satellites (used)

10 Satellites

11 Magnetic heading

12 True heading

14 Wind direction

15 Wind speed

27 EGPS-200-plus RTK Yaw

28 EGPS-200-plus RTK Pitch/Roll

29 EGPS-200-plus Acceleration x

30 EGPS-200-plus Acceleration y

31 EGPS-200-plus Acceleration z

32 EGPS-200-plus IMU Pitch Rate

33 EGPS-200-plus IMU Roll Rate

34 EGPS-200-plus IMU Yaw Rate

35 EGPS-200-plus 2D Speed

36 EGPS-200-plus 3D Speed

37 EGPS-200-plus RTK Baseline

38 EGPS-200-plus RTK Accuracy

39 EGPS-200-plus Heading

catman
136 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
 SLOT SIGNAL
40 EGPS-200-plus Gradient

41 EGPS-200-plus Speed Accuracy

42 EGPS-200-plus Position Accuracy

43 EGPS-200-plus Heading Accuracy

3.4 Open DAQ project

On opening an existing DAQ project in the menu Measure you have three options which
you can select via the file type in the file dialog:
1. catman DAQ projects: Open project file (default).
2. Open Excel parametrization file (only possible for QuantumX/SomatXR).
See also Create DAQ project from Excel parameter file.
3. Open backup copy.
Whether a backup copy exists depends on the settings for the Program option
Backup: Project backup.

When you double-click on a DAQ project file, catman launches and the project is
loaded. You must wait for the Waiting time before first hardware access specified in
Program start options to elapse before accessing the project device(s).

On opening, the settings for the project are loaded, the specified interfaces are activated
and the device configuration is checked. During this procedure different situations can
occur:

Special features for QuantumX (older/current modules)

The communication with the QuantumX modules has been completely changed as from
catman 3.5, because the current firmware versions (as of 4.0) offer a whole range of new
possibilities: Improved transmission of the measurements; faster scanning; and, in con-
junction with current modules with B or C functionality, also new time channel variants
(PTP), new sample rates (decimal stepping) and more. From catman 3.5 the SomatXR
modules are also supported, which likewise use firmware 4.0 or higher. With older mod-
ules you must therefore first update the firmware.

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 137
If you open a project and catman finds during the device scan that the modules do not
use the recommended firmware, then you are requested to update the modules as with a
new project.
See Using older QuantumX modules, Updating MX firmware.

CX27C and EtherCAT signals

The CX27C allows you also to display EtherCAT signals in catman; see EtherCAT with
CX27C (QuantumX) (Advanced options).

If you open a project in which fewer channels are defined than in the current con-
figuration, only the project channels will be set up.

If you open a project that no longer includes all the project channels, you must dis-
able the ones that are not present. Otherwise measurement will start.

A device is not found, e.g. because the address or interface is different or the
device is switched off
Check the device and interface. In the displayed dialog you can search the specified inter-
face with New scan in the dialog Prepare new DAQ project to see which devices are
found. Correct the address on the right-hand side of the dialog as necessary (also pos-
sible by drag & drop from left to right) and choose Repeat connection attempt.
See also No device found?

A device is found, however, the configuration differs from that given in the project
If the arrangement of the channels or transducers does not match the one in the project,
you must either swap the plug-in modules or transducers as appropriate, or open and
change the project in offline mode. No measurements can be taken with the “wrong” hard-
ware; at the most you can deactivate the affected channels in all DAQ jobs.
See also Prepare complete DAQ project.

You have other devices of the type QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus or PMX, which
are to be added
Add further modules after loading a project using the Special menu on the DAQ channels
tab.
A GNSS device (NMEA) or a Vaisala Weather Transmitter is temporarily removed
here, and then inserted again as the last device(s).

catman
138 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
Some devices of the type QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus or PMX are not (or no
longer) present/should be removed.
Remove the relevant devices after loading a project using the Special menu on the DAQ
channels tab.

An On-Board recording is active on one of the MGCplus devices

See also EasyRoadLoad, Prepare On-Board recording.

You receive notification that some functions are not available: sensor assignment, zero
balance and filters. Since the configuration of the channels should not change during the
measurement, all actions in this respect are blocked. You can however view the recording
parameters and terminate the recording: On-Board recording button in the status line.

In the next step all channels are checked and measured, i.e. the Live display is active
(default setting). Channels with TEDS transducers will be set automatically if, in the
Sensor options (Channels and sensors group), you have specified After loading a DAQ
project: Execute sensor scan. If a fault occurs during the channel initialization, you may
display a description of the problem with the Initialization log. The log lists all differences,
even small ones, e.g. channel names that do not match. You can also call up and print the
initialization log via Additional functions ► Diagnostics and Logging ► Show initialization
log (DAQ channels tab, Special group).

If you have activated the option Check that sensors from Sensor database are up to date,
a check is also made of whether the data of the sensors used in the project have changed
in the meantime. You can then carry out an automatic update. In addition, the warning
Sensor data not up-to-date is displayed in the channel list for the channels affected.
See also Sensor options: After loading a DAQ project.

Notes
Channels that exist in the measuring device, but are not defined in the project, will
not be displayed.
Channels that do not exist, but are defined in the project, will be displayed. We
recommend that you change the project accordingly, or at least deactivate the rel-
evant channels in all DAQ jobs. Otherwise an error will occur when a DAQ job starts
causing the channels to be automatically deactivated. Whether an error message
must be confirmed depends on the settings in the DAQ channel options (Channels
and sensors group): What to do if channel initialization fails (when starting acquis-
ition).

catman
3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE) 139
 The Type expected column is only available once a project is opened and the (hard-
ware) Type column is activated for display. You configure the column display via
the Channel list (Program options, Channels and sensors group).
In order to start catman directly with a project, you either create a link to catman or
specify the project in the start options; see Program start options. If you want to cre-
ate a link in Windows, under the link properties, in the Target line specify the full
name of the project in quotes after the program path, e.g. "C:\Pro-
grams\HBM\catmanEasy\catmanEasy.exe" "C:\My projects\Test project.MEP".
QuantumX MXFS: When loading a project, all channels contained in the project are
restored with the respective settings, meaning the band settings are sent to the
device and the sensor settings, such as scaling etc., are restored as usual. If no
peak is detected for a channel, catman indicates Overflow.

catman
140 3 START A DAQ PROJECT (DAQ MODE)
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (M EASURING CHAIN) (D AQ
CHANNELS TAB)

See also Sensor scan when connecting a device, Use sensor description as channel
name, Import channel name and sensor type from Excel, Channel list options,
Create DAQ project from Excel parametrization file.

The Configure DAQ channels window with the channel list (DAQ channels tab) shows you
all the channels currently present, i.e. the DAQ channels and the computation channels
(real-time computations). The active channel settings in the devices are displayed and
are identified with . For transducers without TEDS nevertheless assign the sensors con-
nected to the channels, because otherwise, for example, a measurement range which is
too small or too large could be used. If the Videocam module (catmanAP required) is
activated, there is also the Video Cameras tab for the configuration of up to four cameras;
see Setting up video cameras.
You can print out the channel list via the menu File and the data of a single channel
or a measurement device via the Channel info window.

If you have opened a saved DAQ project and not all channels defined in the project
have been found in the connected devices, channels are also displayed that no
longer exist. Deactivate these channels in all DAQ jobs, because no measurements
can be taken with the “wrong” hardware (error messages occur).

Sensor database and channel information component window

In the default setting of catman on the right side at the top the Sensor database is dis-
played which facilitates the easy setup of the measuring chain in that in each case you
drag the connected sensor or CAN signal onto the appropriate channel. Place the cursor
over a sensor to view comments on it.
Under the Sensor database (default setting) information about the marked channel is dis-
played in the window Channel info; see also Channel info.
You can move both windows to other positions on the screen or dock them to the edge of
the screen as tabs using Auto hide.

Change column display

The information (columns) to be displayed can be changed via the menu File ► Options
and Channel list (Channels and sensors group).

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 141
A double click on a column heading in the channel list adapts the width of the column
(temporarily) to the displayed text. Use the Channel list options to fix the column width.
You can change the font size of the marked line(s) (temporarily) with + and – . -F
resets the display.
If a column is not located at the position you require, click in the heading and drag the
column to the required position.

Change lines, move channel or module/device

Move CAN signals of a MX471 and computation channels
Click in the column on the far left on the relevant row and while holding down the mouse
button move it to the desired position.

Rows with the (physical) channels of a device cannot be moved. Analog transducers also
cannot be moved from one channel to another.

Changing the order in which (multiple) devices appear

Choose Special ► Remove module/device to remove all displayed devices (initially con-
necting just one device) and then use Special ► Add module/device to add the devices or
modules in the desired sequence.
The function is not available for every device.

Displaying measurements
In the default setting the Live display is active to display measurements continuously and
to check whether all channels are working properly. Use the context menu Large display
in the Sample column to display the reading in a window which can be continuously
zoomed.
Activate Live display ► Measure computation channels to also update the results of com-
putations during the live display.
With live display disabled, click on Sample (Channel group) to display the current mea-
sured value of the selected channels, or double-click on a channel in the Sample column.
(Sensor group) or Signal reading ► Electrical values (Channel group) shows the value
measured on the device input (raw value).

A measurement is always executed when you assign a sensor. This allows you to see
immediately whether the channel is functioning and correctly set up. When you double-
click on a computation channel, one value is acquired from all device channels.

catman
142 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Number of displayed decimal places
In the Sample submenu you can define how many decimal places to display for the selec-
ted channel(s). The setting is also used for Digital indicators and tables if you specify
Auto format (default) in the relevant configuration dialog.

Status indicator
As far as possible, in the event of an error and Overflow is displayed in the Sample
column. The function is not available for every device.

Overload detection
catman features three methods to indicate an overload, where supported by the device,
such as QuantumX/SomatXR with a firmware version higher than 4.40:
1. Sensor overload
As soon as the electrical measuring range defined for the sensor is exceeded, the
LED in the Sample column turns red and Overflow is indicated. If you have spe-
cified a value in Display overflow values as (options for DAQ channels), it will be
used as the measured value.
Check that the electrical measuring range of your sensors is set correctly. This
is only automatically the case with Zero span linearization. To do this, open the
Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram context menu in the Sensor/Function
column.
2. Channel overload (default)
Only once the measuring range (input range) of the DAQ channel is exceeded does
the LED in the Sample column turn red, and Overflow is indicated. If you have spe-
cified a value in Display overflow values as (options for DAQ channels), it will be
used as the measured value. This variant is supported by all devices.
3. Sensor or channel overload
As soon as the electrical measuring range defined for the sensor is exceeded, the
LED in the Sample column turns orange. The status in the Channel info (Com-
ponent window) changes to sensor overload, but the measured value is still dis-
played. If the measuring range (input range) of the DAQ channel is also exceeded,
the LED in the Sample column turns red, and Overflow is indicated. If you have spe-
cified a value in Display overflow values as (options for DAQ channels), it will then
be used as the measured value.
You can make the setting for each channel separately, or for a complete device.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 143
 As long as the measured electrical values are displayed with , no overload is
indicated.

Display only possible sample rates for QuantumX/SomatXR

In the Set up sample rate groups and filters dialog (Configure in the Sample rates/Filter
group), you can specify that only the sample rates that the current device actually sup-
ports are displayed. The function requires at least firmware version 4.40 in the Quan-
tumX/SomatXR.

Note that in QuantumX/SomatXR sample rates and filters are linked. If you manu-
ally select a very low filter frequency, for example, high sample rates may no longer
be available. For example, with the MX840 and a 2 Hz filter you cannot select a
sample rate of 19200 Hz.

Only active sample rate groups are checked. Unused sample rate groups are unaf-
fected.

MX410, MXFS: Use an increased sample rate (highspeed mode)

MX410
With an MX410 module, you can increase the maximum possible sample rate to 192 kHz
or 200 kHz (decimal sample rate) if you are using only two of the four channels for mea-
surement. Select the increased sample rate via the context menu in the Sample rate/filter
column (Highspeed mode). Here, channels 1 and 2 are always activated and channels 3
and 4 are deactivated; selection of the channels is not possible. The setting can also be
undone with the same menu to be able to use all four channels again.
See also Switching sample-rate domains for QuantumX/SomatXR.
The increased sample rate is not available for sensor supply with carrier frequency.

MXFS
With an MXFS module (for optical sensors) you can increase the maximum possible
sample rate to 2 kHz. Select the increased sample rate via the context menu in the
Sample rate/filter column (Highspeed mode). The display resolution is slightly reduced in
favor of the speed. The change applies to all connectors of the respective module. The
setting can also be undone using the same menu.

Deactivate the channels without sensors using Active (Channel group) so that no
data has to be transferred for these channels. You can restrict the channels to be

catman
144 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 displayed, e.g. to the active channels, via Display filter (Channel group).
Channels can be activated or deactivated with password protection—see Sensor
options, Password protection.

With QuantumX/SomatXR you can generate test signals in the module channels for test
purposes.
If an error occurs during the sensor assignment or when changing settings, you can dis-
play the complete error description also in the tool-tip which appears when you place the
cursor over the channel in the Sample column.

By default, the Sample rates and Filters settings, and the Channel activation on the
DAQ channels tab, are set for all DAQ jobs. However, only the settings for the first
DAQ job are shown. If you are using several different DAQ jobs and this behavior is
not desired, carry out these settings either on the DAQ jobs tab or restrict the
changes to the first DAQ job on the DAQ channels tab; see Program options: Chan-
nel list.

4.1 Using transducers with TEDS

See also Device search.

Requirements
You must have a TEDS-compatible measuring device (QuantumX/SomatXR,
MGCplus with connection boards with the identifier i, or PMX) available.
You must have transducers with TEDS modules connected.
The relevant channel must support the TEDS module type of connection (zero-wire,
1-Wire®, etc.).

Special scaling, such as tabular scaling or polynomial scaling, is only accepted

when the measurement device supports this scaling. Otherwise just 2-point scaling
is applied. In case of doubt check whether your device supports special scalings.
For example, not all QuantumX/SomatXR modules support polynomial scaling; on
MGCplus only the ML38B supports it and the DMP41 does not support any poly-
nomial scaling. Import the TEDS data into the sensor database as necessary, and
set the sensor by it, as catman is able to apply such scaling.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 145
Detecting TEDS
Activate Execute sensor scan after device connection in the dialog Prepare new DAQ pro-
ject ► Options on the General options tab so that connected transducers with a TEDS
module are detected immediately when starting a DAQ project. In this case, the mea-
suring chain is automatically configured.
You can start a manual search for transducers that have the TEDS module, e.g. with trans-
ducers connected after the device connection using TEDS ► Sensor scan … (DAQ chan-
nels tab, Sensor group).
With Live display ► Execute TEDS scan on the DAQ channels tab (Channel group) you can
define that during live update a check is also made to determine whether a new sensor
has been connected.

Activate in the Program options After loading a DAQ project: Execute sensor scan (Chan-
nels and sensors ► Sensors), so that the sensor scan is also executed and the measuring
chain set up on opening a DAQ project. Any differences between the project and con-
nected sensors are displayed in this case; see Program options: Sensors.
An expiry date for the calibration specified in the TEDS is checked if you activate the
Extended safety checks before DAQ start (menu File ► Options ► Safety).
See also Program options: Safety.

Special features with QuantumX/SomatXR

The settings possible with QuantumX/SomatXR modules for TEDS use also affect cat-
man. If, for example, you use the “Ignore TEDS” setting in the MX Assistant, then no TEDS
is found by a TEDS scan in catman. Instead the message “TEDS usage is deactivated” is
displayed in the Sample column. Activation of the TEDS (TEDS ► Activate TEDS, Sensor
group) also fails (“No TEDS found”). Use TEDS ► Activate TEDS usage Sensor group) to
be able to find the TEDS module with a (following) TEDS scan and to activate it. This cor-
responds to the setting “Use TEDS if available” in the MX Assistant.

The setting TEDS ► Deactivate TEDS usage may be necessary if you have set “TEDS
required” in the MX Assistant and
no TEDS module is connected or
the connected TEDS module is not described yet (blank) or
the connected TEDS module is faulty or
the TEDS settings are not suitable for the channel type.

In these cases no measurements are output for this channel, instead just and Over-
flow when the MX module has read the TEDS module (in this respect refer to the next

catman
146 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
paragraph). To obtain measurements again you must either—with the TEDS module
present—reprogram the TEDS module or assign a sensor from the Sensor database to the
channel.

Use of adapter plugs with QuantumX/SomatXR

The TEDS setting with QuantumX/SomatXR is always read out if the sensor connector
was either plugged in before the module was switched on or is plugged in directly on the
module. However, if you are, for example, working with an adapter plug or an extension
and after switching on the module only plug the connector into the end of the extension,
the MX module does not detect this. In this case you must either use Activate TEDS
(TEDS, Sensors group) or Activate TEDS contents in device on sensor scan (menu File ►
Options, Sensors in the Channels and sensors group). The latter carries out the activation
again, however, after each scan and takes about 3 seconds per channel.

Modify TEDS data

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

Using the Edit sensor context menu and with transducers with TEDS module, you can
transfer the TEDS data into the sensor database for editing (the sensor is shown in the
TEDS group).
Before you carry out a measurement of the sensor data, you should, if possible, set
a sample rate of 10 Hz and form the mean over one or several seconds: Measure-
ment options.

After editing, click on Apply (TEDS group in the ribbon) to write the data to the TEDS
module.

Programming new TEDS/reprogramming TEDS

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

1. With a new, not yet written or an incorrectly programmed TEDS module first create
the sensor in the Sensor database; see How to add your sensors to the Sensor data-
base and Help on the sensor database (in the Help menu on the right above the rib-
bon).
2. Assign this sensor to the channel, e.g. using drag and drop.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 147
3. Activate Apply settings and write them into the TEDS module also in the dialog and
click on OK.
The data is transferred into the TEDS module.

Notes
Not all details in the sensor database can be saved into a TEDS module; see TEDS
The text for Name/description is used as the channel name; Type/model is shown
in the Sensor/function column for HBK sensors. The types of other sensors cannot
be displayed because only a numeric value is stored in the TEDS module. This
would have to be cross-checked against the manufacturer's list indicating which
text belongs to which number. Only the HBM list is available in catman however.
If you want to write special data to the TEDS module, you can also call the (sep-
arate) TEDS editor: TEDS ► Edit TEDS content with legacy TEDS editor (TEDS group
on DAQ channels tab). The TEDS Editor has its own help.

4.2 Assigning sensors (transducers) to channels

See also Using CANHEAD modules, Changing strain gage settings, Calibrating
sensors, Using sensor description as channel name, Program options: Sensors, Use
CAN signals,Assigning CAN signals from Sensor database, Using optical sensors.

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

Activate CANHEAD® modules or other CAN signals in the MGCplus before assigning
sensors, as a scan must be carried out again after these operations which will
delete any assignments already made. With devices in the QuantumX and SomatXR
families the number of CAN channels can be changed retrospectively without the
channel configuration being lost.

You can also import sensors, sensor types (and channel names) from an Excel file.

Procedure
1. Click on the DAQ channels tab to display the channel list and the Sensor database
window. Use Window (on the right above the ribbon) to display the sensor database
again if you have closed or hidden the window.
2. Mark the channel(s) to which the sensors should be assigned.

catman
148 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
3. Select one of the sensor groups for display or use the search function ( ), to find
the connected transducers.

shows the sensors you have created (“My sensors” group).

shows general sensor types like DC voltage, thermocouples, Pt100,

optical sensors, etc.

shows the HBK transducers (HBM and selected sensors from BKSV).

shows the sensors that can be connected to the marked channel.

shows the CAN messages and signals in the sensor database.

shows all the sensors in the sensor database at the bottom of the win-
dow.
4. In the bottom half of the Sensor database component window, double-click on the
correct sensor or CAN signal.
You can assign a sensor to one unmarked channel or to all marked channels
using drag&drop. If you mark several sensors and one channel, they are
assigned to the marked channel and the following channels (as long as there
are sensors or channels available). When dragging, keep the or key
pressed. During the selection with ensure that you have not double-clicked
the sensor, which you are dragging with the key pressed, (otherwise the
marking is canceled). You can drag the first or last sensor. Assignment is
always in the order of the sensors in the Sensor database window.
In the case of CAN signals, the following signals from the Sensor database are
also assigned when you assign a signal to the first of multiple selected chan-
nels.
In the sensor database you can define that a sensor may only be used on one
channel. In this case you obtain an error message for multiple or renewed
assignment.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 149
5. Repeat these steps until all connected transducers have been assigned.

If only the first channel of a channel group is visible ( in the first column), you can
assign the same (analog) transducer to all sub-channels by dragging this onto the
first channel. With CAN signals, the next signals in the Sensor database will be
assigned to the other channels.

Any transducers already defined in the device, e.g. using the Assistant software, are
not recognized by catman. You should therefore assign sensors to all channels or
use transducers with TEDS. Otherwise, the settings currently present in the device
will be used, but on reloading the project the settings will not be reproduced again.

Immediately after assigning a transducer, the setting will be activated and the channel(s)
checked. Should an error message occur, check the transducer connection and whether
this transducer type may be connected to this amplifier type (measuring range, excitation
voltage etc.). The error text also gives information concerning the origin of the error. If not
all of the settings specified in the Sensor database can be accepted, e.g. the desired excit-
ation voltage is not available, a notice provides information. Check the details in the Chan-
nel info component window as necessary.

catman
150 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Notes
The Sensor database is continually being revised by HBM and therefore also con-
tains new sensors. If you have already worked with an older version of catman, you
should import the new sensor database into your (old) sensor database.
After assigning a sensor, you see the circuit diagram for connecting the sensor to
the measuring device in the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram context menu.
If you have stored a sensor comment in the Sensor database, it is adopted as chan-
nel comment.
With QuantumX/SomatXR modules and linearization via table or polynomial, the
scaling is performed in hardware, i.e. in the MX module, as long as the MX module
supports that type of linearization (polynomials of max. 4th degree, otherwise you
get the message “The sensor is not supported by the hardware”). Note, however,
that the computations in the QuantumX/SomatXR modules are performed only with
single precision (about 6 to 7 relevant digits). Especially with polynomial scaling,
this can lead to deviations, for example with very small coefficients. In such cases,
use a computation in catman, catman uses double precision (Create computation
channel from sensor context menu, and run the channel itself without scaling).
With DMP41, linearization via table is also performed in the device.
This means that the linearized values are also available for other channels, such as
for analog outputs on QuantumX/SomatXR.
For all other devices, linearization via table is always performed by catman, mean-
ing the devices only output the “raw values”. The same applies if the device does
not support linearization via polynomial.
With the MX590 (QuantumX/SomatXR special module for connecting pressure
hoses) you cannot assign any sensors. This is not necessary with this module,
because the measuring range is fixed.

4.2.1 How to add your sensors to the Sensor database

See also Sensor database options (path and file name), Nominal value, Char-
acteristic value, Sensitivity, Excitation voltage.

Using the DAQ channels tab (or Signal plan), open the Sensor database for editing using
the Sensor database tab.
The tab can be hidden using Program functions (Program options, System group).
Access can also be blocked by password protection—see Sensor options, Password
protection.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 151
You can enter more groups and sensors in the sensor database under Sensor groups.
The Sensor data base component window shows all groups or transducers sorted alpha-
betically.
Where possible, use the My sensors group (the group cannot be renamed), because

this group can be directly displayed: Click on in the Sensor database com-
ponent window of the DAQ channels tab. The sensors contained in subgroups are
however not displayed, so click on the appropriate subgroup.

More information about entering sensor data can be found in the Help on the sensor data-
base (in the Help menu on the right above the ribbon).

Notes
A maximum of 1024 sub-entries (lower half in the Sensor database component win-
dow) per group can be shown in catman. Therefore use an appropriate structure
which ensures that no group exceeds this number of entries.
Group names must not exceed a maximum length of 50 characters. This also
applies if you insert a file with Vector CANdb, for example, as the file name is used
as the group name here. In these cases, shorten the group name to 50 characters
(including the file extension).
If you have a 2D barcode scanner, you can conveniently configure and install a HBM
strain gage via the code on the strain gage's packaging without typing the data.
If you enter a Serial number, it is displayed in catman in the Sensor/function column
in brackets after the sensor description (Name/description).
If you enter a comment, it will be applied as channel comment.

4.2.2 Search database for transducers

At the bottom of the Sensor database component window of the DAQ channels tab,
it is sufficient to enter one letter of the sensor designation (Name/Description) in
the search field. The search starts immediately and in the window only sensors are
shown which contain the entered character string. Each additional entry restricts
the displayed selection still further. You do not need to enter placeholders in this
field.

You can find transducers according to various search criteria, for example, using the
name/description, the serial number, sensor ID or the calibration expiry (date). This is

catman
152 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
achieved via Find on the Sensor database tab in the Find group in the ribbon or, if the
DAQ channels tab is displayed, with the Advanced button in the Sensor database com-
ponent window.

Activate the relevant search criterion ( ) before the user-specific search in addition to
entering the search text or date you are searching for.
With the (user-specific) advanced search, only results are found which exactly
match the search text. Therefore use placeholders (*, ?) to find all occurrences
which only partially contain the search text.

The results of the search are displayed under Search result below the sensor groups. In
the DAQ channels tab click on a group in the upper section to again display the sensors
in this group.

4.3 Sensor modification: gage factor, calibration

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

To zero channels (Zero balancing), mark them and click on (Zero balancing
group, DAQ channels tab) or use the menu item Zero balance all hardware channels
in the Zero balancing group.

In the following cases, it is useful to modify the values of the sensor database with fur-
ther details (Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram context menu):
1. You are using strain gages and wish to change the gage factor, also called k factor,
or other strain gage settings (the strain gage entries in the Sensor database use k =
2.0).
As of catman 5.5.3, you have an easy way to configure HBM strain gages in the
Sensor database: Scan the barcode on the strain gage packaging. This will
record all the data, including the polynomial coefficients for example.
2. A transducer is entered in the Sensor database only with default values and should
be calibrated in the installed state. This is recommended, for example, for inductive
transducers.
3. You are using optical sensors and temperature compensation.
In this case you have to specify the temperature channel and perform the “zero mea-
surements”. The dialog is automatically displayed by catman.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 153
 If you need the original measured values, e.g. in mV/V or kHz, and additionally the
scaled values, after assigning the sensor scaling, from the context menu choose
Create computation channel from sensor. As a result, the electrical value will again
be measured in the original channel, and catman will create a computation with the
scaling.
An already measured zero value will be imported into the computation channel.
However, you can also zero the original channel, then cancel zero balancing in the
computation channel and disable it.

Notes
With QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus and PMX, the Sensor adaptation and wiring dia-
gram context menu dialog also displays the circuit diagram for connecting the
assigned sensor.
You can also calibrate channels when no sensor (type) has been assigned.
However, the channel must already be capable of measurement, because settings
such as the supply voltage, carrier frequency or transducer type, e.g. DC voltage or
strain-gage transducer, cannot be changed.
You can also perform the scaling using a real-time computation; see Algebraic com-
putations: Linearization.

4.3.1 Calibrating sensors

Sensors which have been specified in the sensor database with a polynomial trans-
ducer characteristic cannot be calibrated. Password protection can be set for cal-
ibration. In this case you cannot perform calibration until the correct password has
been entered.

Mark the required channel and use the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram context
menu in the Sensor/function column, for example. In the following dialog you can meas-
ure a characteristic or enter existing measured values, e.g. from a calibration protocol.
The values are changed for this channel or the marked channels only, the Sensor
database entry remains unchanged except if you activate Update in Sensor data-
base. You can create the newly measured sensor also as a new sensor in the
Sensor database: Create new sensor. You are asked for the new name when you
click on OK.

catman
154 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 If you decide to measure values, you must measure all points on the transducer
characteristic.

You can measure or type in any two points of the transducer characteristic. Usually the
zero-point (unloaded transducer) and a value with a known load between 20% and 100%
of the nominal load is used. However, with transducers which can be loaded in both dir-
ections you can also, for example, measure one value at -80% and the second at +80%.
Calibration is also possible when using a tabular linearization.

Minimum/maximum

So that the correct measuring range is used and the amplifier channel is not over-
loaded, you must also specify the physical range of the transducer (in both dir-
ections): Maximum and Minimum.

Type of (calibration) measurement

With this option you define how the values to be measured are treated. The working prin-
ciple is similar to synchronous precision zeroing, but here however you can also deter-
mine an RMS value. The following methods are available:
1. Instantaneous value (default setting)
A measurement value with the current sample rate of DAQ job 1 is retrieved from
the device.
2. Mean value
catman determines the values through the acquisition of many measured values
and then forms the mean. The measurement is executed at the current sample rate
of DAQ job 1 over the specified duration.
3. RMS value
The RMS value (RMS = Root Mean Square) is calculated from the measured signal.
Specify a sufficiently long duration so that the RMS value of the signal can be cal-
culated accurately enough.

If required, change the sample rate for the first DAQ job via the DAQ jobs tab (Set-
tings group). The sample rate for the calibration is then also changed.

The second method is better especially for signals with interferences (noise), since not a
single measured value is decisive, but the measured values are averaged over a longer
period of time. With this method you should use sampling periods of 1 to 5 seconds and
sample rates of 10 or 50 Hz.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 155
The third method is practicable with acceleration transducers, for example, because they
cannot be statically calibrated. Here, a calibration can be carried out with a sine wave sig-
nal. In this case use at least ten periods for the measurement.
With methods 2 and 3, as many measurements are considered as a maximum as fit
in the data buffer (default setting 2048). If the number of measurements resulting
from the specified duration and the sample rate is greater, the excess measure-
ments are not considered.

Example of scaling in a different physical quantity

Instead of displaying the actual physical quantity, you can also convert to another quant-
ity, for example frequency to torque, voltage to flow rate or pressure to force:
For an absolute pressure transducer with 50 bar at 2 mV/V, where 1 bar corresponds to
0 kN and 20 bar corresponds to 13.256 kN, one can calculate: 1st point of input char-
acteristics, Electrical value: 0.04 (mV/V), Physical value: 0 and as the unit kN. For the 2nd
point of input characteristics enter: Electrical value: 0.8 (mV/V) and Physical value:
13.256 (kN). As Maximum enter 34.2 (bar); use 0 as the Minimum. You can also enter 35
(bar) as Maximum, as this only determines the measuring range of the amplifier.

Cable resistance correction for MX1615 and MX1616 (QuantumX/SomatXR)

For full bridge strain gages in a 4-wire circuit that are also connected via a 4-wire circuit
in the extension cable, you can correct for the effects of cable resistance if you have a cor-
responding calibration protocol.

Procedure
The sensor must be under no load during the entire procedure.

1. Set the Type of measurement to Mean value and select a Duration of 1 or 2 seconds.
2. For 1st point of input characteristics click on Measure. If the value is specified on
the calibration protocol, you can also enter it directly in the Electrical field.
3. For Physical measuring range enter the limits of the range (Minimum and Maximum,
for example ± maximum capacity).
4. For 2nd point of input characteristics enter the maximum capacity (or nominal/rated
force etc.) in the Physical field.
5. Activate Correct cable resistance when calibrating.
6. Enter the calibration value for the maximum capacity specified in the calibration pro-
tocol in mV/V for mV/V Cal.
7. Enter the exact bridge resistance of the sensor in the R-bridge field, for example

catman
156 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 350.4 ohms.
8. In the 2nd point of input characteristics section click on Measure.

catman then uses the internal shunt resistance of the modules to determine the cable res-
istance, which in turn is used to determine the correction for the electrical value of the
2nd point of input characteristics. Then the corrected value is displayed.
Close the dialog with OK to activate the values in the module.
In this type of calibration, only the effects of the cable resistance (loss) for the pre-
vailing temperature at the time of the measurement are compensated. Changes in
the cable resistance due to changes in temperature lead to further changes in the
measurement signal. Therefore extension cables should be designed in a 6-wire cir-
cuit if possible.

4.3.2 Change strain gage settings (gage factor)

So that you can enter gage and bridge factors, the sensor type Installed strain
gages with gage factor must be set in the sensor database. Otherwise you can only
calibrate a characteristic.

Mark the required channels and use the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram context
menu in the Sensor/function column, for example. In the following dialog, you can enter
the gage factor, bridge factor and excitation voltage, i.e. change the values copied from
the database. Additionally, you can define the type of compensation for temperature
effects in this dialog.
See also Temperature compensation when using strain gages.
The values are changed for this channel or the marked channels only and the
Sensor database entry remains unchanged. You can however create a new sensor:
Create new sensor. The sensor is inserted into the My sensors group.

In the Channel list options (Program options), activate display of the Gage factor
column. The current gage factor is then also displayed in the DAQ channels tab.

Where can you find the gage factor?

The gage factor of strain gages is stated on each package, and is usually between 1.8
and 2.2. Ask the strain-gage installer for the gage factor, otherwise measurement devi-
ations of up to 10% can occur.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 157
Which bridge factor is correct?
The bridge factor depends on the number of active strain gages and their orientation. The
strain-gage installer can give you the correct factor: if only one strain gage is active, enter
1. This factor is also correct if you use an active strain gage and a second one (on a sep-
arate piece of your specimen) to compensate for thermal expansion. The latter is not
regarded as active, since it only acquires thermal strains and not strains due to the trans-
fer of load. However, if two strain gages are active, a number between 1.2 and 2 may be
correct.

Which excitation voltage is needed?

The Excitation voltage generally depends on the material on which the strain gage is
installed and the size and resistance of the strain gage. Ask the person who installed the
strain gage which value is best. Otherwise, if your device allows it, run tests to try to find
a suitable excitation voltage: after switching on the device, the measured values for
unloaded objects may only change a little. If a drift is detected which only stops after
some time (approx. 15 minutes), this could indicate overheating. In this case, contact the
person who installed the strain gage and select a smaller excitation voltage or install a
strain gage using a higher resistance.

Which measurement range should be chosen?

By specifying the Measuring range you define which measurement range is activated on
the amplifier if several are available. With a suitable measuring amplifier high strains can
also be measured. On the other hand a favorable sensitivity is chosen for the normally
adequate measurement range of 4000 µm/m (corresponds to a measurement range on
the input of the measuring amplifier of approx. 2 mV/V) and a very large measurement
range is not normally used. With a measurement range of, for example, 16 mV/V approx.
32,000 µm/m could be measured, but with smaller signals of less than 100 µm/m a
higher noise content would arise in this case. In case of doubt check the measurement
range (electrical) used in the Channel info window.

4.3.3 Temperature compensation when using strain gages

See also Strain gage computations.

The compensation of temperature influences, which is often necessary for strain-gage

measurements, can take place in principle in three ways:
1. “Classically” by using an active strain gage and another strain gage of the same type
(same lot number of the foil) which only acquires the thermal expansion of the

catman
158 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 component. Both strain gages are wired in a half bridge and connected as a DAQ
channel.
2. By using a separate DAQ channel with the same type of strain gage which only
acquires the thermal expansion of the component (separate piece from identical
object material). This measurement can be subtracted from many active channels,
each containing only one active strain gage. This means that many active channels
can be compensated with one compensation strain gage if the temperatures of
these strain gages are similar enough. In this case select Temperature com-
pensation using compensation S/G. If you wire the compensation strain gage as a
separate channel, specify the channel in the Temperature compensation values from
section.
The selection in Temperature compensation values from is only possible once
Temperature compensation using compensation S/G has been activated.
3. By entering the polynomial from the strain gage package and the use of a channel
which acquires the temperature at the measuring point. Here too, the compensation
for several active strain gages can also take place using one temperature channel. In
this case select Temperature compensation using temperature response polynomial.
Specify the channel which acquires the temperature at the measuring point in the
Temperature data from section. In addition to the polynomial coefficients ai you
must also specify the thermal expansion coefficients and the reference temperature:
αS/G is the thermal expansion coefficient of the strain gage in ppm (10-6/K) as stated
on the strain gage package, aMaterial is that of the material on which the strain gage
is installed and TRef is the temperature in °C for which the polynomial has been deter-
mined with a deviation of zero. This is the point at which the polynomial curve
passes through the line at zero strain (usually 20°C). To additionally compensate for
the temperature dependency of the gage factor (αGage factor, approximately 1% per
100°K with Constantan strain gage), also specify the value (in ppm/K). Otherwise
leave the field blank or enter 0.
If you have read in the strain gage data via a barcode scanner, the polynomial is
already included in the channel comment, and you can apply it by choosing Tem-
perature compensation using temperature response polynomial. For more
information about the barcode, see the "Installed (single) strain gage" section in
the Help on the sensor database (in the Help menu on the right above the rib-
bon).
The selection in Temperature data from is only possible once you have activ-
ated Temperature compensation using temperature response polynomial.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 159
Formula for temperature compensation with strain gages

4.4 Using CAN signals/bus reset

There are two ways of assigning CAN signals to individual channels:
1. Via the Sensor database with drag and drop (all devices which support CAN); see
Assigning CAN signals from the Sensor database.
2. Only with MGCplus: By a Vector-CANdb (CAN database) that is loaded into the ML71
of the MGCplus; see Assigning CAN signals from a Vector database.
With QuantumX/SomatXR MX471 you can define with the options for the device search
that the current device configuration is used; see also Preset number of CAN channels. A
further alternative is the use of a configuration file; see CCP/XCP (ECU).
With MGCplus also a manual modification of the signals defined in a CAN database is
possible via . However we recommend transferring the CAN signal into the Sensor data-
base and editing there.
See also Help on the sensor database (in the Help menu on the right above the ribbon):
Import CAN database.

Change the sequence of the CAN channels

Change the sequence of the CAN channels for an MX471 by dragging the channel with
the mouse: In the far left column (DAQ channels tab), drag the channel to the desired loc-
ation.

catman
160 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Drag the channel in the column with the red marker.

CAN raw channel (MX471 only)

Activate the reception of CAN Raw signals via the CAN bus options (Default setting
of number of CAN channels). Additionally select FD (max. 64 bytes payload) to
receive CAN-FD Raw messages.

With a CAN Raw channel no channel-specific settings are possible. In the DAQ channels
tab the number of messages since switching on the module is shown in the Sample
column. Using the context menu you can call the dialog for the general settings for CAN
bus modules.
See also Configuring a CAN Raw table, CAN decoders

CAN FD: Only the MX471C supports CAN FD. The MX471 and MX471B cannot be
connected to a CAN bus on which CAN FD messages are also sent. This also
applies to the Raw channel.

If you are using the QuantumX/SomatXR module, you cannot set all connectors to
CAN-RAW receiver only. At least one connector must additionally decode signals.
At the start of a DAQ project a check is made whether at least one other signal of
the module is active, and not only CAN-RAW. Otherwise other modules could not
deliver any more measurement values.

CAN-Raw channels can only be stored in HBM catman standard or ASCII format.
The other formats do not support the format for CAN-Raw. You can, however,
export the CAN-Raw channel separately to different formats in Analysis mode; see
CAN-Raw (Export data (convert formats)).

CAN FD (MX471C only)

Only the MX471C supports CAN FD. The MX471 and MX471B cannot be connected to a
CAN bus on which CAN FD messages are also sent. The bit length of an individual

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 161
message within the maximum 64 bytes may also only be 8 bytes with MX471C.
Select FD (max. 64 bytes payload) in the CAN bus options (Default setting of num-
ber of CAN channels) to receive CAN-FD Raw messages.

Number of CAN channels with QuantumX/SomatXR

For the MX840 and MX471, you define the number of channels for CAN messages (CAN
signals) in the CAN bus options of the Prepare new DAQ project dialog; see CAN bus
options (Default setting of number of CAN channels).

MX840
If connector 1 is configured for analog signals, a dialog is displayed when changing the
connection mode to CAN signals where you can define the number of channels. If the con-
nector is already configured for CAN signals, first assign an analog sensor (which clears
all CAN channels) and then assign a CAN signal again. This opens the dialog where you
can change the number of available channels.

At the time point of changing over from CAN bus to analog input or vice versa there
must not be any plug inserted into the connection, because it may block the
changeover.

Although the new configuration changes the channel list, sensors already assigned to
other channels (except CAN signals) and computations are retained with Quan-
tumX/SomatXR.

MX471
No changes are possible in the running DAQ project with this module. Although you can
specify up to 250 signals per connector for the MX471C, catman only supports 128 per
connector.

Modify number of CAN channels for MGCplus

Change the number of the ML71 sub-channels in the General settings of CAN bus mod-
ules dialog; see Number of sub-channels.
After the change the MGCplus reboots. Settings that may have been made for other
channels will be lost. Therefore configure the CAN channels before making any
other settings.

For MGCplus and CAN channels, you can use a maximum of 512 channels per
device in one sample rate group. If you need more channels, you must assign them
to a different sample rate group.

catman
162 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
In the General settings for CAN bus modules, dialog, accessed via CAN configuration
(DAQ channels tab, Special group), click on the port to be set in the upper field so that the
possible options are displayed. You can then:
define the bit rate for the CAN port or CAN-FD:
The figure is saved for each device in the catman DAQ project and each device or
module can use its own bit rates. The bit rate and the use of the bus termination
resistances are set on loading a project.
switch in the bus termination resistances for MX471 and MX840B-R,
perform a bus reset (CAN adapter or module) (Bus reset before each measurement
is saved in the DAQ project),
Activate CCP/XCP (ECU),
load a Vector CANdb (CAN database) into the ML71 of an MGCplus,
change the number of sub-channels for the ML71 plug-in module (MGCplus only),
send bus commands, e.g. if you need certain initialization sequences for CAN bus
devices,
Read the signal list again for MX471. The signal list is normally read out after the
device search. With this button you read out anew the list saved in the module.
Use the option if the CAN channels are already defined, e.g. via the MX Assistant,
and you want to load a project in which a different channel configuration is present.
After loading the project, read in the signal list anew to obtain the current con-
figuration without changing other project settings. You can also perform this action
automatically after each time a project is loaded; see CAN bus options for the
device search: Preset number of CAN channels.
Use the option also after manually loading an ECU definition (ECU ON).
See also Preset number of CAN channels.

Special settings (Sample point ratio, Sync. jump width)

Sample point ratio: With classic CAN, no special setting is usually required here. With
CAN FD, however, it is important that the setting in catman matches that of the CAN bus
as closely as possible. The entry specifies the time when the sample value of a bit is eval-
uated. Entering 87.5 %, for example, means that the analysis (determination of the bit
status) will take place after 87.5 % of the time between the edges. The time between two
edges is determined by the bit rate. The value for the sample point ratio is dependent on
the expected signal reflections and the settling time of the signal for example. Different
values might be required here depending on the standard being applied. The default is
87.5% according to the CiA (CAN in Automation) standard.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 163
Sync. jump width: With classic CAN, no special setting is usually required here. With CAN
FD, however, it is important that the setting in catman matches that of the CAN bus as
closely as possible. The value determines the tolerance for a bit with jitter in numbers of
cycles by which the bit is additionally evaluated. The value is also dependent on the
sample point ratio and the bit rate, as there must be enough sample values remaining
until the next edge (with the setting in the example above only 12.5% remain). Depending
on the bit rate and the sampling rate used for the CAN signal, this might be fewer than the
default four cycles.

4.4.1 Assigning CAN signals from Sensor database

See also Help on the sensor database (in the Help menu on the right above the rib-
bon): Importing/specifying CAN signals.

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

CAN signals that you have either imported into the Sensor database or entered into it can
be assigned in the same way as normal transducers: select the signal in the list on the
right and drag and drop it onto a CAN channel.
In the current version of the sensor database you can import the classic Vector CANdb
formats as well as the ARMXL formats (version 3.2.3 and 4.2.2).

MX840
When a CAN signal is assigned to the first MX840 module connector it will switch, if
necessary, from analog to CAN bus mode. You can then specify the number of channels
for CAN signals. The channel list will be regenerated after this change has been made;
however, sensors already assigned to other channels and computations will remain
unchanged.

At the time point of changing over from CAN bus to analog input or vice versa there
must not be any plug inserted into the connection, because it may block the
changeover.

Assign several signals

In the list mark the first CAN channel (DAQ channels tab, Configure DAQ channels
window) for which a signal will be assigned.

catman
164 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 Mark the desired signals in the Sensor database with and/or (DAQ chan-
nels tab, Sensor database window).
First drag the last signal you marked—while continuing to hold down the or
key—to the marked CAN channel.
The signals are assigned to the following channels, provided channels are avail-
able.

4.4.2 CCP/XCP (ECU, only MX471)

This option requires (prior) configuration of the QuantumX/SomatXR MX471 for use
of CCP/XCP over CAN with the MX Assistant program. The program help provides
the necessary information.

You can activate sending of the specified information once by clicking Start CCP/XCP, or
you can specify that the activation is carried out every time before a DAQ job starts (Start
CCP/XCP service before every DAQ start). Specify the file with the CAN settings and sig-
nals (CAN database file) using the MX Assistant.
After manual loading, read the signal list in again using the MX Assistant.

Only the messages and signals contained in the CAN database file are used, and the mod-
ule is parameterized accordingly as from the first CAN channel when the file is loaded via
the MX Assistant. All free CAN channels remain deactivated, and cannot be changed. CAN
send messages are also deactivated.
Deactivate the CCP/XCP over CAN function via the MX Assistant to be able to recon-
figure the CAN inputs and outputs or to use CAN send messages.

Background information on CCP/XCP

XCP (Universal Measurement and Calibration Protocol, the X stands for eXtended) is an
enhancement of CCP (CAN Calibration Protocol), and has been standardized by the ASAM
(Association for Standardization of Automation and Measuring Systems,
www.ASAM.net). The protocols were developed to make it easier to test, parameterize
and calibrate Electronic Control Units (ECUs) for automotive electronics. They enable sup-
port for plug & play and data acquisition with time stamps, for example. To safeguard sys-
tem settings against being changed, the settings file can be protected using a method
specified by ASAM. A Seed and Key file is generated using a specific algorithm by which
the CCP/XCP file can then be checked for authenticity and to ensure it has not been
changed.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 165
4.4.3 Loading a CAN database
This function is only available with MGCplus. For all other devices you must import
a CAN database into the sensor database.

Procedure
1. Call the General settings for CAN bus modules dialog via CAN configuration (DAQ
channels tab, Special group).
2. Select the required port by clicking on it.
3. In the dialog click on the ML71 databases tab.

4. Specify the CAN database to be loaded (click on ). The database must be in

Vector CANdb format.
5. If desired, you can also activate the automatic assignment of the signals contained
in the CAN database to the existing sub-channels. Otherwise you can assign them
later, see Assigning the CAN signals.
6. Click on Load.
7. On the Bus parameters tab define the bit rate to be used on the port.

The list of available messages and signals will be read from the ML71 when a DAQ
project is started; it is not saved in the DAQ project.

4.4.4 Assigning CAN signals from a Vector database

This function is only available with MGCplus.

Procedure
1. Click on the DAQ channels tab to display the channel list and the Sensor database
window. Use Window (on the right above the ribbon) to display the sensor database
again if you have closed or hidden the window.
2. Double-click on the required port to display the messages in the loaded Vector data-
base (Vector CANdb).
3. Click on the required message.
4. Assign the contained signals (below in the Sensor database window) to the indi-
vidual channels just like normal sensors.

You may also select several channels in the Configure DAQ channels window and
assign a signal to the first channel: all following signals will then be assigned to the

catman
166 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 following marked channels.

If there are several ML71, a signal must be assigned to one of the channels of the
plug-in module, into which the relevant CAN database has been loaded.

4.4.5 Change number of sub-channels

This function is only available with MGCplus. With QuantumX/SomatXR you define
the number of the possible CAN signals via the Prepare new DAQ project dialog.
With QuantumX/SomatXR MX840 you can also define the number of CAN signals
when first assigning a CAN signal; see Changing the number of CAN signals.

Procedure
1. Call the General settings for CAN bus modules dialog via CAN configuration (DAQ
channels tab, Special group).
2. Select the desired plug-in module (slot) by clicking on it.
3. In the dialog click on the ML71 Channel configuration tab.
4. Change the number of sub-channels.
5. Click on Apply and Close.

A restart of the MGCplus device(s) and establishing the connection again with the
device(s) is necessary to activate the setting. All existing sensor assignments will
be overwritten.

You may therefore decide not to activate the new settings: After closing the window
select No in the following dialog (do not continue the operation). In this case the new con-
figuration is not activated until you restart the MGCplus.
Before changing anything, save the current settings (menu File ► Save ► Project).
Then load the project after the restart. Excess or non-existing channels are here
ignored.

4.4.6 Send CAN bus messages

In order, for example, to send initialization sequences to other devices so that they send
data, specify the CAN bus messages (CPO commands) on the Bus commands tab that
are to be sent to the CAN bus devices before each start of a measurement (once or cyc-
lically while the measurement is running). You can select some ODB2 commands from
the list of commands to send and insert them into the list.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 167
 With MGCplus the list of CAN bus messages (CPO commands) is saved with the
position (slot) of the ML71 in the device. If the position changes, the list will be
deleted. With QuantumX/SomatXR the messages for each module are saved in the
catman DAQ project, i.e. each module can use its own messages (and bit rate).

4.5 Using optical sensors

See also Integrating optical measuring devices, Settings for optical measuring
devices.

Measurement principle of optical sensors

The optical sensors use fiber Bragg gratings in optical fibers. A wavelength is output as
measured value. The change of this wavelength resulting from the fiber Bragg grid under
mechanical stress or temperature change is a measure for the strain of the grid. As only
the wavelength is outputted from the devices, in catman you must still use a conversion
that calculates the strain, temperature etc. from the change in wavelength. You do this
via the assignment of a sensor or via a real-time computation. The latter has the advant-
age that the original wavelengths are still visible, but the disadvantage is that two chan-
nels per measuring point are needed (the channel itself and the computation).

ARAMIS channels (GOM testing controller)

The ARAMIS 3D camera is a stereo camera system which supplies 3D coordinates based
on triangulation and using stochastic patterns or reference point marks. The GOM (Gesell-
schaft für Optische Messtechnik) Testing Controller controls the image data and analog
value recording and the light management. The system measures samples and com-
ponents made of any materials by non-contact means based on the principle of digital
image correlation. It permits wide-area and spot analysis of samples from just a few mil-
limeters in size up to structural components on a scale of several meters. Measurements
can be performed regardless of the geometry and temperature of the samples. catman
has no direct access to the camera, and communicates only with the GOM Testing Con-
troller.
See also http://www.gom.com/de/messsysteme/aramis.html.

4.5.1 Activating and configuring QuantumX MXFS channels

See also Settings for QuantumX MXFS, Integrating the QuantumX MXFS, Defining
QuantumX MXFS channel layout.

catman
168 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
What you see after connecting to a module depends on the module:
1. In the factory default setting, all channels specified in the options are initially deac-
tivated, unless you have activated the QuantumX MXFS Auto Range Detection
option.
2. If you had already created a project with this device, the most recent device settings
are active and the respective channels are activated if they are active in the channel
layout.
If no channels are active yet, or the settings do not match the current project, you have to
change or redefine the relevant frequency bands. To do this, click on Configure ranges
(MXFS optics group on DAQ channels tab). Use the context menu to clear existing bands.

Activating channels, defining ranges

You have several options for defining the frequency ranges (bands):
1. Have catman search for the peaks and define ranges.
Alter the Width as necessary at the bottom of the window and click Create, or use
the Create bands automatically context menu in the graph. The function is the
same as Auto Range Detection, but you can set the Width parameter yourself.
2. Drag the cursor to the desired area in the graph and click on Create band here in the
context menu.
You can also influence the order of the channels if you select a row in the table
beforehand. The channel will then be created in that row, i.e. in that channel.
3. You enter the frequency values in the table.
In variants 1 and 2, you can also change the values in the table using the cursor or the
sliders below. The threshold is determined by the module's firmware, and is shown for
information purposes only.

The values are initially only displayed in the dialog. You must click Apply to transfer
the settings to the device and activate them.

Configure each connector of your device and click Apply for each connector. The dialog
always contains only the data for one connector. Close the dialog when all connectors
have been configured with the desired channels. The channels for which you have
defined ranges are then automatically activated. Any other still existing (empty) channels
remain deactivated, and can also not be activated manually.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 169
Configuring channels, assigning sensors
For sensor scaling you can use the Sensor database, and you have several options on the
DAQ channels tab:
1. You can measure the absolute wavelength.
In the Sensor/Function column, use the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram con-
text menu to select the Wavelength absolute setting.
2. You compute the relative wavelength (default setting).
In the Sensor/Function column, use the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram con-
text menu to select the Wavelength relative setting. The reference wavelength is
the reference specified when defining the ranges. The current measured values are
subtracted from it.
3. You compute the strain (requires a suitable sensor).
In the Sensor/Function column, use the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram con-
text menu to select the Strain setting. Then specify the Gauge factor (k factor) and,
if you want, select the type of temperature compensation.
4. You compute the temperature or acceleration (requires a suitable sensor).
In the Sensor/Function column, use the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram con-
text menu to select the Temperature or Acceleration setting as appropriate. Then
specify the values for Calibration factor S0 … S2.
5. You specify a suitable polynomial for conversion yourself.
In the Sensor/Function column, use the Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram con-
text menu to select the Polynomial setting. Then specify the polynomial coef-
ficients.
When creating the sensors in the Sensor database, enter the (basic) data there. Then you
only have to enter the gage factor, for example, in the dialog. The sensors must be cre-
ated with the correct range, however, otherwise you will get an error message indicating
that there is no suitable band on the connector for the sensor.
The zero balance (zeroing) is also stored in the device, but is only offset against the
scaled values of the sensor adaptation, not when a wavelength is displayed. The ref-
erence wavelength is not changed. Choose Reset reference wavelength (Zero bal-
ancing group on DAQ channels tab) to set the currently measured wavelength as
the new reference wavelength.

Temperature compensation
You have two options for temperature compensation:

catman
170 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
1. You specify a channel that measures the temperature via a temperature sensor such
as Pt100 or a thermocouple.
You can specify any channel that has already been configured here, even if the tem-
perature is measured by another QuantumX/SomatXR module for example. Only
channels that measure temperature can be selected.
The unit of the temperature channel must be °C; other units are not converted.
2. You specify a channel with an FBG compensation sensor.
The channel with this sensor must already be configured, and it must be above the
channel being configured in the channel list, so that its temperature value has
already been computed when the channel is computed.

Notes
The Disconnect sensor context menu only removes the sensor definition in the soft-
ware. Use Disconnect and reset sensor to reset the sensor to Wavelength absolute.
The channel is not deactivated in either case.
After configuring a channel, you can also have the sensor scaling performed by a
computation, and display the absolute values in the channel itself: Create com-
putation channel from sensor context menu.

4.5.2 Configuring FS22 BraggMETER channels

See also Settings for FS22 BraggMETERs, Integrating optical measuring devices.
You can configure and perform measurements as usual in catman using a normal DAQ
job. The maximum sample rate of the devices depends on the model and lies between
1 Hz and 1 kHz. At a sample rate which is higher than the maximum sample rate of the
device you are using, in hybrid systems the relevant last value is repeated until a new
value is present.

Procedure
1. Go to the Optical functions context tab. The context tab is only displayed when you
select the DAQ channels tab.
2. Activate the desired connector as required (CH x).
3. Deactivate SPD (for SI) or Peak Locking (for DI).
4. If necessary, click on Update so that a new spectrum is displayed in the graph.
Auto scaling (Spectrum group) scales the displayed graph such that all signals
are located in the displayed range. Otherwise, specify the range to be displayed

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 171
 with Ymin/Ymax.
Mark data points (Spectrum group) shows you how many measured points
have been used to acquire a peak.
Mark peaks (Spectrum group) only marks the recognized peaks.
5. Check whether all the sensors you have used have been recognized.
Check for correct operation using the Optical functions context tab (at Display
spectrum of: select which connector is to be displayed if your device has more
than one connector. The context tab is only displayed after you have selected the
DAQ channels tab. By default, the graph must be updated manually, as displaying
the spectrum is quite slow, and the process load when doing so is very high. You
can, however, choose Update automatically from the menu ribbon. You can also
export the spectra, or save them with .
6. If not all sensors have been recognized, you may have to modify the device settings.
With DI, click on Configure device (Configuration group) and change the details for
Gain and/or Threshold, for example, on the Connector/Chain tab. Relative threshold
means that with respect to the maximum level only the levels lying lower by this
amount at the most are still considered for the peaks. Then update the spectrum. Fin-
ally, repeat the scan: New scan (Configuration group).
7. Repeat steps 3 to 7 with all channels (connectors) of your FS22 BraggMETER.
8. Activate Smart Peak Detection (SPD ON with SI) or click on Lock peaks (with DI) to
apply the range option. This means that the defined bands (Range per peak) move
with the peaks in order, for example, not to lose the sensor during larger temperature
changes, because the wavelengths change too much. The original wavelengths of
the peaks are saved with Lock peaks and are also included in the project file. With
Smart Peak Detection, the parameters are not stored in the project, only in the
device.
See also Advanced options.
9. Either assign the appropriate sensors from the Sensor database to the channels
(mark channels of the same type and assign all of them to the sensor) or create an
appropriate computation for each channel. You can assign sensors of the same type
to several channels: mark the channels and double click on the sensor. You can also
create the same type of computation for several channels: Mark the channels and
drag them into the computation field.
Then modify the data of the individual sensors using the DAQ channels tab and the
Sensor adaptation and wiring diagram context menu (Sensor/function column).
Strain measurement: The Gage factor is determined by the fiber and is stated on
the strain gage pack. In some cases, the Sensitivity or the Calibration factor is

catman
172 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 specified instead of the gage factor. catman detects based on the differing mag-
nitude which entry is meant, and converts the value accordingly. If available, also
specify the type of temperature compensation and then complete the required
fields.
Temperature measurement: Specify the Type of temperature determination. The
appropriate values for the fields then displayed, for example the Dl/l0are stated
on the pack.
10. Carry out zero balancing (Zero balance) with the original channels if you are working
with sensors, otherwise with the computation channels.
11. Deactivate any channels you do not need (diagnostic channels) for the DAQ jobs.

Notes
If you are operating an FS22 BraggMETERs together with other devices with dif-
ferent sample rates, at least one channel of QuantumX, SomatXR or MGCplus must
be active in the same sample rate group which the FS22 BraggMETER is using. The
sample rate does not have to be available in the FS22 BraggMETER; catman recom-
putes the measured values accordingly.
Some functions, e.g. TEDS or Sensor scan, are not available for the channels of
these devices.
With DI, the device parameters such as Gain and Threshold are constituent parts of
the catman DAQ project.
To convert from wavelength to strain or temperature, the Optics formula collection
is also provided; see Formula collection.
Further information can be found in the operating manual for your device and in the
catman Knowledge Base (via Help ► Knowledge Base at the top right of the pro-
gram interface).

4.5.3 Using ARAMIS channels (GOM testing controller)

See also Settings for ARAMIS (GOM testing controller), Integrating optical mea-
suring devices.

catman communicates exclusively with the PC on which the testing software is running
(GOM Testing Controller). All channels defined there, the NTP time channel and the Diag_
Sec_Number channel are displayed. It is not possible to configure the channels in
catman.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 173
 Diag_Sec_Number is a sequential numbering of the received data packets. Missing
numbers would indicate lost data.

catman cannot carry out any configuration on the Testing Controller, and in par-
ticular cannot change the sample rate. So make sure that the sample rates set in
catman and in the Testing Controller for deformation tracking are identical.

Notes
Exit catman before stopping deformation tracking.
catman cannot check whether the configuration of the Testing Controller still
matches the one in the catman project.
You must create a new catman project if the Testing Controller configuration
changes.
Note that the Testing Controller's sample rate is not guaranteed in all cir-
cumstances. Interference on a camera image or a high CPU load might reduce the
sample rate for example. We therefore recommend dragging the REL_TIME channel
onto the x axis of the graph with the Testing Controller data in order to obtain a cor-
rect display. The channel contains the NTP time for each data packet sent by the
Testing Controller. The NTP time is in UTC and seconds since 1.1.1970 (Coordin-
ated Universal Time, i.e. world time, corresponding to Greenwich Mean Time [Lon-
don time]).

4.6 Use GNSS channels (GPS)

See also Additional devices (adding devices manually), Add additional devices, Syn-
chronization in case 2: different devices (hybrid system).

With an NMEA-0183 compatible GNSS device you can create the following channels, for
example:
Geograph. longitude [-180 degrees (west direction) to 180 degrees (east direction);
up to 6 decimal places are relevant].
Geograph. latitude [-90 degrees (South Pole) to 90 degrees (North Pole)].
Height above SL (Sea Level, here the NMEA message GPGGA must be sent by the
device).
Speed over ground,
Time channel (UTC date and time, i.e. Coordinated Universal Time, corresponding to

catman
174 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 Greenwich Mean Time [London time]),
Wind speed and direction.
Depending on the device, further channels may be available. Make sure that the device
automatically sends the NMEA data.
You can acquire the GNSS receiver with a relatively low sample rate of, for example, 1 Hz
(slow sample rate). With a higher sample rate the last received values are repeated until a
new data record has been transferred.
You must use GNSS devices together with other measuring devices (Quan-
tumX/SomatXR, MGCplus).

With GNSS data the Channel info component window can display the original mes-
sages (NMEA sentences); for this, click on one of the GNSS channels. Click on Start
to start logging of the messages.

Background information
A GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) requires at least three satellite signals to
provide data. Four satellites are needed to determine the height above SL (Altitude). The
more satellites are received, the higher the accuracy of the positional data. Therefore, pos-
ition the GNSS receiver such that it has a view of the sky as free as possible so the satel-
lites can be received without hindrance.

catman evaluates the following GNSS data (sentences), provided they are transmitted:
GPRMC
This information should always be transmitted; it includes Latitude, Longitude,
Speed, UTCTime, SatStatus and True heading.
GPGGA
This information can also be present alone, i.e. without GPRMC. It includes Lat-
itude, Longitude, Altitude, Satellites and UTC Time.
GPVTG
This information includes True heading and Magnetic reading.
MWV
This information includes Wind speed (in m/s) and Wind direction (in degrees, i.e. °).
A sentence which begins with % is also evaluated and includes Pitch, Roll and Yaw,
but is however rarely present.
All other NMEA sentences are ignored.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 175
4.7 Assign channel names and colors

Channel names
Use unique channel names, as you will be selecting channels by name, for example in the
graphs. Alternatively, you can also use the sensor description as the channel name. If this
is done automatically when assigning the sensors, choose Accept from sensor database
or Accept from TEDS; see Sensors (Program options, Channels and sensors group). A ret-
rospective change is nevertheless possible.
To change names double click in the Channel name column or mark the channels ( or
key) and select Rename (DAQ channels tab, Channel group or in the context menu).
In the dialog, you can then either Apply the sensor designation or generate Automatic
numbering. You can also assign a channel comment here. The length of the comment is
not limited. The comment is displayed when you place the cursor over the channel in the
Channel name column.
You can also import channel names (and sensors/sensor types) from an Excel file.

Restrictions and notes

Channel names must be unique. If you try to assign a channel a name that already
exists, you see a dialog box: You can either rename the existing channel (you see
various options for renaming) or choose a different name for the current channel.
The channel name must contain at least one letter, pure numbers are not admiss-
ible.
The channel name must not be identical to the (internal) name of a math function,
i.e. Deriv, Mod, Integral etc. are not admissible. Combinations featuring these terms
(without blanks) are allowed however, e.g. Integral_of_force.
We recommend that no round or square brackets, blanks or dashes (minus signs)
are used in channel names; use an underscore (“_”), for example, instead. Other-
wise, this might lead catman to reject a computation as invalid.

Automatic channel colors

You can assign any channel a color by which it is identified in visualization objects, such
as graphs (the option is enabled by default). The color assignment is also restored when
saved measurement data are loaded. The option Default color of plots (menu File ►
Options, Channel list) determines, whether the column is displayed and the option Use
channel colors as default for plot colors (menu File ► Options, Panels) determines
whether the color is used. You can also use one color for multiple channels, e.g. red for

catman
176 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
all force transducers, blue for pressure transducers.
See also Program options: Channel list, Panels.

4.8 Import channel name and sensor assignment from Excel

If you have an Excel file holding channel names ( and the names or IDs from the Sensor
database for the connected sensors), you can transfer the data or parts of the data to cat-
man. Provided you are using XLS files (Excel 97-2003 workbook), Excel is not required on
the PC. When using XLSX files, Excel must be installed on the PC.

Procedure
1. Click on the DAQ channels tab if it is not the active tab.

2. Using Excel import in the Special group, open the Import channel parameters
component window.
3. Select the Excel file with Open in the component window.
4. In the component window, mark the column which contains the channel names
(click on the header line).
5. Select Channel name in the drop-down pick list. The header then contains the
description Channel name.
Reselect the entry, even if it is already displayed. The setting has only been
accepted by catman when the header line in the Excel table contains the name
and replaces the normally displayed letter.
6. If available, mark the column that contains the sensor types.
The texts in this column must match the texts in Name/description given in the
Sensor database.
Select Sensor type in the drop-down pick list. The header then contains the
description Sensor type.
7. In the list of channels (Configure DAQ channels window), mark the first channel of
the range for which you wish to import the data.
8. In the Import channel parameters window mark the range that you want to assign
(use ) and click on Apply.

The channel names will be assigned and a search will be made through the Sensor data-
base. If the sensor is available in the Sensor database, the channel will be adjusted
accordingly. You will receive an error message if:

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 177
 Sensors are not found,
Not all required settings can be carried out,
A sensor type on the channel entered cannot be used,
A channel name exists already or has been issued twice.

4.9 Test signal (only QuantumX/SomatXR)

See also Computation Signal generator.

With a test signal you can output a constant value or a function in the relevant channels
of MX modules. The values are recorded like normal measured values and—if the con-
nection to the channel is question is configured as the source for another channel—is
relayed to other modules.

Configure and activate test signal

1. On the DAQ channels tab select the channel you want to output the test signal.
2. Choose Test signal from the context menu of the Sample column.
3. Select the Mode: Off, Constant, Rectangle, Sine or Triangle.
4. Enter the Value (constant only) or specify the Level for the minimum and maximum
amplitude. In the case of periodic signals also specify the Frequency and Duty cycle
(only practicable in rectangle and triangle modes).
Example: Triangle with a Duty cycle of 99.9 (%) produces a sawtooth signal.
When the test signal is active the connector LED flashes and the Sample column displays
.
The signal remains active until you call up the dialog again and set Mode to Off or
restart the module. The test signal configuration is not saved in the DAQ project.

4.10 Digital input channels

See also Start and End of measurement, Limit and event monitoring, Splitting a
digital input, AutoSequences, EasyScript.

QuantumX/SomatXR
The digital inputs and outputs of the MX879 are detected from firmware 4.0 of QuantumX
and for SomatXR; they are acquired with the stated sample rate and displayed as 32 chan-
nels. You configure the digital inputs and outputs of the MX879 with Configure digital I/O

catman
178 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
(On-Board group on the DAQ channels tab).
See also QuantumX/SomatXR On-Board-functions.
You can use the digital inputs of CX22, CX27 and MX879 as trigger channels when start-
ing/terminating the measurement, for limit and event monitoring, in AutoSequences and
in EasyScript.
You can also display the status of a digital input directly in an LED.
Disable zero balancing for digital inputs. You can then use the Zero balance all hard-
ware channels function (Zero balancing group in DAQ channels tab), and do not
have to select individual channels.

MGCplus
The digital inputs of the ML78 are detected, processed as a bit mask (16 bits) and
acquired at the same time as the measurements. Use the function Split digital input to
extract the individual bits.
The digital inputs of the single channel plug-ins (bits 0 to 7) can only be used in
AutoSequences and in EasyScript. The inputs of a CP42 are also available for the limit
value and event monitoring or for starting/terminating the measurement (in this case
also CP22). With the single channel plug-ins specify the catman channel which also
includes the analog input (transducer) and with the CP42/52 specify the device.

PMX
The digital inputs of an PX878 are detected, processed as a bit mask (8 bit) and acquired
at the same time as the measurements (slot 10, sub-channel 1) Use the function Split
digital input to extract the individual bits. You can also use the inputs for start-
ing/terminating the measurement, for limit and event monitoring, in AutoSequences and
in EasyScript.

4.11 Digital output channels

Digital outputs can only be addressed by Limit values and events, AutoSequences
and EasyScript.

QuantumX/SomatXR
You can use the digital outputs of CX22, CX27 and MX879 for limit value and event mon-
itoring, in AutoSequences and in EasyScript.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 179
You configure the digital inputs and outputs of the MX879 with Configure digital I/O (On-
Board group on the DAQ channels tab).
See also QuantumX/SomatXR On-Board-functions.

MGCplus
For the digital outputs of an ML78 with one or two AP75s no separate catman channels
are created for the digital outputs. Therefore specify the catman channel which was cre-
ated for the digital inputs.
The digital outputs of single channel plug-ins (bits 0 to 3) can only be addressed by Auto-
sequences and EasyScript, and the outputs of a CP42/52 only by limits and events. With
the single channel plug-ins specify the catman channel which also includes the analog
input (transducer) and with the CP42/52 specify the device.

PMX
You can use the digital outputs of a PX878 (slot 10, sub-channel 2) for limit value and
event monitoring, in AutoSequences and in EasyScript.

4.12 QuantumX/SomatXR On-board functions

Apart from the digital inputs and outputs, the relevant channels and the On-board
functions group on the DAQ channels tab are only visible if, before the start of a
new project or loading an existing one, the following option is activated: Quan-
tumX/SomatXR: Use On-Board math in the device search options. You can access
the options, for example, via the Measure menu in the catman start window by
choosing Select device type, interface and additional hardware options and
Options. Once connection has been made to a device, the channels in catman are
initially deactivated. In the MX Assistant Help you will find detailed descriptions of
the functions.
See also Advanced options.

The modules must be connected via FireWire and the Isochronous data transfer
must be activated for all signals which are to be used as source signal for another
module. In this way the data interchange between the various modules is activated
and it is thus ensured that the relevant values are transmitted over FireWire and the
other modules are available. The activation is carried out automatically when cre-
ating computations in catman; you can also carry them out via the DAQ channels
tab and Active (Channel group). If the ISO column is displayed, one click in this

catman
180 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 column is sufficient.
See also Program options: Channel list.

Configure math functions

1. Mark a math channel.
2. Call the dialog for configuration with Configure math (Configure in the On-Board
functions group).
Different dialogs are shown depending on the selected channel (Settings for com-
putation of RMS value, Peak value configuration, Configure sum-
mation/multiplication, PID controller or MX460 rotation analysis).
3. Drag the source channel(s) from the channel list out of the Channel name column
onto the Input channel x field(s) or select the channels from the field in the dialog.
The isochronous data transfer is automatically activated.
4. RMS value: Define the time window for the computation.
Peak values: Define the desired function.
Summation/multiplication: Enter the coefficients for the desired formula.
PID controller: Enter the values for the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td as well as the set-
point value, or specify an MX channel if you want to use a dynamic setpoint. Two
segments of catman are supported.
Rotation analysis: Specify which function is to be used and define the frequency of
the high-pass filter and the scaling factor.
5. Click OK.

Configuring analog outputs (MX878, MX879, MX410)

With the MX410 you can only define the scaling; the outputs are permanently assigned to
the four inputs.
1. Mark the module with the analog outputs which you want to configure.
2. Call the dialog for configuration with Configure analog outputs (Configure in the On-
Board functions group).
3. MX878 only: Drag the source channel from the channel list out of the Channel name
column onto the Source field or select the channel from the Source field in the dia-
log.
The isochronous data transfer is automatically activated.
4. By way of the value pairs X1/Y1 and X2/Y2 you can define the scaling. Check whether
the suggested scaling corresponds to your requirements.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 181
5. MX878 only: Specify the filter to be used. The default setting Off uses the maximum
channel bandwidth.
6. Check that the desired analog output is also switched to active: in the Active
column.
7. Click OK.

Configure digital I/O (MX879)

1. Mark the module with the digital inputs/outputs which you want to configure.
2. Call the dialog for configuration with Configure digital I/O (Configure in the On-Board
functions group).
3. Define which module pins are to be used as input and which as output. With digital
outputs you can select the output level by clicking on Off or On in the Status column.
4. Click OK.

Configuring MX460 gate monitoring

The function is only practicable if you are using one MX460 and one or more MX410
devices in a QuantumX backplane. The function cannot be used with modules
which are only connected via FireWire.

The MX460 module can monitor whether a signal on one of its four inputs, which is
provided by an angular sensor (incremental sensor with values between, for example, 0
and 360°), lies within a certain angular range. With each entry into this angular range a
certain output connected to the mainframe unit is set to TTL HIGH and with each exit the
output is again set to TTL LOW. Up to four angular ranges can be monitored and the mon-
itoring can relate to four different channels or the same channel. The MX410 modules are
controlled via the mainframe with these signals: HIGH resets the peak-value memory
(Reset and Run) and LOW retains the last peak value (Hold). After each exit the cor-
responding channel of the MX410 therefore contains the peak value which has occurred
within the angular range.

Procedure
1. Mark a math channel of the MX460.
2. Call the dialog for configuration with Configure MX460 gate monitoring (Configure in
the On-Board functions group).
3. Activate the gate function (Active column).
4. Select the source channel from the field in the dialog.
You can only select MX460 channels.

catman
182 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
5. Specify the angular range to be monitored: Gate entry and Gate exit.
6. Click OK.
7. Specify the channel(s) of the MX460 relevant to the MX410 which are to handle the
control of the peak value function (see above).

Notes
CAN signals cannot be used as sources for functions.
Some modules can only process their own signals, not the signals of other mod-
ules. You will find details in the operating manuals of the relevant modules.
Zeroing is also possible with the math functions, but not with the peak value func-
tions. You can, however, inhibit the zeroing of a channel via Lock (Zero balancing
group in the DAQ channels tab).
Further information about the On-Board functions of QuantumX/SomatXR and the
possible settings can be found in the help for the MX Assistant.

4.13 Time channels in catman

There are two basic types of time channels:
1. Software time channels are the default time channels in catman.
2. Hardware time channels are time channels that are transferred from the connected
devices like measured values.
See also Hardware time channels.
In catman (software) time channels are recorded in the background by default, and are
always saved when saving the measurement data. One to three time channels are recor-
ded, depending on how many sample rate groups are active. The calculation of these
times is based on the preset sample rate. The time channels are not required by catman
itself however: To display a channel in a graph, simply drag the channel into a graph. cat-
man then calculates the time channel for the graph from the sample rate of the channel.
This corresponds to the Time from sample rate channel displayed in the list of DAQ chan-
nels on the Visualization tab. If you want to see the actual time since a triggered measure-
ment was started, for example, you need to drag the (software) time channel onto the X
axis. Otherwise, if you have overwritten a graph's defaults, drag the Time from sample
rate channel onto the X axis.
See also Channel list options on how to display the time channels in the channel lists.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 183
4.14 Computation channels
See also Restrictions on channel names.
You activate the display of the group with the dialogs for the computation functions
via the menu File ► Options; see Program function options. The function can be
locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Password protection.

Computation channels enable you to:

calculate using all measured values of one channel already during the measure-
ment acquisition with the measured values of another channel or with other com-
putations.
use functions such as integration, differentiation, sine, cosine, etc. on channels.
determine the effective value of a signal.
check conditions (measured value greater than ... ?).
convert measured values from strain gage rosettes into voltages, angles etc. while
the measurement is ongoing.
implement additional filter functions.
calculate a moving average or the average (mean) value over a specific period of
time.
calculate the electrical power of a signal.
compensate for the phase delay of filters.
determine the number of cycles in the case of periodic signals (e.g. in material ana-
lyses).
determine minimums and maximums in the case of periodic signals (e.g. in material
analyses).
monitor specific ranges of the measurement signal (sector monitoring).
convert the change in wavelength of optical strain gages into strain.
generate new signals (signal generator).
import existing measurement data from a file and process them simultaneously
with new measured values.

You can define computations of computations or enter complex formulas as on a pocket

calculator, which are then analyzed during the measurement for each measured value.
You can also use channels with different sample rates in one computation. The
sample rate of the first channel is used in the formula as the sample rate of the
result channel.

catman
184 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 Activate Live display ► Measure computation channels in the DAQ channels tab
(Channel group) to update the computation channels when you require a live dis-
play of the computations.
You can also create many calculations for multiple channels: simply drag multiple
channels into the field with the input channel(s), or highlight multiple channels and
click on next to the field for the input channel.

4.14.1 Define/change computation channels in DAQ project

To create a computation channel, select Create in the Computation channels group (DAQ
channels or Signal plan tab). In the Edit computations window you have a number of tabs
with the various computation functions. Define the computation you want and then click
on Create computation. Click on Close (at the top right of the Panel) to see the full chan-
nel list again.
You can also create many calculations for multiple channels: simply drag multiple
channels into the field with the input channel(s), or highlight multiple channels and
click on next to the field for the input channel.

You can also import computation channels from other projects: Menu File ► Import ►
Import computation channels. The import overwrites all existing computations, so carry
out the import before defining new computations.
If you want to use a computation in another computation, you must create the
second computation in the order of the channels after the first computation. Other-
wise you will see an error message when you start a DAQ job, and the channel will
be disabled in all jobs.
You can change the order of computation channels: Click in the first column of the
channel list and drag the channel in question to a different position in the channel
list using the mouse. Alternatively, you can also cut a computation and paste it in
front of a highlighted channel.

Assign channels
You have two options for assigning channels for most computations:
by drag & drop from the Channel name column;
by clicking on to insert selected channels.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 185
In most functions you can also define the computation for multiple channels, provided
you use or when selecting the channels to compute or separate the channels by ;
(semicolon). In these cases “computation_type_channel_name[index]” is used as the
name of the computation, but you can also edit names retrospectively: Select the com-
putation from the channel list (Channel name column) and choose Rename from the con-
text menu.

Changing a computation
To modify a computation, select the computation from the channel list (Channel name
column) and choose Edit computation from the context menu or use Edit in the
Computation channels group. Make your changes and then click on Apply changes, or on
Close if you do not want to make any changes.
To change the parameters for multiple computations of the same type sim-
ultaneously, select all the relevant channels (by or ).

Notes
If you define a constant, i.e. a computation, which does not contain any measure-
ment channels, a fictitious sample rate is saved. In a graph this can lead to the time
relationship to other channels not being correctly represented. Therefore in such
cases, use a definition which includes a channel with the desired sample rate
without taking the value into account, e.g. y = x + (0 * Channel z).
Via the menu File ► Options, you can also deactivate the possibility of defining new
computations; see Program function options (System group). Computations which
have already been defined are retained and will also be executed.

4.14.2 Algebra and formulas (computations)

The Algebra and formulas tab offers you several options:
1. Input via the Formula editor.
The formula editor provides the greatest degree of freedom in formulating com-
putations. Enter your formula as on a pocket calculator, e.g. (MGCplus_1_CH1 +
MGCplus_1_CH2)/2. All measured values of the channels MGCplus_1_CH1 and
MGCplus_1_CH2 are added together and the sum is divided by 2. The result is writ-
ten to a new channel, the computation channel.
The formula editor also allows you to include values of input objects on Panels in

catman
186 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 computations.
Frequently used formulas can be saved to a formula collection.
2. Input via Predefined formulas.
The advantage of this form is that the computations are made faster. This makes it
useful in time-critical cases, provided the required computation function is avail-
able here.
3. Use a table or a polynomial for Linearization of characteristic curves.
Select the desired function and enter the table values or the coefficients of the poly-
nomial as appropriate. In this way can linearize a characteristic curve without hav-
ing to change the characteristic sensor values from the Sensor database. As a
result, the original measured values and the linearized values are available to you
after the measurement.
4. Compute current minimum or maximum from multiple channels or compute the
dwell time of a channel with Statistics.
Computations that you enter using the formula editor require more processing power and
time than the predefined formulas. If a computation exists in one of the other groups, you
should preferentially use it.
Don't forget to give the new channel a name. Entering a unit is optional.

4.14.2.1 Formula editor

You always have to enter rational numbers in the Edit expression field with a
decimal point, not with a comma. The comma is used as a separator for the para-
meters with some formulas and must therefore not be used for numbers.

Drag the channels you want into the Edit expression field. The channel is always inserted
at the cursor position and will replace marked text. With drag and drop from the Channel
name column it is ensured that no typing errors appear in the channel name. Otherwise
specify computations as you would enter them on a pocket calculator.

clears the Edit expression input field.

The Additional functions dropdown box offers you additional computation functions.
Click on to transfer the selected function into the Edit expression field.

Formula collections
Add frequently used formulas to a formula collection so as not to have to keep entering
them repeatedly. You can create multiple formula collections.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 187
 creates a new formula collection. The file path and name are displayed below the for-
mula collection's input field.
adds the formulas from the currently loaded formula collection currently displayed in
the editor. Enter a name for the formulas so as to be able to retrieve them quickly from
the formula list in the collection. The description is optional, and is displayed as a tooltip
when you move the cursor over a selected formula.
opens an existing formula collection. The file path and name of the currently loaded
formula collection are displayed below the formula collection's input field. The supplied
formula collection OpticalFormulas in the Templates folder of the catman working direc-
tory contains formulas to convert the wavelength of optical strain gages into strain or
temperature.
See also Folder options, Working directory.

Inserting values of input objects into computations

Use one of the following functions:
Panel input: input(object name) contains the current value of an object, e.g. the pos-
ition of a controller or the content of a text box.
See also Controller, Developer tools (objects for predefined actions, clone actions,
AutoSequences and EasyScript).
Cursor position X: cursorx(graph name) contains the current x position of the (first)
cursor in the graph.
Cursor position Y: cursory(graph name) contains the current y position of the (first)
cursor in the graph.
Only available with the EasyScript module: procvar(variable name) contains the cur-
rent value of a process variable. The otherwise usual percent sign (%) before and
after the name is omitted here.

You should include a channel in the computation, multiplied by zero if necessary, to

define the frequency of the computation. Otherwise the channel is computed with
the highest used sample rate.

Don’t forget to activate Execution mode. Nothing is computed in Design mode.

Example
input(BAR_1) + MX840_CH 1 * 0
This means that the input of the controller BAR_1 is accepted and saved with the sample
rate of MX840_CH 1.

catman
188 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
4.14.2.2 Predefined formulas
This area contains a number of frequently used computations, such as to add or subtract
channels or calculate the derivation of a channel. The computations are made faster,
meaning they need less processing power than an identical computation that you enter
via the formula editor.

Split bitmask (digital input)

See also Digital input channels.

All digital inputs of a ML78 with AP75 (MGCplus) or of a PX878 (PMX) are combined into
a bit mask (max. 16 bits) and assigned to one catman channel. The input signals are
acquired at the same time as the measurements.
This tab provides the Bit test special function in the Formula editor area: You can use it
to split a bit-mask channel, i.e. extract the individual bits in their own result channels.

QuantumX/SomatXR
The digital inputs of the MX879 are detected from firmware 4.0 of the QuantumX and with
the SomatXR; they are displayed as 32 channels. Therefore, splitting is not necessary
here.

MGCplus
For ML78, 8 bits are available for each AP75, i.e. with two AP75, 16 bits are available. The
inputs on the single channel plug-in modules are only supported by AutoSequences and
EasyScript.

PMX
Per device with PX878, one channel (slot 10, sub-channel 1) with 16 bits is available.

4.14.2.3 Linearization
This section permits linearization by way of a table or polynomial, for example if you want
to apply the values of a sensor unscaled, or if you want to reduce the measurement error
of a thermocouple. If you have the linearization values in a table, you can paste them
from the clipboard. Alternatively, you can save the values to a file and reload them from
there. In the table, specify the x values in ascending order.
The values cannot be measured. You must determine the relevant values before-
hand, such as by a push-button measurement (with Manual control of the storage;
see Storage mode).

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 189
4.14.2.4 Statistics
The function calculates the current minimum or maximum of multiple channels.
It also provides a simple means of determining the dwell time. The function calculates
how long the signal is in a specific amplitude range. You will find dwell time calculations
with multiple ranges (classes) in real-time computation Class counting.

4.14.2.5 Mathematical functions

The instruction can differ from the descriptive text in the Further functions pick list,
e.g. the formula syntax floor( is produced for Next smaller integer.

Derivation, deriv
deriv(Arg1, Arg2) computes the derivation of channel Arg1 to channel Arg2. Only chan-
nels are allowed as parameters.

Example
deriv(Chan_Force, Chan_Displacement)
REM Computes the derivation of the force over the dis-
placement.

ABS (absolute value)

abs(Arg) computes the absolute value of Arg.

Examples
abs(-25.3) REM results in 25.3
abs(32.79) REM results in 32.79

acos, asin, atan (inverse trigonometrical functions)

acos(Arg) computes the angle for the specified cosine, asin(Arg) computes the angle for
the specified sine and atan(Arg) computes the angle for the specified tangent. The result
is given in radians (rad).

Examples
acos(0.7604) REM results in 0.7069 = 40.5°
asin(0.7604) REM results in 0.8639 = 49.5°
atan(0.7604) REM results in 0.6501 = 47.25°

catman
190 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
AND, Boolean operator
Returns 1 if the arguments on both sides are true, otherwise 0.
See also OR.

Examples
1 AND 1 REM results in 1
1 AND 0 REM results in 0

Bit test
bit(Arg, BitNr.) tests whether a specific bit is set in the argument. For this the argument
number is converted into a 32 bit integer. The lowest bit is bit 0. Both numbers and chan-
nels are permissible as argument. Produces 1, if the bit is set.
In DAQ mode the function is identical to splitting a digital input.

Examples
bit(25, 3)
REM The result is 1, because the third bit (23) is set (1 +
8 + 16 = 25).
bit(25, 2)
REM The result is 0, because the second bit (22) is not set.

ceil
See Next smaller integer.

cos
See sin, cos, tan (trigonometrical functions).

RMS value
The function is only available in DAQ mode. In analysis mode, use the Filter and
RMS over time window function.
Alternatively, in DAQ mode, you can also use the Filter: RMS function, which
provides additional low-pass filtering and is faster.

rms(Chan, dt, T) calculates the RMS value of a signal. Specify the time T in milliseconds
which is to be used for the computation. For the parameter dt you can either specify the
interval between two measured values (1/sample rate) in milliseconds or 0; then the
value is automatically determined from the channel sample rate. Specifying a parameter
value not equal to zero is only necessary if an auxiliary channel (AutoSequence,

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 191
EasyScript) or a computed channel is involved for which no DAQ channel is included in
the computation and so no sample rate can be determined.

Example
rms(Chan_Force, 0, 500)
REM Produces new function values every 500 ms. The values
are produced with the sample rate of the Chan_Force
channel.

EXP (exponential function)

exp(Arg) computes the value of the exponential function (e function) for the specified
operand.
In DAQ mode the function is also available as a predefined formula.

Example
exp(5) REM results in 148.413

floor
See Next smaller integer.

If (condition)
if(condition, TRUE, FALSE) outputs, depending on the condition, either the expression for
TRUE or the one for FALSE. Both numbers and channels are permissible as arguments.

Examples
if(Channel1 > 0, Channel1, -1 * Channel1)
REM This computation rectifies the signal
if((Channel1 > 350) OR (Channel2 > 740), 1, 0)
REM With this computation you can monitor multiple con-
ditions using a trigger. Trigger on this computation
channel, once the value is greater than 0.5.

Integral
integral(Arg1, Arg2) computes the integral of channel Arg1 over channel Arg2. Only chan-
nels are allowed as parameters.

Example
integral(Chan_Force, Chan_Displacement)

catman
192 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 REM Computes the integral of the force over the dis-
placement.

INT (integer)
With a computation in DAQ mode int(x) cuts off the decimal places from x. This method is
used here to speed up the computation. In Analysis mode, int(x) rounds an argument to
the nearest whole number.
See Floor/Ceiling.

Examples for DAQ mode

int(2.3) REM results in 2
int(2.8) REM results in 2
int(-2.8) REM results in -2
int(-2.1) REM results in -2

Examples for Analysis mode

int(2.3) REM results in 2
int(2.8) REM results in 3
int(-2.8) REM results in -3
int(-2.1) REM results in -2

LN, LOG (logarithm)

ln(Arg) computes the natural logarithm, log(Arg) computes the logarithm to the base 10.
If the argument Arg is smaller than or equal to 0, this will result in a run-time error.
In DAQ mode the log() function is also available as a predefined formula.

Examples
log(100) REM results in 2
ln(100) REM results in 4.605…

Max/Min
max(Arg1, Arg2) determines the greater, min(Arg1, Arg2) determines the smaller of two
numbers. Both numbers and channels are permissible as arguments. However the chan-
nels must be acquired with the same sample rate, because in each case the measure-
ments are examined at the same point in time.
See also Statistical functions.

Examples
max(25.3, 27) REM The result is 27

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 193
 min(25.3, 27) REM The result is 25.3
Use the display mode Minimum or Maximum of a Digital indicator, if you want to
obtain the extremum over a complete DAQ job.

Modulo division, mod

The modulo division Arg1 mod Arg2 finds the integer remainder from the division of two
integer numbers. If you specify floating point numbers, the decimal places are not con-
sidered. Both numbers and channels are permissible as arguments.

Example
14 mod 3
REM Since only 12 or 15 is divisible by 3, 2 is left as the
result (indivisible remainder)

Next smaller/greater integer, floor, ceil (round)

floor(Arg) rounds Arg to the next smaller integer. The arithmetic sign of Arg is considered
in this case.
See also INT.

Examples
floor(2.3) REM results in 2
floor(2.8) REM results in 2
floor(-2.8) REM results in -3
floor(-2.1) REM results in -3
ceil(Arg) rounds Arg to the next higher integer. The arithmetic sign of Arg is considered in
this case.

Examples
ceil(2.3) REM results in 3
ceil(2.8) REM results in 3
ceil(-2.8) REM results in -2
ceil(-2.1) REM results in -2

OR (Boolean operator)
Returns 1 if one of the arguments on both sides is true, otherwise 0.
See also AND.

catman
194 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Examples
1 OR 0 REM results in 1
0 OR 0 REM results in 0

PWR (power function)

Raises the operand preceding the operator ^ to the power specified in the subsequent
operand.

Example
2^3 REM results in 8

sin, cos, tan (trigonometrical functions)

sin(Arg) computes the sine, cos(Arg) the cosine and tan(Arg) the tangent. The argument
Arg must be given in radians (rad).
In DAQ mode the functions sin() and cos() are also available as predefined
formulas.

Examples
sin(1.5708) REM results in 1
cos(1.5708) REM results in 0
tan(0.7854) REM results in 1

SQRT (square root)

sqrt(Arg) computes the square root of Arg. If the argument Arg is smaller than or equal to
0, this will result in a run-time error.

Example
sqrt(9) REM results in 3

Statistical functions min/max/mean value and standard deviation across entire

data set
The functions calculate these statistical values across an entire data set. Not just one
value is stored, however, but usually as many as the data set or another channel con-
tains. You must therefore include a channel in the computation, multiplied by zero for
example, to define the frequency of the computation.
See also Max/Min.

Example
cstd(channel1) + 0*channel1

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 195
System time
The function is only available in DAQ mode.

Outputs the elapsed time in milliseconds since the PC was started.

Random number, rnd

rnd(Arg1) returns a random number between 0 and 1. If you frequently require the func-
tion, you can determine the starting value of the random sequence generated by the PC
via the entry of a number for Arg.

Examples
rnd(5)
rnd()

4.14.2.6 Mathematical operators

You can use the following operators within mathematical expressions.

Brackets
Use brackets around numerical expressions or function arguments or to enforce a spe-
cific analysis sequence.

Examples
sin(%P1%)
(%P1% + 5) * 2 REM without brackets %P1% + 10 would be
calculated

Boolean operator: AND

Logical AND. The expression is 1 if both expressions on the left and on the right-hand
side of the operator are true (equal 1), otherwise 0.

Example
%MaxTemp% > 100 AND %MaxPressure% > 50

Boolean operator: OR
Logical OR. The expression is 1 if either the expression on the left or on the right-hand
side of the operator is true (equal 1), otherwise 0.

Example
%MaxTemp% > 100 OR %MaxPressure% > 50

catman
196 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Less than, greater than, equal to, not equal to, etc.
Less than (<), greater than (>), does not equal (<>), equal to or greater than (>=), less than
or equal to (<=). The expression is 1 if the condition is met, otherwise 0.
The equal operator (=) compares the expressions to its right and left. Results in 1 if both
expressions are mathematically equal, otherwise in 0.

+, -, *, /
Add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/). If when dividing the divisor = 0, this will result
in a run-time error.

Additional text operators for AutoSequences (chaining text, compare)

You can use the following operators with AutoSequences in expressions with texts (in
double quotes) or with process variables containing text.
See also Formula expressions in assignments.
In these cases do not use any mathematical operators and functions, because
"TEST_" & %Counter% + 1 with a value of 3 for %Counter% would produce the text
TEST_3 + 1. The value of %Counter%, increased by one, is not appended to TEST_ as
would normally be the case with the expression %Counter% + 1.

Chaining text
The operator & chains texts with process variables. Use the function Format$() com-
mand in the EasyScript help (F1 in the script editor), to format process variables that con-
tain numbers as text.

Examples
"TEST_" & %CycleCounter% & ".DAT"
"The maximum temperature was: " & Format$(%MaxTemp%,"0.0")
"Kraft: " & Format$(%MaxPressure%,"0.0e+0")
Use a double & if an & character itself is to be present in the text.

Example
"Use drag && drop to assign the channel"

Comparison
The operator = compares the texts to the left and right of it. Results in 1 if both texts are
identical, otherwise 0. Upper or lower case is ignored in the comparison, meaning "TEST"
= "Test" results in 1.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 197
Example
%FileName% = "TEST.DAT"
REM Returns 1, if the expression is true, otherwise 0

Use a double equal sign (==) if an equal sign itself is present in the text.

Example
"Max. temperature == " & Format$(%Temp%,0.0) & " degrees" =
"Max. temperature == 25.0 degrees"

Formula expressions in assignments

A formula expression in an assignment can include numbers, texts, process variables,
mathematical functions, brackets and operators.

AutoSequences
Place texts in double quotes ("") and use the operator & to combine process variables
and texts (chaining).
Format process variables which contain numbers and are to be output as text with the
function Format$() command in the EasyScript help (F1 in the script editor).

Examples:
%Temperature% * 5
sqrt(%MaxVal%) + %MaxVal%/2
%MaxTemp% > 100 AND %MaxPressure% < 300
REM Returns 1, if the expression is true, otherwise 0
%FileName% = "TEST.DAT"
REM Returns 1, if the expression is true, otherwise 0
"TEST_" & %CycleCounter% & ".DAT"
REM Returns TEST_1.DAT, TEST_2.DAT etc.
"The maximum temperature was: " & Format$(%MaxTemp%,"0.0")
REM Outputs the temperature with one decimal place

catman
198 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
4.14.3 Strain gage computations

Stress analysis (strain gage rosettes)

When Auto-complete is active, you only need to drag or double click the channel with grid
a into the field a for the Strain channels. The following channels will then be entered auto-
matically as channels for measuring grids b and c.
Select the required computations by clicking them in the section Create computation
channels and enter the Rosette type. With Single S/G the strain is only multiplied by
Young's modulus (modulus of elasticity), so the computation is therefore only suitable for
a uniaxial stress state. With 90° 2-axis the strain gages must be installed in the direction
of the principal normal stresses, otherwise the results are incorrect.
In the Material properties area, you can also enter the unit of the Young’s modulus next to
the value. The unit will be used for the computed stresses as well.

Temperature compensation
The compensation of temperature influences, which is often necessary for strain-gage
measurements, can take place in principle in three ways:
1. “Classically” by using an active strain gage and another strain gage of the same type
(same lot number of the foil) which only acquires the thermal expansion of the com-
ponent. Both strain gages are wired in a half bridge and connected as a DAQ chan-
nel.
2. By using a separate DAQ channel with the same type of strain gage which only
acquires the thermal expansion of the component (separate piece from identical
object material). This measurement can be subtracted from many active channels,
each containing only one active strain gage. This means that many active channels
can be compensated with one compensation strain gage if the temperatures of
these strain gages are similar enough.
3. By entering the polynomial from the strain gage package and the use of a channel
which acquires the temperature at the measuring point. Here too, the compensation
for several active strain gages can also take place using one temperature channel. In
this case select the Strain gage ► temperature compensation real-time com-
putation. Specify the channel which records the temperature at the measuring point
in the Temperature channel section. In addition to the polynomial coefficients ai you
must also specify the thermal expansion coefficients and the reference temperature:
αS/G is the thermal expansion coefficient of the strain gage in ppm (10-6/K) as stated
on the strain gage package, αMaterial is that of the material on which the strain gage

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 199
 is installed and TRef is the temperature in °C for which the polynomial has been deter-
mined with a deviation of zero. This is the point at which the polynomial curve
passes through the line at zero strain (usually 20°C). To additionally compensate for
the temperature dependency of the gage factor (αGage factor, approximately 1% per
100°K with Constantan strain gage), also specify the value (in ppm/K). Otherwise
leave the field blank or enter 0.

Strain rate
The function computes the change in strain over time in µm/m per second.

Abbreviations and formulas used for strain gage rosettes

The following letters are appended to allow you to distinguish between the strain gage
computations:

Abbreviation Computation
AG Angle

SS1 Principal normal stress 1

SS2 Principal normal stress 2

SH Shear stress

ES Reference stress according to von Mises

SSX Stress X: Stress in the direction of grid a

Stress Y: Stress prevailing at 90° to grid a. The direction is applied

SSY
mathematically positive (anticlockwise).

SN1 Principal strain 1: Strain in direction of principle nominal stress 1

SN2 Principal strain 2: Strain in direction of principle nominal stress 2

SNX Strain X: Strain in the direction of grid a

Strain Y: Strain prevailing at 90° to grid a. The direction is applied

SNY
mathematically positive (anticlockwise).

Shear strain: Strain prevailing at 45° to grid a. The direction is applied

SNA
mathematically positive (anticlockwise).

With Type of rosette 90° 2-axis, the rosette must be installed in the direction of the prin-
cipal strain. As the angle you get either 0° or 90°.

catman
200 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Formula: SG rosette, angle
The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

The arctangent is calculated so that the angle is output in the correct quadrants I to
IV.

Formula: SG rosette, principle nominal stress 1

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, principle nominal stress 2

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 201
Formula: SG rosette, shear stress
The following applies to 0°/45°/90° and 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, reference stress acc. to von Mises

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° and 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, stress X

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, stress Y

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, principle strain 1

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

catman
202 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, principle strain 2

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, strain X

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° and 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

Formula: SG rosette, strain Y

The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 203
Formula: SG rosette, shear strain
The following applies to 0°/45°/90° rosettes:

The following applies to 0°/60°/120° rosettes:

4.14.4 Filter
In this window you have various filter functions available:
Mean over a certain time window,
Running average,
Running RMS value over a certain time window,
Low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and band-rejection filters (Bessel and But-
terworth),
Sound pressure filter which computes an A-weighted sound pressure level in dB
(dBA),
Phase correction (propagation time delay).
The computation enables you to compensate the different propagation times of
various filters by appropriately delaying those channels having shorter propaga-
tion times.
Human vibration filters with various weighting functions to EN ISO 8041, e.g. Wd
weighting for horizontal whole-body vibrations in the x or y direction. See also ISO
2631.
Static and dynamic computation for periodic signals.
The computation allows you to record both the amplitude of the peak values and
the arithmetic mean of a periodic signal.

The filters enable you to specify a cutoff frequency. However, it depends on the
sample rate whether this frequency can actually be used. With a sample rate of, e.g.
300 Hz, frequencies over 150 Hz cannot be acquired at all and even a filter of
100 Hz is relatively impracticable. For catman a filter is therefore invalid and is not
computed when either the sample rate/cutoff frequency < 5 or the sample
rate/cutoff frequency > 10,000. The filter cutoff frequency to be specified relates to
the -3 dB cutoff frequency (with HBM devices cutoff frequencies are often -1 dB

catman
204 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 values; exceptions are PMX and the filters for the decimal sample-rate domain of
the QuantumX/SomatXR).
The filters present in older versions of catman can now be found under the Anti-ali-
asing filter function.

Procedure
1. Select the computation with Function .
2. Drag the required channel into the Input channel field, for example by drag & drop.
3. Average, Running average and Running RMS
Specify the number of values (Number of points) or the Time window to be used for
the computation. The more points or the longer the time you specify here, the more
the measurements are “smoothed”, i.e. the individual original values (brief peaks)
have a weaker effect. With periodic signals you should use at least two to five peri-
ods as the time span for the RMS value. The Mean value over time window function
requires less computation time.
For the mean and RMS values a 4th order low-pass filter is applied after the com-
putation. Specify the filter type and the desired 3 dB Cutoff frequency as a per-
centage of the sample rate for the low-pass filter.
Filter
Specify the filter type and the desired 3 dB cutoff frequency. An algorithm is used in
which the Cutoff frequency is as close as possible to the specified value. The filters
are of the 8th order and are therefore usually steeper than the hardware filters avail-
able in the devices. In the case of the anti-aliasing filters you must specify the Cutoff
frequency as a percentage of the sample rate. In the case of band-pass and band-
rejection filters (only Butterworth, as Bessel is not steep enough) specify the Upper
and Lower cutoff frequencies.
Phase correction
Specify the difference between the propagation times of the filters as the delay time.
Static and dynamic computation
Specify the Time window in which the computations are to be performed. The time
must be long enough to capture at least one oscillation, but preferably more. The
dynamic value then results as (PeakMax – PeakMin)/2, the static as (PeakMax +
PeakMin)/2, if you activate the respective computation. By setting the interval over-
lap you can specify that the time windows for the computations overlap by the spe-
cified percentage. The output rate of the result channels is identical to the sample
rate of the input channel. So you can display the results in the same graph as the ori-
ginal channel, for example.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 205
4.14.5 Peak-Valley (cycle counter, min/max)
With periodic signals this function enables you to calculate the number of periods from
the signal itself. In addition, the minimum and maximum of the period are determined. So
the function generates a total of 3 result channels.

Drag and drop, for example, the channel with the periodic signal into the Input channel
field.
Specify the Hysteresis (reproducibility and repeatability errors), meaning peak-to-peak
amplitude which the signal must have as a minimum to be counted as an oscillation. Any
form of signal can be taken and it does not need to be sinusoidal. Favorable values are,
for example, 20% of this peak-peak amplitude. The value should be clearly above the sig-
nal noise level to prevent erroneous counting. Use a filter as required if you have a signal
with short but high perturbation amplitudes.

By default, only one value is generated per cycle (one counter value and a minimum and
maximum). With the Synchronize output to sample rate of input channel option, you can
keep repeating the values until new values are available. This allows you to display the
counter value or the minimums or maximums in a graph at the same time with other mea-
surement channels. A disadvantage is that there is no data reduction.

If there is only one value per cycle, you cannot plot these channels in a graph at the
same time with other measurement channels.

The function is similar to the cycle counting during the DAQ job Cycle-dependent
intervals (long-term measurements).

4.14.6 Class counting

You should be familiar with the basic principles of class counting to be able to use
these computations practically. Otherwise, obtain the information from the appro-
priate literature.

Drag the required channel into the Channel to be classed field, for example by drag &
drop.
For the Counting method specify which class counting method is to be used. Then,
depending on the method, specify the appropriate parameters in the Configure class
counting window.

catman
206 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Rainflow (FromTo, RangeMean)
This class counting method is used, for example, in the determination of material fatigue.
Here, material stresses or strain traces are monitored and analyzed. Expressed simply,
the method counts the frequency of occurrence of certain amplitude values. To achieve
this, the amplitude range of the output signal is subdivided into sections, the so-called
classes.

Time-at-level, span pairs

The time-at-level class counting method determines how long a signal is located in a cer-
tain amplitude range. Here too, the amplitude range of the output signal is subdivided
into sections, the so-called classes. With span pairs the frequency of occurrence of cer-
tain amplitudes is analyzed. Both computations are normally displayed in a histogram.

2-dim dwell time

This class counting method also involves determining how long a signal is located in a
certain amplitude range. However, an analysis also takes place of in which amplitude
range a second channel is located—the reference channel. An example of this is the mon-
itoring of a speed channel in relationship to the rotational speed which shows the use of
the gearshift during a test run.

Special features in DAQ mode

Since at the time of the measurement the amplitudes occurring are normally no yet
known, generating the classes is a problem. If you set the limits too large, some classes
have no counted values, because they are never reached. If you set the limits too small,
you lose information, because most counts fall in the two marginal classes. In cases of
doubt use the option Determine limits from sensor measuring range.

Displaying results
Drag the results channel to an empty part of a Panel; catman then automatically selects
the suitable type of graph (histogram or 3D chart).
Alternatively, you can also display the data in the table object.
The display of class counting data in the DataViewer is currently not possible.

4.14.7 Optical sensors

From catman 4.2 onwards you have two ways of converting the wavelength to strain or
temperature:

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 207
1. You assign the appropriate sensor to the channel
The channel then shows the converted quantity and, for example, can be zero-bal-
anced. The original measurements of the wavelength are no longer visible and are
also not recorded.
See Assigning sensors (transducers) to channels.
2. You leave the original channel as it is and create a computation.
The computation requires an additional channel which can also be zeroed. The ori-
ginal channel can then not be zero-balanced and contains, as before, the original
measurements of the wavelength. This means that both values, the wavelength
and the converted quantity are acquired.

Procedure for creating a computation

1. Define the type of conversion: to strain or to temperature.
2. Drag one or several channels into the field Input channel ... or mark several channels
and click on adjacent to the field.
3. Complete the other fields as required by the computation.
Strain measurement: The gage factor is determined by the fiber and is stated on
the strain-gage pack. If available, also specify the type of temperature com-
pensation and then complete the required fields.
Temperature measurement: Specify the Type of temperature determination. The
appropriate values for the fields then displayed, for example the Dl/l0are stated
on the pack.
4. Measure the base wavelength of the sensor or sensors (corresponds to the zero bal-
ance).
5. You accept the details with Create computation.

4.14.8 Math libraries

You can use this tab to address functions from custom-programmed DLLs which are
executed in real time just like the other catman computations.

Requirements
The DLL that performs the actual computation must be created by HBM.
The DLL must be copied to the \DRIVERS folder in the catman installation directory.
The file MATHLIB.INF must be created or modified. This file in the directory
DRIVERS must have an entry describing the DLL.

catman
208 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Use the Math libraries tab to select the required function from one of the available DLLs.
Define the channels to be used for the computation as Current arguments (specify the
channel names). The Arguments required field normally contains explanatory notes on
the parameters being specified and their sequencing, so as to help you when defining
them. Please contact HBM if you require special functions.

4.14.9 Electrical power

The function creates the computations for various electrical power quantities derived
from the voltage and current:
the root mean square values for current and voltage (RMS_U, RMS_I),
the product of the current and voltage (UI)
the real power (REALPOWER)
the apparent power (APPARENTPOWER)
the reactive power (REACTIVEPOWER)
the power factor (POWERFAC), i.e. the ratio of the real power to the apparent power
(lies between 0 and 1)
and the phase (shift) angle (PHI)

If you are using a current probe or similar for the current measurement (a coil
around the conductor carrying the current), you have to correct the phase for the
voltage, because a current probe has a delayed indication of the current. If the delay
is not specified in the data sheet, you can use a purely resistive load (filament lamp)
in which the current and voltage are in phase and you measure the time difference
at the zero crossing of the two signals. Enter the value for the Current clamp delay.
The channel DELAY_U is then also generated and used in the computations.

The results channels are created automatically when you create the computation. Double
click on a computation channel to view the relevant computation. If you do not need com-
putations and are not using them in one of the formulas, you can delete them.
Drag and drop the relevant input channels into the Voltage and Current fields.
The frequency of the input signals should not be significantly above 100 Hz,
because otherwise the results may become too inaccurate due to the applied com-
putation function.

Specify the Time window over which the computation is to be calculated. The longer the
time you specify here, the more the measurements are “smoothed”, i.e. the individual ori-

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 209
ginal values (brief peaks) have a weaker effect. With periodic signals you should use at
least two to five periods as the time span.
For the RMS computations and the real-power computation a low-pass 4th order filter is
also applied to the result. Specify the filter type and the desired 3 dB cutoff frequency as
a percentage of the sample rate.

4.14.10 Signal generator/playback file

The signal generator offers you three functions:
1. You can produce any periodic signal (sine, rectangle, triangle, etc.).
The function enables you to generate test signals. You can also use the signals to
test other functions, e.g. filters. In addition to the basic function you can modulate
the signal (Amplitude modulation) or add a noise level (Noise). Also, you can
change the signal between 0 Hz and the specified frequency: Specify the rate of
change in Hz per second for Sweep.
2. You can simulate a CAN raw channel
You can use the channel for example to check the function of a CAN raw table.
3. You can specify a file (Playback file), the values of which are read in synchronously
with the measurements.
The file can be read with any of the sample rate groups which are available (the
allocation takes place as usual on the DAQ channels tab. Activate the Redo option
to start from the beginning again when the file reaches the end. Otherwise no more
measurements are read (and therefore no more are displayed).

4.14.11 Create new auxiliary channel

The Auxiliary channel function (Computation channels group in the DAQ channels tab) is
used to create an “empty” channel which you can fill with data using an AutoSequence or
EasyScript. Here, you can choose:
1. Whether the script procedure is contained in an EasyScript project.
2. Whether you want to directly enter the appropriate script code.
In the first case the EasyScript project must be loaded and started when the DAQ job is
executed. In the second case you do not need any EasyScript project. The script code is
saved in the DAQ project and becomes active on loading the project.

In order that catman knows how many values the channel will contain and so that you
can also display the channel in a graph, you have to state which sample rate is to be used

catman
210 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
for the channel when creating it. Specifying Manual enables you to also use fewer values
than would be produced with one of the three sample rates.
Entering a Unit is optional.

4.15 Limit values and events

You activate the display of the limit values and their monitoring via the menu File ►
Options; see Program function options . The function can be locked with password
protection, refer to Sensor options, Password protection.

Use the LED object if you only want to show the exceeding or undercutting of a
level.

With the limit monitoring you can:

Change the color of a plot in a real-time graph.
Display via an LED various images or symbols depending on measurements or com-
puted values (self-produced images are also possible).
Monitor a digital input.
Set a digital output.
Play an audio file.
The audio file can be repeatedly played until the monitored condition is no longer
present.
Send an email.
Be notified with a push notification.
Switch the storage of measurements on or off (with Pre- and Post-trigger, i.e.
before and after the specified event).
Switch the video recording on or off or record a single image.
Make an entry in the Log file (System log).
Carry out saving of the measured data (saving to a file).
React to errors during the measurement.
Call EasyScript functions (requires the optional EasyScript module).

You can also import limit values and events from other projects: Menu File ► Import
► limit values. The import deletes all existing definitions. Therefore, carry out the
import before defining new limit values or events.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 211
Working procedure
Assign the monitoring of high level or low level crossings as well as CAN message recep-
tion after the generation to one or more channels. The other events are independent of
channels and are always monitored during a measurement. The evaluation and execution
of an action occurs in each case after measurements have been read in (time between
two data transfers); see Data transfer and error handling.
You can monitor up to three limits or events per channel. Any order can be used. For
example, you can also just use limit value 3.
If you need more than three limit values for a channel, define a computation channel
which just uses the unchanged values from the original channel. Then define
another three limit conditions for this computation channel.

Show limit values on a Panel

The limit values can be displayed in a graph (Special tab in the Configure window of the
graph) as well as in an Analog meter and Bar indicator (Alarm tab in the Configure win-
dow of the object: Show alarm limits: From limit value). Use the Axes tab in the Configure
window for the Multi-bar graph. In a Digital indicator you can display the status of the
limit values using LEDs: Display tab in Configure window of digital indicator: Display limit
values. The LED object can also display limit values.

Notes
The reaction time to an event is determined by the frequency of the data transfer. In
the default setting, new measurements are transferred approximately every 100 ms,
and a reaction can only follow once the measurements are present in catman. In
the worst case the reaction time is therefore 100 ms or the time between two data
transfers.
See also Transfer of measurement data.
A digital output is set to the defined state when the limit value condition is fulfilled.
When monitoring for high level crossing or low level crossing, the output is reset
when the condition is no longer present. For other cases of monitoring define a fur-
ther limit for resetting, if this is to occur.
With MGCplus the digital inputs and outputs of an ML78 and of a CP42/52 are avail-
able. The limit value outputs from single channel plug-in modules, e.g. an ML55,
cannot be controlled.
With the PMX you can use the digital outputs of an PX878 (slot 10, sub-channel 2).
Open the catman log file via File ► Special functions ► Show System log.

catman
212 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
4.15.1 Defining/changing limit values/events

Specify limit values/events

1. Open the dialog for defining the conditions using Configure (Limit values/events
group on the DAQ channels tab).
2. Click on New.
3. Assign a meaningful Name.
The name should identify the Event type (condition) and the associated actions.
4. Define the Event type; see Available types and conditions of limit values/events.
5. Check that the event is Active (default setting).
6. Define the event condition; see Available types and conditions of limit values/events.
7. Define the Action(s).
8. If required, activate If alarm condition persists, repeat action after and enter the time
period in seconds.
Note that, for example, an audio file must be able to be played completely within
the repetition period, otherwise the playback is interrupted and starts from the
beginning again.
9. If you have entered alarm and warning levels, the corresponding actions must also
be defined on both tabs.
10. On the General action settings tab you can define that the actions are not to be
triggered too quickly consecutively by specifying a Pause between actions (“block-
ing period”). The definition applies to all actions.
11. Continue with point 2 to assign further events. Otherwise close the dialog.

When creating level monitoring the following steps are needed:

12. Mark the channel(s) in the channel list (DAQ channels tab) for which one or more lim-
its are to be monitored.
13. Using the Limit values/events group on the DAQ channels tab, select the event(s):
Open the Assign menu, select Limit value 1 to Limit value 3, and click on Assign.

For the event CAN (raw) message received, the following steps are necessary:
12. In the channel list (DAQ channels tab) mark the CAN raw channel for which one or
more messages are to be monitored.
13. Using the Limit values/events group on the DAQ channels tab, select the event(s):
Open the Assign menu, select Limit value 1 to Limit value 3, and click on Assign.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 213
Changing limit values or events
Click on the condition to the left in the dialog and change the required setting(s) on the
right. The new settings are accepted immediately and confirmation is not necessary.

4.15.2 Available types and conditions of limit values/events

High or low level crossing

Define Alarm level, Warning level and/or Hysteresis. Also define the color(s) to be dis-
played, if with the actions you would like to activate Change indicator color.
The hysteresis is only considered for the alarm level. Enter the same values for the alarm
and warning levels if you do not need a warning level. You must meet the following con-
dition:
Alarm level ≥ warning level in the event of high level crossing
or
Alarm level ≤ warning level in the event of low level crossing
Note for the Measuring range of channel setting that here only the alarm function is
used and that the level depends on the measurement range of the relevant channel
which has been set according to the sensor scaling. Therefore, this really involves
an overflow indicator of the amplifier and the value may therefore lie above the
sensor load limit.

Display in graph: Define whether on drawing the level the line should be horizontal (on the
y axis) or vertical (on the x axis). The default is horizontal.

Title in graph: Define here which text is to appear on the line. You have to define the draw-
ing for the appropriate axis and graph in each case; see Configure graph, Special tab.
Waiting time: The option allows you to hide short disturbance pulses. The defined action
is only started when the specified levels are exceeded or not reached for a time longer
than entered here. You can also enter your own values in place of the defaults.

High level crossing in frequency range

This monitoring requires the frequency spectrum visualization object (the object shows
an FFT chart in real time) on a Panel. Specify the frequency range (Lower/Upper fre-
quency limit) to be monitored for the channel(s) shown in this object. Since only the dis-
played channels are analyzed, you do not have to assign this condition to a channel.

catman
214 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Specify the Level from which the alarm is to be triggered and also a value for the Hys-
teresis. The values have the same unit as the frequency spectrum (see y axis of the
graph).

Channel overflowing
HBM industrial amplifiers transmit not only measured values but also status information,
such as whether the channel is overflowing. You can use this information to trigger an
action by way of this event, such as to send a push notification. You can specify a period
of time over which this status must occur in order to hide short-time disturbances. Other-
wise use 0 s. Note, however, that the input range of an amplifier is usually much larger
than the permissible measuring range of the connected sensor. In this case, the sensor
would be destroyed long before an overload occurs.
The overflow state is also signaled by way of the measured values, by default as
1,000,000—see Channel list options.

Digital input
Specify the channel (Input) containing the digital signal to be used, and the Bit/Condition.
With MGCplus you can only use digital inputs of the CP22/42 and of the ML78; the digital
inputs of single channel plug-ins are not available.

Receive CAN (RAW) message

You can only use the event if your project includes a CAN raw channel. Specify the Mes-
sage ID to be monitored in decimal or, prefixed with 0x, in hexadecimal notation. The
event is triggered when a message with the relevant ID has been read in.

Time interval
Specify an Interval and the Start time. The Start time can also be situated before the start
of the measurement; the interval then begins with the start of the measurement. Altern-
atively, activate Immediately.
See also Time-dependent intervals (long term DAQ).

Keyboard event
Specify the desired key combination.

On start/stop trigger
The event is triggered when the start or stop trigger of the current DAQ job occurs. Trig-
gers from recorders are not analyzed.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 215
After starting/terminating the measurement
The event is triggered when you click on Start and before the measurement actually
starts, or after the end of the DAQ job.

Error during the measurement

With this option you can log the date and time of each error and also react to the error.
You should use this condition if you have not chosen the default option for Behavior on
errors during the measurement.
See also Reconnect and initialize devices before start in Start recording.

Error during local data saving

The event is triggered when an error occurs during data saving (export of the measured
values from the temporary file). Local data saving means saving on the PC on which cat-
man is running or to a network drive.
The event is only triggered during the saving of the (temporary) data of a DAQ job,
not during the saving of the recording of a recorder.

Error during remote data saving

The event is triggered when an error occurs during transfer of files via FTP or SFTP—see
Remote data saving (FTP/SFTP).

Memory space critical

The event is triggered when the free storage and therefore the remaining measurement
time are smaller than specified. The computation of the free storage space takes into
account the space required for the storage of the temporary file and for saving the data
(from the temporary file) in addition to that for further data, e.g. a video recording.

CX22B power supply interrupted – UPS operation active

The CX22B module contains a UPS (uninterruptible power supply unit) that is able to
maintain the power supply for several minutes. The event is triggered as soon as the
(external) power supply to the CX22B has been cut. This means you can be notified by a
push notification, for example, and use the action Save data, terminate catman and
restart on return of power to save your measured values and terminate catman in an
orderly manner. During this action the Restart Monitor is run automatically on the CX22.
The program restarts catman if the power supply is restored before UPS mode is ended.

The UPS powers only the CX22B, not any connected MX modules. If those modules
do not have their own UPS, any ongoing measurement is terminated as soon as the

catman
216 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 modules are no longer being supplied with current. This action is executed before
catman terminates the measurement with an error message however. Other errors
are then also no longer signaled.
When the CX22B module has been shut down, the next time it is powered up a nor-
mal start is initiated. The same applies when the catman Restart Monitor restarts.
So you have to make the relevant settings to reload the project and resume the mea-
surement.
See also Program start options, Available limit value/event actions.

RT lag
The event is triggered when an RT lag occurs.
See also Possible problems during measurement, Preventing a RT lag (performance).

EasyScript EA_DAQ.TriggerEvent
The event is triggered when the script calls the name of the event with EA_DAQ.Trig-
gerEvent. You require the EasyScript option for this.

4.15.3 Available limit value/event actions

Standard actions

Set digital output

A digital output is set to the defined state when the limit value condition is fulfilled. With
the High level crossing and Low level crossing types of monitoring the outputs are reset
when the condition is no longer fulfilled. The hysteresis is only considered if the alarm
and warning levels are identical. With all other types of monitoring the outputs remain
unchanged. In these cases define another limit value if the output is to be reset.

Entry (in the) log file

You can make an entry in the log file of catman or in any text file. Here you can use place-
holders both in the file name and in the message text.
See also Log file (system log).

Send email
An Internet connection or connection to an outbound mail server is required for this
function.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 217
Click on Edit and specify the data for the email to be sent on the Email tab. In the mes-
sage text you can also use Placeholders. Then go to the Sever settings tab and specify
the log-on data for the mail server:
Address of the outbound mail server (Server),
whether Authentication is required (log on before sending),
User (email address of the mailbox owner),
Password of the mailbox owner,
Return address (From, normally also the email address of the mailbox owner),
The port to be used (normally 25, with SSL usually 465 or 587 is used, the figure
depends on the provider).
After closing the dialog the field shows, apart from Send email, the recipient's email
address in the dialog for checking.
For repetitions note the pause period (‟blocking period”) specified on the General tab.

Example

Server mail.gmx.net

Authentication yes

User [email protected]

Password ******

of [email protected]

Port 465

SSL yes

Push notification
An Internet connection is needed for this function.

For the push function you need a sender ID which is generated on the HBM server
reserved for this. You can request several different IDs for various events.
Create new ID: Enter a Title (description), which will appear as a message on your smart
phone. Also specify the Email address to which the message is to be sent. Then click on
Request ID. You then receive a message to the specified email address with the Push-ID
for this description.

catman
218 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 To ensure that the push notification is sent you should check the Push-ID after
entry with Verify ID.

Complete the entries in the other message fields, Subject and Text. Placeholders are also
possible.
If you have already installed an older version (1.0) of the HBM Push app, uninstall it
and install the current version (1.1). The HBM push app is not updated auto-
matically. Then add your push IDs again.

Perform data saving/storage

Depending on the action, you must use the Controlled by event monitoring/script
setting for the Storage mode and None for Data saving on the DAQ jobs tab so that
the event monitoring function can monitor the recording.

The action Stop DAQ, save data and restart DAQ is normally only needed for high sample
rates: the buffer in the measuring device should not overflow when storing the data. In all
other cases you can use Save data and delete temp.(orary) data storage. In addition you
can also specify for the actions with … save data … whether and how long already before
the specified point in time (Pre-trigger) and after the specified point in time (Post-trigger)
recording is to take place.
For repetitions note the pause period (‟blocking period”) specified on the General tab.

Save data, terminate catman and restart on return of power

The action is only available if you have selected CX22B power supply interrupted –
UPS operation active as the event type.

As soon as the (external) power supply to the CX22B has been cut, you can use this
action to ensure that all data recorded up to that point are saved and catman is ter-
minated with no further error messages.

The UPS powers only the CX22B, not any connected MX modules. If those modules
do not have their own UPS, any ongoing measurement is terminated as soon as the
modules are no longer being supplied with current. This action is executed before
catman terminates the measurement with an error message however. Other errors
are then also no longer signaled.
When the CX22B module has been shut down, the next time it is powered up a nor-
mal start is initiated. The same applies when the catman Restart Monitor restarts.
So you have to make the relevant settings to reload the project and resume the

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 219
 measurement.
See also Program start options, Available types and conditions of limit val-
ues/events.

Advanced actions

Change display color (plot color) of channel

Specify the colors in the Level section. The colors must differ from the standard color of
the plot!
The colors are used in the Real-time graph, the Post-process graph, the Cursor graphs
and the display objects Digital indicator, Bar indicator and Simple table.

Graphs: The color of the (complete) displayed plot changes. With the post-process
graphs this first occurs when the graph is updated, provided the condition is met at this
point in time. If you also activate limit condition on the Special tab, lines in the cor-
responding colors are displayed for the alarm and warning levels.

Digital indicator: The measurement is displayed with the alarm color. If you activate the
Show alarm limits option (Display tab), additional color fields are displayed in the Digital
indicator.

Bar indicator: The scale range is marked with the colors if you activate the Show alarm
limits option (Alarm tab).

Simple table: If necessary, deactivate the Disable limit value display option on the Gen-
eral tab so that the columns with the limit values are displayed. The cells are then high-
lighted with the appropriate colors.

Control video cameras (only with Video Cameras module)

The Video Cameras module is required for this. You also have to use the By event mon-
itoring or script setting to Start/Stop recording on the DAQ jobs tab so that the event
monitoring function can monitor the recording. You therefore receive a warning message
if this is not the case and can change the setting in this dialog for all DAQ jobs. With sub-
sequently created DAQ jobs check which setting is used.

Play sound file

Plays the specified wav file.
For repetitions note the pause period (‟blocking period”) specified on the General tab.

catman
220 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Run EasyScript function
The EasyScript option is needed for this. Click on Edit and enter the code to be executed.
For repetitions note the pause period (‟blocking period”) specified on the General tab.

MX471-CCP/XCP
Switches the send function on or off for the configuration loaded via the MX Assistant.
Select the relevant connector of the MX471 to the right.
See also CCP/XCP (ECU, only MX471).

4.15.4 How to delete/deactivate limit values/events

To irrevocably delete a limit value (limit condition), call the settings dialog using Con-
figure (Limit values/events group on the DAQ channels tab), choose the relevant limit
value definition on the left in the list and click on Delete.

You have a number of ways of deactivating limit values:

1. Using Configure (Limit values/events group), call the setup dialog and deactivate
Active.
The monitoring of this condition is then no longer carried out, but the definition
and allocation to channels remains.
2. Using the group Limit values/events, select the Off setting for the relevant limit value
(Limit value 1 to limit value 3).
The monitoring is only deactivated for the selected channels.
3. You can Deactivate Limit value monitoring (for all limit values) via the DAQ jobs tab
and Job parameters in the Settings groups.
The deactivation applies only to the selected job and the monitoring remains act-
ive in all other jobs.

4.16 Using Power BI

Power BI is a suite with Analytic Tools from Microsoft in the Azure Cloud. Power BI gives
visual analyses at your fingertips with intuitive reporting. You can use data from catman
to create visualizations or perform computations and analyses. You can also merge the
data from catman with other data of your company.
See also https://powerbi.microsoft.com.
The function is only suitable for channels with relatively slow data recording. The
minimum update rate is 0.5 s, which means that a maximum of 2 (individual)

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 221
 measurements are transferred per channel per second. The sample rate set in cat-
man is not relevant as long as it is at least as large as the update rate.

General procedure
The general procedure can be broken down into four steps:
1. Create an account with Microsoft.
2. Create a dataset.
3. Create a dashboard.
4. Link catman with the dashboard.
Power BI has several options for restricting user access or using apps for displaying
dashboards. As this is not a catman topic we cover here only the principle process of cre-
ating such a dashboard.

Step 1: Create an account

Go to https://powerbi.microsoft.com/en-us/get-started and create an account.
You will need Power BI Pro, if you want to create datasets and dashboards (a trial version
is currently available).

Step 2: Create a dataset

1. Log in with your account: https://powerbi.microsoft.com/.
2. In My workspace choose New ► Streaming dataset.
3. As type chose API and click on Next.
4. Specify a name for the dataset (Dataset name), for example Test1.
5. For each channel from catman that you would like to edit or display in Power BI, cre-
ate a data stream, i.e. specify a name and the type of data.
First create the Timestamp channel with type DateTime. This channel is
required for the x-axis of graphs.
Now create additional channels. If you know the catman channel name you can
specify it directly. You can assign any name and make the assignment to the
catman channels later in catman. As the channel type specify Number.
Activate the Historic data analysis.
Click on Create.
6. In the Streaming dataset created window click on PowerShell.
7. Copy the entire text to be displayed in the window under PowerShell into a text file.
8. Save the file, for example as PowerBI_Test1_Config. You can use any file extension.
If you use catpbi, the file will be directly detected by catman.
9. Click on Done.

catman
222 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
Step 3: Create a dashboard
1. In My workspace choose New ► Dashboard.
2. Give your dashboard a name, for example Test1_catman.
3. Add a tile from the Edit menu.
4. As the type chose REAL-TIME DATA (Custom Streaming Data) and click on Next.
5. Choose your dataset from above (Test1) and click on Next.
6. Choose a Visualization Type, for example Card (Digital indicator) or Line chart.
7. Choose one of your channels (data streams) under Value. For the graphs, select
Timestamp for Axis and one of your DAQ channels for Values. For diagrams you
must also define the Time window to display, for example 15 Minutes. For a digital
display, specify the number of post-decimal places to be displayed with (Value
decimal places). Leave the specification of the Display units on Auto.
If you would like to display the unit of a channel, you must specify the unit in the
title, subtitle or legend.
8. Confirm the selection with Next.
9. In the following dialog you can specify Title and Subtitle.
10. Confirm your entry with Apply.
You can change the size of the thumbnails. When you swipe towards the lower right
corner the new size is displayed, however only certain dimensions are possible. If neces-
sary create additional thumbnail or dashboards.
It might be necessary to refresh you browser window several times during the cre-
ation of a dataset or dashboard. Otherwise changes or newly created settings might
not become visible.

Step 4: Link data from catman with the dashboard

1. Start catman as usual and configure the channels as you normally do.
2. Copy the file you created in step 2 (PowerBI_Test1_Config.catbpi) to the catman PC.
3. Specify the file in catman: Special ► Cloud Data Streaming (DAQ channels tab).

4. Specify the file you created in step 2 (click on ). If you have selected a filename
extension other than catpbi, you must display All files in the file dialog.
5. Activate Enable data transfer.
6. Choose the sample rate, i.e. how often a (single measured value is sent to Power BI
per channel: Refresh every.
7. Choose the channels whose data you want to send ( ).
8. If the name of the dataset you chose in step 2 is identical with the catman channel
name, no further settings are needed. Otherwise you must specify the assignment of

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 223
 the catman channel: Choose the dataset in the Streaming Dataset value column. In
addition to channels, you can also specify Digital indicators or Analog meters (Indic-
ators tab) or process variables (Process variables) tab.
9. Close the dialog with Close window.
10. Start the measurement in catman.

4.17 Channel info (Component window)

The Channel info window (Window ► Channel info menu on right above the ribbon)
shows you the following information:
Error status, for example the reason for an overflow indication, problems with a
CANHEAD® module (ML74, MGCplus), etc. (not all device types support the display
of information),
Channel comment.
Enter the channel comment in the same dialog as the channel name. If a
sensor comment exists, it can also be included in the channel comments—see
Sensor options, Use sensor description as channel name. The comment is dis-
played when you place the cursor over the channel in the Channel name
column.
sensor ID of the assigned/found sensor,
serial number of the device or channel,
type of amplifier (for MGCplus with connection board) and set type of connection or
bridge,
currently set excitation voltage for a sensor,
filter (for the currently set sample rate),
status of the Autocalibration for QuantumX/SomatXR and MGCplus,
channel scaling,
gage (k) and bridge factor as well as measurement range for strain gages,
zero balance value.
The window also enables you to:
obtain information, such as the IP address or firmware version of the measurement
device (do not mark a channel, but instead mark the device in the list in the window
Configure DAQ channels),
print out the data,
flash the LED of the connector used by the channel (only QuantumX/SomatXR),

catman
224 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 activate the Autocalibration function of the MGCplus,
You change the type of autocalibration of QuantumX/SomatXR using Sensor ►
Autocalibration in the Sensor group of the DAQ channels tab.
call the PMX web interface,
view the original data of the device (if available) via Details, e.g. the XML data of a
QuantumX/SomatXR channel.
Mark another channel to switch to the normal display again.

4.18 Channel check

Activate display of the channel check as necessary via Program functions (Program
options, System group). The option is useful for MGCplus and some Quan-
tumX/SomatXR modules for example.

Do not confuse the shunt test with a shunt calibration A shunt calibration is only
possible with the MX460, because with this module the shunt in the transducer can
be activated—assuming appropriate wiring. In all other cases only a shunt res-
istance is activated in the measurement device, i.e. a shunt test.

The channel check enables you to check the DAQ channel when resistive transducers are
connected in a (Wheatstone) bridge circuit. Depending on the measurement device, you
have various possible tests available:
1. Check amplifier channel with in-device shunt resistor
This method is available with the following devices:
MGCplus with AP14, AP810, AP814 or AP815.
QuantumX/SomatXR MX1615, MX1616 as well as with MX238, MX410, MX430,
MX440 and MX840A/MX840B (not with MX840) with the connection of strain
gages via the adapter plug SCM-(R-)SG120/350/1000.
The signal is first measured, then the shunt resistor in the amplifier or the con-
nection board is activated and another measurement carried out. The measure-
ment results to be expected can either be calculated (possible with strain gages)
or determined before the test with a reference measurement (Measure in the Nom-
inal unbalance group) which is practicable for transducers, because here the unbal-
ance cannot be calculated.

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 225
2. Check amplifier channel with external shunt resistor
The activation of a shunt resistor in the transducer is only supported by catman
from the MX460. This corresponds to a shunt calibration.
Use this method for other devices only if you can externally connect a shunt res-
istor (manually) parallel to an arm of the (Wheatstone) bridge circuit.
Manual activation is always possible, but is quite difficult and complex in practice.
With this method you must always perform a reference measurement (External
shunt in the Nominal unbalance group) before the actual test in order to determine
the expected signal.

The channel check is only carried out for the visible channels and for channels with
connected and assigned sensors. Channels to which no sensor has been assigned
or which are overflowing and channels which have been masked out by a display fil-
ter are not measured.

A display filter set in the DAQ channels tab is also considered in the Channel check tab.
You make changes to the display filter via the DAQ channels tab.

Export channel table in the Test result group writes the displayed channels with all
results (and the expected values) to an Excel file (Excel does not need to be installed on
the PC for this). In addition, the device and the device address are logged.

4.18.1 Prepare shunt test (determine nominal unbalance)

To prepare the shunt test, the unbalance due to connecting the shunt must first be deter-
mined. Mark the channels for which the preparation is to be made. You have the following
possibilities depending on the device and sensor:
1. Compute nominal unbalance
You can only use this method when connecting strain gages. In these cases the
expected unbalance can be calculated from the strain gage resistance, the excit-
ation voltage and the shunt resistance.
This method is available with the following devices:
MGCplus with AP14, AP810, AP814 or AP815.
QuantumX/SomatXR MX1615, MX1616 as well as with MX238, MX410, MX430,
MX440 and MX840A/MX840B (not with MX840) with the connection of strain
gages via the adapter plug SCM-(R-)SG120/350/1000.

catman
226 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
 Click on Compute (Nominal unbalance group); the result is shown in the Nominal
unbalance column.
2. Measure nominal unbalance
This method is more advantageous when connecting strain gages, because the
actual unbalance is measured. It is also possible if you are working with trans-
ducers. The shunt resistor in the device can also be activated in these cases, but
the resulting signal cannot be computed, because the resistance relationships in
the transducer are not known accurately enough.
This method is available with the following devices:
MGCplus with AP14, AP810, AP814 or AP815.
QuantumX/SomatXR MX1615, MX1616 as well as with MX238, MX410, MX430,
MX440 and MX840A/MX840B (not with MX840) with the connection of strain
gages via the adapter plug SCM-(R-)SG120/350/1000.
With MX460, the shunt built into the transducer is activated by outputting a 5 V
signal (pin 15) (typical for torque transducers).
Click on Measure (Nominal unbalance group) to perform the measurements. The
difference is shown in the Nominal unbalance column.
3. Determine nominal unbalance with external shunt
When you select this method two further buttons appear in the Nominal unbalance
group: Measurement 1 and Measurement 2. First, carry out the first measurement
with Measurement 1 without a shunt. Then connect the shunt to the bridge arm
and carry out the second measurement with Measurement 2. The difference
between the two measurements is calculated and displayed in the Nominal unbal-
ance column.

Depending on the sensor and device, the unbalance is shown in the channel unit or in
mV/V. Finally, specify the Difference allowed for the test later. The deviation is defined in
percent of the expected unbalance; you can choose between 0.5% and 5% maximum per-
missible deviation. The usual deviations mostly lie between about 0.1% and 0.5%,
because here both the tolerance of the shunt resistance and also the temperature effects
of the shunt resistance and sensor play a role.

In cases 2 and 3, save the DAQ project, because the measured unbalance is only
saved in the project.

You can also change the value displayed in the Nominal unbalance column manu-
ally: Double-click in the corresponding cell and enter the required value or correct

catman
4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ 227
 the displayed value.

4.18.2 Perform shunt test

To carry out the shunt test the unbalance, which arises by switching in the shunt, must be
known. If you have measured the unbalance during the preparation, load the relevant DAQ
project again. Otherwise you can only perform a new computation if there is no value
present in the Nominal unbalance column; see Prepare shunt test.
Mark the channels for which the shunt test is to be performed. You have two methods of
performing the test:
1. With internal shunt
The signal is measured, then the internal shunt resistor is activated and another
measurement is carried out. The difference between both measurements is output
in the Measured unbalance column and compared with the value stated in the
Nominal unbalance column. If the deviation is smaller than the selected percent fig-
ure (percent referred to the expected unbalance) given under Allowed difference in
the Shunt test group, the result is evaluated as Shunt test OK.
Also use this method for MX460. With this module, the output of pin 15 is activ-
ated and, if connected correctly, also the shunt built into the transducer too.
2. With external shunt
On selecting this method two further buttons appear in the Shunt test group: Mea-
surement 1 and Measurement 2. First, carry out the first measurement with Mea-
surement 1 without a shunt. Then activate the shunt (manually) and carry out the
second measurement with Measurement 2. The difference between the two mea-
surements is compared with the value given in the Nominal unbalance column. If
the deviation is smaller than the selected percent figure (percent referred to the
expected unbalance) given under Allowed difference in the Shunt test group, the
result is evaluated as Shunt test OK.

Deactivate the channels, for which the channel check could not be successfully car-
ried out, using Deactivate defective devices in the Test result group in all DAQ jobs.
Marking the channels is not necessary for this.

Export channel table in the Test result group writes the displayed channels with all
results (and the expected values) to an Excel file (Excel does not need to be installed on
the PC for this). In addition, the device and the device address are logged.

catman
228 4 SETTING UP CHANNELS (MEASURING CHAIN) (DAQ
5 SETTING UP VID EO CAM ERAS

The dialog is only available with an active Video Cameras module.

See also Configure video recording.

Use Rescan (Extended functions group) to find a camera which was connected only
after starting catman.

You configure the recording parameters of your camera(s) using the Video Cameras tab.
In the dialogs all codecs installed on the PC and various file formats and resolutions are
offered. However, you cannot use every combination: Some codecs only operate with cer-
tain resolutions and not every codec can be used with every file format or frame rate
(FPS, frames per second), etc. For example, if recordings for a certain codec can only be
made with a fixed frame rate, the setting in the FPS column is ignored.
As from catman 5.3.2 you can also use cameras that already transmit a compressed
(Ethernet) data stream. To do so, select Video source: RTP stream, as these cameras can-
not be automatically detected, and specify the camera's IP address. The advantage of
such a camera is that the compression does not have to be done by catman, so the CPU
last resulting from the camera data is relatively low. Some options, such as compression,
are not available for those cameras however.

Check the box in the Live column on the tab as required to activate the display of the con-
nected camera(s) in the video window. (The subsequent recording is not affected by this.)
If no display of the camera picture occurs, the selected combination of compression, res-
olution, etc. is not possible.
Live display only makes sense for testing cameras with RTP streaming. As the data
stream has to be decompressed for this, the CPU load is increased and the advant-
age of a precompressed data stream is lost.

If the relevant driver or codec supports it, you can make other settings (the dialogs
are dependent on the driver or codec) using the Configure camera/video com-
pression (Extended functions group). Since these settings act directly on the driver
or codec software, they cannot be saved in the DAQ project.

Procedure
Try out which settings produce a good compromise between the file size generated and
the CPU computing load:

catman
5 SETTING UP VIDEO CAMERAS 229
 Start a test recording: Record (Test recording group). The file produced in this
way will be deleted by the next start of catman at the latest, otherwise a new record-
ing will overwrite the old file.
If the recording does not start, the selected combination of compression, file format,
resolution, frame rate (FPS) and/or audio settings is not possible. If data are recor-
ded, you will see whether frames (single pictures) have to be dropped in the case
where the PC speed is not sufficient for the codec or frame rate.
At the end of such a recording (click on Stop) the data rate in MB per second
and the frame rate achieved are displayed in the video window.
The settings for starting and stopping the (later) recording are set up through the
DAQ job video settings.

Since very different settings are possible depending on the configuration of your PC,
but generally not all settings can be used, you must carry out a recording test with
Record to check whether the selected settings can be used. Depending on the PC
performance, camera driver, codec and file format, it may be that no data is pro-
duced, the compression leads to artifacts in the picture or many frames (single pic-
tures) are dropped. Therefore, it is essential to view the produced test recording
with Play (Test recording group).

Recommended codecs (video compression)

A good compromise between CPU loading and file size is offered by the codec Microsoft
Windows Media Video 9. You can download the codec from Microsoft at
https://www.microsoft.com.
The MPEG Layer 3 codec from Microsoft which is included in Windows does not
work without problems in conjunction with catman. Use an alternative codec, e.g.
LAME Direct Show Filter 3.99.5 or Lame MP3 Encoder 3.99.5 or 3.100. The codec
can be download from the Internet, e.g. from
http://www.free-codecs.com.

Supported cameras
As a prerequisite, the camera must support DirectShow of Windows (except with the RTP
stream video source), meaning there must be drivers which are compatible with WDM
(Windows Driver Model) or VfW (Video for Windows). You will find tested and supported
camera types in the catman data sheet; see
https://www.hbm.com/Support ► catman.

catman
230 5 SETTING UP VIDEO CAMERAS
For analog cameras you can also use a video encoder, e.g. the model M7001 from Axis
(http://www.axis.com) which converts the analog RGB signal to Ethernet. The driver, AXIS
Video Capture Driver, must be installed for operation: http://www.ax-
is.com/techsup/software/capture_driver.
catman supports most USB cameras. HBM recommends the Logitech models C910 and
C920 for example. All Axis Ethernet cameras are also supported, in conjunction with the
Axis Streaming Assistant, as are Stingray F-033B/C Firewire cameras from Allied Vision.

Background information about DirectShow

The DirectShow interface has been part of the Windows SDK since November 2007 and
the corresponding technologies for the codecs and filters used, e.g. MPEG-1, MP3
(Fraunhofer) or Windows Media Video, are included in the Windows license. In Windows 7
the DirectShow functions are called, for example, Enhanced Video Renderer (EVR) and
support DXVA 2.0 (DirectX Video Acceleration). Other codecs, e.g. MPEG-4, AAC or H.264,
can be integrated. Generally however, you must pay license charges for this, i.e. you must
either purchase the codecs or filters separately or together with a program.

catman
5 SETTING UP VIDEO CAMERAS 231
 catman
232 5 SETTING UP VIDEO CAMERAS
6 CONFIGURING D AQ JOBS

You can work with just one DAQ job or create several DAQ jobs. You can additionally cre-
ate multiple recorders for each DAQ job (requires catmanAP, and is limited to 512 chan-
nels per recorder), and so control the recording (and data rate) of the measured values
differently for individual channels. Without a recorder, all channels are recorded sim-
ultaneously.
If you have multiple DAQ jobs or recorders, give each one a name to identify and dis-
tinguish the respective settings: In the job list, click twice in the relevant name (do
not double-click) to activate the editing mode.

What measuring options do you have?

1. Manual start/stop with sample rates from 1 Hz to 100 kHz (depending on the
device).
2. Measurement with start and stop trigger and sample rates from 1 Hz to 100 kHz
(depending on the device).
3. Measurements in which a measured value is stored only at the push of a button, e.g.
to determine a calibration curve. Use a low sample rate, e.g. 10 Hz, and Storage
mode Manual storage control.
4. Measurements at longer intervals from several seconds to hours. For this use event
monitoring and the Data storage event, either with a Time interval every x seconds
(save 1 measured value) or with two time intervals which activate and deactivate
saving at intervals offset by the desired recording period; see also Limit values and
events.
5. For example, there are special measurement and recording procedures for material
testing: Cycle-controlled and time-controlled measurement, in which you can define
how often, and for how long, all measured values are stored, and how often peak val-
ues are stored, over what period of time; see Cycle-dependent intervals (long-term
DAQ) and Time-dependent intervals (long term DAQ).

What can you define for a DAQ job?

Which (maximum) sample rates are to be used (General in the Settings group),
Whether—and if so, which—test parameters to save.
Whether an event log is saved.
Whether statistical values are determined in addition to the DAQ job
(min/max/mean values over a specific period of time).

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 233
 How often how much data can be transferred (Advanced in the Settings group).
What happens in the event of errors (Advanced in the Settings group).
If you have catmanAP and are using recorders, you can make the following settings for
each recorder separately; otherwise make the settings for the DAQ job:
How to start or stop the measurement or recording.
What sample rate is used for the recording.
Which channels are involved in measuring (Channels in the Settings group).
The file to save to after measuring (Storage in the Settings group).
If you are not using recorders, you can use Channel in the Settings group to additionally
specify whether an active channel is stored in the temporary file, and whether it is
included when saving to a file. All active channels of a recorder are also saved.

Default settings
If you do not make an entry, catman performs a continuous measurement at a sample
rate of 300 Hz (QuantumX/SomatXR only) or 50 Hz (all other devices) and retain all mea-
sured values for saving later. When the measurement stops (Stop in the DAQ group) cat-
man asks whether the measured values should be saved.

Unattended test
If you are configuring a DAQ job for a test that is to run unattended, you can have catman
make some settings that are well suited to the purpose. All settings can be changed after-
wards if they do not fit your DAQ job. The DAQ job can be run on a PC or on the CX22
(QuantumX/SomatXR); the same settings are used in both cases.
Click on Unattended test (DAQ jobs tab, DAQ jobs group).
The following options are used: Reconnect and initialize devices before DAQ start (Gen-
eral measurement settings (Start/ Stop/ Sample rate)), Storage mode Faststream (Stor-
age mode) and Deactivate failed channels and continue with DAQ (Data transfer and
error handling).
See also catman start parameters, Watchdog function

The settings of sample rates and filters as well as the channel activation on the
DAQ channels tab are applied by default for all DAQ jobs, unless you have activated
the Apply to first DAQ job only option in the Channel list options.

catman
234 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
Procedure

Create new DAQ jobs and/or recorders, delete those no longer required, or use or
(DAQ jobs group) to sort them. The job list contains all active DAQ jobs, and is displayed
on the DAQ channels and Visualization tabs when you click Start (DAQ group); see also
Measuring (Start DAQ job). When you click Start on the DAQ jobs tab, the DAQ job cur-
rently displayed, or the DAQ job of the displayed recorder as appropriate, is started.
You can also import DAQ jobs (and recorders) from other projects. Menu: File ►
Import ► Import DAQ jobs. The import overwrites all existing DAQ jobs; therefore,
carry out the import before defining new DAQ jobs.

You can display the job settings via the Text object and System text during data
acquisition. You can use an LED to display the status of the data acquisition.

6.1 General measurement settings (Start/ Stop/ Sample rate)

The DAQ settings are divided into three groups:

1. Start of recording
2. Stopping recording and measurement
3. Sample rate

Optional functions
Zero balancing of the hardware channels/computation channels facilitates the zero
adjustment (the Zero balance) of all released channels (zero balance not locked, DAQ
channels and Options for safety tabs) when starting the DAQ job, separately for device
channels (hardware) and catman computation channels. On-board computation chan-
nels of QuantumX/SomatXR modules are not zero-balanced. The action takes some time,
depending on the zero balancing method. Also make sure that the desired zero state is
set when the job is started.
With QuantumX MXFS, the zero value is only computed with the scaled values of a
sensor adaptation, not with the display of a wavelength.

Connect and initialize devices before start: If one of the devices fails, or channels develop
errors, during measurement when running repeated jobs (Specify job parameters) and
when multiple devices are connected, you can use this option to reconnect (and rein-
itialize). This option is helpful for long-term DAQ if there is a risk that one or several
devices might fail temporarily during the measurement or the connection to them could

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 235
be interrupted. Then divide your measurement into shorter intervals, for example End of
measurement after 12 hours, activate this option and repeat the DAQ job correspondingly
frequently (Job parameter tab). Consequently, reconnection occurs at the start of each
interval and if communication is broken it is re-established.
See also Behavior on errors during the measurement.

catman-Normalize time channels: The option is only useful when starting measurement
by trigger. Use the option to start the recorded catman time channels at time 0. Without
the option, the recorded time channels will start at the trigger time (since start of mea-
surement) minus the pre-trigger. Hardware time channels are not changed.

6.1.1 Start of recording

The start of recording can take place manually, by using a trigger or at a certain point in
time.
You can also start a DAQ job using a shortcut (Job parameters, Settings group, see
Define DAQ job parameters) or a specific key (Menu File ► Options, Keyboard short-
cuts in the System group).

Immediately
Starts recording with the start of the DAQ job.
With recorders the recording is in this case automatically repeated if the end of recording
is restricted (trigger, duration or time-point).

Trigger
The trigger only affects the recording of measured values. Values are displayed
once the acquisition starts.

If you enter Edge as the condition for a trigger, the measured value must first be under
(over) the level entered, so that the value again exceeds (or falls below) the level, i.e. a
rising (or falling) edge exists. With Level, the acquisition is started immediately, if the
value exceeds the level or is below the level at the start of the DAQ job. Note however
that, due to noise on analog signals, falling edges can occur even with, for example, an
overall increasing signal.
In Digital-I/O trigger mode, triggering can occur on the digital inputs of MX879 or a CX22
module (QuantumX/SomatXR), the digital inputs of a PX878 of the PMX or the digital
inputs of the CP22/CP42/CP52 with the MGCplus. Depending on the device, the trigger
can be activated either on the transition from High to Low (x LOW) or from Low to High (x

catman
236 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
HIGH), or it is limited to the transition specified in the device. In Order to fade out short-
time interferences (switch chatter), you can additionally specify a time (Debouncing) for
which the signal must be present before it is recognized as valid.
catman-Normalize time channels: Use the option to start the recorded catman time
channels at time 0. Without the option, the recorded time channels will start at the
trigger time (since start of measurement) minus the pre-trigger. Hardware time
channels are not changed.

Burst mode (not available for recorders): With the burst mode active, once the stop con-
dition has occurred or the post-trigger expired, the start condition is awaited or the pre-
trigger buffer is filled without measurements being saved, i.e. without exporting them
from the temporary file (save). This only takes place when the specified number of Max.
bursts has been reached. In the final measurement file there are then a correspondingly
large number of consecutive sections, one for each trigger event (including pre- and
post-triggers).
See also Configure y(x) graph for display of the measured values.

Pre-trigger: You can specify a time period in which data is already recorded before the
start of a DAQ job. The time is entered in seconds.

The pre-trigger buffer must initially be filled as it is only then that the measured val-
ues are monitored for the trigger condition.

The measured values for the pre-trigger are filed solely in the RAM memory of the PC.
You may therefore not exceed the size of the physical memory (you can check for the
application in the Windows Task Manager). Approximately 8 bytes per measured value
are needed, i.e. approximately 350 MB for 30 minutes with a sample rate of 2400 Hz and
10 channels.
Even without a pre-trigger it may be the values before the trigger level are recorded. Since
the measured values are not transferred singly, but in blocks (read blocks), saving of the
read block occurs when a value in the read block fulfills the trigger condition.

Repeated recordings/repeats (only with recorders): Repeats the recording with the
recorder parameters as long as the DAQ job is active. The recording must in this case be
restricted by a trigger, duration or time-point. If the file name is not unique, e.g. via
%DateTime%, catman appends a counter.
Also, the recording is repeated with the Immediately setting if the end of recording
is restricted.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 237
Min. hold time: With this option you can prevent a brief disturbance pulse from initiating
the trigger. Only signals which fulfill the trigger conditions for a time period longer than
that specified here start the measurement. The time is entered in seconds!
You can also monitor several conditions using a trigger on a computation channel.
For example, you might want to start when the measured value is greater than 350
in Channel_1 (Channel name) or greater than 740 in Channel_2 (Channel name).
Enter the following function in the algebraic computations: IF((Channel_1>350) OR
(Channel_2>740), 1, 0). When the condition is fulfilled, this computation channel
contains 1, otherwise 0. Trigger on this computation channel, once the value is
greater than 0.5.

Special features with the burst mode

In burst mode, only the storage mode Keep all data is permissible.
The DAQ job must have either the Trigger or Duration stop condition. In burst mode,
this condition does not determine the end of the job, but rather the duration of the
burst. The job is only terminated on reaching the number of Max. bursts. A manual
cancellation ( Stop) is however possible at any time.
Trigger events, which occur after the triggering of the start trigger and before the
occurrence of the stop trigger or before the expiry of the post-trigger, are ignored.

6.1.2 Stop of data recording and measurement

A measurement can be stopped manually, by a trigger, after a certain period of time, after
measuring a certain number of values, or at a certain time (day of the week and time, or
every x hours).

You can stop a measurement at any time via Stop (DAQ group). You can also ini-
tiate stopping of a DAQ job using a specific key (menu File ► Options, Keyboard
shortcuts in the System group).

Trigger
If you enter Edge as the condition for a trigger, the measured value must first be under
(over) the level entered, so that the value again exceeds (or falls below) the level, i.e. a
rising (or falling) edge exists. With Level, the acquisition is stopped immediately if the
value exceeds the level or is below the level, whichever is required. Note however that,
due to noise on analog signals, falling edges can occur even with, for example, an overall

catman
238 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
increasing signal.
Since the measurements are not fetched individually from devices, but in small
blocks (read blocks), measurements may also be present which were still measured
after the trigger conditions were fulfilled, because the analysis takes over the com-
plete read block in which the condition is fulfilled.

In Digital-I/O trigger mode, triggering can occur on the digital inputs of MX879 or a CX22
module (QuantumX/SomatXR), the digital inputs of a PX878 of the PMX or the digital
inputs of the CP22/CP42/CP52 with the MGCplus. Depending on the device, the trigger
can be activated either on the transition from High to Low (x LOW) or from Low to High (x
HIGH), or it is limited to the transition specified in the device. In Order to fade out short-
time interferences (switch chatter), you can additionally specify a time (Debouncing) for
which the signal must be present before it is recognized as valid.
Post-trigger: You can also enter a time period which is still measured after a DAQ job
stops. The time is entered in seconds.
Max. (number of) re-triggers (during post-trigger): The setting is only practicable when
the measurement is terminated with a post-trigger. With the option active (>0) and a pos-
itive post-trigger time, monitoring for a renewed occurrence of the condition for the start
trigger takes place within the post-trigger time. If the condition occurs, the post-trigger
time is again awaited from this time-point. This occurs as often as specified for this
option.
You can also monitor several conditions using a trigger on a computation channel.
For example, you might wish to stop when the measured value is greater than 350
in Channel_1 (Channel name) or greater than 740 in Channel_2 (Channel name).
Enter the following function in the algebraic computations: IF((Channel_1>350) OR
(Channel_2>740), 1, 0). When the condition is fulfilled, this computation channel
contains 1, otherwise 0. Trigger on this computation channel, once the value is
greater than 0.5.

Maximum measurement duration

As long as your storage medium can store the data temporarily, there is hardly any lim-
itation on the duration of the measurement or the post-trigger with NTFS file systems
(NTFS: see Temporary data store). The values for the pre-trigger must be able to be
saved in the PC RAM.
In the Duration and Number of samples settings, catman checks the space available, and
outputs a message if the free space is less than would be needed for temporary data stor-
age plus the export (data saving). In other cases you have to monitor the free space

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 239
yourself: In the status bar the number adjacent to shows you how long you can still
measure (d = days, h = hours). During the computation 100 MB of safety reserve is
included. The status indicator is highlighted in red when the free space falls below 1 GB.
See also Job status panel, Disk Full event.
Specify another drive for the temporary storage space (see Program options: Data
storage), delete unnecessary data on your PC or specify a different drive for the stor-
age file when you receive the message that insufficient free space is available.

catman records a maximum of 2,000,000,000 measurement values per channel (if

enough memory is available). Then the measurement is stopped. But we recom-
mend creating smaller files, because files containing so much data become
unwieldy and demand heavy resources. Periodically save just 1,000,000 measure-
ment values per channel, for example, or repeat your DAQ job at shorter time inter-
vals.

6.1.3 Sample rate

Changing the sample rate and filter settings can be disabled with password pro-
tection—see Sensor options, Password protection.

The Sample rate should be about ten times the maximum frequency, which you want to
measure reliably. Use a factor of 20 or higher if you want to acquire peak values.
catman automatically uses low pass filters as default (automatic filter selection) which
use approx. 15% of the sample rate set as long as the channel allows this, i.e. as long as
it does not have a lower bandwidth. This might be the case, for example, with an ML30
(MGCplus, 180 Hz at -3 dB).
See also Program option DAQ channels (System group): Filter, Setting filters manually,
Alias effect.
Filters with Bessel characteristic create no signal distortion, but have a relatively
flat frequency response. In case of high-frequency interference at high amplitudes,
you should therefore set the cutoff frequency to 5% of the sample rate, or use filters
with Butterworth characteristics..

Sample rate groups Standard, Slow, Fast

With some devices, Slow and Fast sample rates are additionally available. A slow sample
rate is useful, for example with temperature channels, if the values measured are not to
be acquired using the same (high) data rate as the other channels or if channels are

catman
240 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
present which operate slower due to their principle (CAN signals, GNSS). The fields are
not accessible (gray) if no channel uses these sample rates. Select the channel(s) you
want to change on the DAQ channels tab and choose a different sample rate group from
the ribbon.
See also MX410, MXFS: Use an increased sample rate (highspeed mode).
The terms Fast and Slow for the sample rates are intended for easier orientation.
You can also, for example, define 4800 Hz for Default, 100 Hz for Fast and 600 Hz
for Slow.

Assigning a sample rate to a channel

Assign which channel is to be acquired with which sample rate on the DAQ channels tab
(Sample rates/filters group); see Configuring channels. Channels for which the slow
sample rate is activated are marked with ; marks channels with the standard sample
rate and marks channels with the fast sample rate. The associated time channels are
automatically created in the background.

Display only possible sample rates for QuantumX/SomatXR

In the Sample rate groups field you can specify that only the sample rates that the current
device actually supports are displayed. The function requires at least firmware version
4.40 in the QuantumX/SomatXR.

Note that in QuantumX/SomatXR sample rates and filters are linked. If you manu-
ally select a very low filter frequency, for example, high sample rates may no longer
be available. For example, with the MX840 and a 2 Hz filter you cannot select a
sample rate of 19200 Hz.

Only active sample rate groups are checked. Unused sample rate groups are unaf-
fected.

Sample rate for recorders

In the DAQ job define the maximum possible sample rates. In the recorders you can then
define that they record at a slower data rate.
Use the option Deactivate down-sampling low-pass filter only if the current process load
is too high during the measurement; see The Job status window. In the default setting
(option deactivated) the higher frequency components of the original sample rate are
reduced using a filter and only then is the specified rate recorded. A Bessel low-pass of
the 8th order with a Cutoff frequency of 20% of the original sample rate is used. The “sur-
plus” measurements are omitted from the resulting values and only those needed for the

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 241
specified sample rate are saved. The computation however requires some computing
power.

Sample rates above 4800 Hz

If you are using sample rates above 4800 Hz, you should increase the write cache in
the options for data saving; see Write cache.
If you are using sample rates above 9,600 Hz, catman automatically increases the
data buffer for the transfer of the measurements so that all values can also be trans-
ferred. The computed buffer size is however not displayed and is also only used
(temporarily) for this job; see Data buffer.

Notes
Different sample rate groups must not use the same sample rate. Assign all the rel-
evant channels only to one group or check whether you can use recorders.
For later QuantumX modules with B, and C functionality and SomatXR modules, you
get various lists for the available sample rates, depending on the Sample-rate
domain used by the module; see Sample-rate domains for QuantumX/SomatXR.
With some QuantumX/SomatXR modules the maximum sample rates are only avail-
able in the DC operating mode, not with carrier frequency. The modules perform the
switchover automatically and independently of the sensor configuration. If neces-
sary, check which settings are being used via the Channel info component window.
With the QuantumX/SomatXR module MX410, you can switch to the increased
sample rate (192 kHz, or 200 kHz with decimal sample-rate domain) via the context
menu in the Sample rate/Filter column (Highspeed mode). Here, channels 1 and 2
are always activated and channels 3 and 4 are deactivated; selection of the chan-
nels is not possible. The setting can also be undone with the same menu to be able
to use all four channels again.

6.1.3.1 Which sample rate is the right one?

A question often asked in digital measurement technology is that of the correct sample
rate, or measurement rate. The following illustration shows what happens when you
choose a sample which is too low on a sampling measurement system.

catman
242 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
Aliasing with a sample rate which is too low

In the picture the blue line shows the plot displayed by a graph when the sample rate is
too low. The green line shows the original signal which is sampled at certain times. We
call the effect Alias, i.e. you see a completely different plot. Therefore, many devices
which operate by sampling have so-called Anti-alias filter.

Sample rate with HBM devices

With the default settings of catman an alias effect is unlikely, as an appropriate filter is
used to suit the sample rate (menu File ► Options, DAQ channels (Channels and sensors
group) and Filter section). However, if you deactivate this filter (Allow manual filter set-
tings and use the setting Working without filter in the channel parameters of the DAQ
jobs), aliasing can also occur with these devices. In this case, enough values will be
acquired in the device, however, not all measured values are also transferred to catman.

Determining the correct sample rate

So that no aliasing occurs, the amplitude of the highest measured frequency must be less
than the smallest step value of the A/D converter (LSB = least significant bit) and the con-
version or sample rate must be twice as high as this frequency. The specified bandwidth
is however the frequency at which the amplitude has only fallen to about 90% (-1 dB). The
frequency at which the amplitude has fallen to values which are small enough is far
higher. The minimum sample rate which you have to use is double this (unknown) value.
In practice this means that the useful bandwidth is with certainty less than one third of

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 243
the sample rate. To be on the safe side, you ought to use even less than 5%. However, you
do not need to draw on the smallest increments of the A/D converter; you can also define
an amplitude below which you do not want to consider any further measurements.
If you want to be sure that no information is lost, i.e. that all relevant frequencies
are measured, select an amplifier with the largest possible analog bandwidth
(ML10, ML55), use the highest possible sample rate and Filter: 10% sample rate.
Then perform an analysis of the signals (for example with a frequency spectrum of
a channel) to clarify which signal frequencies are to be measured.

6.1.3.2 Switching sample-rate domains for QuantumX/SomatXR

Switching sample-rate domain is only possible with more recent QuantumX mod-
ules with B or C functionality, and SomatXR modules.

All modules of a DAQ project used must apply the same sample-rate domain; mixed
operation is not possible and leads to an error message.

Procedure for switchover

1. Go to the DAQ channels tab.
2. Mark the relevant module.
3. Click on Configure in the Sample rates and filter group.
4. In the dialog window at the top select Decimal or Classic at Sample-rate domain.
5. Close the dialog with a click on OK.
6. Terminate the catman DAQ project.
7. Wait about ten seconds and then switch off the QuantumX/SomatXR module, then
on again.
The waiting period is needed, because the module must first save the new setting
in order to be able to use it for the next start. If you switch off the module too soon,
the new setting is not accepted.
8. Start a new catman DAQ project.
9. Check whether the sample rate set by the module after the switchover and the filter
are suitable for your measurement.

catman
244 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
6.2 Data storage and backup (settings: Storage)

If the file system of your storage medium is not NTFS, you can only record a certain
number of measured values; see Temporary data storage.

Special features of recorders

The Storage mode, Data saving, File format, Resolution and Saving depth settings are not
available for recorders. With recorders, data is first saved in FastStream format and con-
verted into the standard catman format after recording.
Auxiliary channels with a manual time base are always recorded at the preset
sample rate; no downsampling takes place here.

The conversion starts automatically as soon as the file has been saved.
Use Analysis mode and export your data if you need other formats.

If you want to suppress automatic start of conversion, you can set the following key to 1
in the Windows Registry: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\VB AND VBA Program Set-
tings\catmanEasy\Defaults\RECORDERNOAUTOFSCONVERT.

Changes to the Registry using the regedit.exe program should only be made by
experienced users, and after backing up the existing Registry, because under some
circumstances serious Windows errors might result. If necessary, ask your admin-
istrator to make the change.

Check the following input fields and change the catman defaults as necessary:
Storage mode
Data saving (and interval)
You can still change the file comment, test parameters or the file name before sav-
ing, if when saving the data you either specify Prompt on DAQ termination or acti-
vate the option Edit test parameters on DAQ termination at Automatically on DAQ
termination. However, you can use Comment in the DAQ group (Visualization tab)
to also enter comments independently of that during the measurement. The com-
ments are then saved as additional test parameters with the date and time of the
entry. The comments in the DAQ comments window are deleted before each mea-
surement.
Saving depth
File format (and resolution)

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 245
Saving file: Using placeholders you can integrate different variable texts in your file name
or folder path, e.g. date or time or the (present) test parameters. If you add more test para-
meters, they are also displayed; see Defining test parameters on this. Process variables
of an AutoSequence are also selectable. The placeholders are directly replaced before
data saving. For example, the placeholder %DateTime% is replaced by the character
string “Year_Month_Day_Hour_Minute_Second”; the final file name then includes, for
example, the character string “2016_08_05_12_01_35”.
The placeholder is inserted at the current cursor position in the input field for the file
name. You can use multiple placeholders in the file name and/or path. If folders do not
exist, they are automatically generated. Note that Windows limits the length of path and
file names, so you should not use more than 240 characters.
Display parameters such as the file name, job name or commentary by way of the
Text and System text objects during measurement.

In catman 5.0 or higher you can save your measurement data not only locally (on the PC
running catman) but additionally on another PC (FTP server): Remote data saving.

6.2.1 Storage mode

See also Temporary data store.

Decide here whether catman should retain all data (Keep all data) or whether you wish to
decide which measured values should be kept (temporarily saved) (Manual storage con-
trol). With this storage mode you can carry out a measurement at the press of a key,
because the currently measured value is only saved with a click on . The latter is, for
example, useful when acquiring a calibration characteristic, as only some points have to
be measured on the transducer characteristic. However, you can activate a continuous
storage of all measurements also in this storage mode.

With Manual storage control, all values are displayed in a real-time graph. However,
they cannot be saved in a file after the measurement or displayed in a Post-process
graph. Here, only the manually saved measurements are available.

Controlled by event monitoring/script is interesting if you want to control the saving of

values exclusively via an AutoSequence or a script. In this case no data is stored by cat-
man itself.

catman
246 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
Peak values per time interval

Cycle-dependent intervals (long term DAQ)

Time-dependent intervals (long term DAQ)

Fast Stream is a special recording method which is intended for high sample rates
(20,000 Hz and more) and/or many channels. Here, the data is not placed in temporary
data storage as otherwise usual, but written directly to a file. This method is also used if
you select Unattended test, i.e. if no graphical output of the measured values on a Panel
is required during measurement. However, this leads to a few restrictions:
If, during the measurement, you add a further channel to a real-time graph, the data
of the last seconds are not shown as otherwise usual. Only the data acquired from
this time point are displayed.
The data acquired in this mode cannot be displayed in DAQ mode in a post-process
graph. This is only possible in Analysis mode.

You cannot use the angle-synchronous graph object ( ) in this recording

mode.
Data from these files cannot be analyzed directly. When first loading a test con-
taining such files, they are therefore converted to files with the catman standard
format. With larger files (> 1 GB) this may take a few minutes. Therefore, on opening
you receive a dialog with which you can cancel the operation.

6.2.1.1 Peak values per time interval

See also Time-dependent intervals (long-term DAQ).

Peak values per time interval is a special method for measuring which results in a lot of
data, ultimately however only the peak values (minimum and maximum) are required that
occur within a certain time-frame. With this storage mode, you can acquire short peak val-
ues using a high sample rate, nevertheless only a few values will be saved. This is useful,
for example, if during material tests you wish to record only the maximum stress through
dynamic load change over several days. In real-time graphs all values (during the mea-
surement) are still displayed. The option affects only the recording of the values.
Drag the time channel, e.g. the Default sample rate, on to the x axis of the graph in
order to display the peak value channel in a post-process graph over time (Activate
display of time channels in the Channel list options!). Use the plot style Points only

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 247
 (scatter), as otherwise the min/max values will be connected with straight lines. For
further computations you can separate the min/max values; see Curve section.

Do not insert any channels into your real-time graphs during the measuring if you
are working in the Peak values per time interval mode. Either define all plots before
you start the DAQ job or create a new graph if you wish to see more channels.

Example of peak values per time interval

6.2.1.2 Cycle-dependent intervals (long-term DAQ)

With this storage mode, you can acquire short peak values using a high sample rate, nev-
ertheless only a few values will be saved (the example in the Peak values per time interval
section shows three time intervals; the function is similar for cycle-dependent intervals).
This is useful, for example, if during material tests you wish to record only the maximum
stress through dynamic load change over several days. In real-time graphs all values (dur-
ing the measurement) are still displayed. The setting affects only the recording of the val-
ues. Additionally, you can periodically record one or more complete cycles or a single
value (snapshot).

Click on Configure to define the parameters for the measurement. You have three options
for how catman can detect a cycle:
1. You have a channel containing a (numeric) cycle counter: Counter channel.
This might be a CAN channel or a counter channel (pulse counter), for example,
which receives one pulse from the controller of your measurement system in every
cycle.
Choose Reset on start to specify whether 0 is to be used as the start value
(option activated), or the original or last value of the counter in catman since the

catman
248 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
 start. Note that the measurement will not start if the counter value is higher
than the last recording cycle.
2. You define a period corresponding to exactly one cycle: Cycle period.
Use this variant if you are able to specify the cycle period on the controller of your
measurement system over a period of time, and that time is adhered to with suf-
ficient accuracy.
3. Each cycle delivers an approximately sinusoidal or triangular signal in one of your
DAQ channels, meaning a minimum and a maximum are produced in every cycle.
This signal is analyzed by catman using the Peak-Valley detection function, and a
corresponding cycle counter is generated from the minimums and maximums. To
determine whether a value is a minimum or maximum, or whether the current value
is merely a signal spike created by noise, you must specify a Hysteresis—that is to
say, a minimum range which the signal must pass through in order to obtain a
valid extreme (minimum peak-to-peak amplitude). Use 20% of the peak-to-peak
amplitude (in units of the channel) for this value for example. Use a filter as neces-
sary if you have a signal with short but high thresholds.

Then specify the total number of cycles (to be monitored). The measurement is ter-
minated after this number; the stop condition of the DAQ job is ignored in this operating
mode. Then in the table for the Sequence plan define how this number is to be divided up
into the various measurement intervals and sequences. Here, you can specify just one
sequence or any number, but sequences must not overlap nor should there be any gaps.
Each sequence (a row in the table) requires the following details:
First cycle: The sequence begins with this cycle. The first sequence begins with 1.
Last cycle: Last cycle in the sequence. When you click in the First cycle field, the
total number of cycles is always entered here; change the displayed number accord-
ingly. The last cycle in all sequences must correspond to the total number of cycles.
Interval for continuous storage: Here you specify the number of measured cycles
after which a snapshot (single value) or one or more complete cycles (all measured
values) is/are to be saved again. You can select one of the default intervals or enter
a number yourself. Entering All (or 1) causes all values in the cycles concerned to
be saved to a file. Activate Continuous storage into one file to also save all the
cycles in further sequences to the same file. If you select Never (or 0), peak values
at the most are saved, if this is specified by Interval for peak storage.
No. Cycles to store: Enter the number of cycles here (click in the field and type in a
number) in which you want all measured values to be recorded and saved in
sequence. In the default setting a new file is created per storage process except

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 249
 when you save snapshots (single values) or activate the option Continuous storage
into one file. Snapshots are always saved in a single file. The current date and time,
the keyword “complete” and the current cycle number are appended to the file name
specified for the DAQ job, e.g. Job1_20090813_143558_complete22.
Interval for peak storage: Here you define whether, and if so, after how many mea-
sured cycles, the minimum and maximum over those cycles are to be saved. You
can select one of the default intervals or enter a number yourself. The peak values
are stored in the catman temporary file and at the end of the measurement are
saved in one file. The current date and time and the keyword “peaks” are appended
to the file name specified for the DAQ job, e.g. Job1_20090827_220318_peaks. The
peak values are displayed as dedicated channels in the channel list, so that they are
available for Post-process graphs.
With longer intervals or acquisition times record the time channel as time of
day and date: Create absolute time stamps for peak values.

Click on Create to generate another row in the table. The First cycle and Last cycle
columns are completed automatically, but you can still change the details.

After a click on Check catman checks whether all fields have been correctly completed
and whether the defined sequences can be processed in this way, e.g. whether the defin-
ition of settings for any cycles has been forgotten during retrospective changes. Erro-
neous sequences (rows in the table) are shown with a red background.
Create a short sequence as the first sequence and specify All for the interval of the
peak values in order to be able to check the correct operating procedure, e.g. in a
graph (a graph is only drawn when more than two values are present). In the
Refresh peak values in temporary storage option, specify a number of seconds
appropriate for the interval so that the new values can be displayed in a post-pro-
cess graph. Use the same value for the graph refresh rate.

Refresh peak values in temporary storage: Defines how often the computed peak values
are transferred to temporary storage. Set the update rate of the graph to a similar value
so that the new values are displayed. However, the duration should not be significantly
shorter than one cycle, otherwise no new data will arrive. Specify an appropriate value for
the update rate of the graphs in question.
The dialog definition applies to the current DAQ job, so you can provide a different
definition for each DAQ job. Only Immediately or Time of day are allowed as start
conditions of the DAQ job, and only Manual, Duration or Number of values as stop
conditions. Other conditions are ignored.

catman
250 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
With Save snapshots periodically to file, specify the intervals at which a backup file (“Sav-
ing file”) is to be created so that the individual snapshots are not saved to a file only after
the DAQ job has ended. If you save complete cycles, each cycle will be saved imme-
diately.

6.2.1.3 Time-dependent intervals (long term DAQ)

With this storage mode, you can measure even short-term peaks with a high sample rate,
and still only a few measured values will be stored (the example in the Peak values per
time interval section shows three time intervals). This is useful, for example, if during
material tests you wish to record only the maximum stress through dynamic load change
over several days. In real-time graphs all values (during the measurement) are still dis-
played. The setting affects only the recording of the values. In addition you can occa-
sionally record all values over a certain time period.

The Event monitoring offers you an alternative to this type of measurement with the
Time interval (equidistant times) event type.

Click on Configure to define the parameters for the measurement. Then specify the Total
duration of job. The measurement is terminated after this time; the stop condition of the
DAQ job is ignored in this operating mode. Then in the table for the Sequence plan define
how this time period is to be divided up into the various measurement intervals and
sequences. Here, you can specify just one sequence or any number, but sequences must
not overlap nor should there be any gaps. Each sequence (a row in the table) requires the
following details:
Start: The sequence begins at this time of day. The first sequence begins with 0
(minutes, hours or days); a value of 1 is however also accepted.
End: The sequence finishes when this time period expires. With a value of 5 minutes
the sequence then terminates at 5 minutes and 59 seconds; from the 6th minute
the next sequence starts. With a click in the field Start time the total time is always
entered here; change the displayed figure appropriately. The end time of all
sequences must correspond to the total time.
Time unit: You can define minutes, hours or days as the unit to be used for Total
duration of job. The setting applies to all sequences. The start and finish times for
new sequences are appropriately converted.
Interval for continuous storage: Here you can define after how many minutes all
measurements are to be saved for the specified Storage duration. You can select
one of the default intervals or enter a number yourself. Specifying Once (or 1)

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 251
 causes a snapshot or the specified Storage duration to be acquired only at the
beginning of the sequence. With the selection of Never peak values at the most are
saved, if this is specified at Interval for peak storage.
Storage duration: Here, you enter for how long all measurements are to be saved. In
the default setting a new file is created per storage process except when you save
snapshots (single values) or activate the option Continuous storage into one file.
Snapshots are always saved in a single file. The current date and time, the keyword
“complete” and the current minute (since the start of the measurement) are appen-
ded to the file name specified for the DAQ job, e.g. Job1_20090813_143558_com-
plete15.
The storage duration must not be longer than the total duration of the
sequence. The shortest possible time is 100 ms (0.1 s).
If you are saving to one file, then for the subsequent analysis use a time chan-
nel for the x axis to obtain the correct time relationship.
Interval for peak storage: Here, you define whether, and if so, after how many
minutes the minimum and maximum over this interval are each to be saved. You
can select one of the default intervals or enter a number yourself. The peak values
are stored in the catman temporary file and at the end of the measurement are
saved in one file. The current date and time and the keyword “peaks” are appended
to the file name specified for the DAQ job, e.g. Job1_20090827_220318_peaks. The
peak values are displayed as dedicated channels in the channel list, so that they are
available for Post-process graphs.
With longer intervals or acquisition times record the time channel as time of
day and date: Create absolute timestamps for peak values.

Click on New sequence to generate another row in the table. The Start (time) and End
(time) columns are completed automatically, but you can still change the details.

After a click on Check catman checks whether all fields have been correctly completed
and whether the defined sequences can be processed in this way, e.g. whether times or
settings have been forgotten during retrospective changes. Erroneous sequences (rows
in the table) are shown with a red background.
Create a short sequence as the first sequence and specify Every minute for the inter-
val of the peak values in order to be able to check the correct operating procedure,
e.g. in a graph (a graph is only drawn when more than two values are present).

Refresh peak values in temporary storage: Defines how often the computed peak values
are transferred to temporary storage. Set the update rate of the graph to a similar value

catman
252 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
so that the new values are displayed. However, the duration should not be significantly
shorter than one cycle, otherwise no new data will arrive. Specify an appropriate value for
the update rate of the graphs in question.
The dialog definition applies to the current DAQ job, so you can provide a different
definition for each DAQ job. Only Immediately or Time of day are allowed as start
conditions of the DAQ job, and only Manual, Duration or Number of values as stop
conditions. Other conditions are ignored.

With Save snapshots periodically to file, specify the intervals at which a backup file (“Sav-
ing file”) is to be created so that the individual snapshots are not saved to a file only after
the DAQ job has ended. If you save complete cycles, each cycle will be saved imme-
diately.

6.2.2 Data saving

See also Program options: Folders, End of measurement: Maximum measurement
duration, event: Error during data saving.
The file is written to the default folder for measurement data if you do not specify
any folder path.

If the intended file name already exists, catman appends a counter to the file name and
increments it for the further job starts. If this file also exists, a further counter is appen-
ded, etc. A counter is also appended if a file name which was created using Placeholders
already exists.

If, during a job repetition, the files with all figures from 001 up to 999 exist in the tar-
get folder, catman appends a further figure. Above 9999 another figure is appended,
etc.

Activate Additional data saving in second format if you want to save the measurement
data in catman format as well as in Excel format, for example. The file formats must be
different, because the same file name is used, and only the file extensions differ.

Prompt
In this mode, after the recording stops you obtain a window in which you can change
both the file path and file name as well as creating other test parameters or completing
existing ones.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 253
Automatic
In Automatically on DAQ termination mode, the data is saved to the specified file without
any further request. In order to be able to enter test parameters with this setting, activate
the option Editing of test parameters after job termination.

Periodic
Use Periodically during measurement for long-term measurements and define an interval
after which the measurements are to be saved as a precaution against power failure. If
you use All intervals in one file as the mode of periodical saving, then any already exist-
ing file is renamed to T_DATABACKUP.BAK after this time expires, saving occurs again
and T_DATABACKUP.BAK is deleted. If the PC was turned off during saving, specify the
file extension .BAK in the Test Explorer to be able to load the file. The file is written to the
same folder to which the final file is written. In all other cases the file provided for the
measurements contains the last state. In the One file per interval mode new files are cre-
ated and numbers appended to the file name. Activate Merge single files after DAQ job to
produce one complete file from the single files. However, you can also carry this out ret-
rospectively in Analysis mode. Merge files (Test Explorer tab, Tools group).
See also Converting/merging files.

No saving to a file
Use None (test mode) for example to check that the measuring chain is operating as
required. No prompt is given to save the measurements, but you can still save the
acquired values using the menu File ► Save as ► Save last DAQ job.
For a trial measurement create a dedicated job and specify an appropriate name for
the job, e.g. Trial measurement without saving so that it is clear that no saving is to
take place.

Note
If you end catman without saving measured data, the next time you start catman
you will be asked whether the data should be saved in a file. The same applies if cat-
man was interrupted unexpectedly, e.g. through loss of power. So, after a power cut,
restart catman without deleting any files or folders.
In Prompt on DAQ termination mode, you are not only prompted to save data, but
also if you do not save any data you are notified that the data can also be saved
later. Choose Don’t show this message in the future if you don’t want to see the

catman
254 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
 notification again. The suppression of this notice can be undone via the menu
Window ► Show again prompt window on the right above the ribbon.
When recording to a storage medium (MGCplus with CP52) or to a PC card
(MGCplus with CP42), no folders can be specified, only a file name is admissible.

6.2.3 File format and resolution

All information about the measurement (traceability data), such as the transducers
used, zero point and serial number of the amplifier, as well as the measurement set-
tings and test parameters, are saved only in catman, ASCII + channel info, NI TDMS,
NI DIAdem and Excel … formats.

Notes on Excel formats

In the MS Excel ... format the measured values start at row 50; the rows above are used
for saving the channel information.
Import the file with the same name as the Excel file but with extension TSX into a
worksheet, if you need the test parameters in Excel.

Excel must be installed to be able to save data in the Excel format. You can save a
maximum of 65,000 values in a worksheet in the MS Excel 97-2003 format. There-
fore more values than this are not exported by catman. In Excel 2007 and later, up
to 1 million measured values can be saved, though the default setting for the file
format in Excel should be MS Excel Office XML or MS Excel Office Binary (not MS
Excel 97-2003).
However, in all cases take into account the increased time required compared to
saving in the catman format.

If you do not enter a file extension, this will be added automatically.

Use the file formats NI DIAdem, nSoft DAC, MDF 3, MDF 4, MATLAB, RPC III, HBM
nCode s3t or UFF58 only if you have the corresponding programs available. Files in these
formats cannot be imported into catman again.
catman records a maximum of 2,000,000,000 measurement values per channel (if enough
memory is available). Then the measurement is stopped. But we recommend creating
smaller files, because files containing so much data become unwieldy and demand heavy
resources. Periodically save just 1,000,000 measurement values per channel, for example,
or repeat your DAQ job at shorter time intervals.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 255
Resolution

Formats HBM catman Standard, Vector MDF 3 and ASAM MDF 4.1
You can define the following resolutions in these formats:
8 Byte saves with full resolution (default). The format is also called Double Pre-
cision.
4 Byte uses so-called Single Precision values when saving. The format is sufficient
for measuring values from analog transducers (mostly only 16 to 24 bits, i.e. max-
imum 3 bytes) and saves storage space. However if you perform further com-
putations using the measured values, this could lead to a rounding-off fault, as
these results are also saved only in 4-byte format.
2 Byte: In this format, the minimum and maximum values of the channel are first
determined, then all values of the channel will be converted to the number range of
±32,000 and saved as whole numbers. The format takes up the least amount of stor-
age space, the resolution is however limited to ±32,000 steps and the conversion
requires time.

If you are acquiring the time in the NTP or IRIG format, you have to use the 8 Byte
format, because the times can only be saved (completely) in this format. With GNSS
data check whether a resolution with less than eight bytes is sufficient.
See also Hardware time channels.

In the ASAM MDF 4.1 format you can also set the compression level and the data reduc-
tion.

Formats ASCII and ASCII + Channel info

In the formats ASCII and ASCII + Channel info you can define the number of decimal
places to be saved:
Full Precision: The operating system decides on the number of relevant places and
the representation. For a value saved with eight-byte resolution, more than ten
places can arise in this manner, but an exponential representation can also be used.
Auto: An appropriate number of decimal places is used depending on the number of
places in front of the decimal point. With very small (< 10-5) or very large numbers
(from six places) the exponential representation is used. Otherwise the following
applies: up to |10| three, up to |100| two, up to |1000| one decimal place(s) are used;
over 1000 no decimal place is used. There is an exception for channels in the units
µm/m and °C: here one decimal place is always used.

catman
256 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
In catman 5.2 or higher, blank spaces before or after numbers are removed prior to export-
ing.

The file formats

HBM catman standard format

Files in this format can only be imported again by catman itself. They contain all the
information which catman has available: measured values, traceability data and measure-
ment and test parameters. You should therefore first save data in this format and only
export in other formats as required.

HBM nCode s3t

Files in this format can be directly processed by the software GlyphWorks and nCode
DesignLife.
GlyphWorks is a software program for the analysis of test data; it processes a large
amount of data and offers a graphical, process-orientated user interface. You can create
a workflow for the analysis using drag & drop of analysis modules.
nCode DesignLife is a program for lifetime analysis. nCode DesignLife uses FEM results
and operational strength tests for the lifetime assessment.
Further information on HBM's nCode software can be found at

https://www.hbmprenscia.com/.

HBM Playback (only available in Analysis mode)

Generates one file per channel in a format which can be read in and “played back” by cat-
man in DAQ mode.
See Signal generator/playback file.

ASCII/ASCII with channel info

Files exported in this format can be read in again by many programs. A file in the format
ASCII with channel info also includes the traceability data and can be read in again by cat-
man almost free of loss; only the measurement resolution is restricted to the number of
places present in the ASCII file.

MS Excel 97-2003
Excel must be installed for the export.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 257
Exports the measurements to an Excel workbook. In addition a second file of the same
name and with the TSX file name extension is created in which the test parameters are
saved.

In this format up to 65,000 measurements can be saved, because this is the max-
imum number of rows on a sheet in the MS Excel 97-2003 format. If there are more
measurements, they are not exported.

MS Excel Office 2007 XML/Binary

Excel 2007 or higher must be installed for the export.

Exports the measurements to an Excel workbook. In addition a second file of the same
name and with the TSX file name extension is created in which the test parameters are
saved.
The default setting for the file format in Excel should be MS Excel Office XML or MS Excel
Office Binary (not MS Excel 97-2003).

In this format up to 1,000,000 measurements can be saved, because this is the max-
imum number of rows on a sheet in the MS Excel Office 2007 format. If there are
more measurements, they are not exported.

NI TDMS
Files (*.TDMS or *.TDM) exported in this format can be directly read in by the data ana-
lysis software, DIAdem® from National Instruments Engineering GmbH & Co KG. Files gen-
erated in this format by catman can also be read again by catman. As all the data in
catman is also stored in this format, the format is equivalent to the HBM catman stand-
ard format.
Files in this format which were generated by other programs can normally also be read by
catman; only channels in text (string) format cannot be read, and are skipped.
®
Further information on DIAdem can be found at www.ni.com.

NI DIAdem
Files (*.DAT) exported in this format can be directly read in by the data analysis software,
DIAdem® from National Instruments Engineering GmbH & Co KG. As all the data in cat-
man is also stored in this format, the format is equivalent to the HBM catman standard
format.

catman
258 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
A header file and a data file are produced when exporting data in this format. Also, the
header file can be directly interpreted by DIAdem® and the data file is in the format
REAL64.
®
Further information on DIAdem can be found at www.ni.com.

MATLAB (5.0)
Files in this format can be directly processed by the data analysis software MATLAB®
(from version 5.0) from the company The MathWorks Inc.
®
Further information on MATLAB can be found at www.mathworks.com.

Vector MDF 3
MDF (Measurement Data Format) is a binary file format which was developed in 1991 by
Vector Informatik GmbH in cooperation with Robert Bosch GmbH. The format is now
primarily used in the automotive sector. See also MDF 4.
Further information on Vector Informatik GmbH can be found at

www.vector.com.

ASAM MDF 4.1

MDF (Measurement Data Format) is a further development of the MDF 3 format and in
this version is an ASAM standard (Association for Standardization of Automation and
Measuring Systems). With this development there is no 2 GB restriction as with MBF 3
(theoretically 264 bytes, i.e. 1010 Tbyte per file can now be written). In addition the format
has far-reaching possibilities of saving metadata (test parameters). Also special func-
tions such as data compression or Quick Preview (data reduction for preview channels)
are supported by catman.

Further information on ASAM can be found at www.asam.net and

wiki.asam.net/display/STANDARDS/ASAM+MDF.

See also Vector MDF Validator ( vector.com/vi_mdf_tools_en), catman Knowledge

Base (via Help ► Knowledge Base at the top right of the program interface).

RPC III (MTS)

Files in this format can be directly processed by the data analysis software RPC® III from
MTS® Systems Corporation. As the format does not permit custom channel lengths, so-

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 259
called groups of 2048 values are always stored. If the channels to be exported do not
have values with a multiple of this size, the missing values are filled in with zeros. You
should therefore preferably acquire or export a multiple of 2048 measurements. Since
integer values with 16 bits always have to be saved in this format, catman uses the min-
imum and the maximum of each channel and correspondingly scales all values of this
channel.
Further information on MTS® Systems Corporation can be found at

www.mts.com.

UFF58 (Universal File Format 58)

The Universal File Format was originally developed in the 1970s by Structural Dynamics
Research Corporation (SDRC) to standardize data transfer between CAD data (Computer
Aided Design) and measured data. It is often used, for example, in modal analysis.
The UFF58 format can be saved as a binary or ASCII file. catman for safety uses the ASCII
format, because it is always supported.

Audio (.WAV, only available in Analysis mode)

Produces one file per channel in the WAVE format (PCM coded with 16 bits). Before sav-
ing, minimum and maximum measurements are determined and scaled to the available
value range (normalized). The files can, for example, be played back by Windows Media
Player.

nSoft DAC
Exports the data for the evaluation and analysis package nSoft® from HBM nCode in the
time series format (*.DAC). Here, an equidistant measurement series is written to a file,
i.e. each channel produces one file. The file name is composed of the name you specify,
the channel name appended with an underscore and the file name extension DAC.
Further information on HBM nSoft® can be found at

https://www.hbmprenscia.com/.

6.2.4 Saving depth

See also Use fixed storage size.

This setting enables you to save only the last few seconds or minutes of the measure-
ment when the measurement stops (manually or due to a trigger event). The setting is
independent of the mode selected under File ► Options for Data storage (Fixed storage

catman
260 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
size, Cyclic storage mode). You do not have to use a cyclic storage mode or a fixed stor-
age size. However, data can only be permanently saved once it has been acquired. If mea-
surements have not been taken for long enough, or if you are using a fixed size for the
temporary data store, that data is the maximum that can be stored.

6.2.5 Remote data saving (FTP/SFTP)

See also Remote (UDP output).

Remote data storage enables you to upload the files arising during a measurement to
another PC (server). To do this you have to be able to establish a connection to the rel-
evant PC, e.g. through a network, and an FTP or an SFTP file server must be active on this
PC.
It is sufficient if you use an FTP file server (server with File Transfer Protocol), e.g.
FileZilla, provided the PC can be reached in the company internal network. If possible, use
an SFTP file server (Secure File Transfer Protocol), if the transfer takes place over an
extraneous network, e.g. via the Internet.
Certain ports, which vary depending on the program, generally have to be released
for this to function correctly. If in doubt, ask your system administrator which these
are in your case and how you should proceed.

No automatic start (manually or by EasyScript): For manual starting use the Job status
panel.
Target folder: Here you can enter a subfolder to which the files of the relevant recorder
are to be transferred. Make sure that you possess the appropriate rights to create such
folders, or use an existing folder for which you have writing rights (letter w in the User
rights column).

Creating a new folder.

Deletes the marked folder or the marked files.

Transfers a single file to the server. You receive a dialog in which you can select the
file.

Updates the list of files in the current folder.

Changes to the higher level folder on the server.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 261
Working procedure
When files become available for transfer, they are automatically transferred using a back-
ground process unless you have activated No automatic start. Since the transfer takes
place using a background process, the operation of catman is not impaired by this. If sev-
eral files are available for transfer, a list is formed and the files are transferred con-
secutively. If you attempt to terminate catman during the transfer, you receive a dialog in
which you can interrupt the transfer. In this case the transfer continues the next time you
start catman.
While a transfer is pending or taking place, you cannot change the server settings.

Server settings
There are various ways of establishing the connection and transferring files via FTP or
SFTP. catman does not support all possible variants. Which method you can use depends
however on your server and its configuration as well as on whether you implement the
connection within a company internal network or (have to) use an extraneous network.

FTP
TLS for the login is not supported by catman.

With this type of transfer there are basically two variants. Normally however passive FTP
is used. The server can usually be configured such that requests may only come from cer-
tain IP addresses. Generally, a user name and a password are needed.

Active FTP
With active FTP catman opens a random port and informs the server of it together with its
own IP address. The data transfer at the server end here occurs via port 20. The advant-
age is that during the data transfer catman can communicate with the server. However, a
wider port range must be open on the server for the random port.

Passive FTP
A passive FTP sends a special command to catman, the server opens a port, which or the
range of which can normally be defined on the server, and transfers it together with the IP
address to catman. The advantage of this procedure is that the PC with catman can also
be located behind a router or a firewall.

What details do you have to provide?

You need:

catman
262 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
1. the name or IP address of the server, e.g. ftp.myftpserver.com or 192.168.05.1,
2. the port on which the server awaits requests, e.g. 21,
3. the User name and Password for your access to the server,
4. whether to Establish passive connection or not.
Optionally, you can define that the transferred files are compressed into a ZIP archive.
See also Using a proxy server.

SFTP
catman only supports DSA and RSA encryption for SSH authentication.

The data are transferred encrypted with this type of transfer. However, you need a key file,
the private key and the associated passphrase for the connection. catman also supports
the facility to connect using only a user name and password. However, since the pass-
word is transferred with each connection, this is not particularly secure. The variant with
key files is more secure, because the private key is only present on the client (catman)
and the public key is only present on the server. In addition, the private key is protected
with a passphrase. None of this information is sent to the server during a connection.

What details do you have to provide?

You need:
1. the name or IP address of the server, e.g. sftp.mysftpserver.com or 192.168.10.1,
2. the port on which the server awaits requests, e.g. 22,
3. the User name for your access to the server,
4. the Password, if you are not using a key file.
When using key files, instead of the password you need:
4. the private key (DSA or RSA private key in the PEM format),
5. the associated passphrase.
Use, for example PuTTYgen, if your private key is present as a PPK file. With this program
you can load the PPK file and save it in a PEM file using Conversions ► Export OpenSSH
key.
See also Using a proxy server.

Using a proxy server

You can also establish the connection to an FTP or SFTP server via a proxy server. Here,
catman supports various types of connection. Specify the one to be used in the dialog.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 263
For FTP
Socks V4: Use a SOCKS (Socket Secure) V4 proxy server.
Socks V5: Use a SOCKS V5 proxy server.
SITE Hostname: Connects to the proxy server and sends "SITE <Proxy server
name>"; then the login takes place with User name and Password.
USER Logon: Connects to the proxy server, logs in with proxy User and proxy Pass-
word to then connect to the FTP server by sending "USER <User name>@<Proxy
server name>".
USER No Logon: Connects to the proxy server and sends "USER <User
name>@<Proxy server name>".
OPEN: Connects to the proxy server and sends "OPEN <Proxy server name>".
Pipe: Connects to the proxy server, then the login takes place with User name and
Password.

With SFTP
HTTP Connect (no other option available).
Additionally specify:
2. Server (proxy server name), e.g. myserver.com or 192.168.25.10,
3. Port, on which the proxy server waits for requests, z. B. 1080 for FTP or 6588 for
SFTP,
4. User name and Password for your access to the proxy server.

6.3 Channel parameters for data acquisition

Changing a channel's activation and filter settings can be disabled with password
protection—see Sensor options, Password protection.

Activate/deactivate a single channel for this job

Click on in the Channels window (DAQ jobs tab, Channels in the Settings group) to
deactivate a channel or click on to activate it. Only active channels (marked with )
take part in the measurement.
If you use the option Deactivate the devices which caused an error and continue
measurement without interrupt, you must manually activate channels (use the con-
text menu) which have been automatically deactivated in all DAQ jobs—see also
What to do in case of initialization errors.

catman
264 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
Deactivate saving for a single channel (temporary file) in this job

With in the Save column you can deactivate temporary storage on a per channel
basis. Measuring data for a channel will then not be available in any file after a measure-
ment, as the values are not saved. You can however use the values in computations and,
during the data acquisition, display them in graphs. Use this function if, for example, you
wish to carry out rosette computations and are only interested in the results of these com-
putations, not in the “raw” data. Therefore the data files saved will be smaller, as only
data for the relevant channels are saved.

Deactivate saving to file for a single channel in this job

With in the Save column you can (only) deactivate saving to the file with the measure-
ment data for each channel separately.
The settings specified in Data storage (Settings group) of a DAQ job as Storage
mode and Data saving can only be disabled by these functions. If no saving occurs
at all, the settings Save: On ( ) or Save: On ( ) no effect.
See also Data storage.

Activate channel for statistic journal

Statistics journal: Here, activate for each channel (and DAQ job) whether minimums, max-
imums, mean values and/or the last current value of a time interval of a channel are to be
saved in a separate file. The time interval, which values and the (basic) generation of the
file are activated via the job parameters.

Setting filters manually

If required, activate the option Allow manual filter settings (Filter section) via the
menu File ► Options and DAQ channels (Channels and sensors group) to be able to
set filters manually. Otherwise the corresponding column in the Channels window
of the DAQ jobs tab is hidden.

There are four possibilities for filter settings:

1. Use current channel settings
To set the filter in the device you must use the corresponding device setup Assist-
ant, catman does not change any of the device settings.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 265
2. Use automatic anti-aliasing filters
This is the catman default setting. As long as the filter is supported by the device
at the selected sample rate, a filter with the characteristics set in the DAQ channel
options dialog is used.
See also Program option DAQ channels: Filter.
3. Select filter characteristic and filter frequency
With this option you can set the required filter for each channel and each DAQ job.
However another filter will be selected if the required filter cannot be used by the
channel. If you select first the sample rate (General in the Settings group) and then
the filter, a message will be displayed in DAQ mode that the next possible setting
will be taken and the new setting is displayed. Otherwise use Validate filters in the
context menu.
With MGCplus multi-channel plug-in modules, all plug-in module channels use
the same filter settings.
4. Working without filter (only QuantumX/SomatXR)
With QuantumX/SomatXR the low pass filter of the channel is deactivated and the
channel uses its maximum bandwidth.

Filters with Bessel characteristic create no signal distortion, but have a relatively
flat frequency response. In case of high-frequency interference at high amplitudes,
you should therefore set the cutoff frequency to 5% of the sample rate, or use filters
with Butterworth characteristics.. The frequency displayed by HBM devices is usu-
ally the -1 dB Cutoff frequency; exceptions are PMX and the filters for the decimal
sample-rate domain of the QuantumX/SomatXR.

6.4 Specify job parameters

See also Shortcuts (Program options System group) for starting and stopping a
DAQ job

In the Job parameters window (DAQ jobs tab, Settings group) you can
change the job name (e.g. Test measurement),
allocate a Shortcut for the start,
deactivate the job (so that it is skipped during the execution of all DAQ jobs),
deactivate the limit value monitoring for this job,
specify whether the event log is saved,
automatically delete the existing entries in an event log before starting,

catman
266 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
 additionally store statistical data (Statistics journal),
on starting the job browse to a certain Panel or Print page,
specify job repetitions with or without a break.

6.4.1 Compute statistics after DAQ job

The option computes the minimum and maximum for all channels over the whole mea-
suring time after a measurement. With appropriate configuration of the objects this is dis-
played in Digital indicators, tables or text objects.
You can then see at the end of a measurement any extreme value that has occurred at
any time in a channel. Assign Limit values to the channels to also display the limit
infringements of certain values in color.
With the option active select the desired display (Minimum/Maximum) in the con-
figuration dialog, for example of the digital indicator, via the Display tab and Show stat-
istics after DAQ job.
The computation takes some time, so the start of a directly following DAQ job is slightly
delayed.
See also Statistics journal.

6.4.2 Statistic journal

With this function you can save the Minima, Maxima and Mean values channels and/or
the last current value of the time interval to a separate file parallel to and independent of
normal data saving.
The computation does not occur automatically with the activation of the option for
all channels. With Channels (Settings group) go to the Channels window of the DAQ
job, and for each DAQ job and channel define whether the computation is to actually
take place. Take into account the actual time requirement needed for the com-
putation and only activate the required channels.
See also Defining channel parameters for data acquisition.

Specify the desired time interval for the computation (Update interval) and activate the
option. The time interval is not maintained precisely; the tolerance is in the range of the
time interval between two data transfers (see Program options: DAQ channels). Select
Also active during waiting for trigger to produce the journal also in the time when waiting
for the trigger event to initiate (normal) recording.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 267
 At sample rates ≥9600 Hz use an update interval of 5 minutes or longer to keep the
load on the processor at a low level.

At intervals of 5 minutes or longer, the data is acquired at “rounded” times. For

example, an interval of 10 minutes and a start shortly after 9:00 h would result in
storage at 9:10, 9:20, 9:30, etc.

During the measurement an ASCII file is first written (file extension .stat) and at the end
of all DAQ jobs the file is automatically converted to the catman format (*.bin). The file
receives the same name as the file with the measurement data, but “_StatJournal” is
appended. With long-term DAQ specify a backup interval, then the conversion to the cat-
man format occurs in separate files with a suffixed counter within that interval, and you
can view the data even before the measurement has finished.

Structure of the ASCII file

K1_ K1_ K1_ K1_ K2_ K2_

Time …
Sn Min Max Mean Sn Min
V V V V N N

43.665 7.2 -3.8 8.9 5.4 -352.63 -800.45

43.666 4.5 -4.2 5.3 5.1 -23.55 -750.33

Meaning of the abbreviations: K1_Sn: Channel1_Snapshot, K1_Min: Channel1_Min etc.

6.4.3 Test parameters

Activate Add DAQ settings after job termination to add the following data automatically:
Start/end time of job
Sample rate used
Number of acquired measurements
Start/stop mode
Trigger mode, trigger level and channel, time of trigger event as absolute date and
time value and relative to the start of the data acquisition (if start or stop triggers
have been used).

With test parameters you define further information concerning the measurement in addi-
tion to the file comment (General settings). To do this, click on New parameter, then

catman
268 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
double-click on the fields in the Name and Value columns. When importing measurement
data, these parameters are displayed additionally to the file comment in the Test Explorer
(see Analysis mode). The default information Operator, Department etc. can be deleted or
overwritten with your own values. You can define up to 128 job parameters.
No equal signs (“=”) may occur in the Name of a test parameter. On the other hand,
it is allowed in the Value.

The test parameters and the file comment can still be changed before they are saved, if
you have specified Prompt on DAQ termination for Data saving (DAQ jobs tab, Data stor-
age in the Settings group).
You can use Comment in the DAQ group (Visualization tab) to also enter comments
independently of the file comment during the measurement. These comments are
then saved as further test parameters with the date and time of the entry. The com-
ments in the DAQ comments window are deleted before each measurement.

Using Save as (Test parameters group) you can save the displayed test parameters as a
template and load them again later. If you save the template under the file name
TESTPARDEFAULT.VPT to the “TEMPLATES” subfolder in the catman working directory,
this default setting is used for each new job.
See also Program options: Folders.
If you save all the job settings as a template, then also the current test parameters
are saved; see Define default settings for DAQ jobs.

Creating a test parameter file with selectable entries

The standard entries in a test parameters file are:
Operator
Department|
Comments|
You can create a predefined text after each entry, or preset a selection by placing multiple
entries after “|” (vertical line) separated by “;” (semicolon).

Example
Operator|Hans;Georg;Werner;Michaela;Vanessa;Monika
Department|AV;BD;WZ;V
Humidity|Currently =

Create the file, as a text file, in Notepad for example, with the extension VPT. Load the file
via Test parameters ► Load (Test parameters group). Then only the names or

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 269
abbreviations listed are available for selection under Operator and Department respect-
ively. It is no longer possible to make free entries in these two fields. However, the current
value can (and should) be entered after “Humidity” – “Currently” when a measurement
has been made.

6.5 Prepare On-Board recording (MGCplus)

See also MGCplus on-board recording for restrictions of on-board recording, Start
On-Board recording, File download.

With more than one MGCplus the devices must be synchronized (sockets Sync
IN/Sync OUT). You also need to enable Sync leader/Follower mode; see Advanced
(DAQ jobs tab, Settings group) and Synchronizing several devices.

On-Board in the Settings group of the DAQ jobs tab enables you to define the parameters
for recording to the storage medium connected to the MGCplus, and to delete files loc-
ated on the storage medium. You define how the recording occurs (only on the storage
medium, or only on the PC, or on both) first with Start of DAQ job. Enter Analysis mode to
transfer files to the PC; see File download.

Procedure
1. Define your DAQ job as usual.
2. Click on On-Board in the Settings group (DAQ jobs tab), and activate Mark job for
On-Board recording. The icon for the job changes to in the list of DAQ jobs.
3. Enter the file name for the data file.
Auto-ident (append device address and date to file name) automatically generates
a file name consisting of the date and the IP address of the device. Use this option,
for example, with a number of devices, because then all files bear different names
and cannot be unintentionally overwritten during the transfer to the PC.
If you are using only high sample rates (≥ 2400 Hz), you can also use the format 2
bytes per value (INT). The 4 bytes per value (FLOAT) format is only useful if you
want to read the measured values later with a program of your own. In this case
the values are fully scaled before saving.
If you need the status (e.g. limit) and error information (e.g. overflow) of the
MGCplus, you must use the (default) format of 4 bytes per value (INT). This data
is not saved in the other formats.

catman
270 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
Optional settings
You can also create a second file in which only the min/max values from e.g. every 2000
measured values are written. In this example, this gives the compression factor 1000, i.e.
the file is 1000 times smaller.The file can therefore be loaded quicker and a search for val-
ues will also be faster.
Choose Delete to delete the selected files from the storage medium. The files are irre-
trievably deleted!
If you need time channels for the data recorded on the storage medium, activate the
NTP or PTP (CP52 only) time in the device, and specify in the Device search settings
that hardware time channels are to be used. Otherwise only the sample rate and
start time of the relevant channel are saved.
See also Hardware time channels, Synchronizing several devices.

6.6 Configure video recording

The dialog is only available with an active Video Cameras module. The camera
must be already selected and the recording format to be used must be defined; see
Setting up video cameras.

In this window you define the start and stop conditions for the video recording.
You can choose between three different start and stop conditions:
1. Automatic with start/stop of the DAQ job
The recording is started with the start of the DAQ job (i.e. not necessarily with the
start of the measurement). The recording is terminated with the end of the DAQ job
(stop including post-trigger).
2. With start trigger or With stop trigger
The recording is started or stopped with the occurrence of the trigger event. With
the recording a pre-trigger is not possible and is therefore not considered; a post-
trigger is considered.
3. Manually
Use this setting when you want to start or stop recording either manually using the
limit value and event monitoring or using script or AutoSequence.
In the default setting the path and file name for the measurements (%TestFile%) are used
as the file name for the video files and only the camera name (%Camera%) is appended.
However, you can:

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 271
 Manually select another path and file name.
Only specify one (other) file name. The file is then written to the standard folder for
measurement data.
In addition, you can integrate various variable texts using Placeholders, e.g. date and time
or the (existing) test parameters. If you add more test parameters, they are also dis-
played; see Defining test parameters on this. Process variables of an AutoSequence are
also selectable. The placeholders are directly replaced before data saving. For example,
the placeholder %DateTime% is replaced by the character string “Year_Month_Day_Hour_
Minute_Second”; the final file name then includes, for example, the character string
“2012_08_05_12_01_35”.

The space requirement for the video file is not immediately considered in the cal-
culation of the memory space available. Since the free space is however determined
dynamically during the measurement, the display of the residual possible measure-
ment duration in the status line is at the start still incorrect. Then, during the mea-
surement it quickly returns to a realistic value, but can however also change again
in the course of the measurement depending on the video compression.

Background information on saving video data

The path and file name for the file with the measurements is defined only at the end of
the measurement. Therefore, the video file is initially only temporarily saved and at the
end of the measurement it is renamed and—if necessary—transferred into the appropriate
folder.

6.7 Advanced (job) settings

See also Using Power BI.

Topics
6.7.1 Synchronization 273
6.7.2 Data transfer and error handling 274
6.7.3 Remote (UDP output) 278

catman
272 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
6.7.1 Synchronization

Time synchronization
Synchronize clocks (only possible for MGCplus): Choose Synchronize clocks in PC and
device upon DAQ start to transmit the PC time to the measuring instrument when starting
the DAQ job. The time is transmitted every time a new DAQ job is start, though not when
jobs are repeated.

The PC clock should have been synchronized via an (external) time server, for
example, otherwise an incorrect time might be transmitted.

See also Synchronizing several devices.

Synchronized measurement
You should always synchronize multiple devices as far as possible, and activate this
option. If you are connecting to multiple devices, you can enable synchronized mode, and
thus this option, in advance in the dialog. The mode will then be displayed when con-
necting. In this case Synchronized measurement is already active. The possible device
combinations and settings are explained in the section headed Synchronizing several
devices.

Continue measurement also in case of Re-Sync messages

In unfavorable circumstances, it might happen that a Re-Sync message is sent by a
device during measurement:
The devices use NTP or PTP time synchronization, and the quality of one device's
time data is poor, as a result of long phase delays or severe jitter for example.
On QuantumX/SomatXR modules a FireWire connection was removed or cut during
measurement.
On QuantumX/SomatXR modules a reset of the FireWire bus was performed.
In these cases the device in question sends a Re-Sync request, but will continue also
transmitting data. Normally in this case catman would terminate measurement with an
error message. But if you are running a long-term test, it is perhaps more important to
keep recording data. At low sample rates especially, a small time delay in the range of a
few milliseconds will not have such a severe impact over a short period of time. Activate
the option when you want to continue measurement even when such a message is sent.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 273
Use SY42 synchronization
For cable lengths of more than 100 meters, the synchronization module SY42 is available
for the MGCplus. This enables synchronization by hardware even over lengthy distances.
The plug-in must be present on all MGCplus devices and with the option active it is used
by catman to start a synchronous measurement.
Activate the plug-in module in the DAQ jobs tab and Advanced (Settings group) at Syn-
chronization: Use SY42 synchronization.

Delay Sync leader start (MGCplus only)

With MGCplus, the devices are classified as Sync leader and Sync follower based on their
connection by the sync cables. The Sync leader subsequently controls measurements.
Using this option, you can set a (short) waiting time so that even fully configured Sync fol-
lower devices have safely completed their initialization phase when the Sync leader starts
the measurement. This is recommended if, for example, the Sync leader has far fewer
channels than one of the Sync follower devices. In this case the Sync leader would also
finish its initialization much earlier and try to start the measurement. If the Sync followers
are not yet ready, an error will occur when starting the measurement.

6.7.2 Data transfer and error handling

Transfer of measurement data, data buffer

Data buffers are required to gather all the values which are read via an interface (read
block) before they are processed (executing computations, copying into the temporary
storage, etc.). In this section you define how large they are and how often data are trans-
mitted and written into the buffer.

With sample rates above 19,600 Hz you should change the following settings so
that all values can be transferred. You can reduce the time between two data trans-
fers so that all measured values can be transferred and also increase the number of
values per transfer, or adjust both values simultaneously.
If you do not change any values, catman will calculate the required minimums auto-
matically. However, the values calculated by catman are not displayed, but only
used for the relevant DAQ-job in the background.

catman uses the following formula for the computation of a suitable size if no larger
value is set:
1.2 * Highest sample rate *Time between two data transfers in milliseconds /
1000

catman
274 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
If a buffer size of 32,000 values is exceeded, you obtain an error message. The default is
4000.
With high sample rates we recommend also increasing the write cache; see Pro-
gram options Data storage.

Maximum number of samples per data transfer (read block): This defines how many val-
ues can be transferred as a maximum per channel and per data transfer (read process).
The buffers are created in the PC RAM.

Time between two data transfers: This defines how often the data transfers occur. The
specified time is however only considered when it is shorter than 100 ms. For sample
rates ≤10 Hz 1/sample rate is always used.
When reducing this time, remember that after each transfer the graphs are also redrawn
with the new values. This means that with smaller values the process load or the load on
the graphics card is increased. However, you can compensate for this by reducing the
refresh rate for graphs; see Refresh rate.

Since the data are only transferred to catman in blocks after this time interval, any
reaction to the measurements can only occur after this time period. catman is there-
fore not suitable for real-time control systems. Also the setting of analog or digital
outputs via a script command or the event monitoring can only occur when the data
to be processed are available. In the worst case the reaction time is therefore
100 ms or the time between two data transfers.

QuantumX/SomatXR modules can supply new data every 50 ms minimum.

Example: Sample rate 96,000 Hz

Set the Maximum number of samples per data transfer to 10,000, for example, and enter
75 ms for the Time between two data transfers. This means that theoretically up to
133,000 measured values per second can be transferred and you still have some
“reserve” in the settings.

Timeout for data transfer: This figure is only of interest if multiple MGCplus devices or
QuantumX/SomatXR modules are connected. In this case catman requests measure-
ments from all devices simultaneously. The data are then acquired first from the device
which responds first. In this field you can define the period after which this (asyn-
chronous) reading of data is aborted if no data are obtained. The value of 3,000 ms
should only be changed in special cases.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 275
 When loading an older project without these settings, the default settings are used
or the size of the read block is recalculated.

Asynchronous transfer mode

This setting can only be used for projects in which exclusively MGCplus devices are
connected. If other devices are detected, the option is not available.

This setting is interesting when several MGCplus devices are connected via Ethernet: The
measurements of all devices are then requested simultaneously and read in asyn-
chronously. This means that in total a higher overall speed is achieved, because the
devices can transfer their measurements once the network is free.

Use PC timing
Normally during a DAQ job HBM devices generate the measurements based on their
internal timing and buffer the incoming values. catman then transfers a data block out of
this buffer approx. 10 times per second. With PC-controlled timing catman requests one
measurement per channel in the time interval determined by the default sample rate. In
this way one single measurement is started in the device, the value is determined and
transferred to catman.
With default sample rates < 1 Hz, catman automatically switches to PC-controlled timing,
but with this option you can also force the mode for higher sample rates. However, the
sample rate should not be above 10 Hz, because otherwise the measurement may pos-
sibly not be able to be executed fast enough, i.e. the measurements would be recorded
with a lower sample rate than desired.
Measurements with PC-controlled timing are therefore useful when you are using two
devices of different types in the same DAQ project which do not permit synchronization
via NTP or the like.

The two other sample rates (slow/fast) are ignored when using PC timing. Channels
which belong to one of these sample rate groups are also measured with the
default sample rate.

With measurements with PC-controlled timing, the time interval between two mea-
surement time-points can vary. With sample rates which are too high the interval
can even be significantly larger than would be expected with the standard sample
rate. So use the “Default sample rate” time channel to generate the x values for a

catman
276 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
 graph (display the time channels; see Channel list options and drag the channel into
the area below the x axis).

You can view the actual time stamp for example in the Table component window
(DataViewer) tab.

Behavior on errors during the measurement

This setting is only relevant when multiple devices are connected: If a device fails during
the measurement or the connection to it is broken, with this option you can specify what
should be done.

Stop measurement with error message

This is the default setting. The measurement is terminated and a message with inform-
ation about the error is displayed. The data acquired up to this point are dealt with as spe-
cified in the job setting regarding the memory mode and data storage, e.g. stored in a file.

Stop measurement without error message

Activate this option only when you want to deal with the error yourself via the Event mon-
itoring or EasyScript. Otherwise the measurement is terminated “earlier” than planned
and you have no indication of the cause of the termination.

Deactivate the devices which caused an error and continue measurement without inter-
rupt
If one of the devices involved fails during the measurement, you can continue the mea-
surement with this option to at least acquire the data of the other devices. After the mea-
surement the channels of the failed devices then contain fewer measurements than the
other channels.

Restart of measurement
catman initially terminates the measurement in this case (and saves all files as required).
Then the measurement is restarted and catman attempts to establish a connection to all
devices again. If this is not successful, the devices not responding are deactivated and
measurement continues with the other devices. This then corresponds to the previous
option. You can combine the arising measurement files with Merge files (Analysis mode,
Test Explorer tab), but the gap in the time channel is retained.
You can also divide a long-term DAQ into several measurements over shorter inter-
vals, for example End of measurement after 12 hours and initiate a connection
again before each interval: Activate Reconnect and initialize devices before DAQ
start on the General tab and repeat the DAQ job correspondingly frequently (Job

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 277
 parameters tab). Then at the start of each interval an attempt is made to establish
communication, not just once per failure of the device as with the option Restart of
measurement.

6.7.3 Remote (UDP output)

See also Remote data saving (FTP/SFTP).

Output via UDP requires that you have an application that immediately reads the
data from the network. Repeating is not possible. Since the time requirements are
therefore generally very high, a fast programming language should be used,
because otherwise values will be lost.

Using the UDP measurement output, you can define that all measurements are to be sent
in the network by UDP protocol immediately after being read in. This mode is possible in
addition to a normal measurement.
The UDP output is not intended for real-time control, because the measurements
are only sent approx. every 50 to 100 ms (the typical UDP output rate is 10 Hz). New
measured values may therefore only be available after 100 ms.
See also Time between two data transfers under Data buffer.

Specify the Port and either a single address or one or more Ethernet segments in which
the output is to occur. For the port we recommend that a port number over 10,000 is
used.
The subnet mask of the PC must allow output to the desired network segment. The
figures in brackets after the segment indicate the required Subnet mask. Check that
your PC is using the appropriate Subnet mask.

Format of the UPD packet

Byte Meaning Explanation

Identifier
0-1
(always #0)

The UDP data stream does not contain any inform-

Number of chan-
ation about the channel name or the unit. The chan-
2-3 nels in UDP
nels, and thus the sequence of the data (channel list),
packet (INT16)
must therefore be known.

catman
278 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
 Byte Meaning Explanation
4-7 Output counter Enables detection of lost packets

The measured value output is scaled in the respect-

8-11 Measured value
ive physical unit. Depending on the format setting, 32
or 8- of channel 1
bits (4-Byte Single-Precision) or 64 bits (8-Byte
15 (FLOAT32/64)
Double-Precision) are outputted.

12-15 Measured value

or 16- of channel 2
23 (FLOAT32/64)

… …

6.8 Define default settings for DAQ jobs

Use this option to define all currently configured jobs with their settings as the default set-
ting for the DAQ jobs present after the start. Only the channel activation is not con-
sidered.
Click on Use as default (DAQ jobs tab, DAQ jobs group) to save the displayed settings of
the following windows for all DAQ jobs:
1. All settings in the General window.
2. All settings on the Storage window.
3. The filter, save/backup and statistics journal settings of the Channels window. The
activation settings are not considered.
4. All settings on the Job parameters window.
5. All settings in the Video window.
6. All settings of the On-Board recording window (MGCplus only).
7. All settings in the Advanced window.

Click on Default (DAQ jobs tab, DAQ jobs group) to reactivate the default settings of cat-
man.

catman
6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS 279
 catman
280 6 CONFIGURING DAQ JOBS
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES

Panels and Print pages are used in catman for the visualization of your measurements.
Up to 64 Panels and 64 pages may be created. You can graphically display the measured
values with various objects, which present the values in tabular form, in Digital or Bar
indicators as well as displaying further information with text or images. The visual dis-
plays for DAQ mode are saved in the DAQ project and those for Analysis mode are saved
in the Analysis project.
See also Visualization in Analysis mode.

Differences and restrictions for Panels and Print pages

Panels ( ) are optimized for screen output during measurement, and can utilize the
full screen. When printing a Panel only a screen copy (pixel) is passed to the printer.

Print pages ( ) display the available space for the selected page format (por-
trait/landscape) to aid layout of the results printout after a measurement. Additionally,
you have header and footer lines as well as configurable page margins available. Print
pages are optimized for the visualization objects of the Data analysis group which are
printed at maximum printer resolution. The objects of the Real-time indicators group are
only printed as pixel graphics.
The number of all objects per Panel or Print page is restricted to 128. You define the pos-
sible numbers of the various objects on all Panels and Print pages using the Panels
options (Program options, Visualization group).

Since you need more than one Panel in most cases, you can also create more Panels by a

direct click on . In addition to the Panels and Print pages, in DAQ mode you also
have the Scope and the Floating panel available (click on the arrow below the icon to be
able to create other Panels or Print pages).
You can also carry out measurements with catman without creating visual displays your-
self: If no visual display exists, you can choose on starting the measurement which of the
predefined visualizations you wish to use. Alternatively, you can open a file with a visual
display already produced.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 281
Predefined visualizations
Automatically (only QuantumX/SomatXR): In this process up to four channels per
module are automatically assigned, and a Scope panel with (four) Scope graphs is
created per module. The Allow automatic visualization layout option must be activ-
ated, otherwise the visualization is not offered; see Panel options).
Scope panel
Floating panel
Simple table
y(t) real-time graph
Simple measurement table and y(t) real-time graph
y(t) real-time graph with multiple axes (3 axes = scaling levels) if you are mea-
suring on channels with different scalings.
From file enables you to use a stored visualization.

Create visual displays yourself

You have two options:
1. Drag one or more channels to a blank point on a Panel or a Print page. You get a
popup menu from which you can select one of the most frequently used objects. If
the object is able to display multiple channels (graphs), only one object is generated
showing all selected channels, otherwise there is one for each channel.
2. Click on an icon in the Visualization objects group on the Visualization tab to select
the object you want. To do this, where applicable, open the group by clicking on the
arrow at the right margin. Then drag one or more channels onto the object.
Once they have been created, you can move the objects, change them in size and con-
figure them further—see Configure display objects.

Notes
All real-time visualizations are updated simultaneously, even if the page on which
they are located is not being displayed. In this case the graph is not redrawn, but
the current values are however written to the graphics buffer and processed. If you
are using many graphs and real-time indicators on your Panels and Print pages, to
reduce the processor load you can “stop” the graphs and real-time indicators which
are not visible (no longer updated): Performance in the DAQ group (Visualization
tab); see Prevent real-time lag.

catman
282 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 By default, an (active) channel is pre-assigned when an object has been generated.
Disable the Auto-assign channels when creating new objects option if you do not
want it—see Panel (and print page) options.
Add existing visualizations (all Panels, Print pages, etc.) or individual Panels or Print
pages to the existing Panels with File ► Open ► Complete visualization or ► Visu-
alization Panel.
You can also import visualizations from projects: File ► Import ► Import visu-
alization. You can choose whether the visualization will replace the existing one or
be loaded additionally.

7.1 Configuring Panels and Print pages

Click on a blank place of a Panel or Print page (no other object must be activated)
to obtain the window for setting up. You may need to display the window again: ►
Object properties window (on the right above the ribbon).

If you have already saved DAQ projects, you can also import the complete visu-
alization for DAQ mode from them: Menu File ► Import ► Import visualization. You
can choose whether the visualization will replace the existing one or be loaded addi-
tionally.

New Panels and Print pages are inserted after the current page. To change the order of
the Panel or Print page tabs, drag the tab of the relevant Panel to another point.
The Panel located in the first position cannot be deleted. You can however drag the
Panel tab to another position and then delete.

Names and symbols

Panels and Print pages are numbered consecutively; they are not enumerated separately.
Scope and Floating panels each use their own counts however. For better identification,
use a name (Title in the component window Configure: Panel). For Panels and print pages
you can also, if you want, Show icon at page tab.

Floating panels
The Floating panels are always displayed above Panels, Print pages or Scope panels. You
can only minimize a Floating panel. The advantage of Floating panels is that they can be
moved to a second (or third) monitor. With the Scope panel or the normal Panels and
Print pages this is not possible as they are always displayed in the main window of

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 283
catman.
See also Floating panel.

Snap on grid
Snap the visualization objects to the grid when moving and resizing, adjust the grid size
(grid width), or display the grid to make it easier to format the pages (component window
Configure: Panel).
See also Panels (Program options, Visualization group).

Zoom in/out, scroll bars

Click on the Visualization tab in the Panel/page group (Full screen mode) or on (on
the right above the ribbon) to hide or minimize the ribbon.
In the full screen mode the ribbon and all component windows are then hidden, and there
is more space available for the display of the graphics objects. Press, for example, ,
to revert to the normal view.
With only the ribbon groups are hidden; displays them again.

Use and to zoom into or out of all objects on the current page.
If not all visualization objects are visible, catman automatically displays scroll bars.

Background image
You can use a background image on Panels and on Print pages, and either adapt it to the
page size or display it in its original size or tiled. Click on to select an image or to
delete a background image. Despite their name, background images can also be dis-
played in the foreground: Select To front from the context menu.
See also Default folder for images in Folders (Program options, System group).

Print
Panels (also Scope and Floating panels) are only printed as screen copies (with pixel res-
olution). The section between the ribbon and the lower status line is copied, appropriately
scaled if required, and the dialog for selecting a printer is displayed.
Floating panels can only be printed via the dialog of the Panel itself: Click on the arrow
next to and choose Print Panel.

Print pages offer additional options: For each page you can specify different header and
footer lines or define a different page format (portrait/landscape). Use page margins to
be able to more easily arrange the layout. The header and footer lines are always printed
directly on the set edge in the region of the page margin. In addition, all graphs from the

catman
284 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
Display of all recorded samples area are printed as vector graphs with the set printer res-
olution.
In the Panel options you can specify that when printing a visualization (multiple
pages) only the Print pages are printed, not the Panels: Print pages only.

Show icon at page tab

Use and on the General tab to display or remove icons on the tabs of Panels and
Print pages. For this, specify the size of the icon to be used (16x16 to 48x48 pixels) and
the file containing the icon. If you have more than 16x16 pixels, also increase the height
of the tab with and a corresponding value in the selection field.

7.2 Available display objects for Panels/Print pages

With the display objects you arrange your visualization which displays your data and com-
putations on the screen during or after the measurement as well as your Print pages for
the printout of the results after a measurement. You do not have all objects available
depending on the operating mode of catman, the type of page and the activated modules.
Click on the desired object in the Visualization objects group. To do this, open the group
as necessary by clicking on the arrow at the right margin of the group. The following sec-
tions give you an overview of the available objects, their possible applications and their
configuration.
In Scope and Floating panels, only the objects displayed at the top of the Panel are avail-
able. The configuration process is similar to that for these objects on Panels or Print
pages, except that the dialog for it is located within the Scope or Floating panel.
See also Scope panel, Floating panel.
The number of visualization objects which can be created on all Panels together depends
on the object type and can be configured in the Options for Panels and Print pages (Pro-
gram options). With Scope and Floating panels a maximum of 64 objects are possible in
each case.
You can also create several display objects simultaneously by selecting multiple
channels with or in the channel list and dragging the last channel selected
onto a Panel or a page. When you select a graph, all channels are displayed in one
graph; the other objects are generated adjacent to one another, provided there is
enough space, otherwise one below the other (the entire Panel is used, however,
even if part of it is hidden by a component window). You can also generally define a

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 285
 specific object type for the creation process: Program option Panels (Visualization
group) and Dropping a channel on a Panel ... produces.

7.2.1 Objects for real-time indicators

Click on an object to display the Configure component window associated with that
object. If necessary, use Window ► Object Properties (on the right above the ribbon) to
display the window again if you have closed it.
The Real-time graphic to LED or Video (optional module) objects display the data during
a measurement (DAQ job execution), so this is the Real-time indicators group. The
objects are provided with data even when the panel or the page they are on is not dis-
played. There is no plotting, however; only the data buffers are filled. The Post-process
graph to Statistics table or Metadata table (Analysis mode) objects display all data, and
should therefore preferentially be used after the measurement.
See also Scope panel, Floating panel, Objects for the display of all recorded samples.
A special position is held by the object Angle synchron. graph in the group Display of all
recorded samples, which displays values both during and after the measurement, restric-
ted however to one or several revolutions.

Real-time graph
Displays the measured values in real time (during the measurement). You can also use
any channel instead of the time (default) for the x axis.
The limit value levels can be displayed as lines: Select in the Configure window the cor-
responding y axis (scaling layer) on the Axes tab and then choose on the Special tab
which limit values to display. See also Limit values.
At high sample rates with y(t) graphs compression to min/max values occurs; see also
Compression.
If you disable compression and then zoom, an overview across the entire measurement
period of time is displayed below the graph and the zoomed section is marked.

Digital indicator
Shows the present measurement or the minimum or maximum of the current DAQ job as
a number. In contrast to the display with the Simple table the extrema are calculated from
all the measurements, i.e. they are the actual extreme values. Enter 0 if you do not want

catman
286 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
the extreme values to decay.
Optionally, you can also display one of the extreme values after the measurement (after
the DAQ job has terminated). To do this, check that the Compute statistics after DAQ job
option is active (DAQ jobs tab, Job parameters in the Settings group).
The Digital indicator can also display the status of limits via one or several LEDs (Con-
figure window, Display tab, Show alarm limits), see also Limit values.
The object is ― apart from the configuration as peak, RMS or mean value indicator ― only
practicable with sample rates below 50 Hz, because otherwise not all values will be dis-
played, i.e. there is the risk of an alias.

Simple table
Displays the current measured value, minimum and maximum value as well as whether
one of the limit conditions has been reached. From the General tab (Configure window),
you can delete the statistical value or limit conditions display from the table and reset the
current minimum/maximum values at once or when starting a DAQ job. The displayed
min/max values simulate a drag indicator: approx. every 50 ms the current measurement
is compared to the previous extremum. Use Digital indicators or an AutoSequence to
detect short-term peaks.
The configuration of the columns for the Simple table cannot be changed; you can only
occupy complete rows with one channel.
See also Flexible table and in Analysis mode Data table, Statistics table.
The object is only practicable with sample rates below 50 Hz, because otherwise not all
values will be displayed.

Flexible table
The Flexible table offers a large number of options. You can:
make different entries for each cell,
display the current measurement of a channel,
display statistical values (Min/Max),
enter formulas in fields as in Excel (Configure window, Cells tab),
span cells,
configure interactive objects for Autosequences or EasyScript,
display images,

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 287
 link to a graph on another panel (Configure window, Cells tab, Picture: From panel
object).
Drag a channel onto any field to open the dialog for selection.
A Flexible table can have up to 100,000 rows. If you would like to view more data, you
have to use the Data table or a DataView window or create a plot section.
See also Configure flexible table, Flexible table in Analysis mode.
For the display of current measurements, the object is only practicable with sample rates
below 50 Hz, because otherwise not all values will be displayed. The display of minimum
or maximum refers to the whole measurement (duration of the DAQ job).

Analog meter
Displays the current measured value with a pointer. You can also configure this object
like a car fuel display (Configure window, General tab, Template). The display of the
numeric value as can be deactivated: On the Layout tab select Pointer digital and
deselect Display value.
Use the Layout and Style tabs to adapt the display, e.g. the opening angle, to your require-
ments. Note here that some of the controls on the Layout tab have a mutual influence.
The limit levels can be displayed via the Alarm tab in the Configure window: Activate
Show alarm limits, and select the desired one at From limit value; see also Limit values.
If you display alarm values, the configuration possibilities on the Layout tab expand: You
can separately change the colors of the individual warning and alarm ranges. For
example, for Band in the field to the right select ID1, ID2 or ID3 for the different ranges.
The object is ― apart from the configuration as peak, RMS or mean value indicator ― only
practicable with sample rates below 50 Hz, because otherwise not all values will be dis-
played, i.e. there is the risk of an alias.

Bar indicator
The bar indicator has many configuration possibilities: different horizontal or vertical bar
layouts, thermometer or tank level display Configure panel, General tab, Template). The
display of the numeric value as can be deactivated: On the Layout tab select Pointer
digital and deselect Display value.
Use the Layout and Style tabs to adapt the display, e.g. the aperture angle, to your require-
ments. Note here that some of the controls on the Layout tab have a mutual influence;
see also Change layout.

catman
288 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
The limit levels can be displayed via the Alarm tab in the Configure window: Activate
Show alarm limits, and select the desired one at From limit value; see also Limit values.
If you display alarm values, the configuration possibilities on the Layout tab expand: You
can separately change the colors of the individual warning and alarm ranges. For
example, for Band in the field to the right select ID1, ID2 or ID3 for the different ranges.
The object is ― apart from the configuration as peak, RMS or mean value indicator ― only
practicable with sample rates below 50 Hz, because otherwise not all values will be dis-
played, i.e. there is the risk of an alias.

Multi-bar graph
The object displays a number of channels in the form of bars with or without a gradient
(graded color change). The bar spacing does not need to be the same; you can also
define any coordinates for the individual bars.
You can display the levels of limit values as lines (select Configure window, Axes tab,
Limit values in the Show alarm limits section).
See also Limit values, Configure Multi-bar graph.
The object is only practicable with sample rates below 50 Hz, because otherwise not all
values will be displayed.

Frequency spectrum (live FFT)

Displays the frequency distribution in the present signal.
Specify the window function and the number of measurements over which the amplitude
spectrum is to be calculated on the General tab (FFT and Window in the Configure win-
dow of the graph).
If you assign a number of channels to the graph, you can select with Channels whether
you want to view the channel spectra separately (Singular) or display the Vector sum (the
single spectra are added vectorially, i.e. squared and summed). Phase difference is only
practicable with two channels; here the difference between both phases is then com-
puted.
With unsteady signals with a quickly varying composition you can obtain a steadier dis-
play using Averaging. In general you should choose a time here, because otherwise the
computation only takes place over the current read block (each 100 ms) (Averaging: Off).
Peak detection: With active detection a table containing the detected peaks is shown in
the graph. For Threshold specify the value (amplitude) from which a peak is to be

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 289
detected. Width is the consecutive number of measurements used for the determination.
Depending on the polynomial computation used, three or four values are usually
optimum. If you do not obtain any results, try with five or six values. Generally, higher val-
ues worsen the results.
See also Spectrogram, Frequency analysis.

Spectrogram
The object is only available with catmanAP or with an active EasyMath additional
module.

The Spectrogram replaces the waterfall-diagram object in DAQ mode from catman 4.0. It
computes the frequencies contained in a signal with the associated amplitudes which are
shown color-coded. Specify the window function and the number of measurements over
which the amplitude spectrum is to be calculated on the General tab (FFT and Window in
the Configure window of the graph).
One spectrum per read block is computed and shown as a column with a width of one
pixel. The time window is given automatically from the number of pixels for the width of
the graph and is shown in the graph. The overlapping is given by the number of measure-
ments for an FFT and the sample rate. Manually define the color scale for the amplitudes
(Contour tab); only the frequency axis can be determined completely automatically.
Peak detection: With active detection a table containing the detected peaks is shown in
the graph. For Threshold specify the value (amplitude) from which a peak is to be detec-
ted. Width is the consecutive number of measurements used for the determination.
Depending on the polynomial computation used, three or four values are usually
optimum. If you do not obtain any results, try with five or six values. Generally, higher val-
ues worsen the results.
See also Frequency spectrum, Frequency analysis.

Polar diagram
Displays the measurements in real time (during the measurement) via the angle (polar
coordinates). You must specify a channel for the x axis (angle).
See also Channels as x data sources.
The object is, for example, well suited to the visualization of measurements of rotating
measurement objects, such as engines, because here the values can be displayed related
to the angular position.

catman
290 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 Annotations or multiple axes as with the Real-time graph are not possible here and
the zoom and cursor functions are restricted.

(Real-time) Cursor graph

Displays the measured values in real time (during the measurement). You can also use
any channel instead of the time (default) for the x axis. In contrast to the Real-time graph,
the graph uses no compression and therefore shows all measured values. With large time
windows this can lead to a high burden on the PC and therefore to a possible RT lag.
Check the settings as necessary: menu File ► Options Safety group, Extended safety
checks before DAQ start.
The limit value levels can be displayed as lines: Select in the Configure window the cor-
responding y axis (scaling layer) on the Axes tab and then choose on the Special tab
which limit values to display. See also Limit values.
Change the plot parameters (color, line style) for this graphical object on the
graph's Plots tab; the Configure: Plot dialog is not available here.

LED
Through various images, the LED displays the status of a digital input, a limit value, a high
or low level crossing or the status of the measurement. You can also control the LED via
an AutoSequence or EasyScript.
For the display of the limit value statuses there are three freely selectable images (LED
symbols) available; only the images for Default and Alarm are used as status indicator.
Toggle sets one of the states as the default. catman uses all image files in the formats
BMP, ICO, GIF, JPEG and WMF which are located in the standard folder for LED symbols.
See also Program option Folders (System group), Default folder for LED symbols and
Limit values.

Video camera display

The object is only available with an active Video Cameras module.

The object displays the (live) picture of one of the active video cameras. During a record-
ing various items of information are displayed, e.g. the file name and the current file size.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 291
With the use of Placeholders they are initially displayed and the actual file name used is
only shown after saving.
Live display only makes sense for testing cameras with RTP streaming. As the data
stream has to be decompressed for this, the CPU load is increased and the advant-
age of a precompressed data stream is lost.

Map
The object is only available with catman AP and catman PostProcess; see also
Licensing and registration.

The object loads a map view from the Internet which is made available by Google Ireland
Ltd. When querying, no user information or PC parameters are passed to Google apart
from the querying IP address.
You can choose between Road map, Satellite image, a map showing the mountains and
valleys (Terrain) and an overlay display of the road map and satellite image (Hybrid).

The maps can only be used in conjunction with catman. Owing to licensing law
restrictions, the object is unavailable in some countries, including China and North
Korea. You can, however, switch to using Baidu maps if you have a Baidu account.
For details refer to the Knowledge Base under “Working with Baidu Maps in China”
and http://lbsyun.baidu.com/index.php?title=webapi.

Choose either with the graphics tools R-Zoom or H-Zoom sections or by stating the
coordinates, the positioning buttons and the zoom selection on the Map tab of the object
(Configure window of the graph).
In the smaller zoom levels (0 and 1), i.e. with the display of whole continents, the
map display is slightly distorted due to the curved surface of the Earth.

Save the map once you have selected the size of the graphics, the type of map and a suit-
able section so that the display is also available without an Internet connection.
If you change the size of the graphics without an Internet connection, the image that is
available is only scaled, i.e. single pixels may show up in the display. It is not possible to
change the map section.
Contact HBM if you would like to use maps from another source, e.g. from HERE.

catman
292 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
Display of position data
Drag the channel with the values for the longitude onto the x axis and the channel with
the values for the latitude onto the y axis.

CAN Raw table

The object displays the individual bytes of CAN raw messages in a table. You can use the
Configure dialog to access various displays; see Configuring a CAN raw table.
The object synchronizes in both DAQ and analysis mode with a cursor in a post-process
graph or Cursor graph (first cursor only). As soon as you place the cursor at a position in
the graph, the line that (most closely) matches the corresponding point in time is marked.

7.2.2 Objects for the display of all recorded samples

Click on an object to display the Configure component window associated with that
object. If necessary, use Window ► Object Properties (on the right above the ribbon) to
display the window again if you have closed it.
The Real-time graphic to LED or Video (optional module) objects display the data during
a measurement (DAQ job execution), so this is the Real-time indicators group. The Post-
process graph to Statistics table or Metadata table (Analysis mode) objects display all
data, and should therefore preferentially be used after the measurement.
See also Scope panel, Floating panel, Objects for real-time indicators.
A special position is held by the object Angle synchron. graph in the group Display of all
recorded samples, which displays values both during and after the measurement, restric-
ted however to one or several revolutions.
As a long measurement can result in many measured values, you should not have these
objects updated so frequently, or do it only manually ( ). The objects are updated only
when the panel or the page they are on is displayed. When browsing to the page, and at
the end of the measurement, a one-time automatic update is performed. You can set it to
update more frequently however (Refresh rate). Note in this case that a more frequent
update also requires more processing power and that it can possibly lead to an RT lag.
The following overview shows all possible objects; some of them are only available
in Analysis mode however.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 293
 Post-process graph
This object displays all the measured values in a graph and is mainly intended for dis-
playing the data after a measurement.
Not all values are drawn in the graph immediately. If more measurements are present
than specified on the Special tab under Compress from (data points) (default 2000 data
points), with y(t) graphs initially a compression to min/max values is carried out.
However, once you zoom into a region, the original values are reloaded—at a sufficient
zoom stage. This means that post-process graphs are quickly drawn even when plots are
assigned with 10,000,000 measurements. If you disable compression and then zoom, an
overview across the entire measurement period of time is displayed below the graph and
the zoomed section is marked.
See also Configure y(x) graph, Compress.
Enter a time unit, e.g. hh:mm:ss, on the General tab of the Configure window (x axis
in) to display the date and time on the x axis.
In addition you have the possibility of using the entries with … (abs). This means
that the data are displayed related to the first data record of the graph and you can
recognize different start times of individual measurements.

(Post-process) Cursor graph

This object displays all the measured values in a graph and is mainly intended for dis-
playing the data after a measurement. The object is particularly well suited for analysis
with the cursor; up to two cursors can be displayed.
Not all values are drawn in the graph immediately. If more measurements are present
than specified on the Special tab under Compress from (data points) (default 100,000
data points), with y(t) graphs initially a compression to min/max values is carried out and
displayed. However, once you zoom into a region, the original values are reloaded—at a
sufficient zoom stage. This means that post-process graphs are quickly drawn even
when plots are assigned with 10,000,000 measurements.
See also Configure y(x) graph, Compress.
Change the plot parameters (color, line style) for this graphical object on the
graph's Plots tab; the Configure: Plot dialog is not available here.

catman
294 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 Polar diagram
Displays the measurements in real time (during the measurement) via the angle (polar
coordinates). You must specify a channel for the x axis (angle).
See also Channels as x data sources.
The object is, for example, well suited to the visualization of measurements of rotating
measurement objects, such as engines, because here the values can be displayed related
to the angular position.

Angle synchron. graph

The object is only available with catmanAP or with an active EasyMath sup-
plementary module.

The graph shows one or several channels against angular values. This occurs both in real
time during the measurement (the default setting for the update rate is 2 x per second) as
well as after the measurement, as is usual with this type of graph.

The values of the angle channel do not have to be present from 0° to 360°; catman
evaluates the minimum and maximum channel values. The figures shown in the
graph are just pure labels and do not depend on the actual values. Depending on
the selected angular axis minimum and maximum values at 0° and 350° or at 180°
and +180° etc. are displayed. Therefore, choose a setting which fits your data.

Gear factor: Defines over how many minima and maxima of the angle channel the data is
to be displayed. In the setting 2, for example, the data is shown from a minimum to the
second following maximum. The setting is helpful when the angular data does not ori-
ginate from the actual observed shaft, but rather from a sensor operating through a
flange-mounted gearbox with the sensor passing through more (or less) revolutions that
the observed shaft.

Zero point: Shifts all plots by the specified amount on the x axis. Positive values move the
plots to the left, negative ones to the right. Use the Offset tab in the Configure dialog of a
plot to move an individual plot.

Revolutions: Defines how many of the curve sections, which arise from the settings made
above, are visible simultaneously in the graph. You have to go via the control field and

the appropriate number of curve sections through the data record to view more than
one section.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 295
Apply to all: Has the effect that a click on one of the control fields acts on all Angle syn-
chron. graphs.
In the default setting the compression of the data records for this graph starts at
64,000 values.
See also Compression threshold.

Contour graph
This type of graph facilitates the display of the value distribution on a z axis using colors.

Histogram
This type of graph is particularly suitable for displaying histograms (see also Class count-
ing).
On the Axes tab activate the Counts in % option to display the class counts as per-
centages of the total.

3D chart
This type of graph is particularly suitable for displaying 3D data.
See also Class counting, JTF spectrum, 3D chart, Spectrogram.

3D diagram (only available in Analysis mode)

This type of graph is particularly suitable for displaying data records which change with
time. Here, several 2D data records can be displayed stacked three-dimensionally. You
can freely rotate the view in all directions using the scroll bars. The object can display the
same data as the 3D chart, but is more versatile in configuration.
See also Counting, JTF spectrum, 3D chart, Spectrogram.

Frequency spectrum (only available in Analysis mode)

The object is only available with catmanAP or with an active EasyMath sup-
plementary module.

Displays the frequency distribution of all measurements.

catman
296 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
Specify the window function and the number of measurements over which the amplitude
spectrum is to be calculated on the General tab (FFT and Window in the Configure win-
dow of the graph).
With unsteady signals with a quickly varying composition you can obtain a display with
less noise using Averaging.
See also Displays the frequency distribution in the present signal., Spectrogram, Fre-
quency analysis.

Spectrogram (only available in Analysis mode)

The object is only available with catmanAP or with an active EasyMath sup-
plementary module.

The Spectrogram is additionally available from catman 4.0. It directly computes a JFT
spectrum; you do not need to produce a computation function. The spectrogram com-
putes the frequencies contained in a signal with the associated amplitudes which are
shown color-coded. Specify the window function and the number of measurements over
which the amplitude spectrum is to be calculated on the General tab (FFT and Window in
the Configure window of the graph).
The time window is given automatically from the measurement time. The number of mea-
sured values is divided by the number of pixels for the width of the graph. In each case a
column with FFTs is calculated and displayed over this number of values. Manually
define the color scale for the amplitudes (Contour tab); only the frequency axis can be
determined completely automatically.
Click in the area of the graph to display the spectrum for this time-point. Click in the
graph frame to hide the spectrum again.
See also Spectrogram (real-time), Class counting, JTF spectrum, 3D chart, 3D diagram,
Frequency analysis.

Map
The object is only available with catman AP and catman PostProcess; see also
Licensing and registration.

The object loads a map view from the Internet which is made available by Google Ireland
Ltd. When querying, no user information or PC parameters are passed to Google apart
from the querying IP address.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 297
You can choose between Road map, Satellite image, a map showing the mountains and
valleys (Terrain) and an overlay display of the road map and satellite image (Hybrid).

The maps can only be used in conjunction with catman. Owing to licensing law
restrictions, the object is unavailable in some countries, including China and North
Korea. You can, however, switch to using Baidu maps if you have a Baidu account.
For details refer to the Knowledge Base under “Working with Baidu Maps in China”
and http://lbsyun.baidu.com/index.php?title=webapi.

Choose either with the graphics tools R-Zoom or H-Zoom sections or by stating the
coordinates, the positioning buttons and the zoom selection on the Map tab of the object
(Configure window of the graph).
In the smaller zoom levels (0 and 1), i.e. with the display of whole continents, the
map display is slightly distorted due to the curved surface of the Earth.

Save the map once you have selected the size of the graphics, the type of map and a suit-
able section so that the display is also available without an Internet connection.
If you change the size of the graphics without an Internet connection, the image that is
available is only scaled, i.e. single pixels may show up in the display. It is not possible to
change the map section.
Contact HBM if you would like to use maps from another source, e.g. from HERE.

Display of position data

Drag the channel with the values for the longitude onto the x axis and the channel with
the values for the latitude onto the y axis.

Flexible table (only available in Analysis mode in this group)

The table offers even more options than the table with the same name in DAQ mode. You
can:
make different entries for each cell,
enter formulas in fields as in Excel (Configure window, Advanced tab),
span cells,
display all measurements of the channel. The values are always entered in the
same column.
display statistical values (Min/Max etc.),
display channel information (excitation voltage, zero-balance value, serial number
of the amplifier or sensor ID),

catman
298 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 display test parameters,
display data relevant to the measurement, such as sample rate or number of mea-
surements (measurement parameters),
link to a graph on another panel (Configure dialog, Cells tab, Picture: From panel
object).
Drag a channel onto any field to open the selection dialog, or use Window ► Data sources
for drag and drop (on the right above the ribbon). Mark the required channel in the Ana-
lysis project window and drag and drop the required information into the appropriate cell.
Activate Append channel name and unit so as not to receive just the numerical values in
the table. In this case four consecutive cells in a row are taken up.
A Flexible table can have up to 100,000 rows. If you would like to view more data, you
have to use the Data table or a DataView window or create a plot section.
See also Flexible table (real-time), Configure flexible table, Data table, Simple table (in
Analysis mode).

Data table
The Data table displays only measurements and is not restricted to 100,000 values like
the Flexible table.

Statistics table
The Statistics table shows only the statistical data of channels. You can choose between
the display of Min/Max/Mean and the display of Extended statistics data (includes, for
example, standard deviation and variance), but the displayed values cannot be indi-
vidually defined.

Traceability table (only available in Analysis mode)

The Traceability table (only available in Analysis mode) includes the traceability data in a
form similar to the Channel info(rmation) window in the DAQ channels tab: excitation
voltage, zero balance, amplifier serial number, sensor ID, etc.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 299
 Meta data table (only available in Analysis mode)
The meta data table (only available in Analysis mode) enables you to display all test para-
meters together in a table. Drag the main entry Test parameter onto this table.
Display the individual entries, e.g. the number of measurements, with the Text
object.

CAN Raw table

The object displays the individual bytes of CAN raw messages in a table. You can use the
Configure dialog to access various displays; see Configuring a CAN raw table.
The object synchronizes in both DAQ and analysis mode with a cursor in a post-process
graph or Cursor graph (first cursor only). As soon as you place the cursor at a position in
the graph, the line that (most closely) matches the corresponding point in time is marked.

7.2.3 Objects for synchronized display (only Analysis mode)

These objects are only available in Analysis mode, and are only used to display mea-
sured values at the cursor position in graphs.

Use these objects together with a graph (cursor or post-process graph) to display the val-
ues of (any) channels at the position of the (first) cursor. All objects of this type on a
Panel or a page are synchronized with the active graph.

Map
The object is only available with catman AP and catman PostProcess; see also
Licensing and registration.

The object loads a map view from the Internet which is made available by Google Ireland
Ltd. When querying, no user information or PC parameters are passed to Google apart
from the querying IP address.
You can choose between Road map, Satellite image, a map showing the mountains and
valleys (Terrain) and an overlay display of the road map and satellite image (Hybrid).

The maps can only be used in conjunction with catman. Owing to licensing law
restrictions, the object is unavailable in some countries, including China and North

catman
300 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 Korea. You can, however, switch to using Baidu maps if you have a Baidu account.
For details refer to the Knowledge Base under “Working with Baidu Maps in China”
and http://lbsyun.baidu.com/index.php?title=webapi.

Choose either with the graphics tools R-Zoom or H-Zoom sections or by stating the
coordinates, the positioning buttons and the zoom selection on the Map tab of the object
(Configure window of the graph).
In the smaller zoom levels (0 and 1), i.e. with the display of whole continents, the
map display is slightly distorted due to the curved surface of the Earth.

Save the map once you have selected the size of the graphics, the type of map and a suit-
able section so that the display is also available without an Internet connection.
If you change the size of the graphics without an Internet connection, the image that is
available is only scaled, i.e. single pixels may show up in the display. It is not possible to
change the map section.
Contact HBM if you would like to use maps from another source, e.g. from HERE.

Display of position data

Drag the channel with the values for the longitude onto the x axis and the channel with
the values for the latitude onto the y axis.

Video playback
Shows a video and in the representation follows either the cursor position of the active
graph or controls the cursor position or display in other graphical objects. Drag the video
file from the test parameters (Video file from camera ...) into the object.
Above the picture various items of information are displayed, e.g. the file name and the
duration. Using the buttons under the picture, you can change the replay speed, pause
the video, play frame by frame forward or reverse or change the volume. The current pos-
ition in the video is displayed below these buttons.
If the video and the measurement data do not start simultaneously, enter the offset
on the General tab.

Digital indicator
Displays the measurement at the cursor position as a number.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 301
 Simple table
Displays the measurement at the cursor position as a number.
The configuration of the columns for the Simple table cannot be changed; you can only
occupy complete rows with one channel.

Analog meter
Displays the measurement at the cursor position with a pointer. You may also configure
this object like a car fuel display (Configure window, General tab, Template).
Use the Layout and Style tabs to adapt the display, e.g. the opening angle, to your require-
ments. Note here that some of the controls on the Layout tab have a mutual influence.
Colored limit values can be configured via the Alarm tab in the Configure window: acti-
vate Show alarm limits.

Bar indicator
The Bar indicator shows the measurement at the cursor position and has various pos-
sible configurations: different horizontal or vertical bars or thermometers (Configure win-
dow, General tab, Template).
Use the Layout and Style tabs to adapt the display, e.g. the aperture angle, to your require-
ments. Note here that some of the controls on the Layout tab have a mutual influence.
Colored limit values can be configured via the Alarm tab in the Configure window: acti-
vate Show alarm limits.

Frequency spectrum (FFT)

The object is only available with catmanAP or with an active EasyMath additional
module.

Displays the frequency distribution in the vicinity of the cursor. In each case the half of
the values to the left and right of the cursor are used for the computation for the FFT.
Specify the window function and the number of measurements over which the amplitude
spectrum is to be calculated on the General tab (FFT and Window in the Configure win-
dow of the graph).

catman
302 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
With unsteady signals with a quickly varying composition you can obtain a steadier dis-
play using Averaging.
Peak detection: With active detection a table containing the detected peaks is shown in
the graph. For Threshold specify the value (amplitude) from which a peak is to be detec-
ted. Width is the consecutive number of measurements used for the determination.
Depending on the polynomial computation used, three or four values are usually
optimum. If you do not obtain any results, try with five or six values. Generally, higher val-
ues worsen the results.

7.2.4 Layout objects

Text and Background image provide you with various options for formatting and dis-
playing system texts.

Text
Use this object, for example, for headings, labels or the display of (single) measurement
or channel parameters. The formatting defined always refers to the entire text.
You can also use the object for images; the object Background image is identical to the
object Text.

DAQ mode
With System text you can also display DAQ job parameters or the date and time. Activate
the Update during DAQ job option (General tab), to view the current time for example.

Analysis mode
Drag a parameter from the Analysis project component window into the Text field of the
component window Configure to display channel parameters such as minimum, max-
imum, channel name, comment, etc. The component windows for configuring the object
and for the loaded analysis projects must be visible for this at the same time.
In the Text field the parameter is displayed enclosed in tags, e.g. <P>XY</P>, but on a
Panel or a Print page the content of the parameter is always displayed. Do not change the
parameter definition, otherwise the associated information can no longer be found by cat-
man. If you load a new test, the same parameter—if available—is displayed for the new
test.
Use the meta data table or the traceability table if you want to display all the inform-
ation.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 303
 Background image
The object is identical to the object Text and is suitable for images or logos in the formats
JPEG, BMP (Windows Bitmap) or GIF (Graphics Interchange Format). The Background
image was introduced, because with the object Text it is not immediately obvious that it
can also display images. The images used are also saved in the default settings in the
project file. The background image can also be shown in the foreground (To front context
menu), but the name is retained.
See also Folders program option (System group) and Configuring Panels and Print pages
for background images over a complete Panel.

Frame
With this object you can arrange a frame around other objects. Grouping does not take
place and the frame is a purely graphical object which however offers you many design
possibilities in color and thickness. You can also display a background image and/or text
in the frame.

7.2.5 Controller, Developer tools (objects for predefined actions, clone

actions, AutoSequences and EasyScript)
See also Program options: Program functions (System group), Autosequences,
EasyScript.

Click on Design mode (on the right above the ribbon) to switch to Execution mode and
vice versa. Only in Execution mode are assigned AutoSequences, clone actions, pre-
defined actions or EasyScript procedures also executed, or controller values applied in
computations.
As long as you are in the Execution mode you cannot move any interactive object.
Configuration is also restricted. You can however switch between the modes, even
during a measurement.

The following (interactive) objects are available in the Controller and Developer tools
groups.

Controller
You can use the values set in these objects in real-time computations or send them to
analog or digital outputs of the connected QuantumX/SomatXR modules.

catman
304 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 Slide control
Object which allows the user to continuously input numerical values. The object is com-
parable with the slide switch, but facilitates continuous input.
Use Panel input (Additional functions) in the formula editor (real-time computations) for
polling.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

Rotary knob
Object which allows the user to continuously input numerical values
Use Panel input (Additional functions) in the formula editor (real-time computations) for
polling.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

Slide switch
Object which allows the user to input discrete states (positions). The object is com-
parable with the slide control, but facilitates discrete input.
Use Panel input (Additional functions) in the formula editor (real-time computations) for
polling.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

On/off switch
The object provides a switch with caption and LED.
Use Panel input (Additional functions) in the formula editor (real-time computations) for
polling.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 305
Developer tools

Button
Use this object to start predefined actions, AutoSequences or script procedures.
See also Configure button.

Checkbox/radio button
Depending on the selection at Operating mode (Configure window, General tab) the object
acts as a checkbox or radio button (single or multiple).
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

Combo box
Object for selecting one entry from many entries (texts or numbers).
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue or EA_Panel.GetListboxSelIndex for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

Text box
Object allowing the user to input texts.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

(Script) table
In its functioning principle the object corresponds to the Flexible table: Each cell is inde-
pendent and can be filled with other data. You assign texts or numbers to the cells via
AutoSequences or EasyScript.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.SetCell to enter data into a cell and EA_Panel.GetCell
to read out a cell.
AutoSequence: Use Output text/selection/condition in the Panel section for the output
and Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.
Interactive use is not possible.

catman
306 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 LED array
The object provides a range of displays in the form of bars, round LEDs or ramps.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.SetValue to set a value for the display.
AutoSequence: Use Output text/process variable in the Panel section for the output.

Canvas
This object provides you with a drawing canvas for EasyScript. You can draw in this area
with the script commands Lines, Points, Circles or Texts.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.CanvasSetText and EA.GetObject.

Analog meter and Bar indicator are also available as input objects:

Analog meter
On the General tab activate the Mode as Controller and define how your input object is to
be displayed using the Layout and Style tabs.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.SetValue to set a value for the display and EA_
Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

Bar indicator
On the General tab activate the Mode as Controller and define how your input object is to
be displayed using the Layout and Style tabs.
EasyScript: Use EA_Panel.GetValue for polling.
AutoSequence: Use Read out user input/selection in the Panel section for polling.

7.3 Configure display objects

By default, the Configure component window of an object is displayed as soon as you
click on the object (see Program options: Panels). Use the Properties context menu or
Window ► Object properties / Settings (at the right above the ribbon) if you have closed
the window. For the Floating panel display the window again with the menu in .
You have two options for creating display objects and assigning channels:

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 307
1. Drag one or more channels to a blank point on a Panel or a Print page. You get a
popup menu from which you can select one of the most frequently used objects. If
the object is able to display multiple channels (graphs), only one object is generated
showing all selected channels, otherwise there is one for each channel.
2. Click on an icon in the Visualization objects group on the Visualization tab to select
the object you want. To do this, where applicable, open the group by clicking on the
arrow at the right margin. Then drag one or more channels onto the object.

By default, an (active) channel is pre-assigned when an object has been generated.

Disable the Auto-assign channels when creating new objects option if you do not
want it—see Panel (and print page) options.

General configuration options

Move object
In the object, click and hold down the left-hand mouse key and drag. With the Video cam-
era display click on the upper section in the window. Objects will be aligned even if the
grid is not visible, if Align objects to grid is activated in the Panel options (Visualization
group).

Notes
You may lock the objects with (Visualization tab, Panel/page group). Click on
to be able to move the objects again.
Graphs cannot be moved when one of the zoom modes, section mode, scroll mode
or the cursor is active. Deactivate the zoom, section, scroll mode or the cursor using
Edit in the Graph tools group.
Graphical objects cannot be moved if you have activated Execution mode.

Move/edit several objects

In order to move, delete, copy or change font settings for several objects, hold down the
key and click on the required objects. The selected objects will be marked in the top
right-hand corner with .

Assign/remove channel(s) to be displayed

Drag a channel from the channel list (Window ► Channel list on the right above the rib-
bon) onto the object or (for graphs) the required axis. Select multiple channels with or
and drag the last channel you selected onto the graph.

catman
308 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
From a channel group (plug-in units with more than one channel) all channels can be
assigned simultaneously by hiding the group ( is displayed) and then dragging the first
visible channel onto a graph.
With this type of channel assignment Time is always used as the x channel. Here, the scal-
ing is determined from the channel sample rate (time from sample rate). If you want to
display data acquired in burst mode, you have to drag a time channel onto the x axis—see
Time channel in Burst mode.
See also Configuring a y(x) graph.

To remove one channel from a real-time or post-process graph click on the Plot legend or

a point on the plot in the graph and then click on Delete plot. In the Cursor graph
delete the graphs with the Plots tab in the configuration dialog of the graph. Press or

to remove channels from a table (Columns and rows tab in the Configure window).
In all other objects, it is enough to assign a new channel.

All channels assigned to a graph can be deleted with .

Changing plot attributes in a graph

For the real-time and post-process graphs click on the Plot legend or the plot to display
the plot attributes in the Configure window (Window ► Object properties). Here you can:
change the display (plot style, line type, etc.),
change the plot name (for the legend),
Define the related x channel (see also Channels as x data sources)

delete the plot with ,

draw an equalizing plot with (best fit, linear interpolation) or to (poly-

nomial interpolation of 2nd to 4th order) in the post-process graph over all mea-
sured values. The calculated coefficients are displayed in the legend; a figure such
as 1.5e-2 signifies 1.5 * 10-2.

With the Cursor graph you do not change the plot attributes in the Configure: Plot
dialog, but rather in the Plots tab in the Graph configuration dialog (click on the
graph once).

Left-click on the Plot legend to directly

move a plot into a new axis layer (axis scaling),
delete the plot,

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 309
 go directly to the plot parameters dialog.

You can also change the plot styles for all the plots in a graph simultaneously:
Choose All for Style (post-process graph and real-time graph) or select the relevant
channels on the Plots tab.

Even if you are using automatic channel colors you can deactivate this option for one
graph and define other plot colors in this graph. In the dialog, which is displayed after the
change of color, click on Yes or deactivate the option Use channel colors for plots on the
graph Layout tab. The graph then uses a different plot color for each newly assigned
channel.

Use color channels (display plot color-coded by measurements)

The function is only available in post-process graphs.

Drag the channel you want to use as a color channel onto the Plot legend or click on the
Color channel tab in the Setup dialog and specify the channel to use. catman calculates
the minimum and maximum values of the channel and allocates the colors red and blue
to them. You can change the allocation by entering different values, but the colors cannot
be changed. All the values between the minimum and maximum are given the intervening
colors.
The color channel used is displayed in the plot legend.
Increase the thickness of the Line on the General tab to make the colors more easily
visible.

Save current object as template

Use to define the current configuration as the template for all new objects of this
type. resets to the default template.

The option to save multiple templates is not available for the following objects of
the Real-time indicators and Display of all recorded samples groups: Polar diagram,
3D diagram, 3D chart and Spectrogram.
For the objects in the Layout group the function is only available for frames and for
objects in the Developer tools group it is available only for the table.

Select the object you want and use the Save context menu to save the current view of an
object.

catman
310 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
Select a newly created object and choose the Load context menu to assign the object one
of the stored templates.

Change layout
On the Layout tab you can change the fonts of title, axes, values, etc., depending on the
object, and also change their colors. With many objects you can separately alter the fore-
ground and background colors or external and internal areas in a graph. You can also spe-
cify color gradients: from top to bottom or vice versa; from left to right; linear; or radially
from the center outward, etc.
Adapt font size dynamically: When this option is active the font size in a graph is also
changed during enlargement or reduction.

The plots or numeric values can be displayed automatically in the color defined in the
DAQ channels tab (Use … channel colors), if you have set Use channel colors as default in
the Panel options. Otherwise this option cannot be selected on the Layout tab.

With some objects you can also configure several areas, e.g. with the scale marks you
can configure several scales by selecting or creating IDs. For example, with the Bar indic-
ator with ID2 and ID4 you have the possibility of also displaying scale marks to the right
of the bar. Set the Transparency to 255 (corresponds to visible) in order to display the
marks.
The following example shows a Bar indicator and which parts of the graph are influenced
by which settings. Note that, for example, there is also the Frame setting for the scale
marks: in this case it is a frame around the line thickness (Thickness). With the values for
the start and finish 0 is the outer left pixel and 1 the outer right pixel in the graph. Number
of ticks sets the number of marks.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 311
Choose Scale text and Font… to specify the font size and style (ID1 acts on the left-hand
scale, ID2 on the right).

Office tab
The Office tab is not available for the Multi-bar graph and LED objects.

For exporting to an MS Word document you can specify here the point in the document to
which the graph is to be copied. To do this you set up a bookmark in Word and enter the
name of the bookmark here. If you specify a different mark for each object you are export-
ing, the export will be collective, for example by way of the Export/Print context menu of
any graph.
See also Create report, Export or print a graph.

Creating a bookmark in Word

1. Click on the point at which you would like to insert a bookmark.
2. Select Bookmark in the Insert tab (Hyperlinks group).
3. Under Bookmark name, select or enter a name.
Names of bookmarks must begin with a letter and can contain numbers, but no
space characters. You can however use underscore to separate words, e.g. First_
picture.
4. Click on Add.

catman
312 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
Note
If an object is partly hidden by another, select To front or To back from the context
menu.
Do not position several objects over one another.
To change numerical values after entering them click either on Apply (if present) or
press to activate the entry.
Some objects do not allow scale labels and title to be formatted separately. In such
cases, delete the title (input spaces) and use a text object, which you position above
or on top of the object.
To change colors, you first have a palette of colors available. Click on More colors
to display the color picker.
The Background transparent option present with some objects only functions with
static backgrounds, not with changing backgrounds, such as a Video camera dis-
play.

Special object configurations

Configure graph
Configuring a y(x) graph
Configure real-time indicators
Export or print a graph
Configure Multi-bar graph
Set up a Flexible table
Configuring a CAN raw table
Configure button

See also Configuration of the special Panels

Scope panel
Floating panel

7.3.1 Configuring graphs

See also General notes, Configure y(x) graphs, Configure real-time indicators.

deletes all channels that are displayed from the active graph. Left-click on the Plot
legend or a point on the plot in a real-time or post-process graph to call the configuration
dialog for the plot where you delete only this plot with

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 313
 Delete plot. In the Cursor graph delete the graphs with the Plots tab in the con-
figuration dialog of the graph.

Title (header)
Use the pipe sign (|, vertical stroke) to divide the graph title up into a left aligned section,
a centered one and a right aligned one:
Left aligned text|Centered text|Right aligned text

Without the pipe sign (|) the text is centered. Otherwise always enter both signs.
You can also use Placeholders in the title (and subtitle).

Axes and scalings

The various axes (x axis, left y axis, right y axis, etc.) of a graph can be obtained via the
Axis selection field on the Axes tab (Configure window). In real-time and post-process
graphs (not cursor graphs) you can also click on the relevant axis in the graph.
In the post-process graph and the post-process Cursor graph you can also select the
point index for the x axis instead of the time channel (tab General, x axis in).

Activate Auto color (Axes tab) to obtain the y axes of the graph in the same color as the
plot last allocated to it.
With real-time and the post-process graphs and with several y axes you can change the
size (height) of the y axes interactively: Lock the graphs (Panel/page group) and click on
the separating line (x axis) between two axes. Then move the axis with the mouse button
pressed. The configuration is not saved however.

With real-time and the post-process graphs use the Layout selection field to define how
many scales (y axes) you want to use. Up to 12 scales (scale levels) are possible.
Using the context menu of the Plot legend, you can also move a curve to a new y
axis (scaling).

On the Cursor graph further axes are only displayed if you move one of the assigned plots
on the Plots tab into the corresponding scale level or if you activate visibility of the scale
level in the Axes tab. Up to 3 scales (scale levels) are possible.

Auto-Range enables you to specify a range which is to be displayed. This range is in each
case moved such that the current measurements lie within the range. When the measure-
ments run out of the range, the scaling is adapted. You can thus have the scaling fol-
lowing the current values.

catman
314 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
The Sensor scale uses the measurement range of the amplifier as positive and negative
scale end values. If the measurement range of the amplifier (e.g. 4 mV/V) is significantly
larger than the senor measurement range (e.g. 1 mV/V), you obtain however a scale
which is too large.

(Axes) format (label format): apart from the formats available in the selection field, you
can also define a free format. For this, enter the text to be displayed and the numerical
format as follows (a vertical line is used as a delimiter):
Text to left of numeric value|Format for numeric value|Text to right of numeric
value

Entry example Display (example)

.00 487.35

|.0| mm 2.3 mm

U = |.000| mV/V U = 0.556 mV/V

Enter a time unit, e.g. hh:mm:ss, on the General tab (x axis in) to display the date
and time on the x axis.
In addition with post-process graphs you have the possibility of using the entries
with ... (abs). This means that the data are displayed related to the first data record
of the graph and you can recognize different start times of individual meas-
urements/data.

Assigning the time channel again to a y(x) graph, time channel when using the Burst
mode
To reassign the normal time channel to an x axis, all you have to do is drag the Time from
sample rate channel onto the x axis. If you have recorded data in Burst mode, however,
the actual time must be plotted on the x axis. A time channel computed from the sample
rate would not include the times between the bursts, unless you activate Burst detection
in the real-time and post-process graphs (in the realization a gap will then be left, or the
graph null value will be used). Display the time channels in a cursor graph: Deactivate pro-
gram option Channel list, Hide time channels in channel tables. Then drag the cor-
responding time channel to the x axis.

Font/color
To change colors, you first only have a palette of colors available. Click on More colors to
display the color picker.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 315
Best-fit approximation in the post-process graph
You can calculate a best-fit approximation in the post-process graph: Activate the
desired function in the plot Configure dialog (by left-clicking on the legend). The com-
puted coefficients are then displayed within the graph at the top. The interpolation is
shown as an additional plot.

Linear interpolation

Interpolation with 2nd degree polynomial

Interpolation with 3rd degree polynomial

Interpolation with 4th degree polynomial

See also Change plot parameters in a graph.

Maximum number of plots

The maximum number of plots which can be displayed in a graph is limited to 12 in the
default setting; see also Program option Panels: Maximum number of plots. You can how-
ever increase the number at any time in both the default setting for all (new) graphs as
well as individually per graph. On panels and print pages up to 32,000 plots in all pan-
els/print pages can be displayed. On Scope and Floating panels up to 8 plots per graph
are possible.

Refresh rate, compression threshold (Special tab)

So that real-time graphs do not put too much stress on the PC during a measurement,
you can select slower refresh (update) rates on the Special tab than Always. With post-
process graphs you are asked already when creating them whether the default setting
Manual is to be used or whether a more frequent update is required. However, note that a
frequent update also requires more processing power and can possibly lead to an RT lag.

The setting of Update on the Special tab does not affect the data acquisition, only the
screen display. For the manual update use, for example, (Update in the Panel/page
group of the Visualization tab.

The setting Compress from (data points) determines how many values are visible in the
graph and also the speed of the display and therefore the stress on the PC. The effect on
the display is however different for the various types of graph:
With y(t) graphs a minimum and a maximum value are determined in each case and
displayed for the range to be compressed. With a sufficient zoom level however all

catman
316 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 measurements are reloaded from the stored data (temporary data storage) and dis-
played. So here you can leave the default values unchanged as the default setting
of 2000 for the y(t) graph or 100,000 for the y(t) cursor graph is already high
enough.
With y(x) graphs (real-time and post-process) “excess” values are always omitted
and no min/max compression is used. The number of values defined with Com-
pression threshold (data points) is displayed; all others are omitted and an Alias
effect may occur. So increase the number of the data points to be displayed, or in
the post-process graph disable compression, if the compression would result in too
many “omitted” values.
See also Configure y(x) graphs.
The real-time cursor graph is never compressed. With large time windows or high
sample rates this can lead to a high burden on the PC and therefore to an RT lag.
Check the settings as necessary: Options ► Safety, Extended safety checks before
DAQ start.
If you disable compression in the Real-time graph and Post-process graph visualization
objects and then zoom, an overview across the entire measurement period of time is dis-
played below the graph and the zoomed section is marked.
With high sample rates (≥ 4800 Hz) and many displayed channels (in particular in
several graphs and on several panels) we recommend setting manual scaling (not
Auto). If the PC load is still too high, on the Special tab select for example the set-
ting Update: 1 x per second and stop the invisible graphs. otherwise a time delay
might occur between the measurement and display—see Preventing a RT lag and
Job status window to view the processor load.

Additionally, you can display the limit values as lines with the Special tab: In the Con-
figure window select the corresponding y axis (scaling layer) on the Axes tab or click the
axis in the graph and then on the Special tab choose which limit values to display.
See also Limit values, Available limit value conditions: Level.

7.3.2 Configuring a y(x) graph

Graphs in which one channel is to be plotted against another channel (and not against
time) have some special features:
1. You have to define the x channel manually (in the default setting the time channel is
always on the x axis).
2. The type of representation differs from the representation for y(t) graphs.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 317
Channels as x data sources
There are various possibilities of using a channel as x data source depending on the
graph:
1. Real-time graph and post-process graph: Drag the channel onto the Plot legend of
the y channel which is to be displayed against this channel and select Use as x axis
from the context menu.
Only this plot is shown against this x channel; the assignment of the other chan-
nels remains unchanged.
2. All graphs: Drag a channel onto the x axis of a graph.
All plots (y axes) in the graph are shown against this channel.
3. All graphs: Via the context menu of the channel list (Window ► Channel list on the
right above the ribbon), add the channel to the x data sources (Add to x data
sources).
Real-time graph and post-process graph: Select the channel in the Configure win-
dow of the relevant plot (click on the plot legend) in the x data field.
Cursor graph: In the Configure window of the graph on the Plots tab select the
channel for the x data.

If you want to display several channels with different x channels in a post-process

graph graph, you must assign the appropriate x channel to each plot.
Real-time graph and post-process graph: Use the first method. First, assign all
plots to the y axis and then drag the x channels onto the appropriate plot legend.
Cursor graph: Use the third method. First, assign all plots to the y axis, then mark all
channels which are to be added to the x axis and then add them to it. Then, go to
the graph Configure dialog and sort the associated y and x channels on the Plots
tab.

You can also call the list of x data sources from the context menu of a graph and remove
channels from it.

Assigning a y(x) graph to the time channel again

To reassign the normal time channel to an x axis, all you have to do is drag the Time from
sample rate channel onto the x axis. If you have recorded data in Burst mode, however,
the actual time must be plotted on the x axis. A time channel computed from the sample
rate would not include the times between the bursts, unless you activate Burst detection
in the real-time and post-process graphs (in the realization a gap will then be left, or the
graph null value will be used). Display the time channels in a cursor graph: Deactivate

catman
318 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
program option Channel list, Hide time channels in channel tables. Then drag the cor-
responding time channel to the x axis.

Presentation of plots in y(x) graphs, compression

If the sample rate multiplied by the time window or the number of the readings gives a
number greater than 2,000 with the standard graphs (real-time and post-process) or
100,000 with the post-process cursor graph, the data will be displayed incompletely. Per
plot initially always only 2,000 (100,000) values (pairs) are displayed; the rest of the val-
ues are not displayed, but instead left out. However, if you zoom in the graph, then with a
sufficient zoom level all values are displayed if the values have been saved in the tem-
porary file.

Unlike with a y(t) graph, with a y(x) graph a min/max compression cannot be carried
out, because, for example, the y maxima do not necessarily coincide with the x max-
ima.

Depending on the performance of your PC, the number of channels, the sample rate and
the number of graphs, you can increase the number of data points to be displayed for indi-
vidual graphs on the Special tab or—in the post-process graph—turn off compression.
With real-time graphs you may have to reduce the update rate. With a post-process
graph the additional time requirement for drawing is only irrelevant if you do not have
more than 100,000 measurements, you have an up-to-date PC, and the update is set to
Manual or 1 x per second.
Therefore, for the graph in question increase the number of data points to be dis-
played on the Special tab and reduce the update rate if required.

See also Configure graph.

The cursor is deactivated in the post-process graph if the product of Compress
data from … points and Max. plots is above 900,000 (graph configuration dialog,
Special tab). In these cases, reduce the maximum possible number of plots or use
the cursor graph.
The maximum buffer size for the post-process graph is 1,000,000 (with max. 12
plots) and for the overview cursor graph it is 10,000,000.

7.3.3 Configure real-time indicators

See also Refresh rate/compress (Special tab), Configuring an y(x) graph, Preventing
an RT lag (performance)

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 319
Objects which only display one value per channel (also the multi-bar graph) should only
be used when using a Sample rate below 50 Hz. Not all values can be displayed with
higher sample rates, and this can lead to unwanted effects: The effect is similar to a film
where the wheels of a car moving forwards suddenly seem to turn backwards. An optical
illusion could also happen here during faster operations. With y(t) graphs the trace is cor-
rectly displayed.
With higher sample rates do not display the current value, but rather, for example,
the minimum, maximum or mean, etc. These values are calculated from all currently
read-in measured values, though this display is not possible with the tables and
multi-bar graph.

Display of channels with different sample rates

The display of channels with different sample rates in one or several y(t) real-time graphs
is no problem: As usual, drag the channels into the graph.
The representation of two channels with different sample rates in one y(x) real-time
graph is however not possible, because here there are fewer measurements present for
one channel than for the other. The relevant associated x and y channels must therefore
be present with the same sample rate. In Analysis mode you must either manually assign
the relevant x and y channels (Configure: Plot, X data) or convert the sample rates accord-
ingly.
See also Channels as x data sources, Interpolation.

Performance of a display in real-time

If you call a dialog during a measurement, this can delay the transfer of values. With
the mouse button held down the transfer can be completely cut. If the buffer on the
measuring device overflows during this time period, an error message is issued and
the measurement stopped.

You obtain information during the measurement about the performance of your PC and
whether it can process and display the data fast enough, for example via the status bar
and (RT lag) or via the dialog which you access by clicking on Additional in the status
bar at the far right. Using the dialog Optimize performance and prevent real-time lag (Per-
formance in the DAQ group), you can reduce the refresh rates of the display objects at
high sample rates and/or implement no updating of the graphs on the invisible pages.
Use the configuration dialog of a graph (Special tab) to reduce the update (refresh) rate of
a single graph or to change the number of displayed points.
See also Refresh rate, Compress (Special tab), RT lag

catman
320 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
7.3.4 Export or print a graph
Using the context menu of a graph you can export the current graph, all graphs on the
page or all graphs in the project to the clipboard or a file or print them out. Depending on
the format and output medium you may be able to carry out further settings.

Scope panel: Use the menu File ► Clipboard ► Export visualization object or Print ► Print
object.
Floating panel: Use ► Panel into clipboard or Print Panel.

If MS Office is installed on your PC, you can also insert the graphs directly into an open
document. Use the Office tab (graph Configure window) to set the bookmarks (positions
in the document) for the respective graphs; see also Office tab, Create report.

7.3.5 Configure Multi-bar graph

See also Configure real-time indicators.

The Multi-bar graph display offers some configuration options (Configure window) that
are not available with other graphs:
Enter Vertical on the Axes tab for the x axis if the channel names are so long that
they run into each other.
The width of all bars can be changed simultaneously on the General tab.
Normally the bars are all the same distance away from each other. You can how-
ever change the alignment. Activate Variable x coordinates on the General tab. Then
click on one of the assigned channels and enter its position in the field x =.
Gradient displays the bars with a color gradient.

7.3.6 Set up a Flexible table

The (flexible) table offers you substantially more extensive possibilities than the Simple
table or the special tables such as, for example, the Statistics table in Analysis mode. In
both DAQ and Analysis mode you have numerous configuration possibilities, because
you can configure each individual cell. Therefore, the Flexible table is also suitable, for
example, for creating report pages.
The differences between DAQ mode and Analysis mode arise from the data which is avail-
able: in DAQ mode essentially the current measurements are available, whereas in Ana-

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 321
lysis mode the traceability data and the measurement and test parameter are present.
The selection of the cell data occurs in both cases via a popup menu or window.
The following are used for configuration:
1. The Configure window for changing the number of rows and columns, configuration
of the display and content of the cells, e.g. also the entry of formulas.
2. In DAQ mode the popup menu for selecting a measured or statistical value when
dragging a channel onto a cell.
3. In Analysis mode a menu window (Data sources for table drag and drop) for stat-
istical values, all data of a channel, traceability data (excitation voltage, zero-balance
value, serial number of the amplifier or sensor ID) and data relevant to the measure-
ment such as sample rate or number of measurements. The window is shown when
you drag a channel onto any cell in the table or open it via Window ► Data sources
for table drag and drop (on the right above the ribbon).

In DAQ mode, you can mark all cells to which a data source has been assigned
using Select all (Data source selected cell, General tab).

For the documentation of the settings used during the measurement use the trace-
ability or the meta data table. After selecting a channel (by drag & drop), these show
in the individual columns and rows all traceability data (channel parameters), or
after selecting a test (by drag & drop) all test parameters.

As in Excel, you can create several sheets in a table: General tab, Sheets.
A sheet can have up to 100,000 rows and 256 columns. If you would like to view more
data, you have to use the data table or a DataView window or create a curve section.

Change column width/row height

Display the header row or column as appropriate to change the width of columns or the
height of rows (Configure window, Columns/rows tab). Then drag the border between two
cells in the header row or column.
To be able to change all rows or columns, click in the field in the upper left corner of the
table ( ) to mark the complete table and then move the separator between the two
cells in the header row or column.

Marking cells
You mark individual cells by clicking with the mouse.
You mark several cells with the mouse by clicking the appropriate corners of the
area while holding down the key. Alternatively, you can inhibit “movement” of

catman
322 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 the table with Lock in the Panel/page group (Visualization tab) and then mark
the required area with the mouse key pressed (drag over the cells). After the con-
figuration do not forget to unlock the movement of objects.
You mark several cells with the arrow keys by pressing the appropriate arrow keys
while holding down the key.

Joining and separating cells

Mark the required cells with the mouse and select Span cells or Remove cell span from
the context menu.

Assigning the value to be displayed

DAQ mode: Drag the relevant channel onto a cell and select the required information from
the popup menu.

Analysis mode: Drag the relevant channel onto a cell to open the selection window Data
sources for table drag and drop. Alternatively, you can also mark the channel and open
the window via the Window menu (on the right above the ribbon). You then drag the
desired information into the relevant cell.
With the menu window open you have two possibilities of assigning further information
to individual cells:
1. You want to assign further information from the same channel to a cell: Drag the
information into the required field. The channel does not need to be marked again.
2. You want to assign the same information for a different channel of a cell: Mark the
entry in the selection window and drag the relevant channel into the required field.
See also Configure the same settings/displays for several channels

Configure the same settings/displays for several channels (Analysis mode only)
Paste column/row: These menu items from the Clone data sources context menu allow
you to easily duplicate a column or row configuration (content and layout) for another
channel.
1. Mark a cell in the relevant column or row and then choose Copy column or Copy row.
2. Then in the Analysis project window click on the channel which is to be used in the
copy.
3. In the table mark a cell in the intended column or row and select Clone data sources
► Paste column/row.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 323
Whole columns or rows are always copied, but you can delete entries no longer required:

Mark the range, and in the Configure window click Delete data (General tab).
The function is only available for measured channels, not for channels from com-
putations.

Field type, formatting (Cells tab)

Using the Cells tab, you can define whether a cell is to contain text, a number, an image or
interactive elements, such as a button. For numbers the formatting can also be defined.
For interactive elements, specify the desired action using the Action tab.

Display a Post-process graph of another Panel in cells

Mark the cell range in which the graph is to be displayed and select Span cells in the con-
text menu. In the table configuration dialog on the Cells tab specify Picture as the cell
type and define which graph of the current project is to be used with From Panel object.

Formula (Cells tab)

With the Numeric (editable) cell type you can also enter a formula in the Formula field sim-
ilar as in Excel. Specify the cell references via the column letters and the row numbers: A1
(first row and column) or C4 (third column and fourth row). Enter cell ranges separated by
a colon: A1:B27 for the range of columns A and B from the 1st to the 27th row. Unhide the
header row and column as necessary using the using the Table tab. As from version 4.1,
you can also enter formulas directly by marking the cell and starting the entry with = (only
click the cell once, otherwise the Edit mode will be activated. The cell must already be con-
figured as Numeric (editable)).
Example: The formula for calculating the sum of rows 1 to 27 of the third column is SUM
(C1:C27) or =SUM(C1:C27) when entering in a marked cell.

Numbers in formulas must be entered with a decimal point; the decimal comma is
not permissible.

Available formulas for the flexible table

ABS(<value>)
Calculates the absolute value.

ACOS(<value>)
Calculates the angle to the specified cosine.

catman
324 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
ACOSH(<value>)
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine.

ADD(<value1>, <value2>)
Adds two values.

AND(<bool1>, <bool2>, …)
Returns 1 if all arguments are true, otherwise 0. A maximum of 30 arguments are pos-
sible.

ASIN(<value>)
Calculates the angle to the specified sine.

ASINH(<value>)
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine.

ATAN(<value>)
Calculates the angle to the specified tangent.

ATAN2(<x-value>, <y-value>)
Calculates the angle to the specified tangent, taking into account the sign.

ATANH(<value>)
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent.

AVERAGE(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the mean value of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible.

CEILING(<value1>, <value2>)
Rounds a number to the nearest larger multiple of <value2>. CEILING(4.65, 2) gives 6,
CEILING(-2.78, -1) gives -3.

CHAR(<value>)
Returns the character corresponding to the transmitted numeric value in ANSI code.

CLEAN(<text>)
Removes all non-printable characters from the transmitted text.

CODE(<text>)
Returns the ANSI code of the first character of the transmitted text.

COMBIN(<value1>, <value2>)
Calculates the number of possible combinations (<value1> over <value2>).

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 325
CONCATENATE(<text1>, <text2>, …)
Links the transmitted texts. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible.

COS(<value>)
Calculates the cosine to the specified angle.

COSH(<value>)
Calculates the hyperbolic cosine to the specified angle.

DATE(<year>, <month>, <day>)

Calculates the date in serial date-time format (Windows format).

DAY(<date>
Calculates the day of the month at the specified date.

DEGREES(<value>)
Calculates the angle to the specified radian value.

EVEN(<value>)
Rounds to the nearest even whole number (INTEGER). EVEN(5) gives 6, EVEN (-2.5) gives
-4.

EXACT(<text1>, <text2>)
Compares two texts and returns 1 if they are equal, 0 otherwise. Case sensitivity is con-
sidered.

EXP(<value>)
Calculates evalue.

FIND(<text1>, <text2>, <value>)

Searches for <text1> in <text2> starting with the position <value>. Returns the start pos-
ition or 0.

FLOOR(<value1>, <value2>)
Rounds a number to the nearest smaller multiple of value2. FLOOR(4.65, 2) gives 4,
FLOOR(-2.78, -1) gives -2.

HOUR(<time>)
Returns the hour at the specified time.

IF(<condition>, <value1>, <value2>)

Evaluates the condition and returns <value1> if the condition is true, otherwise <value2>.

catman
326 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
INT(<value>)
Rounds a number to the nearest whole number.

INVERSE(<value>)
Calculates the inverse of the specified number (1/<value>).

ISBLANK(<cell>)
Returns 1 if the cell is empty, otherwise 0. ISBLANK(B1) gives 1 if B1 is blank.

ISEVEN(<value>)
Returns 1 if the specified value is an even number, otherwise 0.

ISNONTEXT(<value>)
Returns 1 if the specified value is not text, otherwise 0.

ISNUMBER(<value>)
Returns 1 if the specified value is a number, otherwise 0.

ISODD(<value>)
Returns 1 if the specified value is an odd number, otherwise 0.

ISREF(<value>)
Returns 1 if the specified value is a cell reference, otherwise 0.

ISTEXT(<value>)
Returns 1 if the specified value is a text, otherwise 0.

LEFT(<text>, <value>)
Returns the first <value> characters of <text>.

LEN(<text>)
Returns the number of characters in <text>.

LN(<value>)
Calculates the natural logarithm to <value>.

LOG(<value1>, <value2>)
Calculates the logarithm of <value1> to the base <value2>.

LOG10(<value>)
Calculates the decadic logarithm of <value> (logarithm to base 10).

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 327
LOWER(<text>)
Converts text to lowercase.

MAX(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the maximum of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible.

MID(<text>, <value1>, <value2>)

Returns <value2> characters as from position <value1> in <text>.

MIN(<value1>, <value2>, …
Calculates the minimum of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible.

MINUTE(<time>)
Returns the minute at the specified time.

MOD(<value1>, <value2>)
Performs a modulo division. MOD(255, 16) gives 15.

MONTH(<date>)
Returns the month at the specified date.

NEG(<value>)
Inverts the sign of the argument.

NOT(<value>)
Inverts the logical value of the argument.

NOW()
Returns date and time in serial date-time format (Windows format).

ODD(<value>)
Rounds to the nearest odd whole number (INTEGER). ODD(4) gives 5, ODD(-2.5) gives -3.

OR(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Returns 1 if one of the arguments is true, otherwise 0. A maximum of 30 arguments are
possible.

PI()
Returns the number Pi.

POWER(<value1>, <value2>)
Calculates <value1><value2>.

catman
328 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
PRODUCT(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the product of all arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible.

PROPER(<text>)
Converts all the first letters of the words in the text to uppercase.

RADIANS(<value>)
Calculates the radian value to the specified angle.

RAND()
Generates a random number between 0 and 1.

REPLACE(<text1>, <value1>, <value2>, <text2>)

Replaces in <text1> as from position <value1> for <value2> characters with <text2>.

REPT(<text1>, <value>)
Generates a text with <value> repetitions of <text>.

RIGHT(<text>, <value>)
Returns the last <value> characters of <text>.

ROUNDDOWN(<value1>, <value2>)
Rounds to <value1> down to <value2> places.

ROUNDUP(<value1>, <value2>)
Rounds to <value1> up to <value2> places.

ROUND(<value1>, <value2>)
Rounds to <value1> to <value2> places.

SECOND(<time>)
Returns the second at the specified time.

SIGN(<value>)
Returns the sign of <value>.

SIN(<value>)
Calculates the sine to the specified angle.

SINH(<value>)
Calculates the hyperbolic sine to the specified angle.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 329
SQRT(<value>)
Calculates the (positive) square root.

SQUARE(<value>)
Calculates the square.

STDEV(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the standard deviation of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are pos-
sible. n(n-1) is used.

STDEVP(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the standard deviation of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are pos-
sible. n is used.

SUBSTITUTE(<text1>, <text2>, <text3>[, <value>])

In <text1> replaces <text2> with <text3>. If the text occurs more than once, you can use
<value> to specify which occurrence to replace. If you do not specify, all occurrences will
be replaced.

SUM(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the sum of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible.

SUMSQ(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the sum of the square roots of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments
are possible.

TAN(<value>)
Calculates the tangent to the specified angle.

TANH(<value>)
Calculates the hyperbolic tangent to the specified angle.

TIME(<hour>, <minute>, <second>)

Returns the time in serial date-time format (Windows format).

TODAY()
Returns date and time in serial date-time format (Windows format).

TRIM(<text>)
Removes all multiple and leading spaces, and any spaces at the end of the text.

catman
330 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
UPPER(<text>)
Converts text to uppercase.

VAR(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the variance of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible. n(n-
1) is used.

VARP(<value1>, <value2>, …)
Calculates the variance of the arguments. A maximum of 30 arguments are possible. n is
used.

WEEKDAY(<date>, <value>)
Returns the day of the week at the specified date. Use <value> to specify how the week is
defined: 1 = from Sunday (1) to Saturday (7), 2 = from Monday (1) to Sunday (7), 3 = from
Monday (0) to Sunday (6).

XROOT(<value1>, <value2>)
Calculates <value1>1/<value2>

YEAR(<date>)
Returns the year at the specified date.

7.3.7 Configuring a CAN raw table

See also CAN decoders.

In DAQ mode, the messages of a CAN Raw channel are written to the temporary measure-
ment data store with the time stamps of their arrival in the module. The CAN Raw table
can display all the messages stored, and the bytes in them. By default in DAQ mode, as
many messages as the table has rows are displayed in real time. The display then scrolls
so that the last x messages (number of rows) are always shown. So if you receive mul-
tiple messages per second in DAQ mode you should make additional settings in the Con-
figure dialog.

Options in DAQ mode

Live update: This option is active by default, so that the latest messages are always dis-
played. Deactivate the option to view all messages up to the time of deactivating.

If a table has a lot of rows and receives multiple messages per second, the Live
update option imposes quite a high workload on the CPU. Check the load as

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 331
 necessary in the Job status window.

Using filters
Next to enter the message ID or—if Vector-CANdb is loaded—the message name to be

displayed. clears the field.

Separate multiple IDs with ; (semicolon). Then click on to display only these mes-
sages in the order in which they occur. Use Message ID in hex to choose whether to show
IDs in decimal or hexadecimal (default) notation.

Using Vector-CANdb
If you have a Vector-CANdb for some or all of the received messages, specify it. As a
result:
The Message name column displays the corresponding names from the CANdb.
In the filter field (next to ) you can select a message to be displayed in the order
of its occurrence; and
You can use the Decode message context menu in the table to decode the indi-
vidual signals of a message (does not work while Live Update is active).
You can only specify one Vector-CANdb per table. But each table can use a different
CANdb.

7.3.8 Configure button

See also AutoSequences, EasyScript.

You can carry out predefined actions, clone actions, AutoSequences or script procedures
during or after a DAQ job with a single click on a button; for this catman must not be
executing any DAQ job. However, you must first activate the execution so that it does not
occur already during the configuration of the button: To do this, click on Design mode (on
the right above the ribbon); the menu item then changes to Execution mode. The defined
actions, AutoSequences or script procedures are only executed in execution mode.
The button can be displayed in various styles (Font/colors tab), and with multiple
buttons you can define the sequence in which the buttons are addressed on press-
ing the tabulator key (Tab index in the General tab). Instead of having to click the
button, you can also define a Shortcut for the action.

You have four different ways of executing actions:

catman
332 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
1. Start one of the predefined actions.
2. Start one of the clone actions.
A clone action is an action for which a menu exists in the ribbon. You use clone
actions to be able to compile your own menus and groups in the ribbon or to hide
the ribbon and to allocate the required menus to buttons.
3. You start an AutoSequence.
See Start AutoSequences via buttons.
4. Start an EasyScript procedure.
You can execute a single subprogram (Sub) or a complete script. The script can be
a constituent part or an EasyScript project or be saved as an action directly with
the button (free code). You will find a description of the methods in the Help on
EasyScript (in the script editor).

AutoSequences and EasyScript are only available if you have activated these mod-
ules; see Program options: Program functions.

Starting predefined actions via Buttons

1. Open the window for configuring the button (Window ► Object properties on the
right above the ribbon).
2. On the Action tab open the Predefined actions entries (click on ).
3. Click on the action to be executed.
4. The dialog for setting up the action is displayed. If the dialog has already been dis-
played once, you have to click on Configure below the list. Specify the parameters,
such as job name or Panel, as necessary.
5. Close the dialog with OK. The action is displayed in the Standard action field.
6. Define the Caption of the button (General tab) and/or images to be displayed
(Font/Color tab).
Picture formats ICO, BMP, JPG, EMF and WMF are supported.
7. If desired, you can also specify a shortcut or define whether and in which order the
button is selected on pressing the tabulator key ( ) (Tab index and Tab stop).

Start clone actions via buttons

1. Open the window for configuring the button (Window ► Object properties on the
right above the ribbon).
2. On the Action tab open the Clone of entries (click on ).
3. Click on the action to be executed which is shown in the Clone of field.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 333
4. Define the Caption of the button (General tab) and/or images to be displayed
(Font/Color tab).

Notes
Not all clone actions you can select are logical. For example, some actions require
that you first select an object or channel to which the action will be applied. This
must be possible and known to a user for the button to work as desired.
Picture formats ICO, BMP, JPG, EMF and WMF are supported.

7.4 Analysis functions (evaluation in graphs)

Zoom, scroll, cursor and annotations are available for analysis of your plots, as are also
the section functions in Analysis mode. You label particular points on your plots with the
annotations. For the cursor mode and annotations, a dedicated window with two tabs is
displayed which shows the positions and is used for changes or entries.
You can always activate only one mode—either the segment, zoom, scroll, cursor or
annotations mode.

Click on a graph and choose the required function in the group Graphics tools: H zoom
(horizontal zoom), R zoom (rectangular zoom), Scroll or Cursor or Annotations. To deac-
tivate a function again, click on Edit.
You may create new sub-channels, which contain the current zoom section of the x
axis as a limit, directly from a post-process graph. Select Create plot sections from
the context menu.
See also Curve operations.

Notes
You cannot move (relocate) a graph while a segment, zoom, scroll or cursor mode
or the annotations are active.
Neither the zoom mode nor the zoom status (section) are saved in a DAQ project. If
required, you can change the scaling to a manual scaling.
The cursor is deactivated in the post-process graph if the product of Compress
data from … points and Max. plots is above 900,000 (graph configuration dialog,
Special tab). In these cases, reduce the maximum possible number of plots or use
the cursor graph.
See also Maximum number of plots per graph.

catman
334 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
7.4.1 Section functions (Analysis mode)
See also Cursor functions, Annotations, Scroll functions.

You can always activate only one mode—the segment, zoom, scroll, cursor or
annotations mode.
The section functions are only available in Analysis mode (in the visualization and
in the DataViewer).

You have five different section functions available; newly generated data records (except
FFT) are displayed in the graph immediately instead of the old ones.
Zoom ( )
The function operates similar to horizontal zoom, but with active autoscaling of
the y axis the scale is matched to the zoom.
Statistics ( )
Displays minimum and maximum of all channels represented in the graph in a
window. The values are shown in a table without separating lines. To copy the
data mark the area which you want to copy and click on Copy.
Copy ( )
Copies the marked area and generates a new data record for all channels shown
in the graph. The new channels are given the name TempEdit_, an incremented
number and the identifier REGION_COPY_ with details of the point indexes used.
Use Modify computation (Edit group on the Computations tab) to change the
name. If you require a display which takes into account the starting time of the
section, use the abs setting for the x axis; see (Axis) format.
Remove ( )
Creates a new data record for all channels illustrated in the graph in which the
marked area is deleted from the values. The new channels are given the name
TempEdit_, an incremented number and the identifier REGION_CUT_ with details
of the point indexes used. Use Modify computation (Edit group on the Com-
putations tab) to change the name.
After removal the new channels are displayed in the graph, i.e. not the original
channels.
FFT ( )
Computes the FFT over the section. catman opens a dialog after selection in
which you can specify the number of points, window function and overlap, as well

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 335
 as the desired unit. The new channels are given the name TempEdit_, an incre-
mented number and the identifier REGION_FFT_ with details of the point indexes
used. Use Modify computation (Edit group on the Computations tab) to change
the name.
See also Frequency analysis.
Edit data ( )
With this function you have four options: You can carry out an (automatic) drift
correction, remove spikes, scale the plot, or assign a constant value to the sec-
tion. The new channels are given the name TempEdit_, an incremented number
and the identifier REGION_RESCALED_ with details of the point indexes used. Use
Modify computation (Edit group on the Computations tab) to change the name.
Drift correction: For the drift correction a best-fit straight line is placed through
the section. The measurements are then corrected such that the straight line is
horizontal. This means that the end value is approximately equal to the starting
value. The deviations of the measurements from an ideal straight line between
the two end points are however retained.
Remove spikes: Specify the amplitude (Relative change) by which a value must
be higher than the previous one in order to be replaced by the previous one. The
substitution takes place until the measurement is again located in the range of
the last measurement ± relative change.
Constant: Specify the Value which is to be used instead of the readings.
Rescale: Specify the constant shift (b) and the scaling factor (m) with which the
data is to be computed
Some of the section functions are also available in the Cursor and Annotations win-
dow on the Cursor tab. With the standard graph however you have to first set a ref-
erence point; see Cursor functions.

7.4.2 Cursor functions

See also Annotations, Section functions, Scroll functions.

You can always activate only one mode—the segment, zoom, scroll, cursor or
annotations mode.

Activate the cursor via Cursor in the Graph tools group. The window with the cursor pos-
ition and annotation settings is displayed as well as a cursor in the graph. As default, the

catman
336 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
cursor always snaps to the measured data points on a plot. With the cursor graphs you
can use up to two cursors: Activate Visible (Cursor and Annotations window).
In the post-process graph, after activation the cursor is often located first on the
left-hand edge of the graph. Use the arrow keys or click on any point on the plot

(cursor changes to ) to move the cursor to this position. Drag the cursor
crosshair in the Cursor graph.

Snap cursor 1 uses a crosshair for the display, Snap cursor 2 a square.

Moving the cursor (only post-process graph)

and move the cursor from value to value to the left/right.
Use to move the cursor a greater distance to the left/right.
and to change to the next/previous data set (plot) on the graph.
The cursor is deactivated in the post-process graph if the product of Compress
data from … points and Max. plots is above 900,000 (graph configuration dialog,
Special tab). In these cases, reduce the maximum possible number of plots or use
the cursor graph.

Measure differences
Cursor graph: Activate the second cursor. Both the positions and the differences between
the cursor positions are shown in the Cursor and Annotations window.
Standard graph: Use to set the current cursor position as reference. You can then pos-
ition the cursor on another data point and read the differences for the plots shown in the
Cursor and annotations window. The reference point is deleted when you switch over to
another mode.
In Analysis mode the Section functions are also available in the Cursor and annota-
tions window on the Cursor tab. With the standard graph you must however first set
a reference point as described above.

Deactivate cursor mode

Closing the window with the cursor positions (Cursor and annotations) or switching to
another mode deactivates the cursor mode. However, you can also click in another graph
to activate the cursor mode for this graph.
You cannot move a graph while the cursor mode is active.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 337
7.4.3 Annotations
See also Cursor functions, Section functions, Scroll functions.

You can only activate one mode at a time: section mode, zoom mode, scroll mode,
cursor mode or annotation mode.

To create an annotation, you should move the cursor to the required position in the graph
so that the current coordinates are included in the annotation. After the cursor is activ-
ated, the window with the cursor position is displayed and a cursor is shown in the graph.
By default, the cursor always snaps to the measured data points on a plot.
The cursor is hidden when you switch to annotations in the post-process graph.

Creating annotations
1. Place the cursor at the position where you want the annotation to appear.
To do this, click on a (measured) point on the plot in the post-process graph. The

mouse pointer changes to , when it is positioned over a measured point on the

plot. A click on the connecting line between two points does not work, the cursor
cannot snap in here.
For the cursor graph, drag the cursor at the crosshairs to the desired position.
You can also use the arrow keys to move between the plot points in the post-pro-
cess graph:
and move the cursor left/right from measured value to measured value.
Use to move the cursor a greater distance to the left/right.
and to change to the next/previous data set (plot) on the graph.

2. Create the annotation with (New annotation at cursor position).

3. Switch to the Annotations tab (Graph tools in the ribbon).
4. Modify the annotation type as necessary: Text only (annotation) and/or one of the
symbols.
With anchored text (post-process graph only) a line is drawn between the measure-
ment point and the text. The fine position of the text can be defined with a prefix;
Positioning annotation texts.
Specify the formatting of the annotation: Text color, filling, (background color), etc.
or symbols (only post-process graph) for the symbol size.
Post-process graph: The text and symbol sizes apply to all annotations in the
active graph.

catman
338 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 The field with the annotation text can also be modified later.

To change an annotation, you must first select it: Click once on the annotation in the
cursor graph, double-click on the annotation in the post-process graph.
You can also move annotations after creating them: drag them with the mouse to the new
position.

Notes
Moving the annotation is reset when the graph is redrawn (changing axis settings,
deleting plots). We therefore recommend moving this annotation type just before
print or copy operations.
Annotations cannot be saved, not even together with a project.
You cannot move a graph while the annotation window is open (or the cursor is act-
ive).
The cursor is deactivated in the post-process graph if the product of Compress
data from … points and Max. plots is above 900,000 (graph configuration dialog,
Special tab). In these cases, reduce the maximum possible number of plots or use
the cursor graph.

Positioning annotation texts

Enter the prefix given below before your text to position the text accordingly.

Prefix Position
|c Centered

|l Left-justified

|r Right-justified

|e Top, vertical and centered

Bottom, vertical and

|E
centered

|m Bottom, vertical, right side

|M Top, vertical, left side

|s Bottom, vertical, left side

|S Top, vertical, right side

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 339
 |d Centered, vertical, left side

|D Centered, vertical, right side

7.4.4 Scroll functions

See also Cursor functions, Section functions.

The Scroll function (Graph tools group) is only available for the cursor graphs. You
can only activate one mode at a time: section mode, zoom mode, scroll mode,
cursor mode or annotation mode.

Scrolling
1. For the real-time cursor graph specify a buffer (General tab) to be able to scroll over
a larger range than the time window. Bear in mind, though, that large buffers will
cause heavy load on the PC, and might result in an RT lag, because the graph is not
compressed, meaning all buffer values are displayed.
2. Click on Scroll (Graph tools group).
3. Move the segment displayed in the graph by holding the left mouse key pressed.
4. Deactivate Scroll mode to be able to move the graph (click on Edit in the Graph tools
group) or, for example, to be able to use the cursor functions (click on Cursor).

7.5 Special Panels: Scope- and Floating-Panel

You generate the Scope and Floating panels (only in DAQ mode) via New in the
Panel/page group. The Scope panel always fills the complete screen, but the Floating
panel can be placed on the screen independently of catman. If you have several monitors
available, you can display each Floating panel on a different screen. The Panels are first
(separately) numbered through without taking into account other Panels or Print pages,
but they can be renamed (Panel tab).
Before printing, switch with Color scheme (Scope tools group) to a color scheme
which uses a white background.

7.5.1 Scope panel

See also Objects for real-time indicators, Configure display objects

catman
340 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
The Scope panel is only available in DAQ mode, and has its own configuration tab (Set-
tings window on the left). The position of the (component) window can be configured.
You can create a maximum of 8 Scope panels and use up to 64 visualization objects
together over all Scope panels.
Configuration is carried out as for objects for standard Panels. You have the choice of the
following graphical types:

Scope (Cursor graph) displays the sampled values during measurement.

Post-process graph generates a post-process cursor graph, meaning the

values are only displayed in this graph after the measurement.

Numer. table generates a Simple table in which multiple channels with

their current measurements can be displayed.

Live FFT generates a (live) frequency spectrum (graph with com-

putation). You set the computation parameters in the Settings window on the
FFT tab.

Angular sync. produces a (normal) angle synchron. graph.

Digital indicator generates a (normal) digital indicator.

Bar indicator creates a (normal) bar chart display.

Pointer creates a (normal) pointer instrument (analog meter).

Placeholder creates an empty frame. In this way you can modify the lay-
out of the other visualization objects in that you, for example, move an empty
frame adjacent to an object or above an object and adapt it in size appropriately.

Change the window name using the Panel tab in the Settings component window (Win-
dow ► Settings on the right above the ribbon).

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 341
Advantages of the Scope panel
The display can occur triggered (Trigger tab) in order to obtain a steady picture with
periodic signals.
The Scope panel provides a minimum time window of 10 microseconds (compared
to the 0.5 seconds for the other graphics).
The display of the values can be paused at any time to zoom into the graphs or to
use the cursor analysis. At the end of the pause the plots are redrawn using the tem-
porarily saved values.
You have two cursors available:
Multiple graphs can be synchronized (zoom/cursor/scroll).

7.5.1.1 Configuring a Scope panel

Click on one of the symbols at the top in the ribbon (Scope tools group) to create the rel-
evant object. The deletion of the first graph or table is not possible.

Click in on the Plots tab in the Settings component window to display the channel in a
graph. You can assign up to 30 plots per graph. Mark the channel to change the plot
color.

Actions such as Zoom, Scroll or Cursor only affect the active window; therefore, click on
one of the windows to activate it. The active graph is marked in the frame header with a
red LED (this is not the case when Hide border is active in the Panel tab).
Change the axis settings, such as the displayed range of the x axis (time), autoscaling
and the grid via the Axes tab (Configuration component window). With multiple graphs
per Panel here you can also make the synchronization settings.

7.5.1.2 Analysis in the Scope panel (Cursor)

During a running measurement, you can stop the graph refresh with to be able to
analyze the graph.
In the Scope tools group switch between rectangular zoom (R-Zoom), horizontal zoom
(H-Zoom), i.e. zooming without changing the y scaling, scroll mode (Scroll), i.e. moving of
displayed extract after a zoom and cursor mode (Cursor). Only one mode can be active at
a time, but settings, e.g. the zoom status, are not cleared when you activate another
mode.

catman
342 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
The cursor positions can be found on the Cursor tab (Settings component window). Here,
you can also have the cursor snap onto the points on the plot.
On the Axes tab you can synchronize the cursor, zoom and scroll functions for all Panel
graphs.

7.5.1.3 Scope panel trigger (tab)

In the usual display of a real-time graph the plots usually move across when the plot
reaches the right-hand side of the object. However a stationary picture is better for quick
periodic signals. On the Trigger tab (Settings component window) define the channel to
be monitored and the level at which the display (of all plots) should start.
The measurement must be started; if no DAQ job is running, no values can be col-
lected and displayed. In the Continuous and Single shot trigger modes, the plots will
only be displayed when all values to be drawn on the graph are available. Set the x-
axis (time) on the Axes tab accordingly.
The trigger is synchronized one read block at a time. Therefore the plots do not
always start at exactly the same point.

In Continuous mode, when the trigger threshold has been reached and all values have
been acquired the plot(s) will be drawn once. Then the device waits for the next trigger
event.
In Single shot mode, the trigger event monitoring only starts when you click on Start (next
to Single shot); the plots are then drawn and the measurement is finished.
Save data on the Trigger tab allows you to export the values displayed in the graph in all
formats supported by catman.

7.5.2 Floating panel

See also Objects for real-time indicators, Objects for displaying all recorded
samples, Configuring display objects

Use the Floating panel (only available in DAQ mode) to obtain a separate window which
can be moved to a second (or third) monitor. The Panel has its own tab for configuration (
► Settings); the position of this window is configurable. You can create a maximum of
32 Floating panels and use up to 64 visualization objects together over all Floating pan-
els.
Configuration is carried out as for objects for standard Panels. You have the choice of the
following graphical types:

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 343
 generates a line recorder (Cursor graph).

generates a post-process graph (Post-process graph), i.e. the values are

only displayed in this graph after the measurement.

generates a Simple table in which several channels with their current mea-
surement can be displayed.

generates a (live) frequency spectrum (graph with computation). You set

the computation parameters in the Settings window on the FFT tab.

generates a (normal) Angle synchron. graph.

generates a (normal) Digital indicator.

generates a (normal) Bar indicator.

generates a (normal) Analog meter.

generates a blank window or shows the live picture of a video camera, a

picture from a file or an HTML page. You can modify the layout of the other visu-
alization objects with a blank window in that, for example, you move an empty
window adjacent to an object or above an object and adapt it in size appro-
priately. You can use the object also as a video camera display or background
image. The function as an HTML display (web browser), in which any HTML file
can be displayed in the object, is only present with this object.

duplicates, saves or loads a Panel. You can also copy or print the
Panel, hiding the frame around the Panel objects.

pauses all graphs in the Panel. Then you can, for example, zoom in the
graphs. The data continue to be acquired during the pause.

deletes the Floating panel, as only minimizes the Panel.

catman
344 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
 The zoom, cursor and scroll functions are identical to those of the normal
Panels.

You change the window name via the General tab in the Settings component window.
Closing a Floating panel minimizes the displayed window, and you can display it again via
the taskbar.

Advantages of the Floating panel

The Floating panel window can be moved freely on or to the screens (outside of the
catman window).
The display can occur triggered (Trigger tab) in order to obtain a steady picture with
periodic signals.
The Floating panel provides a minimum time window of 10 microseconds (com-
pared to the 0.5 seconds for the standard graphs).
The display of the values can be paused at any time to zoom in the graphs or to use
the cursor analysis. At the end of the pause the plots are redrawn using the tem-
porarily saved values.
There are two cursors available in the graphs.
Multiple graphs can be synchronized (zoom/cursor/scroll).

7.5.2.1 Configuring a Floating panel

Click on one of the symbols at the top in the Panel window (tool bar) to produce the
appropriate object. If the tool bar has been hidden, display it again using the context
menu.

In click on the Channels tab in the Settings component window to display the channel
in a graph. You can assign up to 30 plots per graph. Mark the channel to change the plot
color.

Actions such as Zoom, Scroll or Cursor only affect the active window; therefore, click on
one of the windows to activate it. The active graph is marked in the frame header with a
red LED (this is not the case when Hide border is active in the General tab).

Change the axis settings, such as the displayed range of the x axis (time), autoscaling
and the grid via the Axes tab (Configuration component window). With multiple graphs
per Panel you can also set the synchronization settings in this window.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 345
7.5.2.2 Analysis in the Floating panel (cursor)

During a running measurement, you can stop the graph refresh with to be able to
analyze the graph.
Using the symbols at the top in the Panel window switch between rectangular zoom (R-
Zoom), horizontal zoom (H-Zoom), i.e. zooming without changing the y scaling, scroll
mode (Scroll), i.e. moving of displayed extract after a zoom and cursor mode (Cursor).
Always only one mode can be active, but settings, e.g. the zoom status, are not cleared
when you activate another mode.
The cursor positions can be found on the Cursor tab (Settings component window). Here,
you can also have the cursor snap onto the points on the plot.
On the Axes tab you can synchronize the cursor, zoom and scroll functions for all Panel
graphs.

7.5.2.3 Save/copy/print Floating panel

Use the context menu or click on the arrow next to to save or print a Floating panel
(separately).

Menu or context menu also enables you to copy (clipboard) or to duplicate a Panel.

7.5.2.4 Floating panel trigger (tab)

In the usual display of a real-time graph the plots usually move across when the plot
reaches the right-hand side of the object. However a stationary picture is better for quick
periodic signals. On the Trigger tab define the channel to be monitored and the level at
which the display (of all plots) should start.
The measurement must be started; if no DAQ job is running, no values can be col-
lected and displayed. In the Continuous and Single shot trigger modes, the plots will
only be displayed when all values to be drawn on the graph are available. Set the x-
axis (time) on the Axes tab accordingly.
The trigger is synchronized one read block at a time. Therefore the plots do not
always start at exactly the same point.

In Continuous mode, when the trigger threshold has been reached and all values have
been acquired the plot(s) will be drawn once. Then the device waits for the next trigger
event.

catman
346 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
In Single shot mode, the trigger event monitoring only starts when you click on Start (next
to Single shot); the plots are then drawn and the measurement is finished.

7.6 DataViewer (DAQ mode)

The DataViewer tab gives you a quick overview of the measurements for individual chan-
nels. In the window DataView you are shown in three sub-windows statistical data and
traceability data (Channel info), the measurements as figures (Table) and as graph (Pre-
view). Use Window (on the right above the ribbon) to display the sub-windows again if
you have closed them. You can define whether the DataViewer tab is displayed in DAQ
mode using Program functions (Program options, System group).

Display channels
Double-click on one of the loaded channels (DAQ channels window) or mark the desired
channel(s) and click on Add channel in the Window group.
If you do not want to display a channel in the graph, deactivate Auto preview in the Pre-
view group before adding the channel or deactivate In preview in the Channel info win-
dow.
A zoomed display in the preview is reset when you add a new channel to the
DataView.

Remove channels from the display

You have three options:
1. Double-click again on the loaded channel (DAQ channels window).
2. Mark the loaded channel(s) in this window and click on Remove channel in the
Window group.
3. Use the Remove channel context menu in the Table or Channel info window.

y(x) representation in the preview

A y(x) representation is also possible in the preview: Drag the required x channel onto the
x axis legend in the graph. Note though that with y(x) graphs no min/max compression is
carried out. So increase the number of points to display as necessary: Configure context
menu or Configure in the Preview group, General tab, Data compression from.
See also Representation of plots in y(x) graphs.
Drag a time channel or the channel Time from sample rate onto the x axis to delete the x
channel. You can delete the available x channels using x channels in the Axes group.

catman
7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES 347
Displaying a large number of measurements
If a channel contains more than 5,000,000 measurements, you are asked whether the
computation of the statistics data should also take place, because this may take several
seconds. You can save the setting for the next start of catman.

Displaying many channels/multiple DataView windows

You create further DataView windows with New DataView window in the Window group.
Switch between the individual windows with the tabs displayed at the bottom of the
DataView window. The names of the individual windows (DataView 1, DataView 2, …) can-
not be changed. A maximum of 12 DataViews is possible.

Find measured values

Click Go to (Table group) to find specific measured values or value changes. You can
then choose in the dialog whether you want to
display a specific row,
find a value greater than or less than a specific value,
find two consecutive values with a difference between them greater than or less
than a specified value,
two identical consecutive values,
a measured value identical to zero or to the overflow (OVFL) value.
See also DAQ channel options: Display overflow values as.
The search starts on the current selected row. Choose Find next or press F3 to search for
the next occurrence.

Editing measurements
If editing stored measurement data is enabled in the options (Program options: Program
functions (System group), you can enable or disable edit mode by clicking on Edit
(Table group).
See also Program function options.

catman
348 7 VISUALIZATION: PANELS AND PRINT PAGES
8 M EASURING (START D AQ JOB)

Click on Start (DAQ group) to show the list of active DAQ jobs (job list). If only one DAQ
job exists or the DAQ jobs tab is active, this DAQ job or the marked DAQ job is started
directly, unless it is marked for the On-Board recording. With the list (for several DAQ
jobs) you can also use Execute all DAQ jobs. The DAQ group is displayed in several tabs
to give you the possibility of starting the measurement quickly.
For the measurement the Visualization tab is displayed. If no visualization objects have
been created, you are asked during the first start, whether you would like to use one of
the visualization variants of catman; see Predefined visualizations.
Choose Use as default from the ribbon to define the current DAQ job settings as the
presets for the next catman startups.

Indications in the status bar (are displayed below or above the panel section)
which DAQ job is currently running ( )
whether the measurement is already running ( ) or whether it is waiting for a trig-
ger ( )
what type of data saving mode has been set for this job: Manual after measurement
( , query), Automatic ( ), Periodic ( ) or None ( ),
which sample rates are used ( = Default, = Slow, = Fast),
whether the measured values are being transferred fast enough ( , RT lag),
how many values have already been acquired ( ),
how much space is still free on your storage medium ( ),
whether synchronization is active for multiple devices (Sync leader/ Follower).
You can call the window with the Job status via Additional.

Display in the message bar (below the ribbon)

Since during the measurement only the current message can be displayed in the status
line, all messages occurring since the start of catman are gathered in a list with the date
and time of their occurrence and are displayed in the Message bar. Click on Previous to
view older messages. Alternatively, you can also close the message bar and view the
events in the Job status window on the Events tab.

Choose Quick Setup (DAQ group) to change the key measurement parameters of
the first DAQ job (e.g. sample rate and data backup) directly without having to call

catman
8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB) 349
 up the corresponding windows for the DAQ job (the function is not available for
long-term measurements).
You can also use Comment in the DAQ group (Visualization tab) to enter comments
during measurement. The comments are then saved as test parameters with the
date and time of the entry. The comments in the DAQ comments window are
deleted before each measurement.

Using in the DAQ group you can pause all the graphs. Then you can, for example,
zoom in the graphs. The data continue to be acquired during the pause.

8.1 The Job status window

See also The Recorder Console.

To open the window, click on Additional at the bottom right in the status line or use Win-
dow ► System status.
The Job status window shows you:
the momentary load on the processor core used for catman (only some
DLLs/drivers use more than one processor core),
how much space has been reserved on your storage medium for temporary storage,
how much space has been occupied on your storage medium for data saving (data
export),
the key DAQ job settings on the General tab,
the events from the message bar as a list on the Events tab,
on the FTP uploads tab, the status of the data transfer or information about which
files can be uploaded, if you have configured Remote data saving (FTP).

Processor load
In normal operation the load should not go beyond 50%. In this case the data is fetched at
the interval specified in the options (DAQ jobs ► Advanced ► Data transfer and error
handling, Time between two data transfers). At a load of 100% the time has already
doubled, i.e. catman can only fetch new data half so frequently. Therefore, from a load of
50% you should consider whether you can reduce the processor load; see Preventing an
RT lag.

catman
350 8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB)
Temp. storage/data saving
Shows the space on the drive(s) taken up for temporary storage and that selected for
data saving. If both files are saved on the same drive, the figures are identical. Initially,
the display only shows how much space has been reserved and the space has not yet
been actually occupied. If the display used extends beyond 90%, you should delete the
files not required from the drive or select a different drive for data saving (if possible) or
terminate the measurement prematurely.
See also Data storage options, Folder options.
If no more free space is available on the specified storage media, the catman mea-
surement is aborted.
See also Possible problems during measurement

FTP uploads
The tab shows which files are available for uploading, and whether and how the transfer
is running.
If you have activated the No automatic start of upload option for Remote data saving
(FTP), you can control the upload manually:

Pauses the transfer.

Starts the transfer.

Cancels the transfer.

If an FTP upload is run after a DAQ job, this dialog remains open.

8.2 The Recorder Console

See also The Job status window.

The Recorder Console opens automatically when you start a DAQ job that contains
recorders.
You can zoom the window in or out to display the status of up to three recorders at the
same time. If there are more than three recorders, they are combined into recorder
groups. Click on the relevant group at the top of the window.

catman
8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB) 351
 Use the Windows taskbar to display the window if it is not visible, for example if it is
displayed in the background or minimized.

In the Recorder Console, you can start or stop recording for individual recorders
even if they are not set to Manual in the job settings.

The current status, the key recorder settings and actions performed are displayed. Activ-
ate Log user defined events and limit value tripping in the system log if you want inform-
ation on starting or stopping of recorders to be recorded in the log (system log); see
Options: Safety.

8.3 Start On-Board recording (MGCplus)

See also Prepare On-Board recording, MGCplus on-board recording.

At the start of the measurement you define whether:

1. The DAQ job will only be executed in catman (in this case if On-Board recording is
selected it will be ignored): Computer recording.
2. An On-Board recording controlled by catman will be started: Start On-Board record-
ing.
This method can only be applied to a single on-board DAQ job.
3. The DAQ job for the PC Card should be carried out in parallel in catman and on the
CP42/52 for the storage medium: Computer + On-Board recording.
If you Execute all DAQ jobs, the individual jobs will be carried out according to their
marking only by catman or by catman with additional on-board recording. The
status of the DAQ job (activated/deactivated) will also be taken into consideration.
4. The MGCplus with the CP42/52 will be set for an autonomous measurement without
PC: Prepare On-Board recording.
In the latter case, there are also other options. You can define whether:
1. The MGCplus waits for the AB22 key Start/Stop recording after switching on.
2. The MGCplus starts the DAQ job immediately after switching on.
3. After switching on the MGCplus, you can select one of the jobs using the AB22 key
Load rec. param. set before you start it with the AB22 key Start/stop recording.
4. After switching on the MGCplus, you can select one of the jobs using the AB22 key
Load rec. param. set and start it immediately.
Start in this case means that trigger conditions will be monitored. The measurement will
only start immediately if no trigger conditions have been defined.

catman
352 8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB)
The DAQ job is also or exclusively executed in the device:
Once the DAQ job has started, the (flashing) On-Board button in the status line
enables you to check the recording parameters and stop on-board recording.
You can terminate the DAQ job in catman as well as catman itself at any time
without the autonomous measurement being terminated. Only when you want to
reconnect to the device do certain restrictions apply; see MGCplus on-board record-
ing.

8.4 Possible problems during measurement

If the error message “The maximum available memory … is not sufficient for the dur-
ation of this measurement” appears, check your settings for End of measurement:
More data is generated than there is space for on your storage medium. The Max-
imum measurement duration section contains further information and suggestions
for a solution.
If the measured values are not being transferred quickly enough, there will be a time
delay (RT lag) between the measured values and the displayed values. The values
already measured must first be written to the buffer of the measuring device if the
PC cannot fetch the data fast enough.
See also Prevent RT lag (performance).
With a time delay the measurement is stopped, once the measuring device buf-
fer is full.
If the message “Start time too far in the past or future” is displayed, the Quan-
tumX/SomatXR modules are not synchronized or the synchronization is not work-
ing correctly, i.e. the measuring times of the modules are not identical. Check the
cable connections. Maybe a plug is not contacting for example.
If the message “The size of the write cache may be too small in some cir-
cumstances for the sample rate used” appears, you should increase this value in
the program options; see Data storage options.
If no more free space is available on the specified storage medium, the measure-
ment is aborted. Next to in the status line, you can see how long you can con-
tinue measuring before this happens (d = days, h = hours). The computation uses
100 megabytes as safety reserve. The background of the status display will change
to red as soon as there is less than 1 gigabyte of free space.
See also Stopping the measurement: Maximum measurement duration.

catman
8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB) 353
8.5 Preventing a RT lag (performance)

(RT lag) in the status line indicates whether the performance of your PC is sufficient
and whether it can process and display the arising measurement data fast enough. If the
times displayed here increase, your PC is too slow or the processor load of computations
and graphical output is too high. So a time delay (real-time lag) arises between the mea-
sured values and the displayed values, because the values already measured must first
be written into the buffer of the measurement device if the PC cannot fetch the data fast
enough.
See Job status window to view the processor load.

With a time delay the measurement is stopped, once the measuring device buffer is
full.

Device buffer size

QuantumX/SomatXR: 5 seconds or at least 30,000 values per channel; therefore catman
uses a further (non-configurable) buffer in the PC (in the device driver DLL)
MGCplus with CP42/52: 6,000,000 measurements for all channels (default)
MGCplus with CP22: 1,000,000 measurements for all channels (default)
PMX: approx. 1,000,000 measurements for all channels
FS22 BraggMETER SI/DI: 2000 measurements per channel

You have a number of ways of reducing the processor load:

1. Using Performance (Measure group), you can reduce the refresh rate for real-time
indicators and/or real-time graphs or you can completely cancel refreshing.
The less often the graphical objects need to be redrawn, the less processor load
there is. You can also refresh the graphs manually with (Panel/page group).
With many lines and messages the CAN raw table object in particular also needs a
large amount of processing power.
Use Stop all invisible (graphs and Scope panels) to reduce the processor load.
The disadvantage is that during browsing the graphs with the last displayed
data appear and the new measurements are appended behind them, i.e. the
measurements acquired between them are missing in the real-time graphs.

Alternatively, you can also use in the DAQ group to pause all graphs.
2. Reduce the refresh rate for individual graphs via the configuration dialog (Properties
context menu, Special tab).

catman
354 8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB)
3. Check whether smaller graphs are possible.
The smaller the graph, the fewer pixels need to be “moved”. Therefore smaller
graphs are drawn more quickly.
4. Check whether all graphs on a page are necessary, and delete graphs as necessary.
5. Check how many data points are used for the individual graphs (Special tab); see
also Configure graph.
6. Check whether all real-time computations are needed or whether some com-
putations can also be made after the measurement.

The update rate for real-time indicators (Digital indicator, Analog meter, Bar indic-
ator or LED) is limited. The objects are updated every 150 ms at the earliest, a faster
update is not possible.

8.6 What happens after a measurement?

After the measurement the data is saved, for example, then possibly a defined waiting
period is allowed to expire and the DAQ job repeated or the next DAQ job carried out,
depending on the settings you have made for your DAQ jobs. If you have specified
Prompt on DAQ termination for the saving mode a dialog appears in which you can still
make entries or changes. If you decide not to save the measurements, you are informed
in another dialog that you can also save the measurements from the last test via the
menu File ► Save as. This information window can be permanently hidden (and displayed
again via the menu Window ► Show again prompt window on the right above the ribbon).

With a standard DAQ job the following files are saved:

The file with the measurement and traceability data (*.bin),
the file with the measurement settings and test parameters as well as the reference
to the bin file (*.tst),
the video file if a video recording was made.

Optionally, you can also save the following files:

the file with the events which have occurred during the measurement
(*.event)
and the files for the statistics journal. The files <testname>_StatJournal.bin and
<testname>_StatJournal.tst are created in the process. The name of the file with the
measurement and traceability data is used instead of <Testname>.

catman
8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB) 355
You can open both the tst file and also the event file with a normal text editor. Apart from
the video file and the statistics files, all files have the same name.

Special features for recorders

In the case of recorders, the recorder name is used instead of the job name (%Job%). If
there are multiple recorder files, a counter is appended if the file names are not unique.
The file format is always the binary catman format for the measurement and traceability
data; the tst files are additionally saved for each recording.

catman
356 8 MEASURING (START DAQ JOB)
9 AUTOSEQUENCES

With AutoSequences you can carry out further tasks in DAQ mode in addition to the
actions which you define with the DAQ jobs or limit values:
perform further measurements or special computations depending on measured val-
ues, computed values or user input,
initiate special tasks,
start other programs or
simply only analyze the measured values statistically and write them to an Excel
table.
Despite these extensive possibilities you do not need to learn any programming language
for AutoSequences. All functions are transferred by drag and drop as symbols in the
order of their execution into a list where they are parameterized by dialog.
Activate the AutoSequences module using Program functions (Program options,
System group).

Examples of AutoSequence can be found in directory “…\Docu-

ments\HBM\catmanEasy\Examples”.

9.1 How do you use AutoSequences?

You have basically two different ways of employing AutoSequences:
1. You use different AutoSequences which extend one or many DAQ jobs in their func-
tionality or define additional functions that are executed at the press of a Button.
Start the AutoSequences via buttons or at various points in time, e.g. after each
reading of new measurements, after each job and after all jobs, you check the mea-
surements and execute certain actions depending on the result.
2. You use one AutoSequence which controls the whole measurement.
You start a DAQ job via the AutoSequence, control the measurement results and
thus determine the further execution or the start of other jobs. You can also inter-
rogate user entries, start other programs, carry out actions and include the results
again into the execution of further DAQ jobs.

AutoSequences cannot be executed in parallel, i.e. always only one AutoSequence

can be active.

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 357
 In addition to executing AutoSequences using buttons you can also execute pre-
defined actions and clone actions with buttons. You can also execute many catman
actions, e.g. starting a DAQ job, with the predefined actions and clone actions
without defining AutoSequences yourself.
See also Trigger predefined actions via a button.

Therefore, decide first whether the whole execution of the measurement is to be con-
trolled via an AutoSequence, whether AutoSequences are to be triggered via various But-
tons or assigned to the possible execution times and then started. So depending on
circumstances, you create one or more AutoSequences.
In order to be able to start AutoSequences via buttons, you must switch from
Design mode to Execution mode (click on Design mode on the right above the rib-
bon).

9.2 How do you create an AutoSequence?

Procedure
1. Click on the AutoSequence Editor tab to call up the editor.
2. Drag the desired action from the left side of the window onto the desired row on the
right side (drag and drop).
Place the cursor over an action to view the description of the action in the field
under the list of available actions.
3. Configure the action: double click on the icon in the list. Provide a defining descrip-
tion for the action so that on reading the list the purpose is immediately apparent.
Depending on the action, you can or must specify further parameters, e.g. variables
or channels.
You can create new variables for the result of an action either by typing into the
field or by selecting ones already available in the list. Otherwise you define vari-
ables via Process variables (Project group).
4. Define all actions in the required order. The list is executed from the top to the bot-
tom.
See also Positioning actions.
5. If you want to define more than one AutoSequence, create additional AutoSequences
via Add AutoSequence (Project group).

catman
358 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
9.3 Useful information on creating AutoSequences
See also Mathematical functions, Mathematical operators.

In the following sections you will find information on various topics for creating and edit-
ing AutoSequences. You will find special information on individual actions in the section
Information on the actions.

Positioning actions
You position actions which are to be executed before one that already exists,
directly below the text of the action situated immediately above.
Cut out incorrectly positioned actions (context menu) and use context menu items
Insert before or Insert after to place them at the correct point.

If you wish to move a number of associated actions, create an action block via the

comment ( , see General). Then close the block, cut it out and insert it at the
desired point.

Process variables
Using Process variables (Project group) you can pre-assign values to variables and
delete variables.
You can also define new process variables in the field for the result of an action.
Define variables, which are to apply in a number of AutoSequences, as Global: Pro-
cess variables dialog (Process variables in the Project group).

Entering numbers, variables and channels

Enter numbers in formulas with a decimal point, not with a decimal comma.
Enter the channel name exactly as it appears in the Channel settings window (DAQ
channels tab), i.e. where applicable, with spaces.
Blank parameter fields are not permissible. Specify where appropriate a process
variable which is not needed, e.g. %dummy%.
Variables can be specified in various ways:
By picking in drop-down lists or typing in; % is not needed before nor after the
name in this case.
By drag and drop from the field Process variable into a formula or output field.
You join texts using &.
By entering the name enclosed in %, e.g. %Test%.

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 359
Entering texts
Always enter text in quote marks (""). Use & for chaining, e.g. "This makes " &
%Counter% & " tests so far".
When you use the operator & for chaining, you cannot use any more mathematical
operators in the same expression.

Formula expressions in assignments

A formula expression in an assignment can include numbers, texts, process variables,
mathematical functions, brackets and operators. Place texts in double quotes ("") and
use the operator & to combine process variables and texts (chaining).
Format process variables which contain numbers and are to be output as text with the
function Format$() command in the EasyScript help (F1 in the script editor).

Examples:
%Temperature% * 5
sqrt(%MaxVal%) + %MaxVal%/2
%MaxTemp% > 100 AND %MaxPressure% < 300
REM Returns 1, if the expression is true, otherwise 0
%FileName% = "TEST.DAT"
REM Returns 1, if the expression is true, otherwise 0
"TEST_" & %CycleCounter% & ".DAT"
REM Returns TEST_1.DAT, TEST_2.DAT etc.
"The maximum temperature was: " & Format$(%MaxTemp%,"0.0")
REM Outputs the temperature with one decimal place

What is saved where with AutoSequences?

AutoSequences are saved automatically with the DAQ project. To use the displayed
AutoSequence in other DAQ projects use Export as in the AutoSequence group.
Breakpoints ( ) are saved and exported together with an AutoSequence.

Miscellaneous
Check for blank entries with TestVar = "". The result is 1 if TestVar is blank.
Automatically inserted comment lines, e.g. with the action Execute DAQ job, may be
deleted.

catman
360 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
9.4 Notes on the AutoSequence actions
See also Mathematical functions, Mathematical operators.

All dialogs start with an explanation of the action, which also provides information about
the parameters or results. The following notes therefore only contain additional inform-
ation or tips relating to the actions.

All actions include a line where you can enter a description text. Use the line for com-
ments and explanatory notes about the action. This will make it easier to read the
AutoSequences, and understand the actions performed and their purpose.

Action list
9.4.1 General 361
9.4.2 Measurement 362
9.4.3 I/O 363
9.4.4 Analyze 364
9.4.5 Panel 364
9.4.6 Control flow 365
9.4.7 MS Excel 366
9.4.8 MS Access 366
9.4.9 Special 367

9.4.1 General

Comments
Use this action to comment on your actions and to group action blocks or fold them: cre-
ate an action with <B> as the comment text which you insert before the action block and
create another one with </B> as the comment text which you insert after the action block.
The block, labeled in this way, can be folded or unfolded and can be cut out and pasted in
the folded state.

Notification/Confirmation
This action is helpful both for pure outputs, e.g. information or warnings as well as for
simple interrogations to which only Yes/No or Yes/No/Cancel are the responses.

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 361
Show window non-modal: normally a message window is displayed until a button is
clicked. During this time no other action in the AutoSequence is executed. With this
option you can display the window for a certain time and at the same time allow the
AutoSequence to continue execution. The option Close window automatically after x s
(seconds) is only effective when a non-modal window is displayed.

File selection
You can set the Filter for file type for only one file type or for many. Each statement con-
sists of a text, the vertical line and specification of the file extension including asterisk
and period, i.e. Excel files|*.XLS sets the filter for files with the file extension XLS. The spe-
cification of All files|*.* sets no file filter, because all files are displayed. The advantage of
specifying this is that in the file dialog the text “All files” is also displayed.

9.4.2 Measurement

Retrieve current measurement values

The action may only be used within the Execute DAQ job action ( )—end of the DAQ

job ( ).

Snapshot (single storage)

Specify Control via event monitoring/script for the Storage mode (Save in the Settings
group) of the DAQ job; otherwise all measurements are saved automatically or an addi-
tional window appears for manual storage.

Continuous storage ON
Specify Control via event monitoring/script for the Storage mode (Save in the Settings
group) of the DAQ job; otherwise all measurements are saved automatically or an addi-
tional window appears for manual storage.

catman
362 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
9.4.3 I/O

Acquire single measurement value

The action may only be used outside of the Run DAQ job action ( )—end of the DAQ

job ( ). A single measurement for all active channels is requested from the measure-
ment devices.

Set digital output

Define another action which resets the output.

See Digital output channels regarding the specification of bit position and channel for
MGCplus and PMX.

Read digital input

See Digital input channels regarding the specification of bit position and channel for
MGCplus and PMX.

Send device commands (not for QuantumX/SomatXR)

You can send commands which apply to the whole instrument to any channel. Specifying
the channel is only essential when the channel must be selected for the command (some
commands for the MGCplus). In all other cases only the relevant device is addressed.
QuantumX/SomatXR modules can only be addressed with the EasyScript com-
mands QXWrite and QXRead.
See also Help on EasyScript (in the script editor)

Example:

Process variable for

Command
response
"IDN?" %DevMess1%

"EST?" %DevMess2%

For an MGCplus you obtain, for example:

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 363
 %DevMess1% = "HBM,CP42,0,P4.36"
%DevMess2% = 0,0

9.4.4 Analyze
See also Mathematical functions, Mathematical operators, Storage mode,
EasyMath.

All analyzing functions use the values from the file last saved. They do not use val-
ues from the temporary data storage. Therefore save your measurement data
before using a computation.

Algebraic computations with channels

Enter the channel name exactly as it appears in the Channel settings window, i.e. where
applicable, with spaces. Texts must be set in double quotes ("") and variables must be
enclosed in %. All values of the specified channels are used in the computation. If one of
the channels contains fewer values, then the results channel is shortened to this length.
Only compute with values from channels measured with the same sample rate.

Read out single sample from channel

The function only uses values located in the file; no measurement is executed. The pos-
ition corresponds to the index of the respective measurement. For new measurement val-

ues use either or if a DAQ job is currently running.

9.4.5 Panel

Output text/process variable

Digital indicator: To display measurements with the correct unit, specify it as the second
parameter: %Value% "kg". Use Format$, if you want to display a specific number of
decimal places, e.g. Format$(%Result%, 0.00) for two decimal places. Do not use & to link
the two statements.
Text object, Table: Specify the full text linked with &: "Result of measurement:" & %Res-
ult% & " kg" or just Format$(%Result%, 0.00) & " kg".

catman
364 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
 Use (Table for AutoSequences and EasyScript) to be able to produce outputs

in a table. The Simple Table ( ) cannot be addressed via AutoSequences.

Read out user input/selection

Combo box: The entries are read out as texts or numbers depending on the Type of user
input setting.
Checkbox: Depends on the configuration.
If the Checkbox only has one line (default), then the status of this option is returned
(0 = Not ticked, 1 = Ticked).
If the Checkbox has a number of options and is configured as a radio button, then
the selected option is returned. The first option has the index 1.
If the checkbox has multiple options, and is configured as a checkbox, the states of
the selected options are returned as a bit mask. The bits of the selected options are
set. The first option is in the least significant bit (bit 0).

Change LED status

The symbols in the dialog only illustrate the status; the symbols defined for the LED are
defined on the Panel or Print page.

Save Table

The object (Table for AutoSequences and EasyScript) is written to a file. In Excel
format (Excel 97-2003) the file extension .XLS is automatically added; in other cases spe-
cify the file extension together with the file name.

9.4.6 Control flow

Free assignment to process variable

Specify only the expression to be assigned: 5 * %Test% computes five times the variable
%Test% and assigns the result to the process variable specified below in the dialog.

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 365
 Loop
You must specify both the number of passes and a process variable for the counter, even
if it is no longer needed.

9.4.7 MS Excel

Open Excel workbook

The number of newly created worksheets is defined in the default settings of Excel.

However, you can create further worksheets with .

Set cell content

The cell formatting is set together with the cell content. First read out the content if you
only wish to change the formatting.

9.4.8 MS Access

Open database
The action opens various databases. Refer to the documentation of your database to find
out whether a connection string must be specified, and if so, which.

Example
Open an ODBC database with database name = MyDB, user name (UID) = Tom, password
(PWD) = whoknows; the DSN (Data Source Name) is unknown, therefore the SQL server
name is specified via the parameter SERVER. Specify "ODBC;DATABASE-
E=MyDB;UID=Tom;PWD=whoknows;SERVER=SQLSERVER7;" as the connection string.

SQL query
Enter a valid SQL query, e.g. SELECT * FROM Publisher WHERE [City] = 'New York', to
select all data sets in the table “Publisher” with headquarters in New York. Use double
quotes ("") if the query is made up of different parameters and texts.

catman
366 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
 Specify current data set

After changes, update the current data set with before you browse to a new data set.
Otherwise all the changes are lost.

Create new data set

After changes, update the current data set with before you create a new data set.
Otherwise all changes of the current data set are lost.

9.4.9 Special

Execute EasyScript code

Use the Help on EasyScript (in the script editor) to call the online help for this action. The
help contains a description of the editor, all EasyScript and VBA commands and an intro-
duction to the use of EasyScript in AutoSequences.

9.5 How do you test an AutoSequence?

Define break points to test an AutoSequence: Click on a line and click (Set/remove
break point in the Execution group).

The AutoSequence will stop before executing the line with the breakpoint and the debug
window is displayed. In the debug mode you cannot create any new actions, but you can
edit all the actions which have not yet been executed. The existing variables and their con-
tent are displayed below in the window.
As required, change the variable content by a double click in the appropriate line
below in the window.

If the breakpoint is located in the first line, then the AutoSequence is stopped already on
calling and you can observe further execution step by step with . You continue the exe-
cution to the next breakpoint with .

Use (Deactivate in the Action group) or the context menu Deactivate/Activate action
to eliminate lines from the execution and to execute only the rest of the actions.

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 367
 (Terminate in the Execution group) ends the execution of the current AutoSequence if
you started it via the AutoSequence tab. Otherwise you get the new group AutoSequence
on the Visualization tab which also provides a Terminate button.

9.6 Configure automatic execution at certain times

Define the required time-points using the AutoSequence Editor context tab and Auto exe-
cution … in the Execution group:
1. Mark the AutoSequence to be used at the top in the list of Available AutoSequences.
2. Click on the execution time-point.
3. Click on Assign.

You can also drag and drop an AutoSequence onto an execution time-point.

Remove deletes the marked AutoSequence from an execution time-point.

If you specify a number of AutoSequences for one point in time, they are executed in the
order in which they are listed. New assignments are always added below existing ones; if
necessary, delete assignments and insert them again to obtain the correct sequence.

Execution time-points (in the order of their occurrence)

After starting catman

The time-point is located after the display of the DAQ channels tab (the link to the device
is established) or the Test Explorer tab. It is suitable, for example, for masking out the GUI
of catman or for making other general default settings.

After device scan (New DAQ project)

The time-point allows you to assign sensors and start other actions, which are also per-
formed interactively after a device scan. The device(s) is/are connected but not yet con-
figured.

Before loading a project

The time-point is suitable for saving all settings before loading a new project (with new
settings).

Before closing the file on loading a project

The time-point is only of interest to programmers of add-ins.

catman
368 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
After loading a project
At this time-point you can either change settings before the user executes his own
actions or, for example, start a DAQ job.

Before DAQ job (start)

The time-point is located at the beginning of the execution of a DAQ job, i.e. before the
channel initialization and directly after the Start button is clicked. With repeated DAQ jobs
any specified pause only starts after this time-point. Any specified switchover to another
Panel also occurs after this time-point.
See also Specify job parameters.

Before channel initialization

This almost corresponds to the setting Before DAQ job. However, the channel ini-
tialization is only completely executed on the first start of the jobs in the job list and there-
after only if the channel settings have changed.

After channel init(ialization)

The time-point is located directly after the channel initialization and before the start of
the measurement. The channel initialization is however only fully executed on first start-
ing the jobs in the job list and thereafter only if the channel settings have changed.

Before DAQ start

The time-point is located after the time-point After channel init and directly before the
start of a measurement (if executed). At this point in time you can, for example, com-
municate via low-level commands with a device and directly change settings before the
measurement without the worry that this setting will again be overwritten during a pos-
sible initialization. The video recording is started only after this time-point; the trace-
ability data is determined beforehand however.

During DAQ job

Use this execution time carefully: The time-point is called more frequently during a DAQ
job than After read block transfer, and so also consumes more processing power. It was
introduced for real-time applications that need to run faster than every 100 ms.

After (the occurrence of) a start trigger.

This time-point is well suited if you want to react to the occurrence of the trigger event.
Depending on the trigger event, in the last read block the condition has been fulfilled or

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 369
the corresponding action initiated (keyboard, script, time condition).

After transfer (of a) DAQ data block

This time-point is well suited to the checking of measurements. catman does not read
the measurements singly, but rather in small blocks, the read blocks. At this time-point
after each read-in you can therefore check the newest values, find the minimum or max-
imum of the read block and compare it with old values.

After online (real-time) computation

The specified computations have been carried out, but the values have not been plotted
yet. At this time-point you could still execute your own computations which would then
also be plotted during the “normal” update. The values of the current read block at this
time-point have not yet been stored in the temporary file.

After storing a DAQ data block

This time-point is located in the temporary file after the values are stored and is well
suited if you want to access not just the newly read-in values, but instead all values (tem-
porarily) stored up to that point.

After a complete data transfer cycle

If you want to cancel a DAQ job, this is the first possible time-point; cancellation is not
possible before this. Also the start of a (new) DAQ job is only possible after this time-
point.

After DAQ stop

The measurement is stopped when the condition defined for the DAQ job (End of mea-
surement) has occurred. At this time-point the stop command has been sent to the
device(s).

Before saving the measurement data

If you still want to execute your own computations or analyses before the data are saved,
this is a suitable time. At this time-point you can also determine the file name used for
saving (carried out immediately afterwards) using EA_Test.Re-
solvePlaceholdersInFileName.
If there are no plans for saving the data (job settings), actions at this time-point are
also not carried out.

catman
370 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
Before saving the measurement data
The measurement data has been saved, the (final) file name is therefore known, if place-
holders have been used. You can use this time-point, for example, to carry out further
data saving.

After DAQ termination

The end of the DAQ job is reached when all actions to be carried out after a measurement
have been executed by catman. The time-point is located after the end of the measure-
ment and before the repetition of a DAQ job.

After all DAQ job repetitions

The time-point is located after the complete processing of a DAQ job including the repe-
titions and before any possible start of the next DAQ job in the job list.

After (the execution of) all DAQ jobs

The time-point corresponds to the end of the measurement acquisition, i.e. at the end of
the last DAQ job in the job list.

After DAQ error

With this time-point you can run a script procedure that checks for possible errors in the
measurement and either generates a notification and/or tries to fix the error.

After Panel change

A Panel change occurs when the user browses to another page. The page may be a Panel
or a Print page.
The time-point is not bound to the execution of a DAQ job; the action is executed when
the browsing occurs.

After cursor sync

In Analysis mode, a cursor in a graph synchronizes the objects for synchronized display.
The execution starts after a cursor movement in a graph (also in the angle-synchronous
graph), or in the map object, or when a new video frame is displayed. You can query the
current time in EasyScript with EA.AutoExecParam.

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 371
Before saving a project
This time-point enables you to influence the saved settings before saving a project, e.g.
setting certain default settings for next time when the project is loaded.

Before closing the file on saving a project

The time-point is only of interest to programmers of add-ins.

After saving a project

Saving has finished at this time-point and you can, for example, load a new (different) pro-
ject.

After loading a test (Analysis mode)

The time-point enables you, for example, to analyze the loaded data, i.e. to execute com-
putations or plot graphs with the data.

Before terminating catman

This time-point is suitable if you want to save the current settings before termination.

Notes
The execution time-points are available for AutoSequences or for EasyScript pro-
cedures. You can assign either AutoSequences or EasyScript procedures to an exe-
cution time-point, but not both.
The execution time-points are saved in the DAQ project or in the analysis project
and in the (user-specified) working directory of catman.
See also catman working directory.

9.7 Start AutoSequences via Buttons

See also Starting predefined actions via buttons.

You can also start AutoSequences by clicking on a button. The actions themselves are
executed without a running DAQ job, but you must be in Execution mode: If required, click
on Design mode (on the right above the ribbon); the menu item then changes to Exe-
cution mode.

catman
372 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
Procedure
1. For the configuration switch to Design mode (if necessary, click on Execution mode
on the right above the ribbon).
2. Call the configuration dialog for the button (Properties context menu).
3. On the Action tab open the entries of Start AutoSequence (click on ).
4. Click on the AutoSequence to be executed.
5. is superimposed before the AutoSequence.
6. Define the Caption of the button and/or images to be displayed with the General and
Font/color tabs.

9.8 Restrictions of AutoSequences

Per AutoSequence you can define 2,048 actions, i.e. you can use up to 2,048 lines.
You can create a maximum of 32 AutoSequences.
AutoSequences cannot be executed in parallel, i.e. always only one AutoSequence
can be active. You can however execute different AutoSequences at different times.
AutoSequences are only executed in the DAQ mode, not in the Analysis mode.
The debug mode for AutoSequences completely executes an EasyScript action. Use
the debugger of the EasyScript action to debug this action.

catman
9 AUTOSEQUENCES 373
 catman
374 9 AUTOSEQUENCES
10 ANALYSIS M OD E: D ISPLAY/ ANALYZE D ATA

See also Analyzing functions of graphs, Configure display objects.

In the catman PostProcess version only Analysis mode is available.

In Analysis mode you can analyze data that has already been measured, compare it with
other data, display it graphically on the screen, create layouts for the printout or convert
the data into other formats. Any connected devices are not considered.
You can either change from DAQ mode to Analysis mode directly after a measurement
and the saving of your data (Analyze data on the right above the ribbon) or you can call
Analysis mode from the start window.
When changing from DAQ mode to Analysis mode, catman starts with the DataViewer tab
and the last saved file is loaded (except with recorders); otherwise catman starts with the
Test Explorer tab.

Options when changing from DAQ mode to Analysis mode

1. Set the visualization up yourself (analyzing the measurement with the current ana-
lysis project).
If you have already changed between DAQ mode and Analysis mode, the last set-
tings are available to you again, otherwise you start with a blank Analysis project.
You can, however, either load an analysis project from a file in Analysis mode or
use the next option.
2. Use the visualization of the current DAQ project.
With this option all real-time graphs from your DAQ project are converted into
post-process graphs. Existing post-process graphs are taken over unchanged.
Any Panels in the analysis project are deleted however, so on a second change
from DAQ mode to Analysis mode it is better to select the previous option.
The graph titles remain unchanged, so a “real-time graph” present here is
retained. Despite this however, a post-process graph is involved (see Con-
figuration dialog).
3. To analyze the measurement in catman with an Analysis project assigned to the
DAQ project.
Insert one or more Analysis projects into the list Analysis projects assigned of the
dialog, so that this DAQ project can be analyzed with them.
You can freely modify names shown in the list, because the file name is just the
default setting.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 375
If you have changed from DAQ mode to Analysis mode, you can also change back to DAQ
mode (Back to DAQ mode on the right above the ribbon), and in this case the current DAQ
project is restored.

Save analysis project

You can save analysis projects similar to DAQ projects: All visualizations (Panels, print
pages, etc.), computations and—if required—the references to the loaded tests will be
saved. If you want to pass on the analysis project, choose Add test data files to project.
The query of what is to be done with the data occurs automatically after the selection of
the path and file name for the project to be saved.
If you do not save any references to the data, you can use the project computations
and displays as a template for the treatment of imported data; see also Loading
other tests.

Neither the zoom mode nor the zoom status (section) or annotations are saved in
an analysis project. If required, you can change the scaling to a manual scaling.

10.1 Test Explorer

The Test Explorer provides an overview of the tests and measurement data stored on
your PC. Similarly to the Windows Explorer, it display the folders on your PC on the left,
the tests/files in the selected folder in the center Panel, and the already loaded tests on
the right. You use it to specify which tests you want to load for further processing.
Set up folders as Favorites for quick access: From the folder's context menu choose
Add to favorites. This means that you can also access folders in the network or
deep nested folders with one click.

You can also open the Windows file dialog with Extended file selection (Analysis
project group), and select and load multiple tests with or .

Do not rename catman measurement data files in Windows Explorer. As catman cre-
ates at least two files, and the TST file contains the link to the bin file, you would
have to modify all the files and the link. So use the Rename test context menu in the
catman Test Explorer.

catman
376 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
10.1.1 Find files (search functions)
In the middle Panel of the Test Explorer you can set various filters so that, for example,
only files containing the specified character string, or specific test parameters, are dis-
played.

Search sub folders also displays files in sub-folders of the folder selected on the left. In
this case the path is displayed below the files.

Display file comments displays the comments in the *.bin files below the file in question.

Filter by file type

In the selection field in the middle Panel specify which files you want to see in the file
selection list. You can use one of the entries here or enter your own file extension, e.g.
*.txt to only display text files. Specify the file extension .BAK to be able to load files which
have arisen due to a power failure occurring during periodical saving and where only the
backup file T_DATABACKUP.BAK is available.
See also Data saving.

Use search filters

You can use the search filter in the right-hand selection field of the middle window to
search for specific files or test parameters, or to search within a file for specific channels.
The search box may contain * or ? as wildcards. You cannot mix the three search variants
however.
1. Search for files
Enter the character string you are looking for in the search field and press
(Return), or click on . Only files matching the search box criteria are displayed. If

so selected, this also applies to all files in sub-folders. clears the input field.
2. Search for test parameters
Enter the test parameter you are looking for and the desired value for the para-
meter. You can search by Operator=John Doe or by serial number=* for example. If
so selected, the search also covers all files in sub-folders. Files that have the test
parameter with the value you are searching for are displayed. You can also search
multiple test parameters by linking them by logical AND or OR functions: Oper-
ator=John Doe AND Jobname=*Brakes*. (In older catman versions, Name is the

test parameter for the job name.) clears the input field.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 377
3. Search for channels
Select a file on the File selection tab. Then open the Channels tab to display the
channels in the file. Enter the character string you are looking for in the search field
and press (Return), or click on . Only channels containing that character

string are then displayed. clears the input field.

Displaying test parameters

As soon as you select a file in the middle window, the Test parameters tab appears at the
bottom of the window. All the test parameters and measurement settings are displayed
on this tab.
The information displayed depends on the settings when saving (measurement and test
parameters); see Define job parameters.

Displaying channel data and measured values

As soon as you select a file in the middle window, the Channels tab appears at the bottom
of the window. This tab displays various information on the channels in the file, such as
the sample rate and number of values.
Double-click on a channel to display a window with the graphical plot of the measured
values and the traceability data of the channel. You can also generate several windows
and display them simultaneously.

10.1.2 Toggle views (Show channel properties/configuration)

In the View group (on the ribbon) of the Test Explorer you can choose between the fol-
lowing views:
1. Show channel properties
For the loaded tests this displays the properties (traceability data) of the marked
channel, e.g. sensor ID, filter, zero value.
2. Show XML configuration (QuantumX/SomatXR only)
With loaded tests this displays the XML configuration data of the channel if the
measurement was carried out with QuantumX/SomatXR modules.
3. Show SXR/TCE configuration (only for CX23 and eDAQ)
Shows the configuration of a CX23 or eDAQ when tests are loaded.
Back to test selection
Restores the default view after you have selected one of the above views.

catman
378 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
10.1.3 Loading tests or channels

Display the test selection as necessary ( Back to test selection in View group) and
load your measurement data. You have several options for this:
1. Drag and drop the test into the Analysis project window (area on right).
2. Use the Load test context menu.

3. Mark the file(s) and click on (Load test in the Analysis project group).
4. Load all tests in the context menu of a file loads all tests in the same folder.

You can also load individual channels of a test. Select the desired file, activate the
Channels tab, and drag the relevant channel into the Analysis project window.

10.1.4 Load additional tests

If you load additional files originating from tests with the same channel names, you
should disable the Use channel colors as default for plot colors option (Panel
options).
The plot colors used in the measurement are saved together with the measured val-
ues. Otherwise, when loading identical channels from different tests all the chan-
nels would be displayed in the same color. Alternatively, you can disable the option
for individual graphs only; see Change plot parameters in a graph.

The Use channels automatically option (in the window showing the files in the selected
folder) assigns a special position to the first loaded test: It then acts as a template. When
you load an additional test with the option enabled, catman performs the following
actions:
All the computations you created from the first test by way of the Algebra, Fre-
quency analysis, Filter, Strain gage stress analysis, Curve operations, Interpolation,
Peak values or Class counting tabs are also generated for the new test if the chan-
nel names match.
Computations using data from multiple tests cannot be generated auto-
matically.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 379
 All the channels (and computations) of the first test already displayed in graph
objects and existing in the new loaded test under the same channel name are like-
wise displayed in the objects.
You can choose whether the newly loaded test will be plotted in the same graphs as the
first one (in existing Panels) or whether new Panels will be created with the same graphs
for the newly loaded test (in new Panels).

You also get similar functionality if you save a project without references to the test
data. When you open this analysis project and load measurement data into it, they
are also computed and displayed if the channel names match.

You can also open the Windows file dialog with Extended file selection (Analysis
project group), and select and load multiple tests with or .

10.1.5 Remove or delete tests?

When deleting a test, the test with all measurement data is deleted from the folder; the
deletion must therefore be first confirmed. Deletion is only possible via the Delete test
context menu for the test marked in the test selection (middle window with the File selec-
tion tab active).
When removing a test ( Remove test in the Analysis project group), you are asked
whether you also want to remove the channel links to graphs and computations, i.e.
which channel is used in computations or displayed in graphs, and how. If you answer
No, when a (new) test is loaded the defined plots will be displayed again, and the com-
putations will be performed if channels with the same name exist.

10.1.6 Converting/merging files

See also File download.

You can convert the following file types into the catman format via Convert in the Tools
group (Test Explorer tab):
1. ASCII files
Select File type: ASCII files (*.DAT;*.TXT;*.ASC) or All files (*.*) to display the files.
Then mark the files and in the following dialog specify which characters are used
to separate the values of several channels and whether, where necessary, rows are

catman
380 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
 to be skipped or details such as channel name and unit included. Call the context
menu in the appropriate row and select Ignore row or select which data this row
contains: Channel name, Unit, etc. The setting applies to all columns in the file.
The maximum file size is limited to 2 GB. Files in the UNIX format (only LF as end
of line) can also be read in.
2. SIE files
These files are produced by the CX23-R or eDAQ/eDAQ-lite during an autonomous
measurement. Select File type: Somat CX23-R/eDAQ test files (*.MEA) to display
the files. Video frames are converted into a file with the file extension video. The
file is shown in the Analysis project as a channel and you can drag it directly onto
the Video playback object. CX23 burst mode is also supported. GNSS sentences
(including time stamp) can be extracted to a separate text file.
The files must be present on the PC. Otherwise use Download (Tools group) for the
transfer of files. Here, you can also convert the files.
3. MEA files
These files are produced by the MGCplus on the storage medium connected to
CP42/52 during an autonomous measurement. Select File type: MGCplus CP
recordings (*.MEA) to display the files.
The files must be present on the PC. Otherwise use the File download (Tools
group) for the transfer of files. Here, you can also convert the files.
4. Fast Stream files
These are files generated in Fast Stream storage mode. The files cannot be directly
processed by catman; they must first be converted into the catman standard
format. The function converts all files in the current folder.
You can also load a file into the analysis project via the context menu and the con-
version then occurs on demand just for this file.

Merge (Tools group) combines the selected files of a folder to form one file. The function
is only practicable when the files contain the same channels and, for example, originate
from different measurements.

Converting Fast-Stream files via the command line (Console window)

In the catman installation folder you will find the program “FSConverter.exe”, with which
you can perform a conversion without starting catman. You call the program as follows:
FSConverter /in:<path+file name>

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 381
For <path+file name> insert the complete path and the file name. The resulting file has
the same name as the Fast-Stream file and is saved in the same folder, i.e. the original
file is overwritten.
To convert all files of a folder you use:
FSConverter /in:<path>\*.*
For <path> insert only the path name.
To suppress the output of messages in the Console window you can also use the para-
meter /silent:
FSConverter /in:<path+file name> /silent

10.1.7 File download

Direct download from a device to the PC is only possible with MGCplus with CP42
or SomatXR CX23-R. In all other cases, transfer the files to the PC first.

With Download (Tools group in the Test Explorer tab) you can
transfer files from a storage medium in or on the device to the PC,
delete files that are no longer needed from the storage medium, and
identify the remaining space on the storage medium.
Configure the device scan, if applicable using the submenu for Download, such that
the device(s) are found when you have started catman in Analysis mode and not
changed from DAQ mode to Analysis mode (click on the arrow at Download ). Other-
wise, the storage medium must be located in one of the PC slots. On starting the
function a dialog is displayed in which you can select the location.

Copy the data to your PC and/or convert the files into different formats. Use the catman
format to further process the data in catman. During transfer to the PC in catman format
the TST files required for the Test Explorer are also generated.
Terminate the Download with Exit in the Download manager group in order to restore the
Explorer window.
If, on starting catman a PC card, recording is running on one of the devices found,
then, in contrast to DAQ mode, the On-Board status button is not shown. So it is not
possible to stop recording; to do this change to DAQ mode: Exit Analysis mode and
choose Measure ► New.

catman
382 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
10.2 Searching in analysis projects
The Analysis project window allows you to search across all loaded test files. The win-
dow is displayed as a component window in the Visualization and Computations tabs.

Procedure
1. Enter the text you want to search for in the combo box.
2. Below, select the category in which you want to search, such as all channel names
(default). You cannot search in the test parameters.
3. Click on or use (Enter key).

deletes the text in the combo box and displays all tests again. Click on the arrow to
select one of the latest search entries.

Search options
You do not need wildcards to search for a part of a text or term. Simply enter the
search text; all terms in the selected category that contain the search text will be
found and displayed.
Another possibility is to use “regular expressions”. If you are not familiar with them,
please see this short introductory guide.

10.3 DataViewer (Analysis mode)

The DataViewer tab gives you a quick overview of the measurements for individual chan-
nels. In the window DataView you are shown in three sub-windows statistical data and
traceability data (Channel info), the measurements as figures (Table) and as graph (Pre-
view). Use Window (on the right above the ribbon) to display the sub-windows again if
you have closed them.

Display channels
Double-click on one of the loaded channels (DAQ channels window) or mark the desired
channel(s) and click on Add channel in the Window group.
If you do not want to display a channel in the graph, deactivate Auto preview in the Pre-
view group before adding the channel or deactivate In preview in the Channel info win-
dow.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 383
 A zoomed display in the preview is reset when you add a new channel to the
DataView.

Remove channels from the display

You have three options:
1. Double-click again on the loaded channel (DAQ channels window).
2. Mark the loaded channel(s) in this window and click on Remove channel in the
Window group.
3. Use the Remove channel context menu in the Table or Channel info window.

y(x) representation in the preview

A y(x) representation is also possible in the preview: Drag the required x channel onto the
x axis legend in the graph. Note though that with y(x) graphs no min/max compression is
carried out. So increase the number of points to display as necessary: Configure context
menu or Configure in the Preview group, General tab, Data compression from.
See also Representation of plots in y(x) graphs.
Drag a time channel or the channel Time from sample rate onto the x axis to delete the x
channel. You can delete the available x channels using x channels in the Axes group.

Displaying a large number of measurements

If a channel contains more than 5,000,000 measurements, you are asked whether the
computation of the statistics data should also take place, because this may take several
seconds. You can save the setting for the next start of catman.

Displaying many channels/multiple DataView windows

You create further DataView windows with New DataView window in the Window group.
Switch between the individual windows with the tabs displayed at the bottom of the
DataView window. The names of the individual windows (DataView 1, DataView 2, …) can-
not be changed. A maximum of 12 DataViews is possible.

Find measured values

Click Go to (Table group) to find specific measured values or value changes. You can
then choose in the dialog whether you want to
display a specific row,
find a value greater than or less than a specific value,

catman
384 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
 find two consecutive values with a difference between them greater than or less
than a specified value,
two identical consecutive values,
a measured value identical to zero or to the overflow (OVFL) value.
See also DAQ channel options: Display overflow values as.
The search starts on the current selected row. Choose Find next or press F3 to search for
the next occurrence.

Editing measurements
If editing stored measurement data is enabled in the options (Program options: Program
functions (System group), you can enable or disable edit mode by clicking on Edit
(Table group).
See also Program function options.

Section
The section function in the Zoom and cursor group has the same options as in Analysis
mode; see also Section functions (Analysis mode).

10.4 Display data in Analysis mode

See also Objects for display of all recorded samples, Visualization (general), Ana-
lysis functions in graphs.

Panels and Print pages are used for the graphical visualization of your measurements.
You can create up to 128 Panels and Print pages. A tabular display can also be obtained
via the DataViewer tab. The objects are basically the same as those available in DAQ
mode, but without the real-time graphics. In addition, some special objects are available,
e.g. the 3D diagram, table objects for traceability data or test parameters (metadata), and
the synchronous objects.
You can also call the computations from this tab (requires the EasyMath module); see
Computations in Analysis mode. Using the Report function (also contained in the mod-
ule), you can copy graphs and some other visualization objects into a Word template; see
Create report.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 385
Possible graphical objects

Window Display of all recorded samples

Post-process graph

Cursor graph

Polar graph

Angle synchron. graph

Contour graph

Histogram

3D chart

3D diagram (alternative to 3D chart)

Frequency spectrum

Spectrogram

Map

Flexible table

Data table

Statistics table

catman
386 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
 Traceability table

Meta data table

See Objects for the display of all recorded samples.

Window Synchronized display of channels

Map

Video playback

Digital indicator

Simple table

Analog meter

Bar indicator

Frequency spectrum

See Objects for the synchronized display.

Layout window

Text

Background image

Frame

See Layout objects.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 387
Developer tools window

Button

If AutoSequences or EasyScript is activated, you can use further objects in this group; see
Controller, Developer tools (objects for predefined actions, clone actions, AutoSequences
and EasyScript).

Procedure
1. Create the required display objects by clicking the icons in the Visualization objects
group on the Visualization tab. To do this, where applicable, open the group by click-
ing on the arrow at the right margin. Once they have been created, you can move the
objects, change them in size and configure them.
2. Drag the required channel from the list in the Analysis project window into a graph
object. If the Analysis project window is not visible, display it via the Window menu
(on the right above the ribbon).
You can also assign a number of channels: or and mark the channels,
then drag them into a graphical object.
Alternatively, you can drag one or more channels to an empty location on a Panel. In con-
trast to DAQ mode, however, a post-process graph is always generated here; no selection
is possible.
You can move single plots in a post-process graph in the x and y directions: Shift
plot tab in dialog Configure: Plot (click on the plot legend).

10.5 Computations in Analysis mode (EasyMath)

The EasyMath module (catmanAP or license required) enables you to carry out the fol-
lowing in Analysis mode:
Calculate using all measured values of one channel with the measured values of
other channels or with other computations.
apply functions such as integration, derivation, sine, cosine etc. to channels.
Check conditions (measured value greater than ... ?).
Determine the frequency spectrum of a channel.
Filter measurements: Running average, Savitzky-Golay smoothing, as well as low,
high and band-pass filters and band-rejection filter with Butterworth characteristic
or low-pass filters with Bessel characteristic are available to you.

catman
388 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
 Compute an A-weighted sound pressure level in dB (dBA).
Convert measurements from strain gage rosettes to stresses, angles, etc.
Cut out curve sections.
Offset plots (e.g. by a certain time interval)
Type in new data or modify existing data
Remove errors (data cleansing, interference pulses) from the data.
Convert measurement data to other sample rates.
Convert data so that, e.g. force-displacement plots or torque-angle plots from dif-
ferent tests can be compared mathematically. Thus you can determine the devi-
ation of a plot from the optimum plot shape or the difference between two plots.
Determine peak values in a certain time interval or referred to an angular range.
Carry out a computation with EasyScript functions (requires the EasyScript optional
module).
Compute a three-dimensional characteristic field (matrix), i.e. display the values of
one measurement series in relation to two others.
Decode the individual signals of a CAN raw channel using a Vector CANdb.

Here, you can define calculations of computations or complex formulas, such as they are
entered into a pocket calculator, which are then evaluated for each measured value.
Activate the EasyMath module using Program functions (Program options, System
group).

10.5.1 Create/change computations in Analysis mode

Click on Computations to display the tab with the computations or on New computation
on the Visualization tab to open the computations dialog. Once created, computations
are displayed in the Computations group among all the loaded measurement data in the
Analysis project Panel. The test index will be displayed in square brackets after each com-
putation consisting of values from only one test. For the actual tests the index is posi-
tioned before the test and file names.

Each computation requires a unique name before it can be created. Don't forget as
the final step to click on Create computation in the Edit group or click at the bottom
right in the dialog box to make sure the computation is in fact created.

Assign channels
You have three options for assigning channels for most computations:

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 389
 with drag & drop,
by double-clicking on a channel (where there is more than one input channel either
only the first field is populated or the following channels are also used);
by clicking on (the selected channel is inserted).

With most functions you can also define the computation in one step for several chan-
nels, if you separate the channels with a ; (semicolon) or or , when selecting the
channels to be computed. In this case “computation_type_channel_name[index]” is used
as the name of the computation, but you can also edit names retrospectively (Modify
computation.

Modify computation
To change a computation, go to the Computations tab, select the computation and
choose Modify computation from the Edit group. Make your changes and then click on
Apply changes.
To change the parameters for multiple computations of the same type sim-
ultaneously, select all the relevant channels (by or ).

10.5.2 Algebra (formulas)

You always have to enter rational numbers (numbers with commas) in the Edit
expression field with a decimal point, not with a comma. The comma is used as a
separator for the parameters in some formulas and must therefore not be used for
numbers.

Drag the required channels into the Edit expression field or place the cursor where you
want in the Edit expression field and double-click on a channel. The channel is always
inserted at the cursor position and will replace marked text. Dragging and dropping
ensures that the channel name contains no typographical errors.
If the data originate from a file, the test index is suffixed to the channel name in square
brackets in the formula editor. The test index is a consecutive number which increases
with each loaded test, otherwise it would not be possible to differentiate between chan-
nels with the same name.
Enter your formula as on a pocket calculator, e.g. (MGCplus_1_CH1 + MGCplus_1_CH2)/2.
All measured values of the channels MGCplus_1_CH1 and MGCplus_1_CH2 are added
together and the sum is divided by 2. The result is written to a new channel, the com-
putation channel.

catman
390 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
You can insert further functions via the Additional functions dropdown box at the bottom
of the window; see Mathematical functions and Mathematical operators.
Don't forget to give the new channel a name. Entering a unit is optional.

Formula collections
Add frequently used formulas to a formula collection so as not to have to keep entering
them repeatedly. You can create multiple formula collections.
creates a new formula collection. The file path and name are displayed below the for-
mula collection's input field.
adds the formulas from the currently loaded formula collection currently displayed in
the editor. Enter a name for the formulas so as to be able to retrieve them quickly from
the formula list in the collection. The description is optional, and is displayed as a tooltip
when you move the cursor over a selected formula.
opens an existing formula collection. The file path and name of the currently loaded
formula collection are displayed below the formula collection's input field. The supplied
formula collection OpticalFormulas in the Templates folder of the catman working direc-
tory contains formulas to convert the wavelength of optical strain gages into strain or
temperature.
See also Folder options, Working directory.

Predefined formulas
This area contains a number of frequently used computations:
Derivation of a channel,
Computation of minimums or maximums across multiple channels,
to add linearizations,
to remove a DC component,
to remove a zero offset that was present at the start of the measurement.
The computations are made faster, meaning they need less processing power than an
identical computation that you enter via the formula editor.

10.5.3 Frequency analysis

The frequency analysis calculates a spectrum (amplitude, phase or power spectrum)
using FFT. The computation will possibly be carried out several times over a part of the
measuring value, depending on the Frequency resolution set. The advantage of this

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 391
method is that the measurements which are available are also then analyzed as far as
possible if a quantity of 2n measurements is not present. Either specify From FFT number
of points for the Frequency resolution and the number of values (points) to be used under
FFT or define the desired Frequency resolution.
When you specify a Frequency resolution, then depending on the number of measure-
ments available and the sample rate used, either all the measurements are used for a
computation or a number of spectra can also be computed here, each using a portion of
the measurements. In this case the mean is formed over all the computed spectra unless
you activate the option Create Joint-Time-Frequency spectrum.
Activate Create frequency data set to have the frequency channel also available for
export. The channel is not needed for the display in a post-process graph.

Overlap
During the computation of several FFTs and with a setting of Overlap 0%, the individual
FFTs are always obtained using new measurements. With an FFT over 512 values this
means the first FFT uses the values 1 to 512, the second the values 513 to 1024, etc. This
often leads to significant differences between the individual FFTs producing distortion in
the result. Consequently, “overlapping” of the individual FFTs is normally applied, for
example, with an overlap of 50% the values 1 to 512 are used for the first FFT, whereas
the values 257 to 768 are used for the second FFT, etc.

Example of the specification of the desired frequency resolution

Measurement with 1200 Hz sample rate for 60 seconds (72,000 measured values), fre-
quency resolution 2 Hz, overlap 0%.
With 1200 Hz sample rate and 2 Hz resolution, 300 values are required for the result, the
nearest 2n value is 512. This means that the spectra are calculated using 1,024 values,
i.e. a total of 70 spectra. Finally, the mean is determined and the result is saved for the
display. In this case, the last 320 measuring values will not be considered. With a normal
FFT a maximum of 65,536 values would have been used for the computation. The fre-
quency resolution would then have been higher, but 6,464 values would not have been
considered.

Joint Time Frequency spectrum

With this type of computation no averaging occurs as otherwise, but rather all spectra are
saved individually. You therefore need a graph, which can reproduce the three-dimen-
sional data, e.g. the contour plot. Drag the results channel to an empty part of a Panel;
catman then automatically selects the suitable type of graph.

catman
392 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
 From catman 4.0 you have the spectrogram available which carries the com-
putation and display. You therefore do not need to create this computation in order
to view the result in catman.

10.5.4 Filter
In this window you have various filter functions available:
running average,
Savitzky-Golay smoothing,
mean value over time window with a subsequent Butterworth low-pass filter,
RMS value over time window with asubsequent Butterworth low-pass filter,
low-pass and high-pass filters, band-pass and band-rejection filters with the But-
terworth, Chebyshev and elliptic characteristics,
low-pass filter with Bessel characteristic,
sound pressure filter which computes an A-weighted sound pressure level in dB
(dBA),
filter for crash analysis: CFC 60/180/600/1000,
human vibration filters with various weighting functions to EN ISO 8041 such as Wd
weighting for horizontal whole-body vibrations in the x or y direction. See also ISO
2631.

The filters enable you to specify a cutoff frequency. However, it depends on the
sample rate whether this frequency can actually be used. With a sample rate of, e.g.
300 Hz, frequencies over 150 Hz cannot be acquired at all and even a filter of
100 Hz is relatively impracticable. For catman a filter is therefore invalid and is not
computed when either the sample rate/cutoff frequency < 5 or the sample
rate/cutoff frequency > 10,000. The filter cutoff frequency to be specified relates to
the -3 dB cutoff frequency (with HBM devices cutoff frequencies are often -1 dB val-
ues; exceptions are PMX and the filters for the decimal sample-rate domain of the
QuantumX/SomatXR).

Procedure
1. Select the computation for the Filter type.
2. Drag the required channel into the Source channel field, for example by drag & drop.
3. Running average, Savitzky-Golay smoothing, RMS over time window, Mean value
over time window or Sound pressure evaluation (dBA)
Specify over how many values (Number of data points in window) or which Time

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 393
 window is to be used for the computation. The more points or the longer the time
you specify here, the more the measurements are “smoothed”, i.e. the individual ori-
ginal values (brief peaks) have a weaker effect. With periodic signals you should use
at least two to five periods as the time span for the RMS value.
With computations over a time window low-pass filtering takes place after the actual
computation. Specify the desired Cutoff frequency.
Low pass, high pass, band pass and band-stop
Specify the filter type and the desired Cutoff frequency or, with band-pass and band-
stop filters, the Upper and Lower cutoff frequencies.
All filters are 8th order. It is no longer possible to select a different order since cat-
man 5.0.
For the Chebyshev filters specify the permissible ripple in the pass range. For the
elliptical filters also specify the minimum attenuation in the suppression range
(40 dB corresponds to a suppression rate of 1:100, i.e. 1%).

Eliminating phase delay

With the filter functions phase delays (propagation times) occur, i.e. the output signal
appears delayed with respect to the input signal. You can prevent this “shift in the time
domain” for most computations by activating the Phase correction option. Since with this
option the computation is applied twice, the order of the filter is also doubled and the
cutoff frequency is lower than that specified (6 dB is achieved at the specified frequency).
Use the Curve operations computation as an alternative or to compensate for the
phase shifts due to filter propagation times with data that has already been mea-
sured.

10.5.5 Strain gage stress analysis (strain gage rosettes)

See also Strain gage computations.

When Auto-complete is active, you only need to drag or double click the channel with grid
a into the field a for the Strain channels. The following channels will then be entered auto-
matically as channels for measuring grids b and c.
Select the required computations by clicking them in the section Create computation
channels for.
In the Material properties area, you can also enter the unit of the Young’s modulus next to
the value. The unit will be used for the computed stresses as well.

catman
394 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
This computation generally results in a number of results channels which are displayed
under the computations in the Analysis project window in a node with the Name of the
rosette computation. The single computations of the node cannot be deleted separately.
You can only delete the main node.

10.5.6 Plot operations (Curve section, Shift plot)

Create curve section

The function cuts out the specified section of a channel.
You can create sub-channels directly in a post-process graph. Choose Create curve
sections from the graph context menu, to obtain the current zoom section of the x
axis as the limit for the curve sections. In this case the original name(s) are appen-
ded.
Alternatively, you can also use the section functions or the cursor functions.

Maxima and Minima from peak value channel separate the Min/Max value pairs in a chan-
nel so that only the minimums or maximums are present. Channels with min/max value
pairs occur when using the Peak values per time interval storage mode, see also Peak val-
ues per time interval.

Shift plot
The Shift plot function shifts all values of a channel in the positive or negative direction
depending on the arithmetic sign of the Shift. After the computation the computed chan-
nels contain precisely as many values as the original channels, i.e. at one end values are
lost and at the other end new values are gained. The specified time or frequency interval
is rounded if necessary, because only existing values are moved. Interpolation does not
occur.
As “replacement values” you can either use a fixed value (User specified value) or the
Graph null value; see Program options: Panels. In the Post-process graph this value is
then not displayed. However, you see a line up to the first or from the last measurement
to the zero line or to the lower or upper limit of the display area, so that the correction
remains visible. One advantage of this option is that when using autoscaling, the graph is
not rescaled.
The function enables you, for example, to compensate for the different time delay
(propagation time) of various filter Cutoff frequencies or filter characteristics.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 395
10.5.7 Data series
Use this function to create a new channel and fill it with data. You can:
1. Enter values manually
Enter a number into the first line and press . The next line is then inserted auto-
matically.
2. Copy data from a channel and modify specific values
Mark a channel in the list of loaded tests on the left-hand side and click on From
DAQ channel. Then modify the data in the table as required.
3. Insert values from the Windows clipboard
Specify how many lines are to be accepted as a maximum (Max. lines) and click on
Insert.
4. Specify a formula which is to be used to calculate values
Enter the formula to be used in frame f(x). Then specify the start value, the Dx incre-
ment and the number of values to create.
Formula example: 25+7*x+3*x^2-5.27*x^4
The values in the table may be changed after creating them.

Give the data series a name, specify a Unit as necessary, and the time interval (dt)
between two values (1/sample rate), and click Create computation (Edit group) to create
it.
Create two data series if you want to obtain a table of x and y values. Then assign
the two data series to a graph like normal channels; see also Channels as x data
sources.

Usually only references to test files and computation rules are stored in an Analysis pro-
ject (menu File ► Save), no values. As data series typed in manually do not contain any
definitions, catman can also store this data in the project file: Save data with project.
However, you should save only data which you need for further analysis, for example data
for a tolerance band, because otherwise the project files may become very large.

10.5.8 Data cleansing

There are two basic methods of detecting undesired data:
1. The value is below or above a certain level.
2. The difference to the previous value exceeds a certain value (threshold).

catman
396 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
For Difference to previous value too large specify with Difference larger than the ampli-
tude difference that must be present in order to flag a value. Threshold. When an ampli-
tude change in the signal for consecutive values occurs which is larger, the relevant value
is replaced if the number of values specified under Max. number of consecutive values …
is not exceeded. In this case it is assumed that this is not a single interference pulse but
a “real” signal or a massive malfunction that should not be masked out.
As “replacement value” you can either use the last value before the malfunction (Last
valid value) any value you choose (Different values) or the Graph null value; see Program
options: Panels. This value is then not displayed in the post-process graph. However, you
will see a gap in the measured values so that the correction remains visible. One advant-
age of this option is that when autoscaling is used, the actual signal can still be recog-
nized and does not become unrecognizable due to a single large perturbation amplitude
which would re-scale the graph.
The computed channels contain just as many values after the computation as the
original channels.

10.5.9 Interpolation
There are two main applications for this function:
1. Measuring data should be converted to another sample rate (higher or lower)
Example: A channel should be displayed over another channel that was measured
using a considerably higher sample rate. The channel with the higher sample rate
must be converted to the lower sample rate.
2. The data from two data series should be compared to each other or to reference val-
ues.
Example: Several force-displacement plots are to be compared. As both the forces
and the displacements were measured over the time, the displacement values mea-
sured (x values) are never exactly the same and cannot be compared. Therefore
the force values must first be recalculated to specific displacement values, i.e. a
new x channel with equidistant values (reference points) must be used, in order to
compare the forces that are applied on specific displacements.
The measuring plots must be unique, i.e. there must not be two y values for one
x value (hysteresis plots). Such plots exist, e.g. with force-displacement plots
when returning to the starting position. Calculate relevant curve sections as
necessary beforehand. Strong noise levels are also unfavorable for the com-
putation; here you should first use a filter.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 397
Procedure
1. Specify the required destination of the computation (use New sample rate or x chan-
nel).
2. Drag the channel to be computed into the y channel field or double click on the chan-
nel.
3. With Use x channel drag the relevant channel into the x channel field.
4. Then complete the remaining fields in accordance with the computation.

Available interpolation methods

1. Linear interpolation (straight line)
2. Polynomial (3rd grade, i.e. 4 reference points are used)
3. Rational function
4. Cubic spline

If one of the interpolation methods is not possible, for example because not enough sym-
metrical adjacent points exist around the new x reference point in the original data record,
then a linear interpolation will be automatically carried out or, if the x reference point lies
outside of the original data record, an extrapolation is carried out.
The x channel with the reference points is computed automatically if you select Use
x channel.

10.5.10 Peak values

See also Storage mode Peak values per time interval.

Specify whether you want to compute the Minimum or Maximum in the interval, and how
the interval is defined. You have two options:
1. Time interval
The minimum or maximum value is computed in the selected interval. The number
of measurements in the time interval is however the same except if you specify a
new Sample rate for result channel in Hz. For example, with a time interval of ten
seconds, use a (new) sample rate of 0.1 Hz to obtain only one extreme value per
time interval.
2. Angular sector
Specify the sector (angular range) in which the respective extreme values are to be
computed and drag the channel with the angular measurements into the Angle

catman
398 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
 channel field. The number of measurements is the same, however, except if you
specify a new Sample rate for result channel in Hz.

The Use interpolation option helps you to obtain better values for the extreme values.
Since an interpolation occurs here over a number of measurements (cubic spline), in
some cases the actual peak values in the measurement signal are better determined, in
particular if the number of samples is not very high in relation to the signal frequency.

Example
Whereas the peaks of the first and second maximum have been reliably acquired, the
measurement points for the third maximum are unfavorable: Here a value that is too low
has been acquired (1). The interpolation leads to an improved value (2), because the trace
of the plot is considered.

10.5.11 Class counting

You should be familiar with the basic principles of classification to be able to use
these functions practically. Otherwise, obtain the information from the appropriate
literature.

In Counting method specify which class counting method is to be used. Then, depending
on the method, specify the appropriate parameters in the Configure class counting win-
dow.

Rainflow (FromTo, RangeMean)

This class counting method is used, for example, in the determination of material fatigue.
Here, material stresses or strain traces are monitored and analyzed. Expressed simply,

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 399
the method counts the frequency of occurrence of certain amplitude values. To achieve
this, the amplitude range of the output signal is subdivided into sections, the so-called
classes.

Time-at-level, span pairs

The time-at-level class counting method determines how long a signal is located in a cer-
tain amplitude range. Here too, the amplitude range of the output signal is subdivided
into sections, the so-called classes. With span pairs the frequency of occurrence of cer-
tain amplitudes is analyzed. Both computations are normally displayed in a histogram.

2-dim dwell time

This class counting method also involves determining how long a signal is located in a
certain amplitude range. However, an analysis also takes place of in which amplitude
range a second channel is located—the reference channel. An example of this is the mon-
itoring of a speed channel in relationship to the rotational speed which shows the use of
the gearshift during a test run.

Have catman determine the class limits. Option: Determine limits from Min/Max of DAQ
channel.

Displaying results
Drag the results channel to an empty part of a Panel; catman then automatically selects
the suitable type of graph (histogram or 3D chart).
Alternatively, you can also display the data in the table object.
The display of class counting data in the DataViewer is currently not possible.

10.5.12 Script
The computation function requires the optional EasyScript module.

Here, you can create an EasyScript which executes a computation. The resulting com-
putation channel cannot be used in a graph or as an argument in another computation.
But you can output results in the Panel objects using script commands, as usual with
EasyScript. If a new channel is to be used, you must create it with the instruction EA_
Test.CreateChannel.
The functioning principle is similar to that of a button with free code (direct entry of a
script).

catman
400 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
The computation function (the script) is executed when you click Refresh selected com-
putation or Refresh all (Edit group on the Computations tab).

10.5.13 Matrix
The computation enables you to display the distribution of the measurements of a chan-
nel in dependence of two other channels. This means, for example, that you can display
how the fuel consumption of an engine depends on the rotational speed and vehicle
speed. In this case you could use the rotational speed and the vehicle speed for the x and
y channels and the fuel consumption in the z channel. Then, drag the result of the com-
putation onto a free position in a Panel or Print page.

Grid: The setting determines the number of sections for dividing up the x and y axes. For
a setting of 50 x 50 the measurements on the x axis are divided up into 50 sections
between the minimum and maximum values. The same applies to the measurements on
the y axis. Then for each section the value with the largest magnitude on the z channel is
found which occurred during the measurement. The value is saved with its arithmetic
sign.
The higher the setting on the grid, the finer the display resolution becomes. However, the
computation time and the time required for the display increase.

Example
A field (section) contains the following z values: -10, +3, +7, -5. -10 is saved in the z chan-
nel, because Max (|value|) = 10 and the arithmetic sign of the value is negative.

10.5.14 CAN decoders

The computation extracts the individual signals from a CAN raw channel using a Vector-
CANdb.
When you specify a CANdb in Vector format, all signals contained in this file are displayed
in the field below. You can either choose Decode all signals or press (SHIFT) and
to select the signals.

If you activate the Create time channels from the time stamps of the messages option,
the times at which the respective signals arrived at the measuring device are determined
and written to a separate channel. Otherwise, catman computes an average value from
the time differences at which the signals arrived. This means, for example, that only the
averaged time is jumped to when synchronizing with a graph cursor in the CAN raw table.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 401
Likewise when comparing CAN signals with other signals in a graph, the time allocation is
only correct in this case if the signals were acquired with a constant cycle time.
Use the computed time channel as the x axis for the CAN signal; see Channels as x
data sources.

10.6 Export data (convert formats)

When exporting, you can export all or individual channels of one or more loaded tests or
computations to a file. All formats available in catman in DAQ mode can also be selected
here; in addition the HBM Playback and audio (WAV) formats are available. If all the chan-
nels to be exported are from the same measurement file, then with some formats the
associated test parameters are also saved (from the test file *.TST).

Procedure
1. Click on the Export tab.
2. Drag the required channels from the Analysis project window (left) into the list of
channels to be exported (top right field).
3. If you want to export channels with the same names from different tests, you should
enter a new description in the Alias names column. This will then be used instead of
the original channel name, so that the channel will later have a unique identification
in the file.
Change the sequence of the channels to be exported with Up ( ) and Down (
) in the Configure list group.
4. Enter—if required and supported in export format—a file comment.
5. Define the file format and with some formats also the resolution (Export group).
6. Open the Windows file dialog by clicking on Export to enter the folder and file name
for the export.

The list of channels to be exported can be saved via Save export listand loaded
via Load export list (Configure group) to or from a file in order to be able to
export the same channel configurations of other tests as well.

CAN-Raw
Data of a CAN Raw channel can be exported together with other channels only in the
HBM catman standard format. Use the list of channels in the Analysis project window
and the Export data context menu of the CAN-Raw channel (only one channel is exported)

catman
402 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
for other formats. In ASCII format, the result is a file in which the data is formatted in
columns as in the CAN-Raw table object. The export formats Vector CANalyzer Log,
PCAN Trace and Vector BLF (Binary Logging Format) are additionally available.

The file formats

HBM catman standard format

Files in this format can only be imported again by catman itself. They contain all the
information which catman has available: measured values, traceability data and measure-
ment and test parameters. You should therefore first save data in this format and only
export in other formats as required.

HBM nCode s3t

Files in this format can be directly processed by the software GlyphWorks and nCode
DesignLife.
GlyphWorks is a software program for the analysis of test data; it processes a large
amount of data and offers a graphical, process-orientated user interface. You can create
a workflow for the analysis using drag & drop of analysis modules.
nCode DesignLife is a program for lifetime analysis. nCode DesignLife uses FEM results
and operational strength tests for the lifetime assessment.
Further information on HBM's nCode software can be found at

https://www.hbmprenscia.com/.

HBM Playback (only available in Analysis mode)

Generates one file per channel in a format which can be read in and “played back” by cat-
man in DAQ mode.
See Signal generator/playback file.

ASCII/ASCII with channel info

Files exported in this format can be read in again by many programs. A file in the format
ASCII with channel info also includes the traceability data and can be read in again by cat-
man almost free of loss; only the measurement resolution is restricted to the number of
places present in the ASCII file.

MS Excel 97-2003
Excel must be installed for the export.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 403
Exports the measurements to an Excel workbook. In addition a second file of the same
name and with the TSX file name extension is created in which the test parameters are
saved.

In this format up to 65,000 measurements can be saved, because this is the max-
imum number of rows on a sheet in the MS Excel 97-2003 format. If there are more
measurements, they are not exported.

MS Excel Office 2007 XML/Binary

Excel 2007 or higher must be installed for the export.

Exports the measurements to an Excel workbook. In addition a second file of the same
name and with the TSX file name extension is created in which the test parameters are
saved.
The default setting for the file format in Excel should be MS Excel Office XML or MS Excel
Office Binary (not MS Excel 97-2003).

In this format up to 1,000,000 measurements can be saved, because this is the max-
imum number of rows on a sheet in the MS Excel Office 2007 format. If there are
more measurements, they are not exported.

NI TDMS
Files (*.TDMS or *.TDM) exported in this format can be directly read in by the data ana-
lysis software, DIAdem® from National Instruments Engineering GmbH & Co KG. Files gen-
erated in this format by catman can also be read again by catman. As all the data in
catman is also stored in this format, the format is equivalent to the HBM catman stand-
ard format.
Files in this format which were generated by other programs can normally also be read by
catman; only channels in text (string) format cannot be read, and are skipped.
®
Further information on DIAdem can be found at www.ni.com.

NI DIAdem
Files (*.DAT) exported in this format can be directly read in by the data analysis software,
DIAdem® from National Instruments Engineering GmbH & Co KG. As all the data in cat-
man is also stored in this format, the format is equivalent to the HBM catman standard
format.

catman
404 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
A header file and a data file are produced when exporting data in this format. Also, the
header file can be directly interpreted by DIAdem® and the data file is in the format
REAL64.
®
Further information on DIAdem can be found at www.ni.com.

MATLAB (5.0)
Files in this format can be directly processed by the data analysis software MATLAB®
(from version 5.0) from the company The MathWorks Inc.
®
Further information on MATLAB can be found at www.mathworks.com.

Vector MDF 3
MDF (Measurement Data Format) is a binary file format which was developed in 1991 by
Vector Informatik GmbH in cooperation with Robert Bosch GmbH. The format is now
primarily used in the automotive sector. See also MDF 4.
Further information on Vector Informatik GmbH can be found at

www.vector.com.

ASAM MDF 4.1

MDF (Measurement Data Format) is a further development of the MDF 3 format and in
this version is an ASAM standard (Association for Standardization of Automation and
Measuring Systems). With this development there is no 2 GB restriction as with MBF 3
(theoretically 264 bytes, i.e. 1010 Tbyte per file can now be written). In addition the format
has far-reaching possibilities of saving metadata (test parameters). Also special func-
tions such as data compression or Quick Preview (data reduction for preview channels)
are supported by catman.

Further information on ASAM can be found at www.asam.net and

wiki.asam.net/display/STANDARDS/ASAM+MDF.

See also Vector MDF Validator ( vector.com/vi_mdf_tools_en), catman Knowledge

Base (via Help ► Knowledge Base at the top right of the program interface).

RPC III (MTS)

Files in this format can be directly processed by the data analysis software RPC® III from
MTS® Systems Corporation. As the format does not permit custom channel lengths, so-

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 405
called groups of 2048 values are always stored. If the channels to be exported do not
have values with a multiple of this size, the missing values are filled in with zeros. You
should therefore preferably acquire or export a multiple of 2048 measurements. Since
integer values with 16 bits always have to be saved in this format, catman uses the min-
imum and the maximum of each channel and correspondingly scales all values of this
channel.
Further information on MTS® Systems Corporation can be found at

www.mts.com.

UFF58 (Universal File Format 58)

The Universal File Format was originally developed in the 1970s by Structural Dynamics
Research Corporation (SDRC) to standardize data transfer between CAD data (Computer
Aided Design) and measured data. It is often used, for example, in modal analysis.
The UFF58 format can be saved as a binary or ASCII file. catman for safety uses the ASCII
format, because it is always supported.

Audio (.WAV, only available in Analysis mode)

Produces one file per channel in the WAVE format (PCM coded with 16 bits). Before sav-
ing, minimum and maximum measurements are determined and scaled to the available
value range (normalized). The files can, for example, be played back by Windows Media
Player.

nSoft DAC
Exports the data for the evaluation and analysis package nSoft® from HBM nCode in the
time series format (*.DAC). Here, an equidistant measurement series is written to a file,
i.e. each channel produces one file. The file name is composed of the name you specify,
the channel name appended with an underscore and the file name extension DAC.
Further information on HBM nSoft® can be found at

https://www.hbmprenscia.com/.

10.7 Create report

The EasyMath module (catmanAP or license required) helps you to create a report in
Microsoft Word in Analysis mode containing some or all of the graphs and other visu-
alization objects of your Panels. The function is displayed on the Visualization tab.

catman
406 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
 The function is available for all versions from Word 2003 onwards if MS Word is
installed on the PC. The chosen format (doc, docx, pdf) must however be supported
by the installed version of Word.

The visualization objects must be fully visible on the screen area available so that
they are transferred completely to Word. For parts which are not visible on the
screen, e.g. because the screen used for the configuration was larger than the cur-
rent one, only the contents up to the edge of the screen are copied.
The visualization objects must not be wholly nor partially covered by other objects,
nor should they overlap.

Procedure
1. In catman create the visualization objects which are to be used in the report.
You can use all objects except multi-bar graphs and LED.
2. For the objects on the Office tab define the bookmarks (names) which you will later
use in Word.
3. Create the Word template which is to be used for the report. Insert bookmarks at the
places where pictures or text from catman is to appear; see Create a bookmark in
Word.
4. Configure the report generation. If you have not yet configured anything, you can

click on . Otherwise click on the symbol at the lower right in the corner of the
group ( ).
5. Specify the path and the file name for the template created in Step 3.
6. Define the file name and the file format for the finished report. If you do not specify a
path, the same folder is used as for the template. You can use Placeholders both in
the path and in the file name.
7. Decide whether the report is to be printed automatically after generation (standard
printer at the start of catman) or whether the report is to be opened. In this case you
can check everything again, e.g. whether all pictures (graphs) are present in the cor-
rect size.
8. Close the dialog with OK.

9. Click on to generate the report.

If one or more Word documents is already open, the graphical objects are copied
directly into the active document provided the bookmarks exist. Otherwise, i.e. with
no document open, the specified document template is used.

catman
10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA 407
 If you start the report generation a number of times with a document opened, then
the visualization objects are also copied many times. Therefore, delete the objects
before trying again.

Create the template and do not close it. In the configuration dialog of catman leave
the field Open document template from blank and open the report after generation.
If you then generate the report, you can view the results and correct the report as
necessary, such as altering the size of graphs.

Size of the objects in MS Word, scaling

The size or scaling of the visualization objects depends on where you have positioned
your bookmark.
1. Bookmark at the beginning of a paragraph
The object is used with the same size as in catman; no scaling occurs.
2. Bookmark in a text field
If the area available is smaller than the object size in catman, the object is scaled.
Here, the aspect ratio is retained. Otherwise no scaling occurs.
If you delete a visualization object from a text field, make sure that the book-
mark is not deleted too.
3. Bookmark in a table cell
In the default setting of tables in Word the object with the same size as in catman
is used in the cell; no scaling of the object occurs and only the cell is enlarged (by
Word) if required. However, you can specify in Word that the cell should have a
fixed size. Then the object is scaled if the area available is smaller than the object
size in catman. Here, the aspect ratio of the object is retained.

Creating a bookmark in Word

1. Click on the point at which you would like to insert a bookmark.
2. Select Bookmark in the Insert tab (Hyperlinks group).
3. Under Bookmark name, select or enter a name.
Names of bookmarks must begin with a letter and can contain numbers, but no
space characters. You can however use underscore to separate words, e.g. First_
picture.
4. Click on Add.

catman
408 10 ANALYSIS MODE: DISPLAY/ANALYZE DATA
11 EASYSCRIPT

See also Licensing and registration, EasyScript options.

EasyScript is the programming language with which you can monitor and control catman.
With EasyScript you can: Extend
1. catman with your own functionalities.
Execute your own functions at certain times, e.g. before starting a DAQ job, or ana-
lyze measurement data and transfer the computed values to Excel.
See also Configure automatic execution at certain times.
2. Create complete programs.
Define the sequence of measurements or e.g. the analysis of the data. The start of
such a program can occur, for example, by a button or when starting catman.

Activate the EasyScript module using Program functions (Program options, System
group). The script must be started so that the script actions can be executed. The
start can also take place when loading a project, see EasyScript options.

A stored measurement (DAQ) or analysis project also contains the files for EasyScript
(file extensions ESP, BAS and CLS, if existing). When the project is loaded, these files are
unpacked into a subfolder as a backup. As the folder name, _Temp is suffixed to the
name of the project. The script is still searched for in the original folder when starting,
however; the files are only a backup.

Further information
Further information and the reference for the script language can be found in the Help on
EasyScript (in the script editor). The help is only available in English.
In the “Examples\EasyScript” subfolder of the catman installation folder you will
find various examples for EasyScript programming.
Further application examples can be found in the “Tech Notes” subfolder.

catman
11 EASYSCRIPT 409
 catman
410 11 EASYSCRIPT
12 CATM AN W EB SERVER

This section describes the catman web server, and how to create web pages using HTML
and EasyScript.
Take a look at the precompiled pages and scripts in the "WebServer\Root\" and
"WebServer\Root\SCRIPT" subfolders in the catman installation directory to see
how dynamic page content can be created.

General
The catman web server is designed to deliver static pages, meaning it does not provide a
highly dynamic live data display like the web server in PMX for example. The content of
the page returned by the server can be manipulated using EasyScript however. This
allows you to create dynamic pages. All you have to do is insert the line CATSCRIPT:-
:=MyScript.bas; into your HTML page. The returned page content, such as display of
the current measured values of all channels, changes depending on what the script does.
Independently of catman, you can of course insert any other code supported by the
browser, such as Javascript.

Starting the web server

The catman web server is located in DLL catWebServer in the catman installation direc-
tory. The web server is not started by default.
1. Open the "ADD_INS.CAT" file from the catman working directory in a text editor.
See also catman working directory.
2. Insert the following line (write on one line):
NAME=catmanAP WebServer-
,CLASS=catWebServer.catWeb,DESCRIPTION=Basic WebServer for cat-
man,AUTORUN=1,PROJECT=1

The flag AUTORUN=1 means the server starts along with catman. If you set the flag to 0,
you can start the server in catman via File ► Special functions ► Add-In Manager.
Do not delete any pre-existing lines in the file!

Web server folders

By default, the web server expects the folder "WebServer\Root" in the catman working
directory. You can change this folder by an entry in the registry. To do this, create the key
WEBSERVERROOT (string) in the following branch:

catman
12 CATMAN WEB SERVER 411
 HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\VB and VBA Program Set-
tings\catmanEasy\Defaults
Then specify the path in this key.

Changes to the Registry using the regedit.exe program should only be made by
experienced users, and after backing up the existing Registry, because under some
circumstances serious Windows errors might result. If necessary, ask your admin-
istrator to make the change.

Place the files needed for the web server in the root directory "WebServer\Root" and its
subfolders. Depending on the file type, you must create the following subfolders:
HTML files (*.htm, *.html) with no path prefix are searched for in the root directory
("\WebServer\Root").
HTML files (*.htm, *.html) with a path prefix (e.g. "\MyPagesIndex.htm") are
searched for in the path relative to the root directory, so in the example the path
"\Root\MyPages" must exist.
Stylesheets are searched for in "Root\Resources\Stylesheets".
An EasyScript file (*.bas file) to be run is expected in "Root\Script".
A Javascript file (*.js) is expected in "Root\Script".
Images (<img src="...">) with no path prefix are searched for in "Root\Images".
Images (<img src="....">) with a path prefix (e.g. "\MyImages\Logo.png") are
searched for in the path relative to the root directory, so in the example the path
"\Root\MyImages" must exist.
All other files are either searched for in the root or you must specify a path relative to the
root.

12.1 Create dynamic page content with EasyScript

Each page requested by the browser is analyzed by catman before it is delivered. If the
page contains the text "CATSCRIPT:=MyScript.bas;", catman runs the script. The
CATSCRIPT tag can appear anywhere in the document. catman removes it before the
page is delivered.

You have two options to specify the server's response by a script:

1. Change the page content
2. Deliver a file

catman
412 12 CATMAN WEB SERVER
Change the page content
Normally, your script will create a dynamic content and place it somewhere in the page
being returned. The EA_Web class in EasyScript provides two methods for this:
EA_Web.GetPage(strPage As String) returns the document body as a string.
EA_Web.SetPage(strPage As String) replaces the document body from a string,
meaning everything between <Body> and </Body> is replaced.
With these two methods you request a document, make some changes to it, and return it
to the server. The server then replaces the original body of the document with the new
one, and sends the HTML file back to the browser.

Transfer a file
Alternatively, your script can create a completely new HTML page and save it to a file.
The script can notify the server about this file awaiting delivery (in place of the original
request) by the following method:
EA_Web.SetResponseFile(ByVal FileName As String)

The file name must contain the full path; no search is carried out in the root direc-
tory for example.

By default, the server determines the content type from the file extension. However, you
can use the following method to force a content type:
EA_Web.SetResponseType(ByVal ResponseType As Integer)
The ResponseType can have the values 0 = RESPONSETYPE_AUTO or 1 =
RESPONSETYPE_DOWNLOAD.

Transfer keys/value pairs

The web client can transfer additional keys/value pairs along with the HTML file name,
such as for a user login or to enter additional information such as a channel name. Your
script can read the value of a key by EA_Web.GetRequestItem(ByVal Key As
String, Value As Variant).

12.2 Create advanced page layouts

The catman web server hosts all the necessary files so that you can use jquery and boot-
strap in your pages. This means your pages do not need to reference the files (*.js, *.css)
via a URL to their providers. You get them from the catman file server instead.

catman
12 CATMAN WEB SERVER 413
Example
<link rel="stylesheet" href-
f="resources\stylesheets\bootstrap.min.css">
<link rel="stylesheet" href-
f="resources\stylesheets\bootstrap-theme.min.css">
<script src="script\jquery-2.1.4.min.js"></script>
<script src="script\bootstrap.min.js"></script>
Versions used by the catman server:
jquery: Version 2.1.4
bootstrap: Version 3.3.4

catman
414 12 CATMAN WEB SERVER
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS

See also Scan options.

With the settings of the Options dialog you define how catman should behave in different
situations and in the available tabs. You can also personalize the user interface here.
Call the dialog from the menu File ► Options and click on the required area on the left-
hand side. In the start window of catman you access the options via Options ► General
options. The options are divided into categories.
You call the options for the device search via the catman start window, Measure
menu, and Select device type, interface and additional hardware options.

Program behavior (general) and active functions

Program functions Info Enable computations/limit val-
ues/DataView/diagnostics/channel check, activate additional modules (EasyMath,
EasyLog, ...)
Safety Info Check channels, save project automatically, backup copy
Data storage Info Save where, max. number of channels, cache size, …
Folders Info Default folders for data etc., working directory of catman
Reset to default settings: Reset all options and program settings to their factory
defaults. Additionally, all recently used paths and files in the dialog boxes and all
temporary files created by catman are deleted, and the positions of the component
Panels are reset.
See also catman start parameters, Watchdog function

Behavior when carrying out important actions

Sensors Info Which sensor database, what happens automatically when assigning,
…
Zero balancing Info How is it done? Averaging?
Channel list Info Live display active after device scan? Which DAQ jobs do changes
affect? Display time channels?
Device search (not in the Options dialog) Info Which devices to search for, and on
which interfaces; handling of special channels (CAN, hardware computations, ana-
log outputs), what is done automatically, …

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 415
Default settings for the tabs
DAQ channels tab and the Channel list (appears in multiple windows) Info Filter set-
tings, display overflow, channel names, transfer settings, which columns are dis-
played, display time channels, …
Panels tab (and Print pages) Info Assign channel automatically, channel drop gen-
erated …, grid, number of plots per graph, …
AutoSequences tab
EasyScript tab

catman Personalize
Program start Info What should happen at startup, e.g. load a DAQ project and start
the first DAQ job, user interface (GUI) ...
Keyboard shortcuts Info Define shortcuts: You can set shortcuts to scroll between
Panels so you don't have to use the mouse, for example
Style Info Define color scheme/skin, …
Adapt user interface Info Hide tabs/menu groups, create own tabs/menu groups, …

Options for specific device types

QuantumX/SomatXR: Device search, Enter address, CAN signals/channels, Activate
on-board math, Activate analog outputs, Hardware time channels, Switch sample-
rate domains with MX module, Use increased sample rate with MX410 (high-speed
mode), Use increased sample rate with MXFS (high-speed modus)
MGCplus: Device search, Enter address, Hardware time channels
FS22 BraggMETER: Enter address, Hardware time channels
GNSS devices: Additional devices (add devices manually)

13.1 catman start parameters

catman enables you to influence the program behavior through various start parameters.
Some of the parameters can also be combined, for example /project and /data. You can
access most functions through the start options (menu File ► Options, then click on Pro-
gram start in the System group on the left).

/DefaultStartup: Starts catman with the start screen, i.e. without one of the options spe-
cified under Program start. Thereby you can force a “normal” start of catman, although
start options are set, for example that a certain project is to be started.

catman
416 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
/scan: Tries to establish a device connection after the start of catman. This corresponds
to the start mode Automatic device scan; see Program options: Program start.

/noscan: Suppresses the start of the QuantumX/SomatXR scan server. This is useful
when you are not using any QuantumX/SomatXRmodule, because then the start of cat-
man takes place more quickly.

/blank: Starts catman with a blank DAQ project. This corresponds to the start mode
Empty DAQ project.

/project:file name: Starts catman with a DAQ or analysis project. Depending on the pro-
ject type, the corresponding mode is called and the project loaded. Enter the file name in
quotes if it contains space characters. We recommend that the full path and file names
are given. The option corresponds to the start mode Existing DAQ project or Existing ana-
lysis project.

/data:file name: Starts catman in the analysis mode and loads the specified data file.
Enter the file name in quotes if it contains space characters. We recommend that the full
path and file names are given. If an analysis project with the file name DEFAULT.OFP
exists in the same folder as the data file, it is loaded first. Otherwise use the start para-
meter /project in addition in order to load an analysis project. The file extension for the
Test Explorer (displaying test data) specified in the data saving options is ignored in this
case; the specified file is loaded even if the file extension is different.

/AutoStartDAQ: Starts the first DAQ job. This parameter is only practicable if you have
simultaneously specified the /project parameter. If you use the parameters
/AutoStartDAQ and /scan together, after the scan the DAQ job defined as default for your
catman is started.
See also Define default settings for DAQ jobs

/QXAssist: Starts catman and calls the HBM Device Manager.

/script:filename: Starts catman, loads the stated script project (*.ESP) and executes it.
Enter the file name in quotes if it contains space characters. We recommend that the full
path and file names are given.
The start parameter cannot be used with /project. Either the script must load a DAQ pro-
ject or you use only /project. The project contains the script and one of the options Start
script automatically is active; see Program options: EasyScript. Simultaneously spe-
cifying /NoWarn is possible, and usually also practicable.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 417
/print: Prints an analysis project. This parameter is only practicable when you sim-
ultaneously specify the /project parameter, if the analysis project contains data or you
are simultaneously using the /data parameter.

/HideGUI: Hides all menus, the component windows and all tabs, apart from the Visu-
alization tab. Use the option together with a start parameter to load a project or define,
for example, a DAQ project to be loaded, in the Program start options. Otherwise initially
the (normal) start screen is displayed.

/NoWarn: Suppresses all warning messages and dialogs during the program start, for
example the query whether the data of the last measurement are to be stored (if this did
not take place last time) or the query about checking the synchronization. The option is,
for example, practicable when catman is to start with a certain project. The option is not
identical to Deactivate failed devices; in this respect see What to do if channel ini-
tialization fails when starting acquisition.

Example
1. Create a link with catman on the desktop.
2. Using the Properties context menu, call the dialog for entering a link (the Shortcut
tab is displayed automatically).
3. Click in the Target line at the end of the text.
4. Supplement the text with your start parameters:
/project:"c:\HBM_Projects\My Project.MEP" /NoWarn /AutoStartDAQ.
5. Close the dialog.
A double click on this link loads the specified project, the channels are initialized and the
first DAQ job is started.

13.2 Watchdog function

Use the watchdog function to safeguard continuous running in a DAQ project in which
catman is to record data unsupervised for a lengthy period of time.

Enabling the watchdog function

In the Windows Registry, set the following key to 1:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\VB AND VBA Program Set-
tings\catmanEasy\Defaults\WATCHDOG.

catman
418 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
 Changes to the Registry using the regedit.exe program should only be made by
experienced users, and after backing up the existing Registry, because under some
circumstances serious Windows errors might result. If necessary, ask your admin-
istrator to make the change.

Reset the key to 0 to disable the function.

Function
When the option is enabled, an additional process (‟WatchDog.exe”) is started when cat-
man boots up. After connecting to one or more devices, catman modifies the “Watch-
dog.txt” file in the catman working directory every second. The watchdog process checks
this modification, and reacts if no modification takes place for more than 30 seconds. In
this case, catman is initially forced to shut down if catman is active in the memory but
not responding. catman is then restarted, and the watchdog process terminates, as it is
also restarted after catman boots up.

catman is only started, no projects are automatically loaded or measurements

resumed. Configure this by way of the catman startup options; see Program start
options: Start mode With an existing DAQ or analysis project.. However, any error
messages during startup are suppressed in this case, and not displayed as in inter-
active mode.
If you run the first DAQ job automatically, note that a trigger event, for example,
must also occur before recording is started.
Also consider whether you want to temporarily remove non-connectible devices
from the project.
See also Data transfer and error handling, Unattended test.

To be able to continue measuring even after a possible power failure, you have to
create a shortcut link with catman in the Windows Autostart folder.

13.3 Program function options

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Program functions (System
group) on the left side.

Specify here whether:

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 419
1. New real-time computations (computation channels) can be defined.
Any existing real-time computations will be carried out during an acquisition; how-
ever, the dialogs cannot be called to change or create new computations.
2. Limit values are to be displayed and monitored.
Limit values or events which have already been defined are not deleted.
3. The Sensor database can be edited.
Assigning sensors from the sensor database is always possible. With this option
only the Sensor database tab is no longer displayed, and any changes to sensor
data (Edit context menu) cannot be saved in the sensor database.
4. Editing of measured values in the DataViewer is possible (in Analysis mode and in
DAQ mode if the DataViewer is displayed in that mode).
5. The Channel check tab is to be displayed.
6. The DataViewer tab is to be displayed in DAQ mode.
7. Diagnostics and logging is to accessible.
It is advisable to enable these functions only when you are in contact with HBM
Technical Support, or if you are very familiar with the device commands (ter-
minal).
8. Additional modules are to be activated.

13.3.1 Diagnostics and logging

These menu commands are intended for experienced users or for when you are con-
tacting HBM Technical Support. In all other cases you can disable the option. The
catman system log is always written, and can also be called up via File ► Special
functions ► Show system log.

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Program functions (System
group) on the left side.
You enable the following functions when this option is active:
Turn communication log on/off
Show communication log
Reset (clear) communication log
Command terminal
Show Log file (System log)
When this option is activated, all functions are accessible via Diagnostics and logging in
the Special group (DAQ channels tab).

catman
420 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
Communication log
If you enable communication logging (Special ► Diagnostics and logging ► Com-
munication log), all commands sent to the device together with the responses are written
to the file COMLOG.LOG. In addition, all entries are provided with a time stamp with 1 ms
resolution. You can also view the communication log via Diagnostics and logging in the
Special group. The default number of entries is limited to 5,000. The last five data items
are kept, older files are deleted by default.
The file COMLOG.LOG is always created in the catman work folder. The function is deac-
tivated again when you restart catman, meaning you have to reactivate it. Alternatively,
specify that the log is always written; see also Safety prompts and logging (Options for
safety).

You can change the number of entries by an entry in the Windows Registry: HKEY_
CURRENT_USER/Software/VB and VBA Program Set-
tings/catmanEasy/DEFAULTS/ComLogSize. Create the entry ComLogSize (type string), if
it does not exist.
The number of files can also be changed via an entry in the Registry: HKEY_CURRENT_
USER/Software/VB and VBA Program Set-
tings/catmanEasy/DEFAULTS/MAXCOMLOGFILES.

Changes to the Registry using the regedit.exe program should only be made by
experienced users, and after backing up the existing Registry, because under some
circumstances serious Windows errors might result. If necessary, ask your admin-
istrator to make the change.

Command terminal
When using more than one device, mark first the line with the required device in window
Channel settings. Then call this menu item which allows you to send commands directly
to the device and see the response. You will find the allowed commands and parameters
in the Operating Manual of the corresponding device.

13.3.2 Additional modules

In addition to the basic modules included in catmanEasy, further modules are available:
1. EasyMath
2. AutoSequences (included in the EasyMath license)
3. EasyScript
4. Video Cameras (use video camera, only available in catmanAP)

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 421
You can activate the modules in catmanEasy 25 times for testing. After that you have to
purchase a license from HBM or—for the Video Cameras module—upgrade to catmanAP;
see Licensing and registration. In catmanAP all modules are included.
The EasyPlan, EasyMonitoring, Ethernet-based GNSS and EasyOptics modules used
in older versions of catman have mostly been integrated into catmanEasy. The
EasyRoadLoad module and the recorders (parallel data acquisition in the EasyMon-
itoring module) have been integrated into catmanAP.

13.4 Options for safety

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Safety (System group) on
the left.

Check DAQ settings before DAQ start

Before starting DAQ jobs (after the click on ), you can check various settings. If one or
more possible problems are found, a dialog window appears with appropriate warnings.
Click on the Details tab to view the individual messages.

Extended safety checks before DAQ start: Checks whether, for example, the valid cal-
ibration period of the sensors used has expired, the settings of sample rate and filters are
not appropriate to one another, invalid graph settings, unsuitable job settings (PC timing)
or deactivated limit values are present.

Report inactive channels: With the option active, deactivated channels are also reported
in addition to the general checks.

Report channels without sensor: With this option active, in addition to the general checks,
active channels are also reported to which no sensor has been assigned or for which no
TEDS has been detected.

Measure synchronized and Check internal synchronization of devices: This option is only
practicable when you are working with multiple QuantumX/SomatXR modules. catman
then checks, for example before the start of a measurement, whether the MX modules pro-
cess the internal synchronization without errors (module LED not orange), whether the
FireWire connection appears to be correct, and whether the modules are synchronized
together with Sync leader and Sync follower, provided that can be checked with the selec-
ted time synchronization. Depending on the method, complete checking is not possible in
all cases. For example, with PTP a configuration may be correct in which none of the mod-
ules operates as the Sync leader.

catman
422 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
Periodic check of the devices for loss of connection (only QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus
and PMX): When you make settings on the DAQ channels tab, the option checks approx-
imately every 5 seconds whether there is still a connection to the device(s). If the con-
nection has been interrupted ( before device and channels), you can restore the
connection via Reconnect to device (device context menu in the Sample column, DAQ
channels tab). The option gives you a prompt indication when problems occur with the
connection.

Project backup
The option offers various possibilities of saving the current project automatically. If no
project name exists yet, you are requested, to specify the project folder and project name.

Save automatically all x minutes: Saves the current DAQ or analysis project after the spe-
cified time period has expired. If you have still not specified any path and file name for the
project, you are then requested to do so.

Always save project on DAQ start: Saves the current DAQ project on starting DAQ jobs
(after clicking on ).

Create backup copy before saving: Renames the existing project file as *.MEP_BAK and
then saves the current DAQ project. If a backup file already exists, it is deleted before-
hand.

Check firmware
The function is only available for QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus and FS22 Brag-
gMETERs.

The option checks after the device connection is established whether the connected
devices contain the correct firmware. With some devices with outdated firmware, you can
initiate an update directly in the dialog; see Check/update firmware.

Security prompts and logging

Confirm deletion of objects: Displays a dialog before deletion of (complete) visu-
alizations, computations or panels, allowing you to cancel the action.
catman Catman has no Undo function, so any deletion is always final.

Extensive event logging in system log: All actions on the DAQ channels tab, such as
sensor assignment, zero balancing, filter settings, etc. are logged with the date and time.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 423
The option is practicable when certain actions are not being executed as desired and you
are in contact with the HBM Technical Support.

Log user defined events and limit value tripping in the system log: All the conditions
defined in limit/event monitoring generate an entry with the date and time of their occur-
rence. An entry is also generated when the definition contains no action; it is sufficient if
the condition is satisfied. The start and stop of recorders are also logged if you are using
recorders.
Open the catman log file via File ► Special functions ► Show System log.

Always log device communication: If you have activated the Diagnostics and logging
option in the Program options, you can generate a communication log in the DAQ chan-
nels tab tab via the Special group. However, the function is deactivated when catman
restarts. With the option here you can define that a log is always written. Note, however,
that additional time is needed for this, and more files are generated in the catman work-
ing directory.
This option is only intended for experienced users and should only be used under
instruction from the Technical Support at HBM.

Password protection for critical operations

With password protection you can prevent users who do not know the password from per-
forming the following actions:
Assign a sensor to a channel,
Edit a sensor definition in the sensor database (the Sensor database tab can then
not be displayed),
Modify a sensor definition in the DAQ channels tab (Sensor adaptation and wiring
diagram),
Change/reprogram a TEDS module,
Zero balancing,
Create or change limit values and events,
Create or change real-time computations (computation channels),
Activate or deactivate channels,
Change sample rates or filter settings,
Firmware update.
The setting applies to all users of the PC. If a user wants to perform one of the selected
actions, the password prompt appears. Then you can also deactivate the query for the
rest of the catman session without turning off the option in general.

catman
424 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
 To change the settings for protection, you must first cancel password protection.

The setting is identical to the one in the sensor options (Sensor database (location, pass-
word protection)).

13.5 Data storage options

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Data storage(System group)
on the left.
In the Fast Stream storage mode the following settings are irrelevant because in
that mode a file is written to directly.
See also Configure DAQ jobs, Storage mode.

Temporary data storage

See also System requirements, Folder options.

To be able to retain the measurement data until you have decided on the next processing
steps (at the end of the acquisition), catman uses a temporary storage. In the default set-
ting, a special file is produced for this in the catman work folder. If the path for this user
folder is a network path, on starting catman you receive the notice that this is not admiss-
ible. Then in the following dialog specify a local path (a folder on your PC's storage
medium). catman then creates all the required files in that path.
With several PC users with different Windows accounts (user names), we recom-
mend using one file for all users so that a large amount of space is not reserved for
these files unnecessarily. However, be sure to select a folder to which all users have
read and write access. Specify this folder for all users of catman.

When using an operating system with the NTFS file system, this file can grow dynamically
as long as there is free space available on the storage medium. Therefore all data can be
acquired and exported after the measurement into a “normal” file. The status message
“Setting up temporary data storage” displayed during the start of catman signifies that
this special file is being initialized.

If the file system of your storage medium is not NTFS, you must use a fixed storage
size (Use fixed storage size), and specify the size of the temporary data store. The
maximum number of values per channel that you can acquire with your con-
figuration (number of channels and storage space) will be displayed.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 425
How do you identify your storage medium's file system?
Call the Properties context menu in the main folder of the storage medium disk (e.g. C:\).
The third entry in the following dialog shows the file system used.
If the storage medium of your PC was not already formatted with NTFS at the fact-
ory, we recommend that you do this afterwards. Usually the PC supplier provides a
conversion program for this purpose. Otherwise, try CONVERT.EXE (in the
SYSTEM32 subdirectory of Windows) with the parameters c: Start /fs:ntfs, if c:
is the drive that needs to be converted (CONVERT.EXE c: /fs:ntfs).
The conversion takes place without any loss of data, but for security reasons you
should make a backup of your storage medium first.

As a reference value for estimating the size of the temporary file, use 8 bytes per mea-
sured value, i.e. with 1,000,000 values (about 7 minutes at 2,400 Hz sample rate) approx.
400 megabytes are needed for 50 channels.

If no more free space is available on the specified storage medium, the measure-
ment is aborted. However you can see, for example next to in the status line,
how long you can continue measuring before this happens (d = days, h = hours).
During the computation 100 MB of safety reserve is included. The status indicator
is highlighted in red when the free space falls below 1 GB.

When should you use another disk drive or folder?

You should use another drive if
the drive is not of type NTFS,
there is not enough free space on the specified disk drive, e.g. when you are con-
figuring a measurement and you receive the message that not enough free space is
available,
you have more than one storage medium available (the system drive C is being
used by the operating system and is therefore slower).

Make sure that you have permission to write to the specified storage medium and
folder location.

If all users of a PC are to use the same temporary file, make sure that a folder is
selected to which all users have read and write access and specify this folder for all
users of catman.

catman
426 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
 Where possible, do not use any compact flash media or similar devices, because
here the writing speeds are usually slower than with normal hard disks or SSDs.

A modified setting will only be effective when catman is restarted.

Maximum number of channels

You can reduce the number of possible channels to speed up starting catman. 16 is the
minimum number of channels you may use; however, consider that each time channel
and each computation require a channel. Select some (at least 10) channels more than
absolutely necessary so as to have a reserve for further computations, e.g. 35 channels
for a QuantumX/SomatXR with 8 channels and 16 computations.
The figure is the number of possible channels, not the number of channels actually used!

Use fixed storage size

This improves the speed of (temporary) data recording where there is a large number of
channels, except in Fast Stream mode. In that mode data is saved directly to a file, not to
the temporary file; see also Storage mode.
The number of samples shown in the dialog can be acquired per channel. However
all channels—even those not presently used—have the same memory allocation. If
more space is required per channel, reduce the maximum number of DAQ and com-
putation channels.

Cyclic storage mode

This enables you to wait for an event with high sample rates over a long period of time,
recording all data, but without the file becoming too large. When you stop the measure-
ment once the event has occurred, the temporary data storage contains the prehistory,
i.e. a type of pre-trigger. The maximum possible time duration depends on the sample
rate, the maximum number of channels and the chosen size of the cyclical memory. The
cyclical memory always contains only the values last acquired.
You can also write less than these (temporarily) saved measurements to a file, see Sav-
ing depth.

Write cache
Enlarge the write cache for sample rates above 9,600 Hz. The cache is created in the RAM
of the PC and improves the speed for the display and for saving measurements. Use 512
kB for sample rates of 96 kHz or higher, otherwise 128 kB is sufficient.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 427
 During the first 5 minutes, or as long as the write cache has not been filled at least
once, the data captured by catman is only written to the write cache and not stored
in the temporary file. If catman is terminated unplanned within this time, you will be
notified after restarting catman that all data has been lost. Otherwise, you can at
least save the data in the temporary file. But the data in the write cache will be lost
in any case. So with a slow sample rate set the cache to a small size, so as to min-
imize data loss.
See also Storage interval for write cache.

Storage interval for write cache

For DAQ jobs with small sample rates, the setting can ensure that the cache is not written
to the temporary memory (on the storage medium) only when the specified memory is full
(Auto setting). With a sample rate of 5 Hz and a cache size of 128 kB this would oth-
erwise only occur after over 50 minutes. Then use the 5 minutes setting for example.

File name extension for Test Explorer

The setting specifies which data types are initially displayed in the Test Explorer (Ana-
lysis mode). You can change the selection at any time in the Test Explorer; the setting
here is only a default setting.

13.6 Folder options

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Folders (System group) on
the left.

In this dialog you specify the folders which are to be used for certain files. All settings are
saved specific to the user (Windows user name). catman Though catman does remember
the last setting in many other dialogs. The entries set out below are also only initial
default settings. As soon as you select a different path in these dialogs, that is the new
default.

Default folder for measurement data

This default setting for measurement data is used when you have not specified any path.
Once you have selected a path in the file selection dialog, it is retained and also again dis-
played in the file selection dialog when catman is restarted.
The path for projects is independent of the path for measurement data.

catman
428 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
Default folder for exported data (Analysis mode)
This default setting is used for the export of data in Analysis mode if you have not spe-
cified a path. Once you have selected a path in the file selection dialog, it is retained and
also again displayed in the file selection dialog when catman is restarted.

Default folder for images

This default setting for images is used when you have not specified any path.
Save images with project: In the default setting all images (the object Background image
and the images which are displayed in other objects) are saved together with the DAQ or
Analysis project. If you use many large pictures in your projects, this results in large pro-
ject files. Here, you can specify that images are only saved as references in the project.
Then, for the transfer of a project to another PC, copy the images also to the project file.

Save images with project

Some images are saved only as a link, or taken from the default folder for LED symbols.
Enable this option if you want to share a project with images, to ensure that all images
are included.

Default folder for LED symbols

catman has a directory containing some symbols (images) for the LED object. You can
either copy more symbols into that folder or select another folder for symbols here.

catman working directory

The catman working directory must not be created on a network drive.

After the installation of catman all other files and folders required by catman, such as for
the sensor database, saving data or projects, and the temporary data store, are created in
the catman working directory. You can modify some of these folders or paths with the
appropriate options. However, the catman working directory is also needed, for example,
for the temporary storage of data during computations and it contains the AutoSequence
examples. In the default setting the catman working directory is generated in the “My
Documents\HBM” folder of the user logged in to Windows. If this is a network path, when
starting catman you then receive the message that this is not admissible. With this
option you can specifically select a folder for saving the data required by catman.
If multiple users logging in to Windows with different names are to use the same
settings, specify a folder which is shared by all users. Otherwise it is sufficient to

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 429
 use the same sensor database for all users (see Program options: Sensors), and
where appropriate define the same path for the temporary data store.

13.7 Program start options

See also catman start parameters, Watchdog function.

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Program functions (System
group) on the left.

Start mode
Here you choose how catman is to start:
1. With the normal start window.
2. Directly with a device scan (Automatic device scan, equivalent to clicking on New in
the Measure menu of the start window).
3. With a blank DAQ or analysis project.
4. With an existing DAQ or analysis project.
5. With a device scan followed by the import of all settings from an (existing) project
(Device scan with import …).
The latter variant is practicable if you do not know whether the address of the currently
used device matches the one used in the project, but the device is an identical type (Quan-
tumX/SomatXR) or has the same plug-in equipment (MGCplus). If you are using trans-
ducers with TEDS and have saved the channel name in TEDS, transducers can then also
be found and activated when they are connected to other channels: Activate the Execute
sensor scan options under point 4 (see After loading a DAQ project: Execute sensor scan)
or Execute sensor scan after device connection (point 5, see Execute sensor scan after
device connection), and in both cases Accept from TEDS (see Use sensor description as
channel name).
You can additionally specify whether the first DAQ job or all DAQ jobs should be started
automatically after loading or importing.
Enter *.* as the file name, catman browses all root directories on the connected
drives for a DAQ project (*.MEP). The first project found is loaded. This enables you
to load a project from a USB storage device for example.

Waiting time before first hardware access: The option is helpful when you switch on the
PC and measurement device simultaneously and catman is started automatically. Enter a
“delay period” here so that the measurement device(s) are ready when the search for

catman
430 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
devices is carried out. Depending on the device and configuration, up to two minutes may
be needed after switch-on, e.g. with a connection via WLAN, before a connection can be
established with the device. The time to be specified here is the waiting period after the
start of catman.
The waiting time is also inserted when you double-click on a DAQ project file before
catman launches.

Remove/deactivate unconnectable devices temporarily from the project/show dialog:

The options are practicable for larger projects with many devices, if not all the project
devices can be found when automatically loading a project, e.g. because they are
switched off or defective. Then the project is run with the devices available, depending on
the option either without changing the original file or after saving the changed project file.
See also Data transfer and error handling.

Load GUI extensions

Ribbon extensions: Here you can specify a file which contains your settings for the user
interface (Ribbon); see Program options, User interface: Adapt.
Default script: If catman is always to load and execute a script, enter the script file here.
The option is independent of the automatic start of a script on opening a project (Pro-
gram options: EasyScript).

Load visualization
Specify the files here from which the visual displays (Panels and Print pages) are to be
loaded during the start. You can specify files which contain a single Panel (menu File ►
Save ► Current Panel/page), the complete visualization (menu File ► Save ► Complete
visualization) or DAQ and analysis projects (menu File ► Save ► Project).

13.8 Shortcut options

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Keyboard shortcuts (System
group) on the left.

Set specific keys as shortcuts for switching between DAQ and Analysis modes, scrolling
to other Panels, or other actions.

Procedure
1. Use the tabs in the dialog to choose whether the keyboard shortcut is to act on DAQ
channels, the measurement or the visualization, etc.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 431
2. Click in the field for which you would like to define a keyboard shortcut.
3. Enter the character or double-click the required special character in the list on the
right. You can also mark the character in the list on the right and click Insert.
If you are using a special character which has to be combined with the key (all
characters with +), e.g. Ctrl+ ( ), click again in the setting field and suffix an
additional character to the special character, e.g. s, to trigger the action by press-
ing Ctrl ( ) and s simultaneously. In the example you can also specify
Ctrl+Shift+s ( + +s). In this case you must then press three keys to trigger
the action.

Notes
Key F5 for starting/stopping DAQ jobs starts and stops all DAQ jobs. If several DAQ
jobs are present, the selection list is superimposed on starting. Although the key
can be changed, it cannot be activated.
Jobs for which you have defined Keyboard shortcuts are also started with the key
defined here. But you can also use it to stop any job (does not work with shortcuts).
See also Specify job parameters.
The Delete selected object function (Visualization tab) cannot be used for the table
objects, because they require the Remove function for their fields and do not trans-
mit to catman.

13.9 Options for CX22

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on CX22 (System group) on the
left side.

There you can specify Reset all CX22 digital outputs on DAQ start. This means that the
LEDs are also reset and any current indication of an error is cleared.

By default, the RECORDING and ERROR status LEDs are used by catman to display the
status of measured value recording and the error status respectively. If you do not want
this, and want to configure the outputs yourself, you can disable automatic usage of
status LEDs here.

Automatically connect status LEDs with digital outputs: The option connects the
RECORDING status LED to digital output 1 (terminal 4) and the ERROR status LED to
digital output 2 (terminal 5). You can then trigger further actions via the digital outputs or,
for example, visualize the status by a larger display.

catman
432 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
To also be able to configure a DAQ project with CX22-specific settings on a different PC
(that is, not on a CX22) you must enable the Allow CX22-specific configurations option.
This enables you to assign functions to the digital inputs and outputs of the CX22 for
example.

13.10 DAQ channel options

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on DAQ channels (Channels
and sensors group) on the left.

Transfer channel and device names into device

See also Use sensor description as channel name.

This option is only possible with QuantumX/SomatXR, MGCplus, PMX and DMP41.

The channel names are saved in the device and will then be available when performing
the next device scan. As a result, the same channel names are used in the AB22 of the
MGCplus and in catman for example.

Channel names can also be stored in the TEDS module of a sensor, and with Quan-
tumX/SomatXR are then also displayed in catman if you connect the sensor before the
device scan. and the Accept from TEDS (Use sensor description as channel name) option
is active.

Save settings
This option is only useful with MGCplus, PMX and DMP41. With Quan-
tumX/SomatXR all settings are always saved in the device.

The channel settings that can be saved in the device, e.g. the excitation voltage, are
saved secure from power failure (EEPROM) and are then available later for operating even
without catman.
All settings are first written into the RAM of a device. In QuantumX/SomatXR they are
also transferred approx. every 10 seconds into the flash EPROM. With other devices how-
ever this is not done automatically and the RAM holds the settings only for a few hours
after the device has been switched off. After that the settings are lost. The Save con-
figuration upon exit option allows you to save the settings permanently in the device
EEPROM; however additional time is required when shutting down catman as the system
will first check whether the settings have been transferred.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 433
Filter (automatic filter selection)
See also Which sample rate is the right one?

Unless there are special circumstances, we recommend leaving it at the default 15% of
the sample rate, since no alias effects usually occur in the process.
Filters with Bessel characteristic create no signal distortion, but have a relatively
flat frequency response. In case of high-frequency interference at high amplitudes,
you should therefore set the cutoff frequency to 5% of the sample rate, or use filters
with Butterworth characteristics. (Preferred characteristics).

If you choose a percentage figure which is too high, an aliasing effect can arise if the
amplitudes of interference frequencies above half the sample rate are not suppressed suf-
ficiently by the filter in the measuring amplifier.
Provided the device supports it, the Allow manual filter settings option (active by default)
enables you to apply different filter settings for each channel by choosing Configure
(Sample rates and filter group) on the DAQ channels tab or Channels (Settings group) on
the DAQ jobs tab. If you make the settings on the DAQ jobs tab, you can also make dif-
ferent settings for each DAQ job and channel. In the DAQ channels tab, a change may
affect all DAQ jobs, but only the setting of the first job is displayed.
See also Setting DAQ job parameters via the channel list, Setting filters manually.

What to do if channel initialization fails (when starting acquisition)

All active channels are initialized before a measurement, with one exception. Exception:
the channels have already been initialized and the settings have not changed. If an error
occurs during the initialization, i.e. the channel is unable to carry out a measurement, cat-
man issues an error message (default). Use the DAQ channels tab to call up the Con-
figure DAQ channels window in order to find the origin of the error and correct it.
However, if you wish to process several DAQ jobs automatically, this would in effect end
the acquisition, as catman waits for confirmation of the error message. You can prevent
this by using the Deactivate the devices which caused an error and continue measure-
ment without interrupt option. The option is also practicable when you are measuring
using very many channels and the failure of individual channels during the measurement
can be tolerated.
See also Event monitoring: Error during measurement and DAQ jobs: Data transfer and
error handling.

With this option the defective channel will be deactivated in all DAQ jobs. You have
to re-enable it manually via the DAQ jobs tab and Channels in the Settings group in

catman
434 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
 all DAQ jobs (use the Activate in all DAQ jobs context menu).

Display overflow values as

Here, enter a value which does not arise with “normal” measurement data. This enables
overflow values to be found easier, because the same number is always involved. Other-
wise the measurement for the overflow depends on the measurement range and scaling
of the measurement device. The default is -1,000,000. You can also search for this value
(OVFL value) in the DataViewer, and the values are also not displayed in graphs; see Zero
values for graphs.

13.11 Channel list options

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Channel list (Channels and
sensors group) on the left.

Define in the DAQ channels tab (channel table)

Define here which columns are displayed in the Configure DAQ channels window (DAQ
channels tab or—in offline mode—Signal plan), and in what font, font size, and foreground,
background and highlight colors.

If the Use channel colors as default option is active (see Panel (and print page) options),
you can show the Default color of plots column, thereby changing the plot color for all
graphs or display texts, including at a later time. You can disable the function for indi-
vidual graphs however: Use channel colors for plots in the graph configuration.
Sample rates and filter: The setting of sample rates and filters on the DAQ channels tab is
applied for all DAQ jobs. If you frequently use many different DAQ jobs, you should not dis-
play this column and, using the Program option User interface, you should also hide the
Sample rates/Filter group (deactivate Visible).
QuantumX/SomatXR Isochronous transfer Displays a column which shows whether Iso-
chronous data transfer is active for a channel. The Isochronous data transfer must be
activated for all signals which are to be used as source signal for another module. In this
way the data interchange between the various modules is activated and it is thus ensured
that the relevant values are transmitted over FireWire and the other modules are avail-
able. You can activate it by clicking in the ISO column or via the DAQ channels tab and
Active (Channel group).
The Type expected column on the DAQ channels tab is only available once a project
is opened and the Hardware type column is activated here.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 435
Complete device description: If the option is inactive, only the device name is shown (if
available). If the option is active, UUID, the synchronization state and address, for
example, are also displayed. The details shown however depend on the device type.

Fixed column width: With the option active the width of the columns no longer changes
automatically, but instead only column widths are used which you set manually.
You can also change the arrangement of the columns: In the DAQ channels tab,
drag the column header (the cell with the heading) to a different position. The set-
ting is also retained after a restart of catman.

Font and colors

In the default setting, Alternating colors for even and odd rows is active so that the chan-
nel list is more easily readable. If you do not like the display of the marked channels
(bright blue), select a different marking color, e.g. a bright yellow.

Signal reading
You can also change the display format—that is to say, the number of decimal places—for
the Sample column in the DAQ channels tab. You can also set the format for each chan-
nel separately using the context menu in the DAQ channels tab.
See also Setting up channels (measuring chain) (DAQ channels tab)

Time channels
Hide time channels in channel tables (default setting active): The normally used (soft-
ware) time channels are computed channels, the values of which are calculated from the
sample rate specified for the relevant channel. Since catman knows the sample rate for
each channel, during the assignment of a channel to a graph, the associated time channel
is automatically transferred. The time channels are therefore generally only required for
the export of data and therefore for other programs. They do not though have to be dis-
played in the lists with the channels when working with catman.
Exception: In measurements with PC controlled timing and with the Peak values per time
interval measurement method, you should leave the time channels visible, because then
you have to use a time channel in order to generate the x values for a graph. Since the
channels are however only masked out, you can also display them at any time as
required.

catman
436 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
Setting DAQ job parameters using the channel list
By default, the Sample rates and Filters settings, and the Channel activation on the DAQ
channels tab, are set for all DAQ jobs. However, only the settings for the first DAQ job are
shown. If you are using several different DAQ jobs, you should make these settings either
on the DAQ jobs tab or restrict the changes to the first DAQ job: Apply to first DAQ job
only.

Live signal reading

From catman version 4.0, live display of measurements is activated by default in the DAQ
channels tab after starting or opening a DAQ project. You can alter this behavior here.
It might be better to disable the option, as then error messages for a channel, for
example, are displayed until you either double-click on the channel or activate Live dis-
play via the ribbon.

13.12 Sensor options

Call the dialog via the catman menu File ► Options and then click on Sensors (Channels
and sensors group) on the left side.

Topics
13.12.1 Sensor database (location, password protection) 437
13.12.2 After loading a DAQ project 438
13.12.3 Use sensor description as channel name 439
13.12.4 TEDS 440
13.12.5 Software T-ID 441
13.12.6 Clear zero-balance value and adjustment values on sensor assignment 441

13.12.1 Sensor database (location, password protection)

Database file
Enter here the name and path of the Sensor database file which should be used. The file
can be write-protected to prevent changes to the Sensor database. In this case however
no new transducer can be created. As an alternative you can also hide the tab using Pro-
gram functions (Program options); then the sensor database can be used, but not edited.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 437
We recommend that you use one database as the reference file and, after making any
changes, copy this onto the relevant PC. The file uses MS Access format, other fields or
tables may be added.
An MX Assistant or MGCplus Assistant (from version 4.0) sensor database can also
be used, as the files are backward compatible.

Password protection
With password protection you can prevent users who do not know the password from per-
forming the following actions:
Assign a sensor to a channel,
Edit a sensor definition in the sensor database (the Sensor database tab can then
not be displayed),
Modify a sensor definition in the DAQ channels tab (Sensor adaptation and wiring
diagram),
Change/reprogram a TEDS module,
Zero balancing,
Create or change limit values and events,
Create or change real-time computations (computation channels),
Activate or deactivate channels,
Change sample rates or filter settings,
Firmware update.
The setting applies to all users of the PC. If a user wants to perform one of the selected
actions, the password prompt appears. Then you can also deactivate the query for the
rest of the catman session without turning off the option in general.
To change the settings for protection, you must first cancel password protection.

The setting is identical to the one for Options for safety.

13.12.2 After loading a DAQ project

Execute sensor scan

This option is only relevant when using transducers with TEDS or T-ID.

After a Sensor scan the sensor IDs stored in the project are compared to the sensor IDs
found in the TEDS or T-ID module connected to the device. If the sensor IDs do not agree,

catman
438 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
different transducers are connected! The differences found are written into the Ini-
tialization log and displayed in a dialog.
The sensor scan when starting a new DAQ project is not affected by this option; see
Execute sensor scan after device connection.

Check that sensors from Sensor database are up to date

This option is only relevant when using sensors from the Sensor database.

The sensor data saved in the project contain all the necessary details for balancing the
channels correctly. However, if a sensor has been recalibrated in the meantime, the val-
ues saved in the project no longer agree with the currently applicable values. If the option
is active, catman checks when the sensors used were last changed in the Sensor data-
base. If this occurred after the project was saved, you obtain a dialog with the possibility
of automatically updating the sensors affected. In addition, the warning Sensor data not
up-to-date is displayed in the channel list for the channels affected.

13.12.3 Use sensor description as channel name

There are two different situations in which these options will be evaluated:
1. After a sensor scan.
2. When assigning a sensor.
The first option is only relevant if you are using TEDS-compatible devices together with
TEDS or T-ID sensors.

The sensor descriptions should be unique. In any case a unique channel name must
result. Otherwise catman cannot differentiate between the channels, i.e. a graph
would always show only the first channel of this name. Therefore if there are
identical channel names, an index is added to the channel name and a warning is
issued.

Use description after a sensor scan

If you carry out a sensor scan, then with TEDS-compatible devices transducers with
TEDS or a T-ID module will be recognized. With the Accept from TEDS option you can
also set the channel names to those stored in the TEDS (Template HBM Channel Name)
or—with T-ID modules—the sensor descriptions stored in the Sensor database. In the
case of CAN signals, the signal name can also be used as channel name if you have
enabled the relevant option.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 439
See also Transfer channel names into device, Activate TEDS.
The following cases are possible:
1. The TEDS module contains a channel name (HBM Template Channel Name), Accept
from TEDS is activated
The channel name is accepted.
2. The TEDS module contains no channel name, Accept from TEDS is activated.
A default name is generated (DeviceX_ChanY).
3. The sensor ID of a T-ID module is found in the Sensor database and Accept from
TEDS is activated.
The sensor data are accepted for adjusting the measuring amplifier.
4. Accept from CAN signal is activated.
The signal name is accepted as channel name. With MGCplus this also happens if
a CAN database is found loaded in the ML71.
See also Using CAN signals.

Use description when assigning sensors

The sensor description will be used as channel name if you assign a sensor from
the Sensor database and Accept sensor from Sensor database is activated. If a
sensor comment exists, it is adopted as a channel comment.
If a channel name or comment already exists, it is overwritten when a new one
is assigned.
If you are using strain gages, you should not activate the option, because usu-
ally one definition of circuit configuration and resistance is used for multiple
channels. The channel names here would be suffixed by numbers.
The CAN signal name is used as channel name if you assign a CAN signal from the
Sensor database and Accept from CAN signal is activated.
See also Using CAN signals.

13.12.4 TEDS

Activate TEDS contents during sensor scan in device

See also Execute sensor scan after device connection.

The option is only relevant when using QuantumX/SomatXR modules and trans-
ducers with TEDS.

catman
440 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
The option is intended for QuantumX/SomatXR modules and the case where sensors are
not connected directly to the device, but rather via an extension cable:
The QuantumX/SomatXR modules only read out the TEDS contents on switch-
on (power supply) and when a sensor is plugged directly on the device. For this
reason, when a transducer is plugged in (or replaced on) the extension cable
after the device has been switched on, the connection process is not recognized
and the TEDS content is not read out.

You should therefore activate this option if you use extension cables and not connect
directly to the module. Unfortunately, this increases the time needed for the sensor scan,
it takes about 3 seconds per sensor. Otherwise you always have to call the sensor scan
with the menu item Activate TEDS.

When assigning sensors from the Sensor database, also update TEDS content.
See also Password protection.

If this option is active, the TEDS module is written (overwritten) without further query
when you assign a sensor from the Sensor database to a channel with a TEDS sensor.
In the default setting, the option is not active and a dialog appears during assignment
whether only the setting of the measurement device channel should be changed or
whether the TEDS module should also be overwritten.

13.12.5 Software T-ID

We recommend that you only activate this MGCplus option in exceptional cases.

If a transducer is activated at least once, its unique number from the TEDS or T-ID mod-
ule is saved in the MGCplus. With new settings a check can then be made of whether
these match the saved sensor ID. However, the transducer with the number saved in the
device must no longer be connected as there is the risk that incorrect settings may be
used. For this reason, catman ignores the software sensor ID saved in the MGCplus in
default setting and uses only the sensor IDs actually existing, i.e. the TEDS or T-ID mod-
ules will be read each time there is a Sensor scan, if this option is deactivated.

13.12.6 Clear zero-balance value and adjustment values on sensor assign-

ment
We recommend that the option is left activated, because on the assignment of a new
sensor, a new zero balance should take place (each sensor has a different zero point).

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 441
The same applies when calibrating a sensor, because after the calibration a different char-
acteristic might be present and a new zero balance is also then needed. Otherwise erro-
neous measurements can arise!
If however a transducer has to be replaced during a measurement and the zero state (ini-
tial state) cannot be established, you can (temporarily) deactivate the option. The “ori-
ginal” zero value (offset) is then retained. After concluding your measurement, measure
the “offset” of the new transducer in the zero state in order to be able to correct your mea-
surements accordingly. Alternatively, you can also enter or correct zero values manually
(DAQ channels tab).

13.13 Zero balancing options

Zero balancing can be disabled with password protection—see Sensor options,
Password protection.

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Zero balancing (Channels
and sensors group) on the left side.

Define here how the hardware channels of a device are zero-balanced:

1. Default method
The default method uses either the zero balance or the taring function in the
device or —if the transducer scaling is carried out via catman— a single measure-
ment is carried out.
2. Synchronous high-precision zero balancing with averaging
catman determines the zero values by measuring multiple samples and then aver-
aging them. The measuring is carried out simultaneously on all channels using the
sample rate entered.
A maximum of 4,096 measured values are considered. If the number of mea-
sured values resulting from the time and sample rate entered is larger the sur-
plus of measured values will not be considered.

The second method is better especially for signals with disturbances (noise), as not a
single measured value is used. Instead the measured values are averaged over a longer
period of time. This means however that more time is required for the zero balance:
Internal zero balancing in each device takes about 10 ms. For averaging, measuring times
of 1 to 5 seconds and sample rates of 10 to 300 Hz are useful.

catman
442 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
 Disable zero balancing for temperature channels, voltage inputs, counter channels
and digital inputs. You can then use the Zero balance all hardware channels func-
tion (Zero balancing group in DAQ channels tab), and do not have to select indi-
vidual channels.

Notes
Do not use precision zero balancing for digital channels or counter values if the val-
ues change during the balance (lock zero balancing via in the Zero balancing
group of the DAQ channels tab). Otherwise this can lead to invalid values, e.g. 0.3
as zero value for a digital input that can only be 0 or 1 but has changed its status
during the measurement.
You have to reset computation channels of a device (On-Board functions) using the
appropriate function, for example with Reset for a peak value memory.
For QuantumX MXFS, you can set the currently measured wavelength as a new ref-
erence wavelength by choosing Reset reference wavelength (Zero balancing group
on DAQ channels tab). The ‘normal’ zero balance is only computed with the scaled
values of a sensor adaptation, not with the display of a wavelength.

13.14 Panel (and print page) options

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Panels (Visualization group)
on the left.

Drop of channel onto a panel in DAQ mode creates

When a channel is dragged onto a blank location of a panel in DAQ mode, in the default
setting a dialog is shown in which you can select the object to be created. You can how-
ever also create other objects without a query. A post-process graph is always generated
in Analysis mode.

Max.number of objects per type in the project

The specified number applies to all panels and print pages together and each of the
objects specified in brackets. In the default setting you can therefore create a total of 256
digital indicators and 256 bar indicators and 256 analog meters on all panels and print
pages together. Note that memory in the PC RAM is reserved for all (possible) objects, so
do not set the values unnecessarily high. If required, you can save a project, increase the
number and then reload the project and create further objects. The maximum number of
objects of one type is 32,000.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 443
Maximum number of plots per graph
Default setting, which you can change in any graph if you want to display more plots; see
Configure graph. Since the setting applies to all graphs, and requires additional memory,
it is better to change the setting only for the graphs that you want to display more plots.

Allow automatic visualization layout (only QuantumX/SomatXR)

The option has the effect that with no visualization on starting a DAQ job in the dialog for
the visualizations, a further option is shown—the automatic visualization layout. In this
process the existing channels are automatically assigned, and a Scope panel with four
Scope graphs is created per QuantumX/SomatXR module.

Auto-assign channels when creating new objects

By default, when an object is created it is always assigned a DAQ channel to display. For
the first object the first DAQ channel, then the second, etc.
For the standard objects, it is enough to drag one or more channels to an empty loc-
ation in the panel to display those channels in one or more objects (you get a selec-
tion menu).

Print pages only

If you are using panels and print pages, you can print everything using the menu File ►
Print ► Print visualization. Activate this option to print only the print pages, but not the
panels. To be able to only print a panel despite this, display the panel and use the menu
File ► Print ► Print panel/page.

Use channel colors as default for plot colors

Activates use of the assigned colors in the DAQ channels tab (or Signal plan) when
adding channels to the graph and the multi-bar graph. Each channel is initially shown in
the defined color, but you can change the color for individual objects via the configuration
of the relevant plot. You can hide the column with the colors in the DAQ channels tab if
you deactivate the option; see Program options Channel list.
If you want to load multiple files of a DAQ project in Analysis mode (same channels
or channel name), you should deactivate the option. Since the plot color is saved
with the measurements, this has the effect that the same channel always receives
the same color from several tests and the tests cannot be differentiated from one
another in a graph.

catman
444 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
Use channel colors as default for display text
The colors assigned on the DAQ channels tab (or Signal plan) are used for displaying the
channel (unit and measured value) in a digital indicator.

Align objects to grid

The option allows positioning and resizing of objects on grid positions only, even if the
grid is not visible.
You can also enable display of the grid, the grid width and the alignment directly in
the configuration dialog of a panel.

Allow panel size larger than screen size

The option is only still available for compatibility reasons. If not all visualization objects
are visible, catman automatically displays scroll bars.

Switch visualization to execution mode during the DAQ job execution

The option is helpful when you are using buttons or other input objects (Developer tools,
Controller group). The switch to execution mode then occurs automatically after the start
of a DAQ job. A disadvantage is that in this mode the creation or configuration of visu-
alization objects is no longer possible. However, with the option active you can also
switch back to Design mode via the Execution mode menu (on the right above the rib-
bon).

Graph null value

The option is used to suppress the display of unwanted values. The function is used for
example to suppress the display of invalid measurements. The default value is 0 for the x
axis and -1,000,000 (overflow value) for the y axis.
See also Display overflow values as, Data cleansing.

Display of units
Here you can define how the representation of the unit is to appear after the title of an
axis legend. As standard, for example, in %u. The notations often used, [%u] and (%u), are
not permissible according to DIN 1313, DIN 461 and EN ISO 80000-1.

Graph export dialog

The option defines the default settings for the dialog which you are shown on calling the
Export/print context menu for a graph. You can change the values in the dialog before the
required action.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 445
13.15 Style options
Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Style (User interface group)
on the left.

The dialog enables you to choose from various color schemes for the display of the rib-
bon and windows. Restart catman to see the effect of changes.

13.16 Customize user interface options

See also Show icon on tab (of Panels and Print pages).

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on Adapt (User interface group)
on the left.

With this dialog you can customize catman according to your needs and preferences. The
following list sets out some potential applications: Don't forget to save your changes so
that they will be available the next time catman starts. When saving, catman auto-
matically asks if you want to load the settings on the next startup; see also Program start
options.

Hiding the ribbon (temporarily)

To hide and show the menu ribbon use and on the right above the menu ribbon.
Then you have more space available for the main window. Click on the still visible area
(the name) of a tab to temporarily display it so as to select an action.
With Hide all catman tabs, Hide catman menu or Hide ribbon bar and menu completely
you can permanently hide the components in question. The options are only useful if you
are able to execute the required actions via buttons or a dedicated menu or ribbon.

Specify which tab is displayed first in DAQ mode and which in Analysis mode
Click on the tab you want under catman tabs, and on the right choose Default tab in DAQ
project/Analysis project. The only setting that is not possible is the setting for switching
from DAQ to Analysis mode. Here, the DataViewer tab is always displayed first.

Hide individual tabs or groups within a tab

Click on the tab you want under catman tabs, or call up the tab's groups view and click on
the group you want. Deactivate Visible … on the right.

catman
446 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
 Some tabs or groups are only displayed if the related actions are supported by one
of the connected devices. The Optical measurement group on the DAQ channels
tab, for example, is only displayed if a device of that type is connected. You do not
need to explicitly mask this group out if you do not have an FS22 BraggMETER.

If you mark catman tab, you can hide various sections of the user interface on the
right under General settings. This is useful, for example, when a user is only to be
able to start one DAQ project. Then carry out the “key” actions to start or stop mea-
surement using buttons on the Panels for example.

Specify, how the program window is to be displayed

In the dialog at the bottom right you can set a specific size or, for example, leave the win-
dow permanently maximized. If you activate Hide minimize button, then catman cannot
be unintentionally minimized (reduced) to the Windows start bar.

Define your own groups on the tabs of catman

Select the tab you want and click on New group. On the right assign the Name (only
necessary for EasyScript and AutoSequences) and Title. If applicable also define an icon.
Then mark your new group and produce a New control (button in the group). As actions,
which can be controlled by such buttons, you have the predefined actions and the clone
actions (as for Buttons), AutoSequences and EasyScript available.

Create your own tabs (user tabs)

Select User tab and click on New tab. On the right assign the Name (only necessary for
EasyScript and AutoSequences) and Title, and specify how and when the tab is to be dis-
played. Then produce groups and buttons which are to be displayed on the tab and
assign the actions. As actions you have the predefined actions and the clone actions (as
for Buttons), AutoSequences and EasyScript available.

Create your own context menu entries

Select the context menu entry under which you want the new entry to appear and click on
New control. On the right side issue the Name (only necessary for EasyScript and
AutoSequences) and Title, and specify how and when the context menu is to be dis-
played. As actions you have the predefined actions and the clone actions (as for Buttons),
AutoSequences and EasyScript available.

Icons for a GUI file are initially searched for in the same folder as the GUI file. If they
are not found there, the default folder for images is searched; see Program options:

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 447
 Folders.

13.17 EasyScript options

See also EasyScript.

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on EasyScript (Developer
group) on the left side. The EasyScript option must be enabled in order to use the setting.

Display Script Quick Access Window automatically on program start

This window gives you access to the key script functions without opening the Script
Editor tab. With the Quick Start window you can:
Open an EasyScript project
Start a script
Terminate a script
Run individual procedure
Open the EasyScript editor

Start script automatically on opening the DAQ job

This starts an EasyScript contained in the project on opening a DAQ or Analysis project.

Start script automatically on starting the DAQ job

Starts the currently loaded script on starting a DAQ job. This means that you can ter-
minate a script after execution if it is no longer needed after a DAQ job. It is then auto-
matically started again during the next start of the DAQ job.

Enable catman basic services

Since catman accesses the catman Professional data acquisition software via ActiveX,
you too can also access functions of the catman Professional DLL. When you activate the
option, the object catman is created and made available for the script. You can then
address the ActiveX interface via this object.

There is normally no need to access the catman Professional object. In rare cases
however it may prove to be useful to have access to the catman basic services, for
example, to execute a catScript command. You should only use this if you are very
familiar with how catman Professional works. Otherwise this may lead to the cat-
man program crashing.

catman
448 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
 ActiveX interface commands are listed in a document in the catman installation
folder (“catInterface_Help.chm”).

Help and Code Builder

In the default setting the Code Builder works together directly with the EasyScript Help:
On clicking a function or action in the Code Builder, the associated syntax description is
already superimposed in the lower section of the editor. With these options you can:
Superimpose the Code Builder in the default setting (on calling the editor). Then you
have more space available for the script editor.
Deactivate the automatic display of the syntax description (context help).
Display the help in a dedicated window (WebHelp). This is especially advantageous
when working with two screens, because then the help can be displayed on the
second screen and does not take up space in the catman window.
You can also call the EasyScript Help as HTMLHelp (without context help):
“EasyScriptHelp.chm” in the catman installation folder.

Code generation: Automatically insert #uses directive when creating a new mod-
ule
Each module which wants to run a procedure from another module must declare the
name of this module with '#uses. If the declaration is missing from the module header,
the procedure to be called will not be recognized. On starting the script you then obtain
the error message “Unknown identifier” at the point of the call.
With this option you specify that catman automatically inserts the #uses directive in all
existing modules when adding a new module.
If catman does not find the module specified in a #uses directive, then your script
does not start.

13.18 Options for AutoSequences

See also AutoSequences.

Call the dialog via the menu File ► Options and then click on AutoSequence (Developer
group) on the left.

In the default setting DAQ jobs are terminated when an error occurs in the AutoSequence
or the sequence has been terminated manually.

catman
13 PROGRAM OPTIONS 449
In the default setting the time channels, as in the interactive mode, are also not displayed
anywhere. Here, you can define that the time channels are displayed in the pick list of the
AutoSequence commands.

catman
450 13 PROGRAM OPTIONS
14 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

Please always have your license number ready. You will find this in the catman info
window (About catman menu item in the Help menu).

If you encounter any problems when working with catman, you can use the following ser-
vices from HBM:

E-mail support
[email protected]

Telephone support
Telephone support is available on all working days from 09:00 to 5:00 PM (CET):
+49 6151 803-0

Fax support
+49 6151 803-9100

We recommend that you complete the registration dialog (see Licensing and regis-
tration) and send the data to HBM. You will then receive separate telephone num-
bers from HBM for direct catman support. In addition—provided your maintenance
and service contract is valid—you will be informed when a new version is available
and will also receive your new license number.

System info file

To enable you to give HBM support information about your PC system, generate a system
info file using the dialog with the license details (Info in the start window or About cat-
man item in the Help menu). Before generating the file CATMAN_SYSINFO.TXT, you can
select the file path and the path is also displayed again after it is produced.

You also have the following possibilities available:

Use the video tutorials on the HBM website:
https://www.hbm.com/de/6416/catman-daq-software-knowledge-base/
or the HBM seminars:
https://www.hbm.com/de/0224/seminars-trainings-events-tradeshows/.

HBM Support and Sales International

https://www.hbm.com/worldwide-contacts/

catman
14 TECHNICAL SUPPORT 451
Download software updates from HBM

https://www.hbm.com/Support
Please note that the new software versions (e.g. 5.0, 5.1, etc.) also require a new license
number. Therefore make sure you register (see Licensing and registration), thereby activ-
ating your service contract. If you are just downloading a later release (error correction,
e.g. 5.3.1, 5.3.2 etc.), you do not need a new license number.

catman
452 14 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
15 GLOSSARY

This section contains explanations of various terms used in catman or in measurement

equipment operated by catman.

15.1 Alias, Alias effect

See also Which sample rate is the right one?, Anti-alias filter

Signal in the output of an A/D converter, which does not correspond to any measuring sig-
nal and occurs due to under-sampling (too low sample rate) of the analog signal. An anti-
alias filter is often used to prevent this. The effect arises when signals with more than
half the sampling frequency are present on the input of the A/D converter.

15.2 Anti-alias filter

See also Filters, Setting filters manually, Which sample rate is the right one?

This filter is necessary in some measuring devices so that the A/D converter will not
receive any frequency located above half the sample rate. This would lead to incorrect val-
ues: oscillation of a (very low) frequency, which is not present in the signal, would be dis-
played. Such a filter is not necessary for QuantumX/SomatXR and MGCplus, as the A/D
converter converts using a much higher frequency than the signal bandwidth of the
respective amplifier channel. Through this and the integrated conversion procedure, high
frequency noise will be effectively suppressed and no aliasing will occur in the measuring
device. However, a similar effect can arise if not all measured values are passed on to cat-
man. Therefore a filter with 15% of the sample rate is used as default.
Filters with Bessel characteristic create no signal distortion, but have a relatively
flat frequency response. In case of high-frequency interference at high amplitudes,
you should therefore set the cutoff frequency to 5% of the sample rate, or use filters
with Butterworth characteristics..

15.3 APIPA
Automatic Private IP Addressing is a method of interconnecting devices in local networks
in which no configuration is necessary. The devices automatically configure their network
interfaces, find each other mutually and are then able to exchange data with each other.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 453
The mechanisms required to do this are available in Microsoft Windows and in the Quan-
tumX/SomatXR modules as well as the CP52 of MGCplus. They are only used if no fixed
address is set, which means that DHCP must be set.

15.4 Autocalibration
The so-called autocalibration improves the long-term stability (aging) and—if there are
temperature changes where the measurement device is located—also the short-term sta-
bility of a measuring amplifier. The autocalibration function differs however depending on
the device type and can only be influenced on the MGCplus and some module types of
QuantumX/SomatXR.

MGCplus
The autocalibration of the MGCplus interrupts the measurement, because during the
autocalibration (approx. 300 ms) no measured values are available from transducers but
rather only the internal calibration signals (zero and reference signal) are available. There-
fore, the autocalibration is switched off as factory default. If you are carrying out a slow
measurement using sample rates under 10 Hz, you can however activate a cyclic autocal-
ibration (approx. every 5 minutes).

During autocalibration, the last measured values will be output both via the inter-
face and also via the analog output (if available) until new measured values are
available.

You can activate or deactivate the autocalibration of the MGCplus via the Channel
info window.

QuantumX/SomatXR

MX840, MX440
With full and half bridges (strain gauge or inductive), with LVDTs and potentiometric
transducers all four possible settings are available. With measurement with ther-
mocouples and in the 100 mV direct voltage measurement range the settings 1 and 4 as
well as a modified variant of setting 3 are available: By measuring the zero signal, (only)
an offset correction (zero-point drift) is performed. For all other sensors and measuring
ranges no autocalibration takes place (autocalibration deactivated).

catman
454 15 GLOSSARY
MX1615/MX1616
With strain-gauge full and half bridges you can choose between the settings 1, 3 and 4.
Setting 2 is not available for this module. For all other sensors and measuring ranges no
autocalibration takes place (autocalibration deactivated).

Available settings
1. Off
The autocalibration is deactivated. This setting is only recommended for short-
term measurements.
2. Background calibration
This is the type of calibration preferred for the module. Every x minutes (period) the
second measuring amplifier (see background information below) is disconnected
for about 300 ms from the measurement signal and calibrated. The actual amp-
lifier is adjusted based on the data obtained. However, with very small signals and
high resolutions this disconnection and reconnection may lead to (slight) dis-
tortion in the measurement signal.
3. Direct calibration
Every x minutes (period) the measuring amplifier is disconnected from the mea-
surement signal and calibrated. The measurement signal is frozen during this time
(about 300 ms) (results in a plateau in the signal curve). This corresponds to the
autocalibration process of the MGCplus.
4. Automatic
The setting for this module recommended by HBM and the selected measurement
range are used. This is generally the background calibration if this is available.

You change the type of autocalibration of the MX module using Sensor ► Autocal-
ibration in the Sensor group of the DAQ channels tab.

Background information
Really, the term autocalibration is incorrect, because here not only are any changes in the
zero-point and gain of the measuring amplifier measured, they are also corrected. It is
therefore actually an auto-adjustment. The term autocalibration is however widely used
for this process in measurement technology.
Internally, the MX modules use two measuring amplifiers which are located on one chip
and therefore have practically identical behavior. One of them performs the actual mea-
surement, the other is calibrated with a high-precision calibration signal. For this pur-
pose, after the specified period this amplifier is connected to the calibration signal for

catman
15 GLOSSARY 455
about 300 ms. If different values are then produced at the output of this amplifier, the
amplifier is readjusted accordingly with the actual measurement signal.

15.5 catman working directory

See also Folder options.

All the files and folders required by catman, for example for the sensor database, saving
data or projects and the temporary data storage, are created in the catman working direc-
tory. You can change some of these folders and paths with catman options. The catman
working directory also contains some examples, such as the AutoSequence examples.
In the default setting the catman working directory is generated in the “My Docu-
ments\HBM” folder of the user logged in to Windows.

15.6 Characteristic value

This is the output signal of the transducer at Nominal value, e.g. 2 mV/V at 50 kN.
Depending on the manufacturer, however, you will also find transducers where the sens-
itivity is not referred to the Excitation voltage, e.g. 20 mV with 10 V Excitation voltage (cor-
responding to 2 mV/V). Another possibility is to specify the sensitivity for a transducer as
a measurement under certain conditions, e.g. 0.2019 mV with 10 V excitation voltage and
1 bar, together with the specification of the nominal load (500 bar). This corresponds to a
value of 0.02019 mV/V with 1 bar or a sensitivity of 10.1 mV/V (for 500 bar).

15.7 Compatibility mode

Compatibility mode is no longer available since catman 4.1.2. You need to update older
modules.
For updating older modules you need the appropriate firmware file. Depending on the
existing firmware, you may also have to download the program „QuantumXFirmware
Updater” and perform the update in several steps. Contact HBM Technical Support about
this.

15.8 DAQ job

A DAQ job contains the definition, such as how and with which channels measurements
have to be made and what happens to the data after the measurement as well as how

catman
456 15 GLOSSARY
and which parameters are saved. You can define multiple jobs and execute them singly
or all together (one after another).
With the MGCplus, you can transfer the job settings also to the CP42/52 and have the
MGCplus execute the measurement autonomously (On-Board recording).
Using AutoSequences you can execute and change jobs also controlled by the process.

15.9 DAQ project

A DAQ project contains all settings required for setting up the measuring chain (sensor
description, zero values, scalings), all settings for the measurement and for the visu-
alization. DAQ projects, which you save in the Analysis or Demo modes, contain in the
default setting only the computation templates and visualization settings, but you can
also save measurement data.
If you load a DAQ project having channels which are no longer available in the current
device configuration, these channels will be deactivated. A warning is shown, if a different
channel configuration is found. Check the Initialization log which contains a full descrip-
tion of the problem. However, if the device specified is not found, the loading process will
be canceled. If another device is found, you have the possibility of applying the settings
for devices where the addresses are different to the original ones. If the project sensors
are not present in the Sensor database, they cannot be updated. With CAN signals the
channel names as well as the messages and signal numbers are checked; otherwise the
setting will not be transferred. We recommend however that you check the signals. Even
using this method, there is no guarantee that the same signal as in the original project is
concerned.
If errors occurred during loading, you are asked whether you want to see the initialization
log. However, you can always open (and print out) the initialization log with Initialization
log (DAQ channels tab, Special group).
When loading a project, all zero values saved (Zero balancing) are restored, depend-
ing on the device used either in the device or in catman.

15.10 DHCP
In conjunction with a server, DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) facilitates the
automatic assignment of an IP address in the network. When this automatic reference of
the address is set on a module (client), you do not need to do anything else. On switching

catman
15 GLOSSARY 457
on the module an address is requested from the server and it is then set. In addition other
parameters can be defined by the network administrator which can also be set.
If you would like to work with DHCP with the QuantumX/SomatXR, we recommend des-
pite this, that a permanent address is issued from the server via the MAC address by the
network administrator, because then the module is always accessible via the same
address. This is better for some programs, because here when changing addresses, the
configuration must always be modified.

15.11 Electrical measuring range

The electrical measuring range of a transducer is the maximum electrical signal that the
transducer produces under operating conditions. As a rule, this is the output signal at
nominal load. This value must sometimes be specified to ensure that the amplifier con-
nected is not overloaded.

15.12 Excitation voltage

Many transducers are passive, particularly all strain gage and piezoresistive transducers.
Therefore a excitation voltage is required in order to obtain an output signal. Different
voltages ranging from 0.5 V to over 10 V are allowed, depending on the transducer. Check
the technical data: If a nominal excitation voltage is given, it must be used. If a range is
given, it is recommended that you use the maximum excitation voltage of that range in
order to receive the best possible signal (signal to noise ratio).
With strain gages, select an appropriate voltage, depending on the size of the strain gage,
its resistance and the material onto which it is cemented. This will usually be in the range
0.5 V to 5 V. If in doubt, ask the person who installed the strain gages.

15.13 Execution mode

As soon as you use an interactive object, such as a controller or a button, or have activ-
ated one of the additional modules, AutoSequences or EasyScript, the Design mode menu
item appears on the right above the ribbon.
Click on Design mode to switch to Execution mode and vice versa. The following is done
only in execution mode:
AutoSequences assigned to an object, predefined actions, clone actions, or
EasyScript procedures,

catman
458 15 GLOSSARY
 values of input objects (Controller group) applied in computations.

As long as you are in Execution mode (on the right above the ribbon) you cannot
move any interactive object. Configuration is also restricted.

15.14 File extensions used by catman

catman uses the following file extensions for identification:
*.MEP: DAQ project
*.OFP: Analysis project
*.MEV: DAQ project visualization
*.OFV: Analysis project visualization
*.PAN: Panel
*.GRF: Template for various graphical objects
*.METER: Template for Digital indicators, Analog meters and Bar indicators
*.GUI: GUI extension
*.SDB: Sensor database
*.VPT: Test parameters
*.EXP: Analysis project export list
*.BIN: Measured data in binary form
*.TST: Test parameters related to the measured data (also used with Fast Stream)
*.EVENT: Events occurring during the DAQ job.
*.XLS or XLSX: Measured data in Excel format (Excel workbook)
*.TSX: Test parameters for Excel export (in ASCII format)
*.DAT: NI DIAdem format
*.DAC: nSoft DAC (nCode) format
*.MDF: MDF 3 format
*.MAT: MATLAB format
*.TIM: RPC III time history format
*.S3T: HBM nCode s3t format
*.MF4: MDF 4 (ASAM) format
*.UFF: UFF58 (Universal File Format 58)

For AutoSequences the following file extensions are used:

*.TSQP: AutoSequence project

catman
15 GLOSSARY 459
*.TSQ: Single AutoSequence

For EasyScript the following file extensions are used:

*.ESP: Script project
*.BAS: Code module
*.CLS: Class module

15.15 Hysteresis
The optimal level of the hysteresis (hysteresis bandwidth) depends on the inter-
ference level on your signal. It is only considered if the alarm and warning levels are
identical.

Hysteresis prevents 'jitter' of the limit switch on reaching the switching threshold due to
noise or interference on the signal. Depending on the switching direction, the hysteresis
is located below or above the switching level.

Example of a high level crossing

Example of a low level crossing

Examples
Alarm level 2 kg, Warning level 1 kg, Hysteresis 0.1 kg

catman
460 15 GLOSSARY
In the High level crossing switching direction the Warning limit action is triggered on
exceeding the 1 kg level; the Alarm limit action is triggered on exceeding the 2 kg level.
When 2 kg is undercut, initially no change occurs. Resetting the alarm condition here only
occurs when the warning level of 1 kg has also been undercut.

Alarm level 2 kg, Warning level 2 kg, Hysteresis 0.1 kg

In the High level crossing switching direction the Alarm limit action is triggered on
exceeding the 2 kg level. Resetting of the alarm condition occurs on undercutting 1.9 kg
(2 - 0.1).

15.16 Initialization log

The Initialization log (DAQ channels tab, Special group) contains all errors which
occurred when opening a project and initializing the channels. Column Cause contains
possible explanations and helps you in solving the problem.

15.17 IRIG-B
IRIG (Inter Range Instrumentation Group) is a United States Air Force organization. The
IRIG time is used primarily in the military sector for video and data recordings. Here, there
are various variants which are differentiated by an additional letter; they are not com-
patible to one another. Current standards are IRIG 200-98 (1998) and IRIG 200-04 (2004).
The QuantumX/SomatXR modules MX840A/MX840B and MX440A/MX440B can use the
IRIG-B process. For this you have to assign IRIG-B as a sensor to the channel to which
the IRIG time source is connected.
In some formats IRIG-B uses the number of seconds since the start of the current year,
so you must then also state the current year and the time zone in the dialog for the time
synchronization.

15.18 Isochronous data transfer

The Isochronous data transfer must be activated for all signals which are to be used as
source signal for another module. In this way the data interchange between the various
modules is activated and it is thus ensured that the relevant values are transmitted over
FireWire and the other modules are available. The activation is carried out automatically
when creating computations in catman; you can also carry them out via the DAQ chan-
nels tab and Active (Channel group). If the ISO column is displayed, one click in this

catman
15 GLOSSARY 461
column is sufficient.
See also Specifying columns to display (Channel list options).

15.19 Job list

List of the active DAQ jobs. You can change the sequence of the DAQ jobs in the list and
run the list. catman then executes all the DAQ jobs consecutively as given in the list. A
break can only be made to repeat a DAQ job, not between the different DAQ jobs.

15.20 Limit load

Maximum load on the transducer (force, displacement, pressure, torque, etc.). If this limit
is exceeded, the transducer is damaged.

15.21 Link resource conflict

See also Device reset/factory settings

A link resource conflict can only occur with the MGCplus.

With the multi-channel plug-in modules only one signal per channel can be output, i.e.
not gross and net signals simultaneously. If other plug-in modules, for example an ML70,
an ML78 or an On-Board recording, access one signal, an attempt to measure the other
signal leads to a link resource conflict.
If you do not wish to carry out a measurement via On-Board, you should delete the
parameter set 0 (flash memory). The settings defined there are activated each time
the MGCplus is switched on, thus determining the “selected” signals of the indi-
vidual channels, even when no measurement is taking place.

Example
A plug-in module, for example an ML78, is connected to the gross signal of a multi-chan-
nel plug-in module and an On-Board recording is defined. When you now attempt to
measure the net signal, a link resource conflict arises, because the gross signal is already
assigned.

catman
462 15 GLOSSARY
15.22 Log file (system log)
In the log catman enters the start and termination of the program with the date and time.
Other entries are not currently carried out by catman. However, using the options, you can
specify that further information is to be logged; see Options for safety.
Call the log via File ► Special functions or via Special ► Display system log on the DAQ
channels tab.
Since the system log from catman 4.2 is a normal text file, you can edit the content with
any text editor.
Above a file size of 1 MByte, the current log file is saved with the current date and
time as the file name, and a new file is created in the catman work folder. Delete old
files manually as required. Larger files arise particularly when you carry out further
entries in the log, e.g. to log events and limit infringements.

15.23 MAC address

Internationally this is the unique address of an Ethernet adapter. Often the address is
coded in the hardware and cannot be changed. This means that in networks a device can
be unambiguously identified even without an IP address. The MAC address of a Quan-
tumX/SomatXR is stated on the MX module and is identical to the UUID or the serial num-
ber. However, in contrast to the serial number, it is stated in hexadecimal notation.

15.24 Message bar

The message bar is located below the ribbon and is used for various purposes:
Start and termination of a DAQ job are indicated.
All events (limit/event monitoring) since the start of catman are brought together in
a list with the date and the time of their occurrence. You can display this list here
during the measurement. Click on Previous to view older messages.

See also Job status window.

15.25 Network segment

A larger Ethernet network is usually divided into several segments, e.g. for the various
departments. For example, the same network segment is present with the following

catman
15 GLOSSARY 463
addresses: 192.168.169.21 and 192.168.169.84. Both groups of numbers are identical
apart from the last group and are therefore located in the same segment. With suitable
subnet masks however addresses in which only two groups of numbers are identical can
also be used for communication and data transfer.

15.26 Nominal value

The (physical) nominal value of a transducer is the nominal load (or force, displacement,
pressure, torque, etc.) value of the transducer. This indicates the end of the usable mea-
suring range, as the technical data, such as the linearity deviation, is only guaranteed up
to the nominal value. If the transducer is subjected to higher loads, the specifications can
be exceeded. If the Limit load is also exceeded, the transducer is damaged.

15.27 NTP time

The NTP (Network Time Protocol) time is the number of seconds elapsed since midnight
(00:00 hours) on January 1, 1970, with a resolution of better than one microsecond. It is
always stored in catman in 8-byte format (double precision), and a separate time channel
is used for each sample rate. An NTP time server can be, but does not have to be, syn-
chronized with a time server on the Internet.
Further information can be found at http://www.meinberg.de and
http://www.pool.ntp.org.

15.28 Panel
See also Panels and Print pages, visualizations

Window for displaying the measurement data during the measurement. Use the bar
above the Panel for browsing if you have created a number of Panels or Print pages. You
can position various graphics objects for displaying measurements or texts (toolbar on
the far right) on a Panel.
Panels are only printed as screen copies (with pixel resolution). The section between the
list of available Panels and the lower status line is copied, appropriately scaled if required,
and the dialog for selecting a printer displayed.
Panels and Print pages are numbered incrementally and there is no dedicated count-
ing method just for Panels or just for Print pages, but you can issue names for bet-

catman
464 15 GLOSSARY
 ter identification. The Scope and Floating panels use their own numbering, but can
be renamed.

15.29 Placeholders
See also Standard folders.

You can use placeholders at various points:

With the DAQ jobs in path and file names.
With the limit value and event monitoring in path and file names for the log file.
With files for video recordings in path and file names.
With the limit value and event monitoring in the email subject and in the email mes-
sage.
In titles for graphs.
During the execution of an action the placeholders are then replaced by the actual texts,
e.g. the date or time inserted in the file names, a measurement in the log file or in an
email message.

Not all placeholders are possible at all places; this is indicated in the following overview.

Placeholders Explanation
Uses the path from which the project was loaded or where the
current project was last saved. The last action determines the
name. If no project has been loaded or saved since starting ...,
%ProjectDir%
you are prompted to give the project a path and file name
when starting the DAQ job. The current project is saved when
you do so.

Path and file name of the file with the measurement data are
inserted. This placeholder is only available for the path and file
%TestFile% name of a video recording and is supplemented in the default
setting with the name of the camera (%Camera%). You can
also use the placeholder as a graph title.

File name of the file with the measurement data are inserted.
%TestFileName%
You can use the placeholder as a graph title for example.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 465
 The name of the current camera is inserted. This placeholder
%Camera%
is only available for the file name of a video recording.

%Job% The name of the current DAQ job is inserted.

Year, month, day, hour, minute and second are each linked
%DateTime%
with _ and inserted as double-figure numbers.

The current year number is inserted as a double-figure number

%yy%
(the last two places).

%mm% The current month is inserted as a double-figure number.

%dd% The current day is inserted as a double-figure number.

%h% The current hour is inserted (single or double-figure).

%m% The current minute is inserted (single or double-figure).

%s% The current second is inserted (single or double-figure).

The hours, minutes and seconds are each linked with _ and
%hhmmss%
inserted as double-figure numbers.

Generates a counter with two or three digits, i.e. with leading

zeros. Every time you save the counter is incremented by one;
the start value is 01 or 001. The count is saved when you exit
catman, and is also used the next time catman starts if you
%00% and %000%
specify one of the counter placeholders in the file name. The
count is saved system-wide (per PC), i.e. not separately for
each user. Reset the counter with Counter reset or the script
command EA_Job.GlobalTestCounter.

The name of the event or limit value is inserted. This place-

%Event% holder is only practicable with limit value and event mon-
itoring.

The name of the channel is inserted which has triggered the

%EventChannel% event. This placeholder is only available with limit value and
event monitoring.

catman
466 15 GLOSSARY
 The current measured value of the specified channel is inser-
%MV_<Channel_ ted. Replace the <Channel_Name> by the name of the channel
Name>% whose measured value is to be used. This placeholder is only
available with limit value and event monitoring.

The current unit of the specified channel is inserted. Replace

%UN_<Channel_ the <Channel_Name> by the name of the channel whose unit is
Name>% to be used. This placeholder is only available with limit value
and event monitoring.

Test parameters can also be inserted; for this, use the name of
Test parameters the test parameter, preceded and followed by a %. For example
write %Department% for the test parameter Department.

No equal signs ("=") may occur in the Name of a test parameter. On the other hand,
it is allowed in the Value.

Example of an email text

In the channel Force_le_top the limit value of 85 N was exceeded by 10:13, and in this
case 93.3128 N was recorded in the channel Force_ri_top. In order to retain this entry (the
event is triggered by exceeding 85 N in the channel Force_le_top), enter the following in
the field for the email text:
In the channel %EventChannel% the limit value of 85 N was exceeded by %h%:%m%, and
in this case %MV_Force_ri_top% %UN_Force_ri_top% was recorded in the channel Force_
ri_top.

Example of file name

C:\Data\Force measurements\2012_12_06\Job1_John_11_27_18.bin. To obtain this file
name when the DAQ job has the name Job1 and the test parameters Operator (John) and
Test_type (Force measurements) exist, enter the following into the field for the file name:
C:\data\%test_type%\20%yy%_%mm%_%dd%\%Job%_%operator%_hhmmss%

15.30 Plot legend

The plot legend displays the color, style and name of a plot. It is located at the top edge
of a graph:

catman
15 GLOSSARY 467
Left-click on the plot legend to move a plot into a new axis layer (axis scaling).

15.31 Print page

See also Panels and Print pages, visualizations

This is a window for arranging pages which are to be printed out. Use the bar above the
print page to browse if you have created several Panels or print pages. The page has the
page format (portrait/landscape) set in the configuration dialog. Since Print pages are
first printed out after a measurement, it is not practicable to use real-time displays. The
selection of these objects is therefore rejected with an appropriate message.
For each page you can specify different header and footer lines or define a different page
format.
Panels and Print pages are numbered incrementally and there is no dedicated count-
ing method just for Panels or just for Print pages, but you can issue names for bet-
ter identification. The Scope and Floating panels use their own numbering, but can
be renamed.

15.32 PTP
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is a network protocol that handles the synchronization
of devices in a (local) Ethernet network. There can be a special time server in the network,
but also all devices can "communicate" with each other, and use the best as the Sync
leader. Devices can therefore be both Sync follower and Sync leader. PTP is usually imple-
mented in hardware, such as in the newer QuantumX modules with B and C functionality,
and SomatXR modules, thereby achieving very high accuracy. The time deviation is smal-
ler than with NTP, and is less than 1 µs (MGCplus with CP52: 10 µs). PTP is defined in
IEEE 1588 and BS IEC 61588.

The protocol requires special Ethernet switches, and QuantumX modules with B or
C functionality or SomatXR modules.

A PTP time server can be configured on the network in order to use the PTP time format.
This is not essential, however, because in this mode even without a PTP time server the

catman
468 15 GLOSSARY
devices exchange times with each other and synchronize to the "best" module
(Grandleader Clock).

15.33 Regular expression

This section provides a brief introduction to regular expressions, with examples. Further
information can also be found on numerous Internet websites. Note, however, that all
functions that allow you to replace text, for example, are not available in catman, as only
search criteria can be used.
A regular expression in effect depicts a search pattern. There are some special char-
acters that are used to control settings, and consequently must be entered in a specific
way if you want to search for them. The most important of them is the backslash \. So to
search for it you have to enter \\. This is also referred to as an escape sequence. In con-
junction with the backslash, there are a number of special escape sequences that you
can use to control your search; see table.
If you are using regular expressions for the first time, you should be aware that for-
mulating them is not easy. You can certainly generate quite complicated searches.
But sometimes the results can be rather surprising—at least initially—and not as
you first thought. If that happens, try to find results with part of your search text
first, and add more parts subsequently.

Control codes of importance for searching

Control
Meaning
code
() Groups a search input

Allows you to specify multiple characters that are, or may be, contained
[] in the text you are searching for (depends on the expression after the
bracket).

[^ ] Finds everything except the characters in brackets after the ^.

{n} Corresponds to the previous element exactly n times.

{n,} Corresponds to the previous element at least n times.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 469
 Control
Meaning
code
Corresponds to the preceding element at least n times, but no more than
{n, m}
m times.

? Corresponds to the previous element not at all or once.

* Corresponds to the previous element not at all or more than once.

+ Corresponds to the previous element once or more than once.

Corresponds to any element separated by a vertical line, i.e. an OR oper-

|
ation logically linking multiple elements.

. The dot corresponds to any character.

\r Corresponds to a carriage return, i.e. Return or Enter (CR).

\n Corresponds to a line feed. In Windows \r\n is usually used (CR+LF).

Corresponds to any alphanumeric character. Corresponds to [a-zA-Z_0-

\w
9].

W Corresponds to any character that is not an alphanumeric character.

\s Corresponds to any blank (space).

\S Corresponds to any non-blank character.

\d Corresponds to any decimal digit.

\D Corresponds to any character that is not a decimal digit.

^ The match must start at the beginning of the string.

The match must be at the end of the string or before \n at the end of the
$
string.

Examples

Regular expression What is found?

hallo Finds all texts that contain “hallo”, including in composites.

a|b Corresponds to a or b.

catman
470 15 GLOSSARY
Regular expression What is found?
gray|grey Finds gray and grey.

[a-z] Finds everything with the lower case letters from a to z.

Finds a word with 5 ASCII letters (upper or lower case) and 1

or 2 digits from the range 0 to 5 after it (without spaces). If
[A-Za-z]{5}[0-5]{1,2}
you want to search for umlauts, you must specify them like-
wise, e.g. [a-zäöü].

[^abc] Finds everything except a, b and c.

gr(a|e)y Also finds gray and grey.

b[aeiou]bble Finds babble, bebble, bibble, bobble and bubble.

[b-chm-pP]at|ot Finds bat, cat, hat, mat, nat, oat, pat, Pat and ot.

colou?r Finds color and colour.

rege(x(es)?|xps?) Finds regex, regexes, regexp and regexps.

go*gle Finds ggle, gogle, google, gooogle, goooogle, …

Finds google, googoogle, googoogoogle, googoogoogoogle,

go+gle
…

Finds google, googoogle, googoogoogle, googoogoogoogle,

g(oog)+
…

z{3} Finds zzz.

z{3,6} Finds zzz, zzzz, zzzzz and zzzzzz.

[Bb]rainf\*\*k Finds Brainf**k and brainf**k.

1\d{10} Finds an 11-digit number starting with 1.

Finds a number in the range 2 ... 36 (inclusive): the terms are

logically OR-linked. The first term finds the numbers from 2
to 9, the second term finds all numbers that start with 1 or 2
[2-9]|[12]\d|3[0-6]
and have an additional digit, i.e. 10 ... 29, and the third term
finds all numbers that start with 3 and have as their second
digit a number between 0 and 6, i.e. 30 ... 36.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 471
 Regular expression What is found?
Finds all instances where a word with 3 letters and 1 number
[a-zA-Z]{3,}\d{1}
occurs.

Finds a positive integer or a floating-point number with

\d+(\.\d\d)?
exactly 2 digits after the decimal point.

^time Finds all instances beginning with “time”.

rate$ Finds all instances ending with “rate”.

Finds all instances beginning with exactly “dog” as text (and

^dog$
nothing else).

15.34 Sample rate

See also Alias, Filter (automatic filter selection), Which sample rate is the right one?

The sample rate is the speed at which the measured values are delivered from the mea-
suring instrument to the PC. If not all data recorded by the measuring instrument (sample
rate of the A/D converter) is also passed on to the PC, the same effect as with under-
sampling can occur (measured values are omitted).

15.35 Sample-rate domain

Sample-rate domain denotes the lists available for the sample rates for newer QuantumX
modules with B or C functionality, and SomatXR modules.

Classic sample-rate domain

This is the gradation of sample rates used up to now in all HBM devices, derived from the
amplifier carrier frequencies. For the MX modules, sample rates of ... 20, 25, 50, 75, 100,
200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, 48,000, 96,000 and 192,000 Hz are avail-
able, provided they are supported by the module. Particularly at the higher sample rates,
the gradation with a portion or multiple of 4.8 kHz, the standard carrier frequency, is not-
able.

Decimal sample-rate domain

These sample rates are only available for newer QuantumX modules (B and C func-
tionality), and SomatXR modules. The sample rates are useful, for example, when MX

catman
472 15 GLOSSARY
modules are used together with other devices that use such a sample rate gradation. For
the MX modules, sample rates of ... 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 600, 1000, 2000, 2500, 5000,
10,000, 20,000, 25,000, 50,000, 100,000 and 200,000 Hz are available here, provided they
are supported by the module.

15.36 Characteristic value

This is the output signal of the transducer at Nominal value, e.g. 2 mV/V at 50 kN.
Depending on the manufacturer, however, you will also find transducers where the sens-
itivity is not referred to the Excitation voltage, e.g. 20 mV with 10 V Excitation voltage (cor-
responding to 2 mV/V). Another possibility is to specify the sensitivity for a transducer as
a measurement under certain conditions, e.g. 0.2019 mV with 10 V excitation voltage and
1 bar, together with the specification of the nominal load (500 bar). This corresponds to a
value of 0.02019 mV/V with 1 bar or a sensitivity of 10.1 mV/V (for 500 bar).

15.37 Sensor database component window

See also Using CAN signals, Help on the sensor database (in the Help menu on the
right above the ribbon).

The Sensor database component window is only displayed with the DAQ channels and
Signal plan tabs. If it has been hidden, restore it with Window ► Sensor database (on the
right above the ribbon).
Depending on the selected symbol, only certain sensors or all sensors are displayed:

shows the sensors you have created (“My sensors” group).

shows general sensor types like DC voltage, thermocouples, Pt100, optical

sensors, etc.

shows the HBK transducers (HBM and selected sensors from BKSV).

shows the sensors that can be connected to the marked channel.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 473
 shows the CAN messages and signals in the sensor database.

shows all the sensors in the sensor database at the bottom of the window.

The upper half of the window shows the groups in the selected range and the lower half
shows the list of sensors in the selected group. The list is sorted alphabetically.

In addition you have the possibility of configuring the CAN settings, e.g. setting the bit
rate (CAN configuration context menu of a CAN data base).
Place the cursor over the sensor to view comments on it (if available).

15.38 Sensor ID
See also Program options: Sensors (Channels and sensors group).

The sensor ID is used both for the unique identification string for a sensor in the Sensor
database and for the world-wide unique series number of a TEDS or T-ID module.
When a device connection is established, the sensor ID of a T-ID module is read and a
search is made in the Sensor database. If the Sensor database from which the sensor
was assigned no longer matches that of catman the sensor ID will not be found. Then
either redefine the sensor (copy the sensor ID using the context menu) or import the
sensor from the other Sensor database.
The sensor ID of a T-ID module need not necessarily be imported into the Sensor
database. In this case, ignore the message that the sensor ID was not found in the
Sensor database.

15.39 Sensor scan

See also Execute sensor scan after device connection (Device search options) as
well as the program option Sensors (Channels and sensors group) After loading a
DAQ project: Execute sensor scan and Use sensor description as channel name.

This option is only relevant when using sensors with TEDS or T-ID.

You can carry out the sensor scan manually (DAQ channels tab, TEDS scan in the Sensor
group or Sensor scan context menu) or automatically when you create or load a DAQ job.

catman
474 15 GLOSSARY
Here, provided the measurement device supports TEDS, all transducers with TEDS or T-ID
module are detected. Channels for transducers with TEDS modules with be adjusted
immediately, a search will be made in the Sensor database for the sensor ID of trans-
ducers with T-ID and, if available, the channel will also be adjusted.
Depending on the settings under the sensor options, you can also set the channels
names to the channel name saved in the TEDS (template HBM Channel Name) or—for T-
ID modules—set them to the sensor description saved in the Sensor database (Sensor
description as channel name).

If a sensor scan is initiated manually later, changes of channel names will not be
transferred, i.e. computations still use the old channel names and will therefore not
be executed.

15.40 Shortcut
Function key, e.g. F1, a single key, e.g. 2 or a key combination, e.g. + +P. You can
define shortcuts at various points in catman:
Start a certain DAQ job; refer to Specify job parameters.
Change to a certain tab, Panel, etc.; refer to Program options: Shortcut.
Executing the function assigned to a button; refer to Configure button.

15.41 Switch
A switch (Ethernet switch) is a network component which facilitates the connection of
several devices in an Ethernet network. It ensures that data do not randomly reach all the
devices in the network, but rather are sent directly from the source address to the des-
tination address. Since network devices can operate with different speeds for data trans-
fer, many switches have the possibility of individually defining the speed on each
connector. This can occur either automatically or—with so-called Managed Switches—be
determined manually.
In some cases it can occur that the speed may not be correctly detected or is frequently
repeated unnecessarily. The data transfer is then at least erroneous and consequently
very slow or it is not even established. With problems in the communication with
MGCplus or QuantumX/SomatXR set your switch to 100 Mbits Full Duplex.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 475
15.42 T-ID
Transducer Identification. The T-ID module consists of a chip that contains a globally
unique number, and is usually mounted at the sensor or in the connector housing. In a
sensor scan the number is read, e.g. from the QuantumX/SomatXR module or MGCplus
(here only for connection boards with the identifier i). The number can be compared
against the entries in a sensor database on the PC. If the number is in the sensor data-
base, the corresponding settings are transferred to the channel during initialization. Other-
wise no settings are made and an error message “T-ID not found” is displayed.

15.43 TEDS
Transducer Electronic Data Sheet. The TEDS module consists of a chip which contains an
internationally unique number, and is generally fitted in the transducer. This chip holds
the complete transducer data according to the standard IEEE 1451.4. During a Sensor
scan e.g. by a QuantumX/SomatXR module or an MGCplus (here only with connection
boards with the identifier i), the data is read out and the measuring amplifier set appro-
priately.
Special scaling, such as tabular scaling or polynomial scaling, is only accepted
when the measurement device supports this scaling. Otherwise just 2-point scaling
is applied. In case of doubt check whether your device supports special scalings.
For example, not all QuantumX/SomatXR modules support polynomial scaling; on
MGCplus only the ML38 supports it and the DMP41 does not support any poly-
nomial scaling. If necessary, transfer the TEDS data into the Sensor database and
set the sensor appropriately, because catman can accept such scaling.

Using Sensor ► Edit sensor in the Sensor group (DAQ channels tab), you can edit the
TEDS data for transducers with a TEDS module.

The following data from the Sensor database can be accepted into a TEDS module
(depending on the transducer type, not all entries may be used):
Name/Description
Serial number
Type/model (for HBM sensors only)
Manufacturer (only when the manufacturer is listed)
Calibration date
Validity of calibration
Transducer type (SG full bridge, frequency F1, etc.)

catman
476 15 GLOSSARY
 Excitation voltage
Bridge resistance
Type of characteristic curve (Zero—Span, two-point, table, etc.)
Rated outputs and table of calibration values

15.44 UDP
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a minimal network protocol which is substantially more
simply structured than that used for a network based on TCP/IP. So-called ports are used
to make data available. A port corresponds in this case to an address, but there are only
about 65000 addresses of which some are already taken up by standard functions.
QuantumX/SomatXR modules, PMX, DMP41 and MGCplus with CP52 use UDP in order to
be recognized in the network, even when the IP address is not (yet) known. The function
is triggered by the PC on searching the network for the devices. Since the port is known,
the method finds the devices very quickly.
Depending on the devices connected, open the following ports:
QuantumX/SomatXR: TCP ports 80, 5001 and 7411, UDP for ports 1200, 1201, UDP-
Multicast for ports 1300, 1301, 31 416 and 31 417, for the CX27 the TCP ports as
from 50 000,
MGCplus with CP22/42: TCP port 7 (no UDP or multicast present),
MGCplus with CP52: TCP ports 7 and 80, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31
417,
DMP41: TCP port 1234, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31 417,
PMX: TCP port 55 000, UDP-Multicast for ports 31 416 and 31 417,
FS22 BraggMETER: TCP ports 3500 and 3365,
Kistler System 2000: UDP for ports 8888 and 8889,
Kistler KiRoad: TCP ports 6155 and 6158, UDP for port 6156.
UDP is however not suitable for the reliable data transfer of readings (data can be lost).

15.45 UDP output rate

UDP packets are sent approx. every 50 to 100 ms. This occurs once all measurements
from all channels have been read in, i.e. after the retrieval of a read block. The actual data
can be output on an interval of approx. 70 µs.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 477
15.46 UUID
The UUID (Universally Unique IDentifier) is a unique number for a QuantumX/SomatXR
module which can also be determined via an interface command. It is identical to the
serial number and is stated on each module. Generally, the hexadecimal notation is used
instead of decimal, so that the identification also contains the letters A to F.

15.47 Vector CANdb (CAN database)

The CAN database from Vector Informatik GmbH has been defined by leading European
automotive manufacturers as the standard for the acquisition of devices in internal CAN
data communications in cars. It contains a list with the symbolic names and the settings
of all CAN devices which may be relevant to data acquisition. In the current version of the
sensor database you can import the classic Vector CANdb formats as well as the ARMXL
formats (version 3.2.3 and 4.2.2). These versions cannot be loaded into the MGCplus.

MGCplus
A Vector CANdb present in the ML71 is displayed in the Sensor database component win-
dow. Using the CAN configuration context menu for the entry of CAN databases, you can
also load a new Vector CANdb into the ML71.
See also Loading a CAN database.
Further information can be found in the help for MGCplus Assistant in section ML71, CAN
bus plug-in.

QuantumX/SomatXR
Import your CANdb into the Sensor database. Then assign CAN signals just like analog
sensors.

catman
478 15 GLOSSARY
15.48 Zero balancing
See also Zero value, Program options: Zero balancing (Channels and sensors
group).

The function can be locked with password protection, refer to Sensor options, Pass-
word protection.

in the ribbon of the DAQ channels tab sets the output signals of all marked channels
to zero. The values determined during zero balancing are deducted from all subsequent
measured values as the zero balance value. A different process is used depending on the
measuring device:
QuantumX/SomatXR
The zero balancing is always carried out in the device.
With QuantumX MXFS, the zero value is only computed with the scaled values of
a sensor adaptation, not with the display of a wavelength.
MGCplus
Taring is carried out for channels with sensors and linear characteristic. For
sensors that use special characteristics or characteristic corrections, the zero bal-
ancing is carried out in catman (software zero). In all other cases, zero balancing
is used in the MGCplus, for example, sensors that measure using the electrical
base unit (µm/m, ohms or mA).
With MGCplus, the net signals are always measured by catman. Measurement
of more than one signal simultaneously (for example gross and net) is not sup-
ported.
Computation channels
The zero balance is carried out in catman (software zero). Current measured
value samples are collected from all device channels beforehand however. A
check of which channels are included in a particular computation is not carried
out here.

You can prevent the zero balancing of a channel via catman by selecting Lock for the
channel (click on the arrow in Execute in the Zero balancing group).
The lock is not set in the device, only zeroing via catman is prevented.

Use the menu item Zero balance all hardware channels in the Zero balance group to
set all the (not locked) hardware channels of the connected devices to zero.

catman
15 GLOSSARY 479
15.49 Zero value
See also Zero balancing.

The output signal of the transducer under no load. Except for absolute pressure trans-
ducers, you can use this value with all resistive transducers (sensors with strain gages)
to check for transducer overload: If the zero value of the transducer has changed sub-
stantially compared to the zero value on shipping (by about 1 to 5%, depending on the
quality of the transducer), there is most likely mechanical damage, meaning the trans-
ducer is defective. The value has no practical significance beyond this, because after
installation of the transducer there is usually a completely different zero value. That value
is eliminated by zero balancing the channel.

catman
480 15 GLOSSARY
16 IND EX Activate analog outputs (Quan-
tumX/SomatXR) 89
Activate recording in device 270
+
Activate/deactivate channels 144
+, -, *, / 197 Activate/deactivate zoom 334
Adapt font size dynamically 311
3 Adapter plug for
QuantumX/SomatXR 147
3D chart 296 Add additional devices 91
Add DAQ settings to file 266
A Add devices manually 72, 91
Add EGPS 2000 91
Abbreviations and formulas used for Add peplink devices 91
strain gage rosettes 200
Add VECTORNAV 91
Absolute value 190
Add weather station 73, 91
Access (AutoSequence action list) 366
Additional devices 72
acos 190
Additional modules 168
Activate activate/deactivate 419
analog outputs of Quan- Autosequences 357
tumX/SomatXR 89
EasyMath 388
AutoSequences 419
EasyScript 409
channels 144
Enable 20
Computations 419
overview 421
EasyLog 419
Additional modules for catmanEasy 31
EasyMath 419
EasyScript 419 Additional text operators for
Limit values 419 AutoSequences 197
PC Card recording 270 Advanced (job) settings 272
Real-time computations 419 Advanced (section in Configure
save measurements for single chan- window) 314
nels 265 Advanced device scan options 89
save to file 265
After DAQ job
Sensor database 419
Compute statistics 267
temporary storage 265

catman
16 INDEX 481
After end of measurement(Event mon- Annotations 338
itoring) 216 Apparent power 209
After start of measurement (Event mon- ARAMIS
itoring) 216 Include channels 91
Algebraic computations Integrating devices 96
in real time 186 Settings 74
Linearization of sensors 189 Using channels 173
Math in Analysis mode 390 Arc functions 190
Alias name 402 arc cosine 190
Align function for objects 445 arc sine 190
Align objects with snap function/grid 283 arc tangent 190
Allocation of storage space critical 216 ARMXL formats 164, 478
Analog meter 288, 302, 307 ASCII file format 255
Analysis in Scope panel (cursor) 346 ASCII/ASCII with channel info 257, 403
Analysis in the Scope panel (Cursor) 342 asin 190
Analysis mode 14, 20, 375 Assign CAN signals 160
Compute channels automatically 379 from CANdb 166
Display measured values without load- Assign CANHEAD modules 100
ing test 378 Assign channel color 176
filters 393 Assign Print page names 283
open with analysis project 375
Assign/remove channel(s) to be dis-
set up with visualization yourself 375
played 308
with visualization of the current DAQ
project 375 Assigning
sensors (transducers) to
Analysis project
channels 148
template 379
Assigning CAN signals from Sensor data-
Analyze (AutoSequence action list) 364
base 164
Analyze data (Analysis mode) 375
Asynchronous transfer mode 276
Analyzing function 334
atan 190
AND (Boolean operator) 191
Audio (.WAV) 260, 406
Angle synchron. graph 295
Audio file
Annotation not available play 211
see Notes, Deactivation of analyzing
Auto-ident 270
functions 334

catman
482 16 INDEX
Auto-Range 314 AutoSequences
Autocalibration automatic execution at certain
for times 368
MGCplus/QuantumX/SomatXR Autosequenz
454 test 367
see Channel info window 224 Auxiliary channel 210
Automatic channel color 176 Available additional modules for cat-
Automatic channel numbering 176 manEasy/AP 31
Automatic computation (Analysis Available display objects 285
mode) 379 Available event conditions 214
Automatic execution Available formulas for the flexible
AutoSequences 368 table 324
Automatically Available storage space 351
assign channel 444 Axis format 315
create display objects 443-444
Azure Cloud 221
Automatically create visualization 443
Automatically generate visualization 444
B
Automatically insert #uses directive when
creating a new module 449
Background color for marked
Automatically store data on DAQ ter- channels 435
mination 253
Background image 304
Autonomous measurement
Backup 245
(MGCplus) 270, 352
Bar indicator 288, 302, 307
AutoRange 314
BAS 460
AutoSequence 357
activate 419 Best-fit approximation 316
Breakpoint 367 BIN 459
Change process variable 367 Bit mask 178, 189
deactivate 367 Bit rate for CAN port 160
restrictions 373
Bit test 191
save 359-360
Bookmarks in Word
terminate 367
see Office 312
AutoSequence actions 361
Boolean algebra 191, 194

catman
16 INDEX 483
Boolean operator CAN-Raw
AND 196 export 402
OR 196 CAN bus
Brackets 196 reset 160
BraggMETER Sending Initialization Commands 167
Add manually as device 91 Sending messages 167
Add manually as device. 72 switching on terminating
enter address 79 resistances 163
No device found 117 CAN bus options (tab) 85
Breakpoint (AutoSequences) CAN decoders 401
save 360 CAN FD 160
Breakpoint(AutoSequences) 367 CAN port
Bridge factor for strain gages 157 bit rate 160
Browse CAN raw
for sensors 152 Table 293, 300
Browse database for transducers 152 CAN Raw channels 86, 161
Browse network for MX module 68 CAN raw message (event
Browse network for PMX 68 monitoring) 215

Browse Sensor database 152 CAN Raw simulation 210

Buffer for data 433 CAN raw table 331

Buffer in graphs 316 CAN signals 160, 164

add further channels 160
Burst mode 237
as name, see sensor description as
Bus reset (CAN) 160 name 439
Button 306 assign from Vector database 166
start AutoSequences 372 assigning from Sensor database 164
read in again 163
C CANdb
ARMXL formats 164, 478
Calculation in MGCplus 166
Define computation channels in DAQ Use signals 160
mode 185 CANHEAD
see also Computation 184 activate sub-channel block 100
Calibrating sensors 154 connecting CANHEAD
on MGCplus 99

catman
484 16 INDEX
Canvas 307 Changing the font size in the channel
catman list 142
Enable basic services 448 Channel
standard format 257, 403 activate/deactivate 264-265
start with DAQ project 137 assign as x data source 318
working directory 429 assign name automatically 176, 439
catman AP and catman Easy 23 assigning sensors (transducers) 148
automatic numbering 176
catman file format 255
automatically assign 444
catman start parameters 416
comment 176
catman web server 411 Define color 176
CCP/XCP 165 define decimal places 143
ceil() display in graph/table 307
see Floor/Ceiling 194 import name from Excel 177
Cells (table configuration tab) 324 import sensor type from Excel 177
load single channel 379
Chaining text 197
MXFS channel layout 89, 96
Change name 176
computation in Analysis mode 389 name as CAN signal 439
name of PMX 71 name doesn't change, see Use descrip-
name of the MX module 70 tion after a sensor scan 439
PC IP address 80 name from sensor description (Sensor
Change channel order 95 database) 439
Change IP address 80 name from TEDS/T-ID 439
BraggMETER FS22 79 number of decimal places 143
DMP41 80 Overload detection 143
MGCplus with CP52 78 remove from graph/table 309
QuantumX/SomatXR 78 Transfer names into device 433
Change number of sub-channels with CAN signal 85
(ML71) 167 with EtherCAT signal 89
Change plot color 211 Channel automatically assign 444
Change sequence Channel check 225
channel/CAN signal/device 142 Channel comment 224
Changing the column width in the channel adopt as channel comment 151
list 141 see Channel info window 224

catman
16 INDEX 485
Channel configuration CLS 460
lock 84 Color channel 310
Channel info (component window) 224 Colors in graphs 315
Channel list Comparing texts 197
print 141 Component window
Channel list (Configure DAQ channels win- combining (several) into one
dow) 141 window 26
Channel list options 435 Component windows
Channel marking docking 26
background color 435 hiding 26
Channel name minimizing 26
assign 176 moving 26
restrictions 176 showing 26
see Channel info window 224 Compression factor (PC Card
Channel names recording) 270
reset 83 Compression in graphs (Special tab) 316
Channel settings (window) Computation
Show/hide columns 141 see also Calculation 184
Channel settings window 141 Computation channel
Show/hide columns 141 move 142
Channels as x data sources 318 Computation channels 184
Checkbox/radio button 306 Create/change 185
in live display 185
Class counting
in Analysis mode 399 Computations
(real-time) from DLLs 208
Classic sample-rate domain 472
activate/deactivate 419
Classification
Algebra (real time) 186
in DAQ mode 206
Formulas (real time) 186
Clear flash settings (MGCplus) 83 Min/Max 206
Clear history (device scan) 77 Real time computations 184-185
Clone actions Computations in Analysis mode
for own menu groups 447 (EasyMath) 388
for own tabs 447 Compute formula
starting via buttons 333 Flexible table 287

catman
486 16 INDEX
Computing peak values 398 Continue measurement also in case of
Configuration Re-Sync messages 273
flexible table 321 Continue measurement without
Configure device 277
automatic execution at certain Contour graph 296
times 368 Control and regulation 188
Button 332 Control flow (AutoSequence action
catmanEasy/AP 415 list) 365
DAQ job 233
Control video camera (event action) 220
device scan 66
Controller 304
limit values 213
Objects in DAQ mode 286 Conventions used, the Help window 21
Panel objects 307 Conversion of DAQ data to other
Panels 283 formats 402
Panels and Print pages 283 Convert data to other formats 402
Print pages 283 Converting Fast Stream files 381
Real-time graphs 319
Converting files 380
Configure channels (DAQ channels
cos 195
tab) 141
Cosine function 190, 195
Configure graph 313-314
CP52 and MGCplus 68
Configure Print pages 283
Create (own) menus 447
Configuring
CAN raw table 331 Create (own) tabs 447
Multi-bar graph 321 Create auxiliary channel 210
Configuring time-synchronization ser- Create channel with "old"
vices 110 measurements 210
Connecting Create compressed file 270
MGCplus with CP52 68 Create computations in Analysis
MX module 68 mode 389
PMX 68 Create context menu entries 447
QuantumX/SomatXR 68 Create menu groups 447
to CANHEAD modules 99
Create own context menu entries 447
Connection via FireWire not possible 18
Create own menu groups 447
connector LED flashes 178
Create own menus/tabs 447
Console for Recorder 351

catman
16 INDEX 487
Create/change computations in Analysis additional parameters 266
mode 389 configure 233
Creating a bookmark in Word deactivate limit value monitoring 266
see Office 312 define name 266
define shortcut 266
current 209
Job list 233
Cursor functions 336 Recorder 233
Cursor graph repeat 266
measure differences 337 DAQ mode 65
real-time 291
DAQ project
Cursor graph (data analysis) 294 Configure channels 141
Cursor not movable open 137
see Notes, Deactivation of analysis start 65
functions 334
DAQ settings
Curve section 395 configuration 235
Custom real-time computations 208 DAT 459
Customize user interface 446 Data buffer 274
CX22B power supply interrupted 216 Data cleansing 396
CX27C Data formats 255
EtherCAT signals 89
Data recovery 253
Cycle-dependent intervals (long-term
Data series 396
DAQ) 248
Data storage
Cycle counter 206
options 425
Cyclic export of measurement data 253
Data storage and backupData saving and
Cyclic storage mode 427 storage 245
Data table 299
D Data transfer 274
DataView
DAC 459 display a large number of measure-
DAQ channel options 433 ments 347
DAQ comment (while measuring) 349 Display a large number of measure-
DAQ data storage 425 ments 383

DAQ job DataView window

add settings to file 266 multiple 347, 383

catman
488 16 INDEX
DataViewer (Analysis mode) 383 Default folder for LED symbols 428
DataViewer (DAQ mode) 347 Default folder for measurement data 428
Date/time Define default settings for DAQ jobs 279
in post-process graph 294 Define file comment 266
Date/time-controlled measurement 236 Define limit values 213
Date/time in Cursor graph 294 Define saving to file channel by
Date/time in post-process graph 313- channel 265
314 Define starting value for process
deactivate variable 359
channels 144 Define test parameters 268
Deactivate Delay leader start (MGCplus only) 274
AutoSequences 419 Delete limit values 221
Computations 419
Deleting tests 380
EasyLog 419
EasyMath 419 Demo project 65
EasyScript 419 deriv (derivative) 190
Limit values 419 Derivation
of an AutoSequence 367 deriv 190
save measurements for single chan- Design mode 332
nels 265
Determining the correct sample rate 243
save to file 265
Developer tools 304
Sensor database 419
temporary storage 265 Device
the cursor mode 336 hardware sensor scaling 148
the scroll function 340 Device connection
Deactivate cursor mode 336 options 81
Deactivate limit values 221 Device failure
terminate measurement or ... 277
decadic logarithm 190
Device Manager
Decimal places
for QuantumX/SomatXR/MGCplus
define for channel 143
with CP52 78
define for channel display 143
using 68
Decimal sample-rate domain 472
Device reset/factory settings after
Default folder for exported data 428 scan 83
Default folder for images 428

catman
16 INDEX 489
Device scan Display limit values
Advanced options 89 Analog meter 288
configure 66 Bar indicator 288, 302
firewall blocks 66 in graph 313-314
settings for MGCplus 74 Multi-bar graph 289
settings for QuantumX/SomatXR 74 Display maximum
DIAdem format 258, 404 Flexible table 287
Diagnostic functions 420 simple table 302
Differentiation 190 Simple table 287

Digital channels Display measured values without loading

test (Analysis mode) 378
using 178-179
Display minimum
digital indicator 286, 301
Flexible table 287
Digital indicator 286, 301
simple table 302
Digital input (event monitoring) 215 Simple table 287
Digital input channels 178 Display objects
Digital output channels 179 Channel colors as default 444
Disk full 216 channel colors in default setting 445
Display area 445 configure 307
for Analysis mode 293
Display channel parameters
for Autosequences 304
Flexible table 287
for clone actions 304
Display channel properties/configuration for DAQ mode 286
(DAQ mode) 224
for EasyScript 304
Display color for predefined actions 304
Change via event 220 locked 308
Set/display plot color 435
Display of values in DAQ channels win-
Specify in channel list 435, 444 dow 435
Display color-coded measurements 310 Display options for Configure DAQ chan-
Display connection diagram 154 nels window 435
Display data in Analysis mode 385 Display peak value
Display filter 144 Digital display 286
Display grid 445 measurement value table 286
simple table 302
display limit values
Simple table 287
digital display 286

catman
490 16 INDEX
Display pin assignment 154 e function 192
Display position data 292 EasyLog
Display Quick Access toolbar auto- activate 419
matically on program start 448 EasyMath
Display symbols (messages) 211 activate 419
Display/mask out channels 144 Enable 20

Displaying position data 292 EasyPlan

overview 120
Distributed Clock (EtherCAT) 115
EasyRoadload
DMP41
device scan during new DAQ
No device found 117
project 103
Set address 80
Procedure for RoaDyn 101
Document sensor settings 321 procedure with MGCplus 75
Document settings 321 EasyScript 409
Documenting sensor settings 299 activate 419
Documenting settings 299-300 Enable 20
Download Manager 382 options 448
Download software updates from EasyVideocam
HBM 452 Enable 20
Drive for temporary data storage 425 ECU 165
Driver ECU ON (event action) 221
for FireWire 17 Electrical measured value 142
Drop-down listbox 306 Electrical power 209
Duration of measurement 238 Enable (Ethernet ports) 117
Dwell time 190, 206 End of measurement 238
Dwell time (2-dim) 207, 400 End of measurement with trigger 238
Dwell time, span pairs 207, 400 Enter comment when measuring 349
Dynamic peak locking 172 Enter DAQ comments 349
Enter gage factor 157
E Enter k factor 157
Entering numbers, variables and channels
e-function 190 (AutoSequences) 359
E-mail support 451 Entering texts (AutoSequences) 360

catman
16 INDEX 491
Entire data set error during remote data saving 216
Calculate min/max/mean 195 high level crossing in the frequency
Calculate standard deviation 195 range 214
keyboard event 215
Error during data saving 216
monitoring 211
Error during measurement (event mon-
RT lag during measurement 217
itoring) 216
time interval 215
Error during remote data saving 216 trigger with script command 217
Error during the measurement with start trigger 215
restart 277 EVENT 459
Error on DAQ start? 349 Event action
Errors during initialization 433 Change display color 220
ESP 460 control video camera 220
Establishing a connection Data storage/saving 219
DMP41 74 ECU ON 221
MGCplus (CP22/42) 74 log file entry 217
MX471-CCP/XCP 221
EtherCAT
Play audio file 220
Including signals 89
push notification 218
Signals no longer present 138
run EasyScript 221
Time synchronization 115
Send email 217
Too few channels? 138
set digital output 217
Ethernet
Example of scaling in a different physical
problems 119
quantity 156
Ethernet address 76
Excel
Ethernet interface AutoSequence action stock 366
no device found 117 File format 255
Event import channel name 177
After end of measurement 216 import sensor assignment 177
After start of measurement 216 import sensor type 177
available conditions 214 Saving data as Excel file 255
CAN raw message 215 Excel parametrization file 122
change 214
Excitation voltage
digital input 215
for strain gages 157
error during data saving 216
error during measurement 216 Execution mode 332

catman
492 16 INDEX
EXP 192-193, 459 Fiber Bragg grid
Experimental stress analysis Integrating devices 96
Analysis mode 394 Preparing devices 74
Exponential function 192-193 Field type (table) 324
Export File comment 266
to ASCII 402 File conversion 380
to DIAdem 402 File converter 380
to Excel 402 File download 382
to Matlab
to RPC III 402 File for temporary data storage 425
to MDF 402 File format and resolution 255
to nSoft 402 File name extensions 428
Export graph 445 File name with variable texts 246, 254
Export or print a graph 321 File system 426
Extended file selection (Analysis File transfer 382
mode) 379 Filter
automatic filter selection 434
F currently set, see Channel info
window 224
Factory settings MGCplus 83 do not change after connecting
device 84
Factory settings QuantumX/SomatXR 83
in real time 204
Failure Math in Analysis mode 393
data recovery on power failure 253 options for DAQ channels 433
Failure of a device prevent automatic filter selection 84
terminate measurement or ... 277 set manually 265
Fast-stream conversion with Filters
recorders 245 in Analysis mode 393
Fast sample rate 240 Find calibration expiry date 152
Fast Stream 247 Find files 377
Fast Stream file 381 Find MX module 68
Faulty devices Firewall 16
deactivate 277 ports 118
Fax support 451 prevents device scan 66, 118

catman
16 INDEX 493
FireWire 17 Formula expressions in assignments
adapter is not correctly installed 18 (AutoSequences) 360
Installation problem 18 Formulas (Analysis mode) 390
no device found 119 Formulas used for strain gauge
Firmware rosettes 200
checking 116 Frame 304
update 69-71, 116
Free hard disk space 239
update older MX modules 95
Free hard disk space with red
Fixed storage size 427 indicator 239
Flash LED Free memory (hard disk) for the acquis-
of the QuantumX/SomatXR 70 ition 239
Flash LED of QuantumX/SomatXR 224 Free storage space 351
Flashing LED 70, 178 Frequency spectrum 289, 296, 302
Flexible table 287 Frequency spectrum (Analysis
configuration 321 mode) 391
Floating-Panel Frequency spectrum (event high level
configuration 343 crossing) 214
Floating panel FS22
analyze 346 Smart Peak Detection 90
copy 346 FSConverter 381
print 346
FTP server 261
save 346
FTP upload 261, 351
floor()
see Floor/Ceiling 194 Further processing of entries 188

Folder options 428

Fonts in graphs 315 G

Format conversion of DAQ data 402

Gain 172
Format of measurement data 255
Garmin 73, 92
Formats of measurement data 402
Gateway
Formatting (table) 324
activate for MX471C 69
Formula (in tables) 324 CX27 68, 95
Formula collection 187, 391 enable for MX471C 95
Formula editor 187 General (AutoSequence action list) 361

catman
494 16 INDEX
General hints on creating Hard disk storage almost full 216
AutoSequences 359 Hardware scaling (sensors) 148
General scan options 82-83 Hardware time channels 87
Global process variables 359 HBM Device Manager 68, 78
GNSS data (GPS) HBM nCode s3t 257, 403
display 292
HBM Playback 257, 403
Use channels 174
HBM Support and Sales International 451
Use device 72, 91
Help and Code Builder 449
GOM testing controller
Using channels 173 Hide context menu during current DAQ
job 445
GOM Testing Controller
Add as device 91 Hide ribbon 446
Integrating devices 96 Hide time channels in channel tables 436
Settings 74 Hide/show menu groups 446
Graph High level crossing (limit) 214
Channel colors as default 444 High precision zero balancing 442
Default settings for export dialog 445
High sample rate with MX410 144
measure differences 337
High sample rate with MXFS 144
Reference point 337
shift plot 388 Histogram 296

Graph not movable 334 History 32

Graph null values 445 Homogeneous (measurement)
systems 103
Graphic buffer 316
How can you find out which file system is
Graphically generate plot section 334
used on your hard disk?
Greater than, less than, equal to, not equal see Temporary measurement data
to, etc. 197 store 426
GRF 459 How do you create an
Grid width 445 AutoSequence? 358
GUI 459 How do you use AutoSequences? 357
GUI extensions 431 How do you work with
catmanEasy/AP? 28

H How is the address set on the Bragg-

METER? 79
Hard disk and file system 426

catman
16 INDEX 495
How is the address set on the INT 193
DMP41? 80 Integral 192
How is the address set on the Interactive objects 304
MGCplus? 79
Interference pulse 396
How is the address set on the PMX? 78
Interpolation 397
How to add your sensors to the Sensor
Introduction 13
database 151
inverse trigonometrical functions 190
How to test an AutoSequence? 367
IP-over-FireWire not present 18
Hybrid (measurement) systems 103
IRIG-B 114
Hysteresis 460
Isochronous transfer 180, 435

I
J
I/O (AutoSequence action list) 363
Job icon for autonomous measurement
Identifying an MX module 70
(MGCplus) 270
If (condition, TRUE, FALSE) 192
Job list 349
Images for LED 286 DAQ job 233
Import channel name from Excel 177 Job parameters 266
Import Print pages 283 Job status (window) 350
Import Print pages/Panels 283 Job status window 350
Import sensor assignment from
Excel 177
K
Import sensor type from Excel 177
Import visualizations 283 Keep all data (storage mode) 246
Importing data 379 Keyboard event (event monitoring 215
Increase sample rate for MX410 144 Kistler RoaDyn 101, 114
Increase sample rate with MXFS 144
Initialization error 433 L
Initialization log 137
Install NTP time server 15 Label format 315
Installation problem with FireWire 18 for graphs 315
Installation/Upgrade 14 Large display (of measurements) 142

catman
496 16 INDEX
Leader/Follower 110, 273 Live display
LED 291 activate 142
own images 286 Include computation channels 185
LED array 307 Live measurements 142
Less than, greater than, equal to, not Live reading
equal to, etc. 197 activate 437
License number 14, 20 Live signal reading 437
Licensing 20 LN 193
Limit Load
high level crossing 214 a DAQ project 137
low level crossing 214 an analysis project as a template 376,
Limit value 380
CAN raw message 215 single channel 379
change 214 Load additional tests 379
configure 213 Loading
digital input 215 a CAN database 166
display as line 317 Loading a CAN database 166
frequency spectrum 214 Loading tests 379
keyboard event 215
Lock channel configuration 84
time interval 215
trigger with script command 217 Locked graph (cannot be moved) 334

Limit values Log

deactivate 221 system log 212, 424
deactivate/display dialog 419 Log file 211
delete 221 Logarithm 193
Line style (of a plot) Long-term DAQ 248, 251
Color (of a plot) change 309 Low level crossing (limit) 214
Line type (of a plot)
change 309
M
Linearization (in addition to sensor scal-
ing) 189 Manual filter setting 265
Link resource conflict 83 Manual storage control 246
Listbox 306 Map 292, 297, 300
MAT 459

catman
16 INDEX 497
Math channels (QuantumX/SomatXR) 89 Mean across entire data set 195
Math drivers.doc 208 Mean value
Math functions (real-time) from over time period 393
DLLs 208 sliding 393
Math libraries 208 Measure differences 337
Mathematical functions 190 Measured values
in real time 186 display continuously 142
Mathematical operators 196 display momentary values 142

MATHLIB.INF 208 Measurement

Solving problems 353
MATLAB (5.0) 259, 405
What happens next? 355
Matlab file format 255
Measurement (AutoSequence action
Max across entire data set 195 list) 362
Max. number of plots per graph 444 Measurement data
Max. number of visualization objects 443 load 379
Maximum 193, 335, 395 load a channel 379
of multiple channels 190 Load additional 379
Maximum display Measurement duration 239
Digital display 286 Measurement error
Measurement value table 286 terminate measurement or ... 277
Maximum measurement duration 239 Measurement on key press 246
Maximum number of channels 93, 427 Measuring (starting a DAQ job) 349
Maximum number of plots 316 Measuring data
Maximum number of samples per data delete 380
transfer remove 380
see Data buffer 274 Measuring rate
Maximum of one channel 206 see Sample rate 240
MDF 459 MEP 459
MDF (Vector Informatik) 259, 405 Merge files 380
MDF 4.1 259, 405 Message bar 349
MDF file format 255 METER 459
Mean MEV 459
over time period 204 MF4 459
sliding 204

catman
498 16 INDEX
MGCplus mod 194
activate sub-channel block Modify
(CANHEAD) 100 a real time computation 185
Change number of CAN channels 162
Modules
Change number of CAN channels sub-
activate/deactivate 419
sequently 86
Enable 20
connect via WLAN 16
find QuantumX/SomatXR 68
No device found 117
move 142
remove CANHEAD modules 101
set address 79 Modules (optional) for catmanEasy 31
Update firmware for CP52 70 Modules of catman AP 31
MGCplus with CP52 68 Modulo division 194
Set address 78 Monitor measured values 211
Min across entire data set 195 Monitor program state 211
Min/Max values 335, 395 Monitoring conditions 214
Minimum 193, 335, 395 Move
of multiple channels 190 channel/CAN signal/device 142
Minimum display Move CAN signals 142
Digital display 286 Move cursor 337
Measurement value table 286
Move device 142
Minimum of one channel 206 Moving
Miscellaneous (AutoSequences) 360 objects 308
ML71 Moving the cursor 337
Assign the CAN signals from Vector- MS Access (AutoSequence action
CANdb 166 list) 366
change number of sub-channels 160,
MS Excel (AutoSequence action
167
stock) 366
Loading a CAN database 166
Maximum number of channels 160, MS Excel 97-2003 258, 404
162 MS Excel file format 255
ML74 MS Excel Office 2007 258, 404
activate sub-channel block MS Office (tab) 312
(CANHEAD) 100 Multi-bar graph 289, 321
connecting to CANHEAD 99
Multiple DataView windows 347, 383
remove CANHEAD modules 101
Multiple selection 307

catman
16 INDEX 499
MX module New MX firmware (4.0 and higher) 69
rename 70 NI DIAdem 258, 404
MX410 NI DIAdem file format 255
increase sample rate 144 NI TDMS 258, 404
sample rates > 96 kHz 240
NMEA-0183 174
MX460
No DAQ start? 349
Shunt test 226
No data saving 253
MX471-CCP/XCP (Event action) 221
No MGCplus found? 117
MX471C gateway functionality 69
No QuantumX/SomatXR found? 117
MX590
sensor setting 151 Normalize time channels 236

MX840 Normalizing time channels 236

modify number of CAN channels 162 Notations in the Help 22
MX878 Note(Annotation) in graph 338
Configure analog outputs 181 Notes on the AutoSequence actions 361
MX879 Notes on the Ethernet interface 16
Configure analog outputs 181 Notes on the FireWire interface (IEEE
Configure digital outputs 182 1394) 17
MXFS nSoft DAC 260, 406
Activating and configuring nSoft DAC file format 255
channels 168
NTFS file system 425
Increase sample rate 144
NTP
MXFS channel layout 89, 96
Install time server 111
NTP Leader channels 111
N NTP time 111
synchronization 111
Name of a channel 176 NTP synchronization, operation 115
Names for Panels/Print pages 283 NTP time 87, 103
Naming a DAQ job 266 Null values for graph 445
Natural logarithm 190 Number
nCode s3t 257, 403 CAN channels 160
New auxiliary channel 210 CAN channels for MGCplus 162
New DAQ project 93 change number of CAN signals 160
measurements 238

catman
500 16 INDEX
 modify number of channels for CAN OFP 459
signals for MX840 162
OFV 459
of CAN channels 85
Old MX firmware (lower than 4.0) 69, 95
of catman channels 427
of DAQ and computation On-board math
channels 427 (QuantumX/SomatXR) 89, 180
of scale levels 314 On-board recording
of scales 314 Convert files 382
of y axes 314 Transfer files 382
Number of DAQ and computation chan- On-Board recording
nels available 425 activate 270
Number of job parameters (max) 266 MGCplus device scan during new DAQ
project 103
Number of post decimal places in Con-
figure DAQ channels window 435 procedure 270
start 352
Number of sub-entries in Sensor data-
base 151 On/off switch 305
Online computations from DLLs 208
Open a DAQ project 137
O
Operating requirements 13
Objects Optical measuring devices 74, 96
align to grid 445 Optical sensors 168
locked 308 Computations 207
move 308 Optional modules 168, 421
prevent configuration 445 EasyScript 409
Objects for Enable 20
AutoSequences 304 for catmanEasy/AP 20
clone actions 304 Optional modules for catmanEasy 31
EasyScript 304
Optional settings 30
predefined actions 304
Options
Objects for panels in Analysis mode/for
auto-filter 433
print pages 293
catman start parameters 416
Objects for panels in DAQ mode 286
Customize for user interface 446
Observing (monitoring) measured for AutoSequences 449
values 211 for channel list 435
Office (tab) 312 for DAQ channels 433

catman
16 INDEX 501
 for device scan 66 Paragraph symbols 22
for folders 428 Parametrization file (Excel) 122
for print pages 443
Password protection 424, 437
for program functions 419
for program start 430, 446 PC Card recording 352
for sensors 437 Convert files 382
for Shortcuts 431 MGCplus device scan during new DAQ
for zero balancing 442 project 103
on device connection 81 procedure 270
overview 415 Transfer files 382

Options for CX22 432 PCAN Trace (export format) 402

Options for EasyScript 448 Peak detection

Frequency spectrum 289, 296
OR (Boolean operator) 194
Live-FFT 289
Order of channels 95 Spectrogram 290
Outlier 396 Peak lock bandwidth 172
Overload detection 143 Peak locking (dynamic) 172
Overview 375 Peak valley 206
Peak values
P separate 395
Peak values per time interval 247
Paid modules 20
Perform in hardware (scaling) 151
activate 419
Performance
Enable 20
preventing a RT lag 354
PAN 459
Periodic export of measurement data 253
Panel (AutoSequence action list) 364
Phase compensation 204
Panel area larger than screen 445
Phase correction 204
Panel objects
Placeholder in file name 246, 254
template 310
Placeholders 465
Panels
assign names 283 Play audio file 220
configure 283 Play sound file 211
Lock configuration of objects 445 Plot
only print print pages 444 delete 309
Panels and Print pages, visualization 281 label(Annotation) 338

catman
502 16 INDEX
 shift 388, 395 Pre-assign process variables with
shift in graph 388 values 359
Plot attributes Pre-trigger 237
change 309 Predefined actions
Plot color starting using buttons 333
change 211 Predefined formulas 189
change (plot attributes) 309
Prepare DAQ project
Plot name from Excel parametrization file 122
change (plot attributes) 309 without devices 120
Plot style Preparing a DAQ project
change (plot attributes) 309 complete project 120
Plots color-coded by measurements 310 Prevent configuration of objects 445
PMX Prevent graph configuration 445
Device sequence 94
Preventing a RT lag (performance) 354
find 68
No device found 117 Print pages
Renaming 71 only print print pages 444
set address 78 Print Panels/pages 283
Ticks in time channel 88 Printing the channel list 141
Polar diagram 290, 295 Printout
Port (Ethernet) enable 16, 117 of test parameters 300
Port for device connection 74, 95 of the sensor settings 299
of the traceability data 299
Ports used (Ethernet) 16
of traceability data 321
Positioning actions (AutoSequences) 359
Problem
Post-process graph 294 during measurement 353
Post-trigger 239 No device found? 117
Post decimal places (value display) in with interface 117
Configure DAQ channels Problems on DAQ start 349
window 435
Process variables (AutoSequences) 359
Power BI 221
Processing several objects sim-
Power factor 209 ultaneously 307
Power failure Processor load 350
data recovery 253 Project
Power function 195 Configure channels 141

catman
16 INDEX 503
Protocol of settings 299-300 QuantumX MXFS
PTP 110 Activating and configuring
channels 168
Push notification 218
Channel layout 89, 96
PWR 195
Integrating devices 96
Settings 74
Q Quick start 23

QuantumX
R
activate channels for on-board math
and analog outputs 89
adapter plug and TEDS 147 Rainflow 207, 399
addition 181 Random number 196
calculate RMS 181 Range per peak 172
Configure analog outputs 181 Re-Sync messages 273
Configure digital I/O 182 Reactivate information on data
configure gate monitoring 182 saving 253
configure math functions 181
Reactivating the security prompts 349
Display only possible sample
rates 144, 241 Reactive power 209
EtherCAT signal with CX27C 89 Read block 238
Flash LED 224 Read buffer for data 433
modify number of CAN channels 162 Read file in real time 210
Module sequence 94
Real-time computations from DLLs 208
multiplication 181
Real-time filter 204
MX460 182
MX878/MX879 Real-time graph 286
Configure analog outputs 181 Real-time graphs
MX879 182 configure 319
No device found 117 Real power 209
On-board functions 180
Real time computations 184
peak value function 181
Define/modify computations 185
rotation analysis 181
Reassign time channel to graph 315, 318
sample-rate domain 244
Set address 78 Reconnect before start 235
using TEDS 146 Reconnecting before start 235

catman
504 16 INDEX
Recorder 233 Resolution
Console 351 Saved measurement data 255
no burst mode 237 Resolution of values in Configure DAQ
start of recording 236 channels window 435
stopping recording 238 Restore information on data storage 349
Recorder window (Console) 351 Restore security prompts 349
Recorders Restrictions of AutoSequences 373
Fast-stream conversion 245
Restrictions on channel names 176
Recording format 245
Suppressing automatic Ribbon extensions 431
conversion 245 RMS 204, 393
Recover from power failure 253 RMS value 204, 209, 393
Recover measurement data 253 voltage 209

Rectangular zoom 334 RMS, Root Mean Square 191

Red display for free storage space 239 rnd() 196

Red status line 349 RoaDyn 101

Refresh rate in graphs (Special tab) 316 Root mean square value
of signals 191
Refresh rate of Real-time graphs 319
Rosettes (strain gage)
Registering catmanEasy/AP 20
Analysis mode 394
Regular expression 469 Real-time computation 199
Relative threshold 172 Rotary knob 305
Remote (UDP) 278 Round 193
Remote data saving 261 Rounding 194
Remove CANHEAD modules 101 RPC III (MTS) 259, 405
Remove decimal places 193 RPC III file format 255
Removing or deleting tests? 380 RT lag during measurement (event mon-
Rename MX module 70 itoring) 217
Renaming the PMX 71 Run EasyScript (event action) 221
Report 406
Representation of units 445 S
Requirements
for the PC 13 S3T 459
Reset the channel names 83

catman
16 INDEX 505
Safety prompts Scaling in a different physical
reactivate 253 quantity 156
Sample-rate domain 472 Scaling in hardware 148
switchover 244 Scan
Sample point ratio 163 MGCplus reset 83
Sample rate options for device scan 66
Display only possible ~ with Quan- QuantumX/SomatXR reset 83
tumX 144, 241 settings for MGCplus 74
do not change after connecting settings for QuantumX/SomatXR 74
device 84 Scan range 76
fast ~ 240 Scan range for TCP/IP device scan 76
prevent change when connecting 84
Scope panel 340
slow ~ 240
save data 343
standard ~ 240
Script (event monitoring) 217
which sample rate is the correct
one? 243 Scroll functions 340
Save SDB 459
AutoSequence 359 Search
breakpoint (AutoSequences) 360 for channels 377
Save min/max per time interval 247 for files 377
Save Scope panel data 343 for test parameters 377
in analysis projects 383
Save settings 433
Search for MX modules 68
Saving data 255
Format and resolution 255 Search functions for files 377

Saving depth 260 Selecting several objects 307

Scale Self-created real-time computations 208

sensor 315 Send email 217
Scale level Sensor
define many 314 add 151
Scaling assigning 148
Auto-Range 314 assignment with MX590 151
use many 314 Browse Sensor database for trans-
ducers 152
Scaling from sensor measurement
create 151
range 314
import from Excel 177

catman
506 16 INDEX
 Overload detection 143 QuantumX/SomatXR 78
sensor description 439 Set digital output 217
sensor scan when loading a Settings
project 438
DAQ settings 235
Sensor adaptation 153-154
Settings log 321
Sensor comment as channel
Setup
comment 151
flexible table 321
Sensor database
Several conditions for trigger 192
activate/deactivate 419
add sensors 151 Several devices 274
browse 152 SFTP server 261
find sensor 152 SFTP upload 261
name and directory 437 Shift
number of sub-entries 151 a plot 395
password protection 437 Shortcut 332, 431
storage location 437
Shortcut for DAQ job 266
Sensor modification
Show alarm limits
characteristic measurement 153
Analog meter 288
gage factor 153
Bar indicator 288
Sensor options 437
Show channel parameters
Sensor scaling in device 148 table 298
Sensor scaling in hardware 148 Show channel properties/configuration
Sensor scan during device scan 82 (Analysis mode). 378
Sensor scan on project load 438 Show data in Analysis mode 385
Sensor setting with MX590 151 Show icon on tab (of Panels and Print
sequence of devices/modules 94 pages) 283
Sequence of devices/modules 95 Show information again when saving
Set-up data 253
Panel objects 307 Show limits
Set address Analog meter 302
DMP41 80 digital display 301
MGCplus 79 LED 291
MGCplus with CP52 78 Show maximum
PMX 78 digital indicator 286, 301
table 298

catman
16 INDEX 507
Show minimum Smart Peak Detection 90
digital indicator 286, 301 Snap function for objects 283
table 298 Software T-ID 441
Show peak value 286, 301 Software time channels 87
table 298
SomatXR
Show prompt windows again 253, 349 activate channels for on-board math
Show reference values 210 and analog outputs 89
Show security prompts again 253 adapter plug and TEDS 147
Show status addition 181
LED 291 calculate RMS 181
Configure digital I/O 182
Show symbols (messages) 211
configure gate monitoring 182
Show/hide columns in Channel settings
configure math functions 181
window 141
find 68
Shunt calibration Flash LED 224
see Channel check 225 modify number of CAN channels 162
Shunt test multiplication 181
introduction 225 MX460 182
Performing 228 MX878/MX879
Preparing 226 Configure analog outputs 181
with external shunt 226 MX879
with internal shunt 226 Configure digital outputs 182
with shunt in transducer 226 No device found 117
Signal generator 210 On-board functions 180
peak value function 181
Signal reading 436
rotation analysis 181
Signal rectification 192 sample-rate domain 244
Simple table 287, 302 Set address 78
sin 195 using TEDS 146
Sine function 190, 195 Sound file
SINGLE 110 play 211
SLAVE 110 Space requirement (hard disk) for the
acquisition 239
Slide control 305
Special (AutoSequence action stock) 367
Slide switch 305
Specify different port number (TCP/IP) 66
Slow sample rate 240

catman
508 16 INDEX
Specify job parameters 266 Stopping recording 238
Specify port (TCP/IP) 74, 95 Storage 245
Specify port number (TCP/IP) 66 and backup of measurement
data 245
Spectrogram 290, 297
deactivate/activate for DAQ job 264-
Splitting a digital input 189 265
SQRT 195 Storage control through event mon-
Square root 195 itoring/AutoSequence/script 246
Standard deviation across entire data Storage interval for write cache 428
set 195 Storage mode
Start AutoSequences via Buttons 372 controlled by event
Start of (data) recording 236 monitoring/script 246
Start of measurement 236 cycle dependent intervals (long term
DAQ) 247
Start of measurement with trigger 236
keep all data 246
Start On-Board recording 352 manual control 246
Start script automatically Peak values per time interval 247
on starting the DAQ job 448 time-dependent intervals (long term
when loading a project 448 DAQ) 247
Start trigger 236 Storage space required for
Statistic journal 265, 267 acquisition 239
Statistics Strain gage
compute after DAQ job 267 bridge factor 157
Statistics (real-time computation) 190, excitation voltage 157
206 formulas used for stress analysis 200
gage factor 157
Statistics table 299
Stress analysis 199
Status bar 349
which bridge factor is correct? 158
Status bar is red 349 which excitation voltage is
Status indicator 143 required? 158
Status line 349 Strain gage rosettes 200
Stop measurement with trigger 238 formulas used 200
Stop measurement without error mes- Stress analysis (rosettes), real-time
sage 277 computation 199
stress analysis, Analysis mode 394
Stop trigger 238

catman
16 INDEX 509
Stress analysis Synchronize zooming (Scope panel) 342
Analysis mode 394 Synchronized high precision zero bal-
Strain gage rosettes, real-time com- ancing 442
putation 199 Synchronizing devices 273
Sub-channels (ML71) 167 SYNCMASTER 110
change number 167
System 2000 (Kistler RoaDyn) 114
Support 451
System info file 451
Supported cameras 230
System log 212, 424
Suppress data saving 253
System requirements 13
Suppressing conversion (recorders) 245
System time 196
Surveillance (monitoring) 211
Switch sample-rate domain 244
T
SY42 synchronization 274
Symbol explanation 21 Tab
Symbols (messages) Algebra 186, 190
display 211 Algebra (Analysis mode) 390
Symbols for LEDs 286 axes (Floating panel) 345
Symbols in the status bar 349 Axes (Scope panel) 342, 346
Bus commands 167
Sync. jump width 164
channel parameters 265
Synchronization 273 Create computation channels in DAQ
Synchronization (multiple devices) 110 project 185
Synchronization (tab in DAQ job Cursor (Scope panel) 342, 346
advanced settings) 273 Curve section (Analysis mode) 395
Synchronization of several devices 103 Data series (Analysis mode) 396
Synchronization with Kistler RoaDyn 114 data storage 425
Filter (Analysis mode) 393
Synchronize clocks (MGCplus + PC) 273
filters 204, 393
Synchronize cursors (Floating panel) 345 Frequency spectrum (Analysis
Synchronize cursors (Scope panel) 342 mode) 391
Synchronize scrolling (Floating Job parameters 266
panel) 345 Math libraries 208
Synchronize scrolling (Scope panel) 342 Panels 307
plots (Floating panel) 345
Synchronize zooming (Floating
panel) 345 Plots (Scope panel) 342

catman
510 16 INDEX
 Show computations in Test using transducers with TEDS 145
Explorer 389 Telephone support 451
Special (graphs) 313-314
Temperature compensation when using
Strain gage stress analysis 199, 394 strain gages 158
Trigger (Floating panel Trigger) 346
Template
Trigger (Scope panel trigger) 343
For analysis projects 379
Table 298, 306 for DAQ jobs 279
Table (flexible) 287 for Panel objects 310
Table (simple) 287, 302 for test parameters 266
Tabs Temporary data storage 425
Hide 446 Terminate measurement with error mes-
tan 195 sage 277
Tangent function 190, 195 Terminating (data) recording 238
Tank display Terminating a measurement 238
Bar indicator 302 Test
Tank indicator Compute channels automatically 379
Analog meter 288, 302 delete 380
Tank level indicator Load additional 379
Bar indicator 288 remove 380

TCP/IP scan range 76 Test Explorer

Channel properties 376
TDMS format 258, 404
Test selection 376
Technical support 451
Test measurement 253
TEDS
Test selection (Test Explorer) 376
activate TEDS contents during sensor
scan in device 440 Test signal 178
modify data (content) 147 Tests
password protection 437 loading 379
program new TEDS 147 Text 303
reprogram 147 Text comparison 197
special features with Quan-
Text entry field 306
tumX/SomatXR 146
TEDS-compatible instruments 145 The new user interface 24
TEDS Editor 148 Thermometer display
TEDS use is deactivated 146 Bar indicator 302
using adapter plug 147

catman
16 INDEX 511
Thermometer indicator Transducer
Bar indicator 288 assigning 148
Threshold 172 import from Excel 177
Ticks in time channel (PMX) 88 options 437

TIM 459 Transfer channel names into device 433

Time-controlled measurement 236, 238 Transfer of measurement data 274

time (realtime computation) 196 Trial measurement 253

Time between two data transfers Trigger

see Data buffer 274 set several conditions 192

Time channel Trigger (tab) in Floating panel 346

reassign to graph 315, 318 Trigger (tab) in Scope panel 343
Time channels Trigger measurement 236, 238
hardware/normal 87 Trigonometrical functions 195
not displayed 183 True RMS 204
software time channel 183 TSQ 460
time from sample rate 183
TSQP 459
Time dependent intervals (long-term
TST 459
DAQ) 251
TSX 459
Time from sample rate 183
TWIPS 445
Time interval (event monitoring) 215
Type of monitoring 214
Time source 110
Time synchronization with Kistler
RoaDyn 114 U
Time synchronization with PC
(MGCplus) 273 UDP output 278
Time with date UFF 459
in Cursor graph 294 UFF58 260, 406
in post-process graph 294 Unattended attempt 418
Time with date in post-process Unattended test 234
graph 314 Uninstalling 19
Toggle views Unit representation 445
Show channel prop-
Update
erties/configuration 378
firmware 69-70

catman
512 16 INDEX
 Firmware of old MX modules 95 set up camera/codec 229
UPS operation active (CX22B) 216 supported cameras 230
Use channels automatically 379 Video Panel 340
Use IP address with port 74, 95 Video playback 301
Use limit values from file 210 Virtual channel 210
Use multiple devices 273 Virus protection program
Use NMEA-compatible GNSS device 72 prevents device scan 118

Use NMEA compatible GNSS device 91 Visualization objects

max. number 443
Use PC timing 276
VPT 459
Use search filters 377
Use sensor description as channel
name 439 W

Using digital inputs 189

Waiting time before Leader start
Using several devices 93, 274 (MGCplus only) 274
Using transducers with TEDS 145 Watchdog 418
Weather Transmitter WXT520 93
V Web server 411
What's new in catman 5.5? 32
Vaisala Weather Transmitter WXT520 73,
93 What is saved where with
AutoSequences? 360
Value format in DAQ channels
window 435 What to do if channel initialization fails
(when starting acquisition) 434
Values from input objects in com-
putations 188 What was new in catman 2.0? 62

Vector-CANdb 166, 331 What was new in catman 2.1? 61

Vector BLF (export format) 402 What was new in catman 2.2? 60

Vector CANalyzer Log (export What was new in catman 3.0? 59

format) 402 What was new in catman 3.1? 57
Vector CANdb 160 What was new in catman 3.2? 56
Vertical zoom 334 What was new in catman 3.3? 54
Video camera What was new in catman 3.4? 53
configure recording 271 What was new in catman 3.5? 50
Display 291 What was new in catman 4.0? 47

catman
16 INDEX 513
What was new in catman 4.1? 46 x channel
What was new in catman 4.2? 44 Assign/remove data source 318
What was new in catman 5.0? 42 x data source
What was new in catman 5.1? 41 Assign/remove channel 318

What was new in catman 5.2? 38 XLS 459

What was new in catman 5.3? 35 XLSX 459

What was new in catman 5.4? 34

When should you use another disk Y
drive? 425
y axes
Where can you find the gage factor? 157
define many 314
Which Ethernet address is to be entered
on the device? 77
Which sample rate is the right one? 242 Z

Windows 10
Zero balance
Modify the IP address of the PC 80
performing 153
Windows 8
Zero balance value
Modify the IP address of the PC 81
delete 441
Windows Firewall 16 see Channel info window 224
With start trigger (event monitoring) 215 see Zero balancing 479
WLAN 16 Zero balancing
Word before starting measurement 235
Create report 406 options 442
Working directory 429 password protection 437
Write cache
size 427
storage interval 428
WXT520 Weather Transmitter 73

x axis
Assign/remove channel 318

catman
514 16 INDEX
catman
16 INDEX 515
 A05566 02 E00 01

HBK - Hottinger Brüel & Kjaer

www.hbkworld.com
[email protected]